m::. 




- ^^ 



^^0^ 






.^^ & 



.-^o^ 



























^/ .«.*' "»^ -J 




< 











•^ .^^ 



^^R<v 































7- A 


















.^o^ 



-°^ .^^ % '^'^ .^^ ,, ^^ ^'^^ ^ ^- 



^^ 




.0 % " 






















.-^•^ V 




c^^, 









.-^-^ ^ 



^' .^^^^-^. ^'^i^.^ ^^^^^ ° 




, ^-^ 






o. 











.V 



"^^ 



o V 



^C^. 



^ v^ -'^ 







- -t. 



^^..<^ 



*' » 















(% 



OUendorft's ITew Method of Learning to Bead, "Write, and 

Speak the German' Language. By Geokge J. Abler, A.M. 
12mo. 510 paj;es. 
KEY TO EXERCISES. Separate volume. 

Few books have maintained their popularity in the school:? for 
so long a periofl as ihe Ollendorfi" series. The Verdict pronounced 
in their favor, on their first appearance in Europe, has been signally 
confirmed in America. 

Grammars for Teaching English to Germans. Ollendorfi":^ 
New Method for Germans to Learn to Rea'l, Write, and Sp^^ak 
^ the English Language. Arrang<rd and adapted to Schools and 
Private Academies. By P. Gands. 12mo. 599 pages. 

KEY TO THE EXERCISES. Separate volume. 

Roemer's Polyglot Reader. 5 vols., l:imo. Consisting of a Se- 
ries of English extracts, translated into French, German. S})an- 
ish, and Italian respectively. The several volumes derngned as 
mutual Keys to each. 

Wrage's Practical Grammar of ihe German Language. 
12mo. 315 pages. 



SPANISH TEXT-BOOKS, 

Ahn's Spanish Grammar. Beiug a New, Practical, and E.'>.v 
Method of Learning the Spanish Language: after the Sy>^te]u 
of A. F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy, and Professor at tlie Col- 
lege of Neuss. First American Edition, revised and enlarged. 
12mo. 149 pages. 

KEY TO THE EXERCISES. Separate volume. 

Butler's Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-Book. An 
Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring- a Speaking Knowl- 
edge of the Spanish Language. 18mo. :i93 pages. 

Be Vere's Grammar of the Spanish Language. With a His- 
tory of the Language and Practical Exercises. 1-imo. 2T3 pp. 

Morales's Progressive Spanish Reader. With an Analytical 
Study of the Spanish Language. Bv Agustin Jose Mop.alf.- 
A. M., H. M.. Professor of the Spanish Language and Literature 
in the New York Free Academy. l"2mo. 

^^ SEE END OF THIS VOLITME. 



^Pi /^r? 



A NEW 

PEACTICAL Al^D EASY METHOD 



OF LEAENING 



GERMAN LANGUAGE. 



F.^AH N, 



DOCTOR OF PHIIOSOPHT AND PEOFESSOR AT THE COLLEGE OF NEU33. 



riRST COTJESE. 

SECOND A3IERICAN TKOM THE EIGHTH LOXDON EDITION. 



NEW YOEK: 
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 



549 & 551 BROADWAY. 

1872. 



-f? 






PREFACE. 

Learn a foreign language as you learn your motket 
tongue : this is in a few words the method which I have 
adopted in this little work. It is the way that nature her- 
self follows, it is the same which the mother points out in 
speaking to her child, repeating to it a hundred times the 
same words, combining them imperceptibly, and succeeding 
in thi? way to make it speak the same language she bpeaks. 
To learn in this manner is no longer a study, it is an amuse- 
ment. 

Supposing the pupil to have learned his own language by 
principles, I thought it proper to add a few rules, which 
will serve to shorten the course and render the progress 
more secure. 

The Autiior. 



APR 18 f 



TABLE 

OF THE GERMAN DECLENSIONS. 



ARRANGED 



By Dr. MASTIN WEISS, 



FKOM THE UNIVEKSITT OP BERLm, LATE FRENCH AND GEEitA>: MASTER, AT THE 
ROYAL, COLLEGE DimGANNON. 



Almost every German Grammar used in England states 
a different number of Declensions. Dr. Ncehden whose 
Grammar is in every respect unquestionably the best, has 
attempted to reduce the number of Declensions to four, and 
I think most successfully. But German Grammarians have 
not adopted his system. "Wendeborn who tries to imitate 
the Latin gives five Declensions, whilst Dr. Render in his 
anxiety to smooth the way to the learner, has made appear 
an absurd doctrine of one Declension. In Germany itself 
Grammarians follow either Adelung or Klopstock. The 
system of the former being the best and offering the least 
confusion to the student. I have tried in the following 
table to arrange the Declensions of all German Nouns upon 
Adelunq's plan. 



© 

s 
ct 

:i 
1 

mi 

M, 

© 
© 


^1 ; 1 « 1 


Of this Declension are all tlu' 
Nouns. 

1. In el, Masculine and Neuter. 

2. In er. Masculine and Neuter. 
8. In en. Masculine and Neuter. 

4. The Diminutives in d}cn and kin, 
which are all of the Neuter Gender. 

5. Neuters beginning with the syl- 
lable be and gc, and ending with c, as : 

2)a§ ©cntdlbe, the Picture. 
$Da§ ©cbirgc, the Mountain. 

6. ©as ^rbc) the Inheritance. 
^a§ (Snbc, the End. 

and 2)er Sia\c, the Cheese. 


^5 

CO '2 




S ai <w ^ oj 


-S ^7^ •- f;. O J^ ^ . 

,1.1 iflljiij i 

O T-; ^ (M' ^co ."^ ^ H a> ^ ^^ p H 


1 




; J 

gSJ 
H 


^ 

Q 

^ 




o 



s 
t 
i. 

it 

> 

"s 

It 

'1 
■je 

u 
s 

e 


02 ' 2 «- 


^ § 1 
g^ .a ^ n^-A 

, i^4 .- «|i5| 1 lilt Is .°--i£ 

111 g 5 1 2 = = e.!- =-*s ^.- s S i--" ^.=in- 
|!c |ii::-|||| s 1 |||||f*||:i 

S. ^ 11 


_^^ a, o- <u o 
02 o o ^ 


3 S 

*^ ^ .'- m 1— 1 

13 o 

of H . 
-J3 .2 


^ t: si tt si s 


rH <y ^ C3 =^ G^l 2 ^ CO ?: -* — -tg ^O tf ^^"^ 



•1 

s 
Ti. 

L 

= 

B 

= 
S 

i 

o 

1 


<3 

^ 1 1 1 1 


•3 -f ^." ^1 

I -^ § 11 

1 t^-l 1 till ri ft f iiiUi =1 ! 

<-^_ 


.. c s s s 

^^1 « ^ " ^ 

S.b 

1 ; ■' : ' 


'Of this Declension are, 

1. All Nouns Feminine in c, as bic 5tmmc, bic 

2. Those in ce, and ie, btc ©cc, btc ^avmonic. 
8. The Feminines in ct, as btc ©abcL 

4. The Feminines in er, as bic j^cbct. 

5. Radical Feminines, as ^Itjur, \X\)X. 

6. Derivatives with a particle in the begin- 
ning, as bte 9Inbac^t. 

7. Those with an end-syllable, and particu- 
larly the words in el, i)cit, ixi, fcit, j^aft, and ung. 

8. Foreign words of the Feminine Gender 
which have the accent upon the last syllable, as : 

bte yjatur, Nature, 
f^tqur, Figure, 
^ur, Cure, 
'S^iai, Regimen, 
?;-acultdt. Faculty, 
*4>roytni5. Province, 
^V-rfon, Person, 
SJiufif, Music. 



Ziii'tner- \ - 


Chamlre- \ ^ 


l\ ^''\ 


1 1 ^Vmbcn , 


51ad)tl)err 


Unterjad 


§al§!tag 


§al§bm^ 


G ^aar © 


7 Untevl}D[ 


8 58ein!(t'lt 


9 Beftcn 


10 Slaf^ent 


2)ai 


1 1 g)emben 


12 ^;)oien . 


i:h Unterr5< 

1 


9k4)tja( 


D^Qd)t^a 


(g^uvje 


Sri firm 


^aar ^^ 


S^emijf 


-- mm\i) 


2? Unterd^ 



gto- 1 "'■ ^^^ Hotel vier Jahreszeiten 



w 



0ci'vcii=aBoftf)c 



Lingc pour Messieurs Gentlemen's linen 



9kd)lf)emben 
Untevjadcn 

,t)nl'3binben 
'^aax ©ocfen 
Unfcvl)Dfen 
33eiiil!dt)er 
ffieftcn . 
3:(ifd)entru'f)ei- 

5)omen=3Bafdjc. 

,'pfmbon . . 
S)o\m . . . 
Unterrfide glott 

garnirt 
'DiQdjtjaden . 
^](ad)t[)aukn . 
'2d)iivjen . . 
Avifinnontel . 
"^anx ©ttiimpfe 
(5[)emifetten . 
5)!Qnid)etten . 
UntevQcmel . 
§al§lud)cr . 
So^c^entiidier 
meiber glatte 

„ gnrnirte 
33Ioujcn . . 
©it)ctfc . 

C^onbtiidjer . 
©crbietlen 
?(u§be[fern . 



Chemises . . 
chemises de nuit 
cumisoles . . 
faux-cols . . . 
cravattes . . 
paires de cliaussettes 

cale9ons 

pautalons ... 



moudioiis de poclie 

Linge pour Dames 

chemises . 
cale^ous . 



jupons urns . 
„ gai'uis 



bonnets de unit 
tabliers . 



paires de has 
chemisettes . 
raanchettes . 
manches . 
fichus . . . 
mouchoirs de poch( 
robes unies . 
,, garnies 
blouses . . 



essuie-mains 
serviettes , 
racommodage 



Sliirts . . . 
night-shirts 

uuder-vesls . . 

collars . . . 

cravats . . . 

pairs of socles . 

drawers . . . 



trowsers .... 
waistcoats . . . 
pocket-handkerchiefs 

Ladies linen. 

chemises .... 
drawers .... 
petticoats plain . 
„ trimmed 
night-jackets . . 
night-caps ... 
^pron^ .... 
combing-cloths 
pairs of stockings 
collars .... 

cuffs 

sleeves .... 
neck-handkerchiefs 
pocket-handkerchiefs 
dresses plain . . 
„ trimmed . 
blouses .... 



towels 

table-napkin 
mending . 



^*. ' k" - 



Speoz7?tefis of Ger7JiarL Current JJajicL. 



a- 













^^^^^/^i^^^C^y^-^Z/Z^-^i 



&*^W^:::^^;?i^^ 



^ 7 /y 




The Small :Aljjhahel. 

rn 11 o .^>^ 'q^ i A> s, ' st 



a c. d ■ 6 




;../ 



-y 



y 



i-^-^ ^J--^ y<A:.- 



X ^ _^9^ ^l^i^ ^xU^ //'^^ ^^ -^^^^ -:# ''«^«^' ^.^ 



German Cupital Ze iters 




wi^-m 



Douhle Letters and ConibuiatLons . 



CyC/^^Ly&^^€^<€l€y C^ (S^ey'y^P^..^^' &'Ui>-" O'Ceyy. 



'€^r^'^''^/2Yy,.^t^/^"ya^y[^yr^^^y€^^ 



/^/ c/'t^ -c^^^^^ /i^ J^ y/^/ ^^ y//^- ^.d^^- 



4..-^ 



c^< 



THE PRONUNCIATION. 



I. THE ALPHABET. 



The German Alphabet is composed of the following 
twenty-six letters : 



% a, a. 


m, n, n. 


^, b, b. 


£), 0, 0. 


(5, c, c. 


%\ h p. 


s:), b, d. 


Q, q, q. 


(S, e, e. 


9?, r, r. 


1^, f, f. 


@. [. §, s. 


®. 8. g- 


X, t, t. 


§, ]§, h. 


U, u, u. 


-3. t, i. 


3), t), V. 


3. i. j. 


S, IP, w. 


^\ !, k. 


^*, ^V X. 


i^ h 1. 


dr t)^ y. 


2}Z, m, m. 


3/ 3/ z- 


The vowels are : a, ci, e, i, 


0, 0, u, il The diphthongs 


or compound vowels are: c 


IT, et, an, ciii, eu ; all other 


letters are consonants. 





n. SniPLE VOWELS. 

Every vowel, followed by two consonants, is pronounced 
short: followed by only one consonant, it is long. 

^, a, is pronounced like a in the English wore] 
father. 

5ntcr, banfen, Si'ciG^r 

5Bater, taben, ©alle. 

^e, a, IS pronounced like a in the English word care. 
ta(te, ^drm, flatter, 

£afc, (Scibel, Scinber. 



^ 



i 

®, Cp is pronounced like e in the Englisli word letter 

(Efe(, ^ benfen, %xtz{, 

•r^x (5t"c(, ^trenncn ^DJBnner, 

'' veben, Gnbe, -.D^ebc, 

,3, i, is pronounced like <? in the English word me. 
Qiti^, tmmcr, in, 

finben, (Sitber, ^tnb. 

iO, 0, is pronounced like o in the English word hojpe, 
Cfen, fonbern, ^oft, 

■^_^ rollen, ober, SS^ort. 

SC/ O, is pronounced like 'z^ in the English word 
murder. 

^ofe, toncn, Soffel, 

Soine, fonnen, !4)brfer. 

H/ II, is pronounced like oo in the English word roof, 
mxxtr ^ruber, iDlunb, 

^lume, DJ^utter, (Stunbe. 

He, ii, is pronounced like the French u. There is 
no corresponding sound in the English language, 
lib en, miibe, iDciitter, 

" , triibe, :priifen, Silu\\z. 

5), t), has the sound of the German i, by which it is 
generally replaced. 

III. DOUBLE YOY/ELS. 

The double vowels, aa, ce, oo, are no diphthongs, 
because only one letter is sounded, and the second only 
serves to indicate that the syllable is long. 
Slar, mm, 9}^oo§, 

(BaoXf (Seele, -^oot 

^Stf it, is pronounced like ea in the English word 
meat. 

^tcne, iBier, ttef, 

Uebcn, !^ieb, Stcb. 

lY. DIPHTHONGS. 

In the German diphthongs, the two vowels must be 
sounded one after the other, but so quickly as co form 
only one syllable. 

^i and ei are pronounced almost alike, and have the 
sound of the English ^ in the Avord fire. 



9 

©aitc, ^Qtl'er, (etben, 

©eite, reimen, Scin. 

^Ill, is pronounced like ou in the English word Jiousg 

Mm^r rciuben, blau, 

^aum, (aufcn, !aum, 

^leil und CM, are both pronounced like oy in the 
English word joy. 

Wm\z, ^cittcl, greimb, 

^aume, geucr, %xt\xt, 

V. COIS^SONAi^TS. 

The pronunciation of the consonants differ but little 
in the two languages ; the scholar should remark the 
following peculiarities. 

i§,, C, before ct, e, and t, is pronounced like ts. 
(Sdfar, (Sebar, (litrone. 

Before a, o, it, before a consonant and at the end of a 
syllable, it is pronounced like k, by which in most cases 
it may be replaced. 

(Earl, (E^urt, STombac, 

CEonrab, (Creole, dlaffe. 

^l), at the beginning of a word is pronounced like k, 
except in words derived from the French, when it pre- 
serves the French pronunciation. 

SI) or, (EIjarlatQH, 

(E{)rtft, (5I)ariuari. 

In the middle or at the end of a word cf) has a pronun- 
ciation quite peculiar to the German language, and more 
or less gutteral, but for which no corresponding sound 
can be found in English ; it is like the Scotch ch in the 
word loch after a, o, u, au, but softer after ci, e, i, d, li, (iu, 
til, and after a consonant. 

!4Dai^, diaud], md)t'3, 

Sod), ^itc^e, red)neit, 

^u^, ^irclje, fuc^en, 

2id)t, 2:oc^ter, ^aumifjen. 

d)^ or d>f is pronounced like x when these conso 
nants belong to the root or radical syllable. 

SBac^^?, Sud)^3, " tnadjfen, 

£)^^r \td)^, ^ud)[e. 

1* 



10 

But the cf) preserves its gutteral pronunciation, when 
it stands before the § or f by contraction or in a com- 
posed word. 

nadjfeljcn, tnadjfen, bc§ ^itcl)^ instead of be§ ^iidje^ 
®, f^f at the beginning of a syllable is pronounced 
like the English g in the word good ; but between two 
vow^els, in the middle of a word, and at the end of a syl- 
lable, it has a somid like the dj, only much softened. 
gel)en, c\xd% @abt, 

S33ac5en, (gteg, arttg, 

^egcn, ^rng, ric^ttg. 

After n at the end of a word it is pronounced like l 
very soft 7v, 

@ang, 9?ing, (Sprung. 

*§f I), is ahvays aspirated at the beginning of a syl- 
lable. 

l^ter, I) art, §e(f}t, 

|)auC> §tmmel, grei^eit. 

The aspiration becomes however almost imperceptible 
before an e in the end-syllables. 

D^eilje, 9?u^e, feljen. 

After a vowel or a t, the tj is not pronounced, but only 
indicates that the syllable is long. 

§a{)n, (gtro^, STIjier, 

^ U^r, friii mt^. 

3, if only stands at the beginning of a syllabic, and 
is pronomiced like the English y in the word yet. 
3a!)r, Qod)r ^ ^iigettb. 

^ replaces the double f, and is pronounced short 

(Btod, ^ritd'e, ^^cfer. 

Sll, <in, has the sound of qu in English. 

£iml, Ouelle, €iim\ 

(^, f, ^, at the beginning of a syllable is pionounced 
like the English 2, at the end of a syllable, however, like 
the English s, 

(Sommer, D^eife, §aiti', 

(^acL, (5ifcn, Oictc. 

The long f is placed at the beginning and in the 
middle, § only at the end of syllables. If in a non- 



11 

composed word there are two [, one after another, tliey 
are written ff. 

SBaffer, irifjen, milffen. 

^ is only placed at the end or in the middle of syl- 
lables ; it is always preceded by a long vowel, and has 
the sound of the English ss. 

©trage, grog, fltcgen. 

^d>, fc^ is pronounced like the English sh. 
©djattcn, (Bdjnk, ^eitfdje, 

fd](afen, (Sd}i(b, 2:tfc^. 

^ and fp are pronounced like st and sp in English ; 
but in some parts of Germany they pronounce ft at the 
beginning of a word like sht, and fp like shp. 
©tul}0 ftet)lcn, fptelen, 

(Stent, fpredjen, ftedjen. 

2», t) has the sound of/l 

iBater, «oger, S3lel), 

■IS, \X> is pronounced like the English v. 

Selt, 3Ste[e, SSanb. 

3/ J is sounded like ^5. 

3at)l, 3orn, §0(3, 

3eit, S^^finsig, ^Jers, 

• 1^ replaces the double g and is pronounced very hard. 

^lit> 9hi^en, fei^cn. 

VI. SYLLAEIC ACCENT. 

The Germans never pronounce several successive syl- 
lables one after the other with the same force ; the prin- 
cipal syllables are pronounced with a louder, and the 
others with a softer tone. The end-syllables in German 
words are pronounced very softly. 

The accent is always laid upon the radical syllable, 
that is, upon the one which includes the principal idea ; 
thus in the word @ered)ttg!eit (justice) which is derived 
from redjt (just), the second syllable is pronounced more 
strongly than the rest. 

In compound words, the first syllable always has the 
accent, because it presents the principal idea and modi- 
fies the following one : ^lumengarten, ©artenblume. 



PART I. 



1. 



Singular, fcf) Bttt, I am ; 
/ bu h[\i, thou art ; 

I cr ift, lie is ; 

1 ftc iii, she is ; 

I Plural, irtr finb, we are ; 

tl)r fetb; you are ; 
jte flttb, they are. 
®\\\j good ; gtop, rreat, large, big ; Jlein, little, small ; xd6)f rich ; 
ornt, poor ; jung, ycung ; alt, old ; mube, tired ; !ranf, ill, sick. 

3(i) bin gro^, S^u bift lidn, (5r ift alt. @ie tft gut. 
Sir finb jung. S^r feib reiif). (Sie finb arm. ^tn idj 
gro5? ^iftbumltbe? Sfterfran!? ^ftfiejung? einb 
inir reirf}? (£eib i^r arm? (Sinb fie att? 

2. 

I am little. Thou art young. We are tired. They 
are rich. Art thou sick ? You are poor. Is she old ? 
Are you sick ? Are they good ? He is tall (gro^). Am 
I poor? 

8. 
Sliest, not. 
Stavf, strong ; treil, faithful ; faul, idle, lazy ; fictfitg, diligent ; BciC, 
wicked, naughty ; traurig; sad ; glucflidj, happy ; t)djilicf), polite. 

Sd\\i 'tiVi U\t? -3d) bin nic^t bofe. (gr ift traurig. mt 
finb ni^t ftarf. ©inb fie treu? ^ift bn nic^t glucflid)? 
3^r feib nii^t fteijig. (Sie ift nic^t faul. 3ft er nic^t miiber 
%&k finb nid)t arm. <Sinb fie nidjt pflid) ? !l)u bift nidjt 
fran!. 

4. 

I am not tall. They are idle. She is not ill. We are 
not happy. He is not short (flein). Are you not tired ? 
They are not rich. Is he not diligent ? Thou art not 
12 



13 

strong. They are not liappy. He is not polite. Are 
they not faithful ? Is she not rich ? He is not wicked. 



Masculine nouns : ber S^tCTj^ tlje father ; bci.®artcn, the garden ; 

Feminine " :"Tte Stutter, tlie mother ; bie <£tabt; the town ; 

Neuter " : 'ii^§, iliub, the child ; baiS <§au§, the house. 

^6.)Q\\f beautiful, fine ; lang, long ; r)Ocl}, high ; neu^ new ; iiub, and ; 
\i{)X, very. 

S^er S3atcr tft gut. "^k Wwiitx tft traitrtg. ®q§ ^iub 
ift~fauI."'^erMarten t[t nid)t fel]r (ang. S^ie ©tabt ift grog 
imb rctcfj. ©a§ §au§ tft ntdjt Ijo'c^. 3ft ber ©artetLMon ? 
3ft ber Skater frouf? -3ft ba$ ^tnb tu^Tpffg? Sft^boT 
"^^utFneu? ^^^cr^ater imb bie 9J2utter finb glildlidj. 

Observation. All German substantives begin with a capital letter. 
When two or more substantives follow each other, the article must 
be repeated before each, unless they are all of the same gender. 

6. 
The house is not new. The mother and (the) child 
are ill. The town is very heautiful. The child is not 
naughty. The father is very old. The house and (the) 
ga'rden are very large. Is the mother not happy ? The 
house is not very old. Is the garden not very fine ? 
The house is very small. 



a ^-_bt'e[crJBaum^ this tree. 



Fe m. bTe]e ^"rau, this woman. 
Neut. bicfeS ^^fcrb, this horse. 



_ ^cr 9Jcanu, th e^nan ; bet ^CXQ{, the mountain ; bte Slumc, the flower, 
bog \;)"cn1tcr7~"the^window ; of[cn7jop^P~rpf^ p^'^^^/ c ontented, satisfied, 
pleased ; jDbcr^_or;^__ 

.^cjer Wo.\xxi tft jeljiijirm. ©tefe6 Jcnfter ift fef)r Ijodj. 
S:)iefe :^tumc ift fi^on. :4:)tefe§ "^ferb ift jimg itnb ftar!. gft 
btefe grau gliidttrf)? SDtefer S3ater imb biefe 2)2utter finb 
nicf)t 3ufrieben. g)tefer •^ .aittit tft fcl)r _grog. !l)iefe grait 
ift arm imb !ran!. !Diefe§ £tnb ift fefjr Bofc. ^^ferjOcoim 
_ 'ft iiicfjt ^oflid). _^i{t_bu tramig ober irau! ? 

This woman is tired. This mountain is not high. la 
this child good or naughty ? The man is not satisfied. 



14 

This child is not very diligent. Is this garden small oi 
large ? Art thou not contented ? This window is not open. 
Is this house old or new ? This tree is very fine. Is 
this man rich or poor? This town is very dull (traurig). 

9. 

Masc. Fern. NeuL 
^_jg^ cine, cm, a; 

nietiTy _ mctne, mcin, my ; 
__ Mil/. beine, hdn, thy ; 
?^J?tfei^SI/J]i^3Lo^^Gr ; bte ©djWcjler, the siste: ; fete i^ebcr, the pen 
hd§ ^iidf7^'f^6~hook ; jDer Sreunbjjfche.jfriend ; ilatl, Charles ; Souifc, 
Louisa ; tpo^r where ; ^icr^ere ; no^^till, yet ; aber, but. 

9}Mn Sntber tji trour^ QJ^eine (Sdjmefter ift !ran!. 
9}tcin ^nd) i]f \d]mh jyft bein ©arten c^rofe? Q\t beine 
gcbcr gut? 3'fi »^cin ^ferb flein? ~^^avTi\tnod) eirt ilinb. 
-Berlin ift eine ©tabt. Soutfe ift nteine ^d)tr)efter, , 5^ein 
^ ruber ift niein_greunb* . 3^|tn_^aterjfyu^tji^ Sffio ift 
luctu^ud)? -3ft metn ^u^' md)t {)ter? ,3ft b^tne 5DMtcr 
nod) tvant? Qd) bin nod) ntdjt mitbe, aBer betn ^ruber unb 
betne ©djmefler finb fcljr luiibe. 
10. 

Charles is my brother. This child is my sister. Thou 
art my friend. Thy garden is very large. Where is thy 
mother? A friend is faithfdr- Is this child thy brother? 
This horse is still young. Where is my pen ? Thy pen 
is here. Louisa is still a child. Thy brother is idle. 
My friend is very diligent. 

11. 

Masc. Fern. NeuL 
ITnfcr, imferc, xmi'er, our ; 
euer, ciicre, cucr, your; 
il}x, t^re, t^r, their. 
^ :CiL^p,|ttt^the_SQii ; tie Xod^kx, the daughter; bte Xi)mc, the door; 
^immcTj_ always. 

0^5. In addressing any one, the third person plural is from polite- 
ness used instead of the second : <Bk finb, instead of ii)X fcib. For the 
game reason 3^r is used instead of eucr. In this case the pronoun ia 
always written with a capital letter. 

llnf_ei:®artjn_i{t_gro6. Unfere 9}2utter tft !rani Unfer 
^ferb ift fd}on. ' M.^Hv 9}tan n tltunlcr.^53ater. S^iefe gran 
tft unfere DJZutter. ^ar( tft eucr -^ ruber. Soutfe ift eurc 
@d)ir)efter. ^31]t3^L§^te-JMBl£l 3ft 3^^'^ iodjtcr gu^ 
^ricben? 'iBo ift ^f)V ^ndjl llnfcr ^p an § ift aft. Unfere 



15 

Atpre tft immvi' off en, Sjiefcr 25ater imb blefe 2}^utter finb 
fcljt traurtg; i()r ©olju ift tmmcr f'ranL 

12. 

Our father is good. Our mother is little. Our child 
is ill. Is this man your brother?* Is this woman jour 
mother ? Your son is not always diligent. Is your horse 
beautiful? This child is our brother. Is Charles not 
youi friend? Louisa is not your sister. 

13. 

/ .^(ctn, little, small ; ; flcittcr, smaller ; 
/ alt, old ; aitcXf older ; 

( 9t^^^f great ; I QVogcr, greater ; 

i""9/ young ; / jiingcr, younger ; _ 

' flci^ig, diligent ; ^ei^tger, more diligent. 

Stu^Ud), useful ; ungludlid), unhappy ;_bcrj§imb^ the dog ; hk ^a^c, 
the catTbie (Sonne, tEe^unT^erJOtonb, the moon ;_alg, than, as. 

Obs. In forming the Comparative of an adjective, the radical vowel 
a generally changes into d ; o into o ; and u into u. 

Tldn -53rubcr ift alter, a(§ t^. Q6) bin iiinger, al§ mein 

greunb. ^avi ift grdger, a(§ Souife. ^^iefer JgatULitt 

jjTofe/ alltpir. ©cr §unb ift trcucr, aU bie Sat^e. ©a^ 

$ferb ift fdjoner imb uiililtdjer, aU bcr §unb. ©iefe§ ^inb 

tft fleigtger, ai^ bu. @ ie finb c ^ Iiic! Iicf)er, aU jylir ^ruber. 

^ --^cirt tft ftarfcr, aI-3 idi. ^ir finb j^iifrtebetter^^jl^i^ Souife 

ift pflicfjer, aU betne (^jtrefter. -3ft h tin -^rub e^ iunger^ 

ji(£^? Qr jft alter, abe r fleiiier, at-3j^ 

—— ^^ 

My brother is more diligent than thou. Thou art not 
younger than he. He is taller and stronger than I. 
Your son is younger than this child. The moon is 
smaller than the sun. Art thou older than I? This dog 
is finer than this cat. Your sister is politer than you. 
I am more contented than thou. You are richer than 
we. We are more unhappy than you. 

15. 

/ ®ilt, good; Beffcr, better; 
/ t)od), high ; {)pl;er, higher ; 

btefcr, btcfe, biefcS, this, this one ; 
^ jener, jenc, jeneS, that, that one, 
S)a§ (Stl'cn, the iron ; baS S3let, the lead ; bcr (StvlH. th e steel ; i)k (Srbe, 
the earth ; |cl;wcr, heavy ; i^art^ hard ; tt)cucr, dear ; fo, so, as ; gu, too 



16 

^m -53ucli ift frf)oncr, aU }ene0. dWmc gcber tft beffei'; 
nU btefe, !4:)er (Stal)( ift Ijclrter, a(§ ba§ (Sifen. g)le[er ^erfl 
ift I)o{jer, al5 jener* !Die ^alse ift nicljt fo treu, alS ber §)unb. 
*^3IM^lert|fln^ fo Ijart, aU ha^ (gifcn. 3ft S^^ 5^"^ 
nidjt Grower, a(§ jeneS? 3ft ba§ ^lei ttjeurer, al5 ba§ (2ifen? 
S:)er 9:i^onb ift ntdjt fo c^xo% aU bie (Srbe. ©iefeS £inb ift 
fleiBiger, aU jeneS, 3^ne grau ift armer, nl§ btcfe» Unfcr 
©artcn ift nicfit fo lang nub fdjon, al§ biefei\ " " 

(The) lead is heavier than (the) iron. This tree is 
not so high as that. Is this book not better than that? 
Our garden is smaller than this one. This house is 
higher than that one. (The) iron is more useful than 
(the) lead. I am not so old as he. (The) lead is not 
so dear as (the) steel. Our town is larger and finer than 
this one. We are not so rich as this man, but we are 
more contented than he. 

17. 

/ Singular, id) Ijahc, I have ; 
/ bu tjaft, thou hast ; 

I cr, fte i}at, he or she has ; 

I Flural. Xoix tjaben, we have ; 

/ tf)r ^abt, (^te fjabett, you have ; 

fie {)aben, they have. 
©ie tTf)r, the watch ; ba§ 'Dccffcr, the Imife ; 9|c^tij;iglrtjJInrcd&t,jwr^^ 

,,^£^B-^k.S£££Z.L^^^^^^3' Lewis ; fur, for ; aud), also ; lt)arunij, why. 

Ohs. The Accusative of the fem. and neut. nouns is like the N"omi- 
native. — In German the verb to have is used with right and wrong, 
thus : id) f)abe 9led)t, er \)oA Unred)t. 

^i) ftabe ^ec^t. ©u ^aft llnrec|t. Q6) ^aBe etn ^ud}. 
!Du ^aft elite geber. SJZein ^ruber ^at etne UI)r. Sir ^aben 
etu §au§. 3^r ^abt ein 'ipferb. ^art mtb ^ouife I)aben eine 
^a^e. ^a\i bu eine ©djmefter? §at biefer 3DZann eine 
Sodjter? §abt t(}r ein linb? SDiefe Ut)r ift fitr meine 
SJ^ntter? ^Siefe geber ift fiir ^arl. ^^aben @ie nod) 3I)re 
S}2ntter? S>arnm ^aft bu ntetn 93Zeffer? Q6) ^abe bctn 
SJ^cffer nidjt. 

18. 

Charles, hast thou my pen? Louisa, hast thou my 
book? Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book. 
Thou art right. My son is wTong. We have a book 
and a pen. Have jou also a horse and a watch ? This 



17 

knife is for Henry. Is tliis watch for thy mother ? Hag 
your friend a knife ? Charles and Lewis have a horse» 
Has your father still a sister ? Is this flower for my 
daughter ? 

19. 

@cfcr)en, seen ; itcrlcrcn, lost ; gc[unben, found ; gcfauft, bought ; tjerfaiift, 
sold ; genommcn, taken. 

Ohs. The past participle is detached from the auxiliary and placed 
.ftt the end of the sentence. 

Qd) tjain metn ^mi) Derlorctt. §aft bit ntcin DJZeffcr c\c- 
funben? Qii) I)abe bein 93^effer nidjt gefmiben. So ift meine 
geber? §abt tl)r meine geber? SBir {)aben beine gcber 
nidjt. 3}^etn 35ater Ijat bte[e§ ^ferb gefauft* Sir ^abcn 
imfer §au§ berfauft. So l)aft bu meine UI)r gefnnben? 
Sarum {)aben (Ste meine U^r genommen? ^cf) I)abe 3I)re 
dJlntkv unb 3I)re (gdjirefter gefel)en, Sarum l^at S^v S3ater 
biefe^3 ^am nid)t gefanft ? §at bein ^ruber meine gtber 
genommen? (5r Ijat beine geber nicfjt genommen, 

20. 
"Where hast thou found this book? Have you lost 
your pen ? Has your father bought this horse ? Why 
have you sold your watch ? Why have you not taken 
my pen? My brother has found thy knife. We have seen 
thy mother. I have not yet seen this woman. Charles 
and Lewis have lost their mother ; they are very sad. 

2L 

Nominative. Accusative. 

5^cr SSatcr, ben 93atcr, the father ; 

/ bicfer Satcv, / bicfcn 23ater, this father. 
!Dcr £cnig, the king ; bcr •Qiit, the hat, bonnet ; bcr <Htocf/ the stick, 
cane; bcr 33rief, the letter; gcjdjriebcn^ written; cr^altcrt, received, got; 
c[t, often ; jcl}on, already. 

Obs. The subject is placed in the nominative case, and the object 
in the accusative case. 

J^Jjtbe ben £onig gcfeljcn. g)aft bu htn ^rief err)nrtcn?_ 
DJ^etne ^djinefter I)at ben ^rief nidjt gefdjriebcn. §ciurici) 
Jat ben @tocf uertoren, 332ein '^atcr bat biefen @artcn unb 
bie]e§ §au§ gefanft. So I)abt i()r bic[cn ijunb unb bie[e 
^a^e gefnnben? Qd} 'ijahc biefen OJiann fdion oft gejeljcn, 
_fBarumJ)aben ©ie biefen ^put genommen.? Sir tjabcn bic]eii__ 
Sricf gefunben. ,*pat_bciii 4Bnibcr biefen Stocf ucrlorenl 



18 



We have sold the hoase and garden. Have jou 
bought this dog and this horse ? I have seen the man 
and woman, the son and daughter. I have not written 
this letter. Where have you found this book and cane ? 
Has thy brother bought this tree ? This letter is for 
this man. Hast thou lost this hat ? Hast thou not taken 
tliis book and pen? Hast thou already seen the king? 
I have not yet seen the king 



Norn, ein ©artcn, ) „ i 1 Nom. metn ^unb, ) , 
Accus. eincu ©arteti, ( ^ m^^^-I Acc. mcmen ^unb, ( "^^ '^°^- 

5)cr ©ogel, the bird ; bcr (itxif)l, the chair ; bet Xifd;, the table ; bcr 

S3leifttft; the pencil ; ber 9Iad)bar, the neighbor. 

9i)^etn ^rubcr ift \z\)X 3ufrieben ; er i)at etnen SSogeL §aft 
bu etnen ^rtef erljalten ? 3<^ ^^^^ metnen §ut cerloren. 
§aben (Sie metnen §imb fdjon gefetjen? Sir ^ben einen 
%\\&j unb einen (2tnf)l gefauft. Warn ^ruber t)at betnen 

_gtoijgenommen^_So l)aft bu beinen 43Iet{tift gefauftTJ Sir 
I)aben unfern S3atef unb unfere 9}^utter Derloren. 24jabe/ 

. 3fe^.^J'^<^f ^id)t_er^altcn. §at betn ABruber unfertt ©artcn^ 
itnb un[er $an§ fdjon gefe^en? Unfer^Mi^barJatJ>en_j^tig 
gefe^en. §aft bn biefen ^ogel geMjTIoberjenen ? 



24. 

We have lost our dog. This man has lost a son and 
a daughter. Where have you found my pencU ? Have 
you already seen my brother and mother? I have bought 
a bonnet for my sister. Our neighbor has found thy 
knife and cane. Where hast thou bought this table ? 
Thy brother has taken my chair. Have you written a 
letter? AVe have found this stick and that one. 



Num. \d\\, fchie, km, } ^^j^ -. . t()v, i(;ve, il)v, ) ^g,, 
Accus. feincn, kinc, ietn, S ' ' if)rcn, \[)xz, itjr, ( 
©clef ertj ^rg.ad ; jcfannt jknown ; ^£LDnfcl^_Jbhe uncle ; V\t Xante, the 
'aunt; bct ^^inc^ctbiU. the tnimble ; bic ^cl)ecre, the scissors. 

3}Zei7%reunb ift tranrig ; fctn 33atcr nnb fcine Djtutter 
finb Ixmt Waxwt %0A\tz ift ^ufricben : il)r (Sol)n nnb tl)re 
Todjtcr finb fe!)r ficifin. *pcturid) \y:d f einen ^tocf, fehti- 



19 

lll)r imb fetit DJceffer Derloren. 
lljre geber unb it)r ^itd) t)er(orcn. <Siier Oufel l}at fetu §au^ 
unb fetnen ©arten Dcrfauft. S^tcfe gran {)at iljreu DJtaun 
unb i^r ^inb Derloren. i)icfc S^odjtcr (}at eincn ^ricf fiir 
iljre 9}iutter gc[d)rieben. ^^M^ioyaucn/^atenii^^^ 
T)k Xante Ijat beincii itnb mcincn ^ricf ijelefen. 

26. 
The father has lost his son. This mother has lost 
her daughter. Mj uncle has sold his watch. Our aunt 
has sold her scissors. Henry has found his pencil 
Louisa has found her thimble. I have seen this man 
and his son, this woman and her daughter. My mother 
has lost her pen and her knife. My brother has taken 
his hat. I have seen your aunt; has she still her 
horse ? This man is very sad ; he has lost his wife 
(gran). Charles has written a letter for his father. 
My aunt has bought this book for her son. 

27. 

Nom. bic 23>J'.ttcr, the mother ; bicfc OJcutter, this mother ; 

Gen hex li)ftittcr, of the mother ; blefer ^Diutter, of this mother. 
5)ic 2)Zagb; the maid-servant ; bte £6utgin, the queen ; bte 5Jlact}bavin, 
the female neighbor ; angcfommcn, arrived ; abgcrcijl, departed. 

!5)ie 3}^iitter ber ^dntgin ift angefommen. ©er ^ater ber 
9^ad)barin tft abgeretft. Qd) I)abe ben ©arten ber 3:ante 
gcfc^en. ^aben @ie ben ^leifttft ber ©djiuefter gefnnben? 
S^iefe gran ift bte ©djtnefter ber 9tadjbarin. !D{efer dJlainx 
ift ber ^ruber ber 93cagb. !Da^3 ^iub btcfer gran ift immer 
!ran!. 

28. 

The bonnet of the mother is beautiful. The sister of ' 
the queen is not beautifuL Is the father of the servant 
arrived ? Are you the brother of the (female) neighbor 1 
I am the sister of this woman. Hast thou taken the 
chair of the sister? Have you seen the horse of the 
aunt ? We have known the father of this servant. 
29. 

Nom. ber 93atcr, the father ; / btci'cr ^akv, this fathe 

- - - ■ . 1^ jefcl 



jGcn;3iit.,^^|!^I|^,2£jlli.^ther ; ^^^bje jcg. gjatcrg^^ oTthis father , 
Nom. bai'lRlnbTthe child ; btcfcF^Tnb7tnis~child ; 

Gen. hc§ £inbc0, of the child , bicfeg Itmbcg, of this chila 



20 



5)cr (id}ul;mad)ci', the shoemaker ; bcr Sdjneiber, the tailor ; ber ©art 
,jier, the gardener ; bcr ilau[mann/ the merchant ; ber 5(rjt, the physi- 
cian ; }^a§ 3inimcr, the room ; t:aS ^cU, the peojifer — >=t=.,.^ 

Obs. All neuter nouns and most masculine nouns take § or e§ in 
the Genitive Singular. 

Sjie d]}ac],h be§ (SdjitcibcrS ift tvant 2^er_0oSn_be^lacfjs 
bar§ tft nod) [eljr jmu]. ©ie ^liime be^ ©cirtner^ ift fei]r 

Icljdn. ^£e£_©aito_bei_gM.alJflj£fc^5^ SDer ^'6m(^ 
ift ber S3atcr be§ S3ol!e§. Sjie grau be§ ^rsteS ift immcr 
gufrieben. 24Jl5M^^3-=@^iL.^^I_SflMi_gefe5eit^ S>ii 
|aben ba^ "ilJferbbeF^ufmannS gefauft. ©^^_bu_ben_^Ici* 
ftift be§ ^ruber|_£enommen^ SSo ift bie B)IagbTeF@^iiI)^ 

'lna5eBT~^ir^|ure"'bei^tmt:ter§ ift immer offcu. S^ie 
2:odjtcr btcfcS 2J^anne§ ift abgereift. SBir l^aben bie 93luttcr 
bicfe^ llinbe^ gefaitnt. ^er ©arten biefcS §aufe§ ift !(etn. 

30. 

This man is tlie brother of the gardener. This woman 
is the sister of the shoemaker. This child is the son 
of the tailor. The door of the house is not open. I 
have seen tho son and daughter of the physician. \Ye 
have seen the horse of the merchant. The servant of 
the neighbor is the sister of this gardener. Yihj is the 
door of this room open ? We have known the son of this 
merchant. The dog of the neighbor is faithful. Tho 
mother of this child is arrived. 



31. 



Nam. cin 33atcr, 
Gen. cme0 33atcr§; 



cin 5itnb; 
cincB ^inbcg. 



cine SLltuttcr, 

cin or 2)tutter, 

J)4r_^e^enf^irm£_tliejambrella ; haS Sebcrmclfer, the penknife ; gefhrn, 
yesterc^r^ °* " 

Obs. The pronouns incin, bctn, fein, {f)r, iin[cr, cucr, are declined 
like cm, cine, cin. 

^inL,@teAg^^_^jg eineg Slr^^teg? -gcQin ber (So^^t 
^dne§^^^^^^^7^^^ (SiFba^ ^ouImemeOFai^bar^ 
gefaufF? !^^J^ruber beine^ ^vcM^ tft peftevtt an gefom^ 
mm. ^0 ift ber^^genfdiirm ^ineg Dnfel^? §aft bit 
ba§ 3^1^!^^^^* ittetner ©djineftcr gefetjen ? 2Bir l^aben bcii 
^ricf beiiier DJMter gelefen. Mtxn DnM I)at ba§ §aii3 
OI)re§ S3ater3 Gcfauft. j^d) Imbe benMotfjl^^ve^ ^riibeij 
JiStLorea* ^e£@arteiLU^S£^glli ^Jfng^]^ ^ ^%l^ Unfere 
23uagb ift bie Zodjitx eure§ ©drtncrFT^^L'o ift bcr '^^egeu^ 



21 

fdjirm unfcrer iD^utter? ^arl Ijat ben gmcjerrjiit [cinet 
©djiDcfter genoimneu, 2ox\\\c ijat ha^ gebcnncj'fer ifjver ZanU 
gcnomnicn. 

82. 
I have found tlie hat of a child. Are yon the servant 
of my uncle? I am the servant of your tailor. The 
penknife of thy brother is very good. The pen of thy 
sister is not good. The house of our aunt is large. 
* Henry has lost the letter of his father. Louisa has 
found the pen of her brother. Is the garden of our 
uncle as fine as this one? We have found the hat of 
your neighbor's son (the hat of the son of your neigh- 
bor.) Lewis has read the letter of his friend. Louisa 
has bought a flower for a child of her sister. 

33. 

1 Nom. ber 93tubcr, the brotlier ; 
/ Dat. fcem S^ruber, to the brother ; 
Nom. ba§ 53iid}, the book ; bie (ict)tr>cj}er, the sister , 
Dat. bcm ^ucl}e, to the book ; tcr (Edjweftcr, to the sister. 
®c{)ort, belongs ; gclicl}cn, lent ; gcgcbcn, given ; gefd^icft, sent ; tcT; 
fpvod)en, promised ; gcjeigt, shown ; bcr i^rcxmb, the friend ; tie t^rcmii 
bin, the female friend. 

Obs. 1. If the Genitive terminates in c§, the Dative takes c, ^m\)C§, 
SBudje. 2. The Dative generally precedes the Accnsative. 3. In in- 
terrogative and negative sentences the English auxiliary verb to do is 
not translated in German. 

5jiefe§ §au§ gcljort bem Dn!cl tneineS ^'tai^barS. ^cncr 
©arten geljort bcr Xante mmtQ greimbc^. :24-teL^iliL 
gater eineu -^BricL Bt^ifetcbcn. (Sie !)at bcr gremibtu iljrcr 
©djipe[teFcutri3Iume gegeben. ^arl Ijat bcr (Sdjraeftcr fciii 
gcbcrmeffcr gelicljcn. §aft bu bem Slrjte mein ^ud) Gcfdjicft ? 
3d) I)abe bte]em ^tube etnen ^oge( tjcrfprodjen. ^etnrid) Ijat 
bicfcr grau unfcrn 9kgen[djtrm geltefjcn. Souife I)at biefctit 
DJIanne unfern ©aiteu gc^eigt, Qd) tjabc ineinc gcber bcin 
g-reimbe meineS ^rubers gccjcben. 

1 34 

'^ This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs 
to the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle 
and aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend 
(fern.) of your brother. My uncle has sent a watch to 
the son of your neighbor (fem.) Have you given a 



22 

cliair to this cliild? Have you lent an umbrella to this 
woman? Does this garden belong to the king? (belongs 
this garden, &c.) No, it belongs to the sister of the 
king. We have sold our horse to the friend of our un- 
cle. Does this knife belong; to this or to that servant ? 



Nom. cin 33ud), a book ; cine ^cbcr, a pen ; 

Dat. eincm 5Bud)e, to a book ; eincr Scber, to a pen. 
■5^_^cr^ctter,Jhe cousin ; fcte ©afe, the female cousin ; Slmanc^Amelia,^ 
fccr^artnct/ the gardener ; l)ie ©drtnertn, the gardener's wife. 

^.^tefer_®arleiLii£|ortji^ ©iefeg DJteffcr 

cjepHlmeF~SStgbr^^t^^at meinem 3Sater_einen ^rief 
gefd)rteben. §einrtc^ I)at metner ^^uHeFTme^Iumrgegeben. 
"^f^^obc^^i'^nt Onfel mein ^ferb gelte^en. @te l)aben un^ 
fcrer ^ante i^r §au§ cerfaiift, ^arl \)QiX femem greunbe etn 
^ud) gefd}{(ft. ^malte ^at il)rer greunbin einen gtngerl}ut 
gelieljen. '^iefer 9}2ann ^at eurer ^^ac^barin einen 33ogeI ge^ 
fdjtcft? §aft bu mctncm 33atev btefe llf)r gegeben? §abt 
il)r un[erer ^a[e einen ^(eiftift gelteljen? 

m. 

I have lent my pen to a friend of my brother's. Hast 
thou given thy cat to a friend (fern.) of my sister's ? 
We have given the letter to a servant of the physician's 
Have you sent this flower to our gardener? This gar- 
den belongs to my cousin (masc. and fem.) This um- 
brella does not belong (belongs not) to your brother. 
Does this pen belong (belongs this pen) to thy brother 
or to thy sister? Has Henry written to his father or to 
his mother? Has Louisa written to her uncle or aunt? 

3T. 

SSott, of, from, by. 
Of the mother, bcr 3}iiitter, or »cn bcr 9?tutter; 
of the child, be0 JlinbeS, or tjon bcm j^lnbe; 
of the _ father, be g ^atcr gj^ojL;_^on_bcm^COaier4_____^ 

Jof2^^^r3^^_bieieFg^teii£^^ 

""ofmysisterTlnHncF^c^irejler, or t)0irmcmer<£c5toc|HrI 
3d/ ft'tcc^e, I speak, or I am speaking ; it»ir fprec^ctt, -we speak, we aro 
ipeaking ; \X)itb gcltebt, is loved. 

Obs. Of 18 expressed by the Genitive, when o/ relates to a substan- 
1 bv " ~ ' 



iiive. and by t^cn followed by the Dative, when of relates to a verb 



23 

Qd) fjobc ba^3 ^uc^ hc^ 3Ir3te§ ge[el}en. §aben Sle bte[e^3 
§3udj Don bcin ^r^te erljattcn ? SBir Iiabeu ,benj^avtcn im* 

2g^to3^i!t?^^i^) ^ci^c ^^(^["^ G^]^* ^on metnera £)ufe(^" 
cxljaltm, §emncf) (}at etnen ^rief mn feinem S3atcr imb 
(t)on) feiner S^tuttcr crljaltcn. Qdj fpredje con bent ^onitie 
mib ber ^ontgin* SBir fprcdjcn uon 3f)rem ^rnber mib 
-31)X'er edjiucftcr, uon biefent 9J^anne nnb btefcr gran, (2pre 
d]en vgte Don mctnem better obcr metner -53afc? .^cinria^ 
luirb Don fetncm ^ater nnb feiner DJIntter oelicbt. 
88. 
I have received this horse from my friend. I have 
bought this cat of thy sister. Louisa has got an um- 
brella from her uncle and a watch from her aunt. I 
speak of this dog and of this cat, of this bird and of 
this flower. We are speaking of your cousin (masc. 
and fem.) Amelia is loved by her uncle and aunt. 
Our gardener's wife has received a letter from her son 
and daughter. Henry is the son of this shoemaker and 
Louisa is the daughter of this tailor. 

39. 

^^ (ii1)on, beautiful ; fd}oncr, more beautiful ; bcr [djonflc, the most 

beautiful ; 
I gut, good ; bcffiT, better ; bcr bcjle, the best ; 
I l)od), high : t)ot)cr, higher , bcr ()cd)ftc, the highest. 
5)-ag ^l)ter, the animal ; ber^c^e^he lion ; ber 3jC(cr, the tiger ; ^as 
a.VctaU, the metal ; ha§ SlIEcrTthe silver ; baS ©olb) the gold. 

Obs. The Superlative is formed by adding jle or cjlc, and softening 
tlie radical vowel. 

S:)ie^a^e tft ntdjt fo ftar!, aU ber §nnb. g^er gotne ift 

[tarfer, alg ber gtger, S^cr Soidc ift ^a^^ ftarffte 2:f)ter. 
Tlcin 92ad)bar ift reic^er, a(§ ©ie;^ er ift ber reidjfte ^anu 
'telSfaH: ^43a§'"^or5~tfrT^erer, aU ba§ ©ilber. ©a^ 
(Eifen ift nii^tidjer, aU ba§ ©itbcr. S^a§ (gifen ift ba§ nit^* 
Iid)fte Wctail Sonife ift fd)oner, al§ 5Imatie ; aber §einridj 
ift ba§ fd}onfte ^inb. _Snbtt)ic^ ift jiincter; atg M -L-gr Hi ber 
_™ftiJgo|n_imfer^^ farHj ^ter, a UM±jvMZZ~ 

_^r' ottiftr^olm J^mg^^n^ 

"ScT^nnb ljrtaiTrene^3:t)ier. ^iefesBn^tfTbfffer, alg 
iene^\ ,^n_bif^^^_berjegeg^^ 
t^an? bTefe?lHnfiiianneIt|T^a§ I}od]fte ber ©tabt. 



2i 

. 40. 

This bird is very little; it is the smallest bird. Louisa 
IS very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her sister. 
(The) silver is not so useful as (the) iron. The tiger is 
not so strong as the lion. The tailor is the happiest 
man in the town. Henry is more diligent than Lewis, 
but Charles is the most diligent. Thy umbrella is very 
beautiful; the umbrella of my cousin is the most beau- 
tifuL You are not so poor as my cousin; he is the poorest 
man in the town. My chair is too high; this one is 
higher; but the chair of my mother is the highest. I 
have given my brother the best pencil and the best pen. 
41. 

1 Norn, tccx, who ? 

/ Dat. Went, to whom ? 
Ace. Wen, whom? 
/ SBa§, what ; chna0, something ; md}t§, nothing ; Scmanb, anj'body, 
' 6omebod_y ; S^tiemanb, nobody ; ijux, here ; ha, there. 

/ Ser tft ba? (§^ tft ber ©d)neiber ; e^ ift ^einriif) : id) Inn 
c^. SBer tft jenerSJMnn? (5§ tft ber ^djufjmac^er ; e6 ift 
ber (SoI)n be§ ^rgteg. Ser l)at biefen ^rtef gefci)rtebeu? 

geI)oHbi^]Tu5F?'~%trppHmemer ©c^iDefter. ^m ha^ 

_te_@ie_be|L£ut.a!££^!I^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^ ®^^ ^^^f^ ^Imtie 
Trfaften? ^^^JoB^^^te^^efeJen? Sag {)aben _^ie ux ^ 
Joren^? /vS j^TmSB^e Homu ^a&etr@ieetiMg gefun^ 
Ten? ,^oJft35£_gruber? ^_grjft m^Tgie^r^ft^gemanF 
^2^ ^i/ijj[^^temcm j boT ' ^at Qcmani tnetne ^^er genoni?^ 
men? "Wteman5"5^t tl)re geber genommen. 
42. 
Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is 
that woman? It is the wife of the shoemaker; it is the 
servant of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your 
knife ? To' the son of the gardener. To whom has your 
brother sold his dog? To the sister of my friend. From 
whom hast thou received this bird? From the father 
of this girl. What have you bought? I have bought 
an umbrella for my cousin (fem.) What have you 
taken? I have taken nothing. Of whom do you speak? 
([prccijen (Sic). I am speaking of nobody. Has anybody 
read my letter? Nobody has read 3"our letter. 



43. 

i\o«i._^clc^ \-odd)C, Vodd)c'§, wlio or whicli ; 

Dat. ^J^^^diim^\vdd)CXf \Md)cm, to whom or to which; 

Ace. Joc^n^ \vdd)C, \v>dd)c§, whom or which. 
/ !Der 3.iicJ)Icr, the joiner; gcmacl)t, made; auSgcgangen, gone out; 5c. 
( Wcmt, cried, wept; in, in ; mit, with ; bet, with (at the house of). 
Obs. The prepositions in, mit, bet govern the Dative. 

. Setite^ifdilejLliat bte[en SiJJjicma^? SBeWje mac^h 
iat btejeiTOTief gcfc^nmnT' ^eld)c§ ^inh ^at geiDemt? 

_SeI^e^.£MUl£6j^rL^!La3^^ ? SSeldje lU)r ^ft bit I3cr 
loren? SBelcfjc§ §au§ I)at 3I)r S5ater mian\t? S3oii inel 
djem S5oI!e fprecljeu @te ? ^Otitjpelcl^em gmmbe BiiLbit au^ 

^ncaangeu? JJin2cHi£m_^arteOMiL^ 
iBcWje '(^cber^ajTbuboP^elc^er graiT^o^TirMrr^tcfit-r- 
cjegeben? SBelc^em 3}Bb(^en ^ft bit bemen gtitgerljut gclic^ 
{)cn? .^eLtPcIdjem ^aitfmaniL£ci£££L@i'Lbtefcit glciftift ge^ 

^_^ir[t? Wlit wcldjtv gcber ^aben @tc bte[eu ^ricf gcfdjiic* 
bcu? D}ljt ircm [iiib @ie angefoimrtciLl, 
44. 
Wliero is your sister? She is in lier garden. Where 
is your brother? He is with (at the house of) his friend. 
Is your father gone out? He is gone out with the phy- 
sician. Which hat have you bought? Which book have 
you read? Which pen have you taken? Which boy is 
the most diligent? Which watch is the best? Eroni 
which gardener hast thou received this flower? At the 
house of (hex) which woman hast thou bought this 
bird? In which house have you lost your thimble? 
With whom is your brother departed? To which man 
have you lent your umbrella ? Which stick have you 
lost? Yfhich joiner has made this table? 
45. 
S)cr Slyfe l, the apple ; hit Sime^ the pear ; gegcfycn, eaten. 
Ohs. In those sentences, which begin with a relative pronoun, tho 
jcrb is placed at the end. 

Jgtrj abenj men -^vub er^ y etd) cr [eljr grog tft. ^^^r l]aU 
eiuT^^'^epcrrBelcIjC 7^^r~lTeiir ilt.TIZeitr^o^n fjat ciu 
^ucf), inctdje^ fef)r niil^Itd) ift. ^cr @arten,_jgeidieit be in 
pntd gcfauit Ijat^ ift fcfjr fdjon. 'X)k gcber, tnetcfje luctii 
iBcttcr gcpmbeiip"t, i'^^T^^F^ptT^^cI) I)abe ba§ §au6 ge^ 
[cijcn, lnclcljc^3 Qi)v ^atcr' gcfauft ijat. ^aben ^te ben gnua 



26 



cjetijut Qefimbcn, iDcIdjeu nietne ^dyicqkv 'oerloreu Ijat? §afl 
ju bcii "^j^f d^tmUjlfJ^^tn bit gefimbcn !]a[t? ^^^ ^]^^^ 

^jijcMjcm @ie -3fen_%tef ^egeben i;iakii. " |)icr ift bte ^foirr 
Uietdjcr Uiir itnfcnt ^imb tterfauft Ijabm. S^kx ift ber Elr^t, 
jou IP el d) cm lijir [o o]tj ^ud}txL_ "^ ' 

46. 

'' 0^5. Instead of Wdi^jtx &c. may be iised ber, bte hd^^ for instance: 
l<;r ©attcn, ben or todd)m Wix gefauft 'i)abm, 

I have a dog i\'iiicii is very little. Yf e have a, cat 
wliicli is very fine. My father has bought a house vfhicli 
is very beautiful. Have you seen the umbrella v^hich 
my mother has bought? Hast thou found the pear 
which thy brother has lost? We have seen the horse 
which your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble which 
you have found? I have taken the pencil which my 
cousin has bought. Henry has eaten the apple which 
his brother has received. Have you seen the woman 
of whom we speak? Have you read the letter Vvdiich 
I ha,ve written? Have you found the boy to whom this 
Denknife belongs? 

47. 
ScriciiiQc Wd&jcx, lie who ; bicjcntge ir>cld)c, slie ^v]lo , basjeuige U>c(dj)c0, 
"'■■■~~'*~=— — = — °°° "''^ tliat which. 

Obs. Instead of berjcTtige etc. may also be used bet/ hk hci§y loi 
instance : bcr, tcd&jCX* 

^^^rjenic^c^ ^^'^^!L/^^^H^!E_ifciiiI!J^ liefer giitGcr^ 

fleiner, aU bieienige beuie^S ^rubers, !©tefc§ ^avS ift jdjo^ 
ner, aU baSjemge unfereS 9kdjbar§, ^^Jjobejiteinen ^ut 
Deiior^en xtnb beit Hteine§ ^etter^>. SStr^pFeiflieine geber 

"■"gefunborinbTre bcineS greun^ ^einrid) fjat ittein ^nit^ 

mer gefe^eit imb ha^$ mdnt§> Dn!e(§. ^^fi bu meincri @to(l 

jmomnmi ober beitmeinc^S ^rubers ? "'^'^aJTft uid)t beine 

'"^TuHeJ ba§ ift TtTntemer ^OUittxr^^aUn (Bk ntctn 2}2cffer 
ober ba§ be^3 ©artnerS? g]jred]en @te t)on^temeTn (Soline 

_ober tionJuniL^g ^tr^tcgj ®a§ ^ferb, iDeldje^S iDir gcfauft 
()al)en, ift jiiuger, al§ basjenige SD^tQ S3ater0« 
48. 
He who is rich, is not always contented. My dog is 
more faithful than that of my uncle. Our servant ia 



27 

stronger tlian tliat of our neiglibor. My room is large? 
than that of my friend. This umbrella is finer than 
that which we have bought. Have you taken my pen 
or that of my sister? This is not your pencil; it is that 
of my brother. I speak of my book and of that of 
your friend. Louisa has lost her thimble and that of 
her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my 
cousin. My watch is better than that of my cousin (fern.) 
I have received your letter and that of your brother. 
49. 

I <§emrid), Henry ; ^outfe, Louisa ; 

J <§emrid)§, Henry's ; £ouifcu§, I omsa's ; 

I bem «§emrtd}, to Henry ; bcr I'ouife, to Louisa ; 

' ton tgtetnrtd), of or from Henry ; i)on ^ouil'en, of or from Louisa, 

!3BiU)eIm, William ; " * SBtcn, Vienna ; 
Scl)anrt, John ; 1 Sicin, Cologne ; 

(Smilie, Emily ; I §tad)en, Aix-la-Chapelle ; 

l)ci$t, is called ; ' gcf)t, goes ; rcof)iit, lives. 

(S'r f/d^t ^axl, Lis name is Charles. 
The hat of Henry, bcr •^dit -^dnxidjS'^ to Brusselo, mid) S3ru[[cl; 'a\ 
Brussels, gu or in ^viifjel. 

S}teiu ^ruber Ijeij^t §etnr[ci) mib luelne <2dpt\kx Ijcigt 
Souife. g)erJ3ater SiU jelmg ift an g efommcn , 2jie SJ'aitter 
^oiiifcn^ i[t aigerciftT SiiblDtcjg Onfel t[ t__[e|l_Ji^c^ (£nii^ 
J[icn^ put .ifiLMLlgJlgll-^"""^^^ ^!L^':!^^^l j^un'qjJCtL^ein^ 
'^^^^^^ ^Hftalte Ijat ^em Qd^amT 
l^^egeSer geUefenT ^arl^otber (^milie eine Finnic gegc- 
ben. ©cljort bic[cr ©arten bem Sub-rig ober ber Earcliiie ? 
^.^^ioJI^Sil^cfm? (Er j^mit llarl i mb So\c\)l) c mps-c^axiQnL_ 
^ SgoI^nrTTPOnTcf uTSSjlncrober mJ3anil mjt 3I)r 
^eltcrjldc& SBicu obcTno^ ^flm J'^fl^an g cjHler, al^^ 
g^on? -SfF^'ljr grcitub t 3on ^oln ober D onjkdjeuL-^^ 

Obs. "The proper Sanies of persons are declined with or without 
an article. If declined with the article, they remain unchanged. 
Without the article, the feminine names ending in e add r\§ in the 
Genitive and tl in the Dative. 

50. 
^ly cousin's nam^e is John. The daughter of our 
gardener's wife is called Jane (-3of)t"^rtna). Art thou 
Charles's or Ferdinand's brother? Where are Henry 
and Lewis? They are in my father's room; they are 
gone out with William. Have you lent j^our pen to 
Henry? Who has given this fiower to Louisa? We 



2S 

have received a letter from Levvis; lie is at Dussel* 
dorf. The sister of Charles is very short. The bonnet 
of Josephine is too large. My uncle lives in Vienna 
and my cousin in Paris. My friend goes to Cologne. 
William is arrived from Amsterdam. Have you seen 
John and Lewis? My garden is larger than that of 
Emily. Louisa is gone out with her mother. Henry 
\£ departed with his friend Ferdinand. 



PART II. 

51. 

Norn, bie Xijcrie, the tables ; 

Gen. bcr ^ifd}e, of the tables ; 

Dat. ben Xi\d)tn, to the tables ; 

Ace. bie Xifcfje, the tables. 

Obs. Substantives of one syllable take c in the plural. Those 
nouns the radical yowel of which is a, C, it, an, generally change 
it into d, C, ii, du. The Dative plural of all substantives terminates 
in n. 

SDie greimbe metneS ^ater§ finb angel'cmmen. !3)ie 
©oljiie itn[ere§ 3tad}bar§ finb fd)r f(eiBig» ^te (Stiiljle, 
inelc^c Von gefanft Ijabert, finb fe^r fc()on. ^abcn (Sie bie 
'Bttibte Sten unb Berlin gefel^eit? I^arl ^at bie §iite ^iU 
^e(m§ unb gerbtnanb§ gefnnben. SJcein ^ater Ijat bie -^riefe 
3;5rc$ DnkU nic^t cr{)alten. ©a§ Stfen unb ba§ ©ilbcr 
finb 9}|etaIIe. !Die $ferbe finb nityidjer, aU bie |)nnbe. 
IDie DJZctgbe eure§ 9^adjbar§ finb fel)r fletBtg. 3Dte ^iler^te 
in biefer ^taht finb fel)r retd). Sent !)aben ©te bie ©tdcfe 
nieineS ^rubers gegeben? !l)ie 3r!)tcre, trelc^e tt)ir in 3I)i*cm 
©arten gefel)en ^aben, finb fc^r ftarf. §aben ©ie ben 
grcnnbcn §einrirf]6 gcfdjrieben? (^chd biefen §nnb ben 
(£obncn meineS iSruber§. SBir fpredjen Don hen ^ricfen 
:!c5'2Iiite^3. 

52. 

Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. 
The iriends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the 
horses of our uncle? Yv^ho has written the letters of 



29 

my brother? Where are the hats that jou have bought? 
1 have received this bird from tha sons of the phy- 
sician. I have given your umbreUa to the maid-ser- 
vants. (The) metals are very usefuL (The) dogs are 
very faithM. Your brother is gone out with the sons 
of our neighbor (fern.). Cologne and Aix-la-Chapelle 
u.re towns. I speak of Henry's and William's friends, 
53. 

' 5)cr 3aT)U, the tooth ; bcr ?fting, the ring ; 

bcr %ni^f the foot ; tic 9cu|^, the nut ; 

bk "^anh, the hand ; bcr S3aum, the tree ; 

bcr Scl)iif), the shoe; Voarnt, warm ; tcirt, clean ; 

bcr Striuupf, the stocking ; irci§, white. 
Obs. The determinative T^ords, as : bicker, jcncr, mcin, bent, Unldjcr 
&c. take in the plural the same terminations as the article. 

2}^cine S'^lyat fiub jeljr incig. Qdj Ijabe bte giigc fc(}r 
roarm. 3^A•c §anbe finb nldjt rctn. 'J^at bcv'©cfjul)mndjcr 
mcinc '8djiil)c (Jcbradjf? SBcr ()at metue ©triimpfe gcncm^ 
men? (B'mh ha^ S\)vc (Striimpfe? ©a§ fiitb iurf)t bic mtU 
MX (gdjineftcr. So i)aben ^k biefe 9citf]"e gcfauft? ijatcn 
<Bk meinc ^aitme frfjon gc[cl;cn? ^on wddjcn -33aumen [prc^ 
d]cnjBk ? S5oit bcnjcrdgcn, ineldje tdj mn bcm ©civtncr bcr 
^'onigin gcfauft I)abe. Uufcre grcmibc finb fdjou abcjercift 
^er Ijat biefe ^riefe ge[djrieben? 5Jtcin Sater Ijcit fcine 
$fcrbe unb ^pimbc i3crfauft. ^jtctn DIadjbar I]at einen ^ricf 
Hon fcincn (2bl)nen crljcdtcn, irclclje tn Devlin finb. .fat 
--3einanb mcinc {^linije Gcfnnbcn? Tcicmanb f}at beine 9xing,c 
gcfe^en. %id \yixh t3on fcincn grennbcn gclicbt. 

Their, ff)r ; those, btcjcntgcn or bic. 
Charles and Henry have lost their sticks. The shoe- 
maker has not made your shoes. Where have you 
bought these tables and chairs ? From w^hom have 
you received these pencils ? My feet are very small. 
My sister has lost her thimbles. I have received these 
letters from my friends. These trees are, higher than 
those. These animals are very fine. These servants 
are very lazy. Have you already seen our hats and 
our rings? Emily's stockings are wdiiter than those 
of Louisa. Your teeth are not clean. My hands are very 
warm. I have found these nuts in my uncle's garden. 



80 

65. 

mc, all. 

©as Pdn^, the chiA ■ ba§ 3}orf, the Aillage ; 

bag ^.nd), the book ; has 531att, the leaf ; 

ba§ 4^aug, the house ; bag led), the hole ; 

bag ^cit, the people ; bag «§u()n, the chicken ; 

ba§ ©lag, the glass ; bag Raih, the calf; 

bag 53arib, the ribbon ; bcr 2i>urni, the worm ; 

bag Jllcib, the dress ; bcr 2Salb, the forest ; 

bag SclilOp, the castle ; bcr Si'tann, the man, the husband. 

Gbs. All tliese monosyllabieal nouns are exceptions from the 
general rule, and form their plural bv adding er, and softening the 
radical Towel. Substantives ending in tfjam follow the same rule, as : 
Srrtljum, Srrtljunier (mistake). 

:l)[e[e ^aujtv fmb Ijo^er, als jeue^ ^cm ^dnbcr finb 
fcfjoner, aU bie[e. !©eme iBlidjer finb nul^iicijer, al^ bte 
SouifeiiS. ^ie[e ^Otutter Ijat iljrc Hinber ijerioren. S^tr 
£ordg Ijat feine (gcljtbjfer Derfauft. ^ou iDcm Ijabeu (gie 
biefe ©lafer er^attcn? Ser I)at biefe llleiber gemacijt? 
S^ie[er 5Jlarat ift fcljon fc^r aft; er Ijat alle feine 3^^^^^ ^<^i^' 
Ioren» SBo finb S^^^ grcunbe? SlUe nicine grennbe finb 
anSgegangem ©iefe Golfer finb fetjr gtlidlid); fie I}al-cn 
cinen ^onig, meldjer fef;r gnt ift. '^ie ftonigc finb nidjt 
inimer gtiidiici), ^einrid; unb Siiljelm ^aben ade iljrc ^ii- 
d)er ijerlorcn, 5Ide enre ^riefe finb angefomnien. SBir 
Iiaben ode biefe 9?itffe in beni Saibe nnfcreS Onfel§ gefnn^ 
ben. S^cr S3ater ift niit aden fcinen ^inbern abgcrcift ®icfe 
!^orfer finb feljr fdjon. S^on lueldjen !l)orfern fpredjen (gie ? 
SBeldje <Btahtt Ijaben (Bk gefeljen ? @inb ade biefe (Striimpfe 
filr t'onifen obcr fiir (Suulien ? ^Jaben <Bk ben i!inbern be§ 
dcadyoax^ einen ^cgcl gegeben ? ^^er fjat ade biefe Sodjer in 
meincm S^ifdje gen^adjt ? 

66. 
Isot 3'et, nod} nid;t. 
Where are join cliildren? My cliildren are gon 
out. Their friends are arrived. Have you not yet 
writteii your letters? "Who has bought ail these rib- 
bons"? Henrietta has lost all these books. We have 
seen all these houses. Have you also seen the castles 
of the king? W^ho has taken all my nuts? These 
children have lost their hats. Give these glasses tc 
Henry and these rin2;s to- Louisa. This tree has 



31 

lost all its leaves. My neiglibor lias sold all Ills 
chickens. 

57. 

S)cr ^ttcfcl, the boot ; bct £iit|Ct}cr, the coachman ; 

bcr ©picgcl^ the mirror baa Scitfter, tho wiiido\7 ; 

bcr I'cffcl, the spoon ; baS 93tcibcljcu, the gi- 1 ; 

hie ^atd, the needle • bcr (Snglanbcr, the Englishmau ; 

bte ®a&cl; the fork ; bcr Stalicner, the Itahan. 

Obs. Masc. and neuter substantives ending in er, d, en, do no 
ehange in the phiral ; the feminine nouns ending in er and d take it, 
except : bte 3}tuttcr, tlie mothers ; bie S^cdjter, the daughters ; bcr Set; 
tcr, the cousin, tk iBettcm. 

®te ©djueiber itnb (Sd)itf}ruad)cr in bicjcr 'Btaht ftnb aUt 
reldj. S^icfe (^ngldnber fiub fefjr fletgig. Wldnt Siliber 
[tub aUt txant ^ahm (gie rttchie ©djUKftcm (]e[el)cn? 2Bo 
Ijvibeu (Sie biefe DJtcffcr, Soffcin uub ©abcut gefauft? SDie 
genfter Qijxc^ ^tmmerS ftnb offcn. ^axl itnb ^dnxid) fiub 
meine S3ettent. Sir ^abeit bicfe S3oi3e( in bcm iBalbe ge- 
funbcn. ©ie S:tger fiub fel)r ftavL ©icfe S)Bbc§ett fiub feljr 
gtitdUc^. (Siub meine S^ocfjtcr an§gegangen? ©inb nteine 
3tmmer uicljt fcljr fcljiin? ^at 3f)i*<^ S^aute alle bicfe (Spic^ 
gelgefauft? Ser I)at bie ^iidjer mh gcbent biefe§ Sjlab^ 
djenS geuommcn ? Sem geljorcn biefe ©drteu unb^dufcr? 
Couife nub ipcnriette Ijahcn iijre Slabcln neiioren. SDer 
©cl)ul)uiac(jer I; at SO'^c ©djulie nub ©tiefcl nod) nidjt gc^ 
bradjt. S^er fiub Jene D^'^dmier? (5§ fiub -S'taliencr; e^ finb 
bte OuicI nieiuev greunbe^. ®iefe 9}2iUtcr fiub feljr traurig; 
fie ^abeu alk iljre tinber uerlorcn. 

68, 
The shoemaker has brought your shoes and boots. 
The houses of this village are all very fine. Bring us 
(Orutgen @ic mxx>) the spoons, forks and knives. Where 
have you bought these needles? Your brothers and 
sisters are not come. Lewis and Ferdinand are cou- 
sins. Our mothers have seen the gardens of the king. 
My sons have bought the mirrors of my neighbor. 
(The) horses are bigger than (the) tigers. Are my 
stockings clean? Are your shoes ne^y? 

59.' 
i§in§, (cin) one; iner, four; 

i\V)d, two; fiinf, five; 

hxdf three; fcfij^/ six 



ftcben, seyen; ncurijc()5l, ninclcen; 

ad)i, eight ; jliwn.^ig, twenty ; 

iicun, nine; Mc 5luf(]abc, the tash, exercise 

icljn, ten; ba5 3a()r, the year; 

elf, eleven ; bic 3Bod)c, the week ; 

iWcIf, twelve ; bcr S.'tOiUlt; the month (pi. c) 

brciicl)n, thirteen; bcr ^.ag,, the day; 

liieqcfjn, fourteen ; bie (Htunbc, the 'hour , 

funfje^n, fifteen ; bcr 5lnai)e, the boy ; 

fcdjSgerjrt; sixteen; [cit, since (Dat.); 

ficbenjef^n, seventeen; c§ Qiht, c§ i\i, there is; 

ad}tjel)n, eighteen ; cS gibt, e5 jtnb, there arc ; 
gcmadjt, made, done. 
' Obs. Substantives ending in e take n in the plural. 

-gu itnfcrm ^aitfe finb utcr^cljit ^tnimer. Qn bicfem ^hri' 
mcr finb ^\vd Zi\d}z itnb 3ii3o(f ©tiil)(e. Uufer dladjhax ^ai 
fiinf k'inbcr: bret (Boljnc imb gtDet 3::o(^ter. Sir Ijabcn t)ter 
^a'geit imb bret §unbe. Qn eurem @artcn finb fitnf3el)n 
^Bctitme. S3a§ 3^^^)^ ^f^^t ^^^'^^ Tlonak; ber SJZonat ^at uicr 
Sodjen; bie SBodje I)at fieben S^age. 3d} •fj^^s t)on inctncu? 
^ater fcdjS 2Ie|3fe( unb adji ^irncn txljaltm. Tlcin £)n!e( 
Ijtit meiner (SdjiDefter ein gebermeffer xmb sinanstg gcbern gc- 
gcbcn, §aft bit fdjon al(c beine Slufgaben gemadjt? ^ofiann 
f)at nod} nidjt feine Slufgabe gemadjt dJlt'm iBruber tft fd)on 
brei 3^^}^^ in Berlin, opaben @ie nod) nid)t gcgeffen? 3d) 
Ijabe [djon feit brei <Stnnben gegeffen. -3ft -S^jr Satcr nod; 
nid)t angciommcn? Qx ift fdjon feit jmei STagen angefommen, 
DJtein Dn!el tft feit t)ier siconaten !ran!; er I)at feit ad)t Zac^cn 
nid)f§ g(^geffen. ^2ein ^ritber tft neim -3^^^)^^ ^^^r ft^'^T mcine 
@d)ix)efter ift nodj nidjt fieben 3a^re alt. 
60, 

My father lias three houses and two gardens. This 
man has five boys and four girls. My friend has seven 
sisters. We haye received six letters. In this to^Yn 
there are twenty physicians. My cousins (fern.) have 
bought two cats. My cousin is seventeen years and 
two months old. My mother has bought six knives, 
twelve forks and eighteen spoons. Our joiner has 
made three tables and ten chairs. We have received 
this week fifteen chickens and three calves. William 
has eaten five apples, four pears and eleven nuts. 
Henry is arrived three days ago (since three days). 
My uncle is departed a twelvemonth ago (since a 
year). Charles and Ferdinand have made six exercises 



33 

There are two holes in this door. The gardener has 
given three fio"^^ers to my children. 

61. 

SaS ffirob, tlie bread ; IBrob, some or auj bread 
5)a5 Stcifd), the meat ; ^Ictfrf), some meat ; 
bic 5lcpfcl; the aj^ples ; Slcpfcl, some apples. 

!Dcr 2Bcm, the wine ; He J^tiici)c, the cherry ; 

ha§ '-BicT, the beer ; bie ^[(aumc, the plum ; 

ba§ SBafl'cv, the water ; bte ©intc, the ink ; 

^a§ ©emuje, the vegetables ; bie (Suppe, the soup ; 

bcr 3uc!cr, the sugar ; man finbct, one finds, they find ;^ 

bcr itattcc, the coffee ; gctrunfcn, drunk ; 

gcbcn ^ie mix, give me ; bringen ^k un§, bring us. 

Qd) l)aBe ^rob imb gteift^ O^scffen, SSir ^aben ^irfcficn 
mib ']3fiaumcn gefaiift. DJtein ^ruber f)at 3Betn getntnfen 
lutb if)r f)abt ^ier imb SSaffer gctnmfen. SDcr ©c^u^madjcr 
madjt ed}id)e imb ^tiefeL >Dcr 3:ifdj{er madjt Zi]d}t itnb 
(2tii()lc. -53ct biefcm i!aiifmann finbet man ^itdjer, gebcrn, 
S^iiite imb ^leiftifte. ©cben (Sie mir (Suppe imb ©emiife. 
§ier ift Scin imb Suffer, imb ba ift ^affee imb WM,, 
ipaben @te and) ^i^^^^"^ ^'^^ ^}f^i''cn 9}2effcr mib @abe(n, 
2;affen imb ©Idfcr gefaiift. S^er ©artner I)at ber Souife fir- 
fdjen imb :53(umen gcgcbciL §aben Sie fdjon ^affee gctrmd'cn'/ 
3n jenem §aufe finbet man (Spiegel, ^xegenfdjirine, ^dnber, 
gingerljitte imb Dtabefn, QJtetne greimbin ^at t)cn iljrem 
£)nfe( ^irncn nnb Dcitffe erijalten. Sir I)aben ^'otren, 3:igcr, 
^atjen imb §nnbe gefcljen. S^x biefer etabt gibt c§ Sdjnci* 
ber imb (Sdjnljuiadjer, mc(dje fcl)r reid) finb. 

62. 

SBcHcn (Sic? will you (have) ; gefanigft, if you please. 
Will you have some wine or some beer, some milk or 
some water ? Give me, if you please, some soup, vege- 
tables, meat and bread. Where does one find (finds one) 
ink and pens ? Are you a father ? Have you children ? 
Has your father bought any trees or flowers ? My bro= 
ther has books and friends. Here is coifee and sugar 
My neighbor has birds, dogs and horses. W^e are speak- 
ing of towns and villages, of houses and gardens. Iron 
and silver are metals. Vienna and Berlin are towns. 
What have you made ? We have done exercises (^^Inf^ 
gabcn gemadjt), we have written letters. ^Ye have eaten 
apples and plums, and we have drunk some wine and beer 



S4 

GB. 

33cuig, liltlc, fc'Yv' ; ju, too ; trie ? liow ? 

l^icl, miieli ; bag Chft, bie orud)!, the fruit; 

"oick, many ; bag ®clb, the money ; 

gcnuci, enough ; ber ^fcffcr, the pepper ; 

inc{)r, more; ia^ S<^^/ the salt; 

liuniiger, less, fewer ; bcr (Senf, the mustard. 

I^cinrtd) ^at t)tcl @clb ; cr ^at met)r ©elb, alS id), ©cbci 
?^ie mir cin ixienig g(eif(^. Qd) I)abe genug ^rob. !4^u [)au 
ju Diet (Sal3 unb ^'feffer. Sir I)aben iDeniger Db|%a(3 -3bv. 
\?oin]e Ijiit tneniger gebern, al$ §enriette. ^ar( I)at me()i' 
5(uft3aben gemadjt, aU gubmig. |)aft bit fo t)ie( @e(b, al^3 
mcin ^ruber? 'A^zv ^Irme Ijat iDcnig greimbe. (£•§ gibt 
luenig DTcemdjcn, \vtid)^ gufrieben [inb, ©cben ^ie bcr gen^ 
riette nid)t git mi ^cnf. DJceiit ^ritber :^at gu ciel SBeiit 
gctriinfcn. S^iefe Tlnttcv ^at t)iele ^inber. >Ciefer DJcaitit 
ijat Dtele tinmen. SBie i^iele ^unbe ^at 3^)^'^^^^^'? ^^ 
gibt biefc§ Qa^x inenig ^irfdjen, abcr tiiele "ipflaumen. Whin 
grcunb l)at btefe Sod)e tne^r ^riefe er^alten, aU id). §at 
b'ciit 3Sater fo t)tc(e -^itc^er, a(§ meiit Cnfel? ©ebcit (feie 
mir gefcilligft eiit ruenig ^Tinte. Swollen ^ie m^ meljr ? ^i^) 
Ijabe gciiitg. 

64. 

There is mucli fruit this year. Our gardener has 
many trees and flowers. Will you haA^e a little meat or 
some vegetables? Have you mustard enough? I have 
salt and pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money ; 
he is very rich. Give a little -wine to this woman. This 
man has few friends, but he has many dogs and cats. 
There are many birds in this forest. How many phy- 
sicians are there in your town? Have you as many 
apples and pears as we ? We have not so many as you, 
but we have more plums and nuts than you. Charles has 
fewer friends than Henry. This tree has fewer leaves 
than that one. There are too many chairs in this rocm, 

65. 

^a§ ^tud, the piece ; \^a§ 2)u|cnb, the dozen ; 

bte «5lafd}e, the bottle ; bcr P\.oxb, the basket ; 

bte 3:afie, the cup ; bie £'ciniranb, the linen ; 

ba§ ^furtb, the pound ; ha§ 3^ajd;entuct), the pochet hand 

bie (S((e, the yard, ell ; kerchief ; 

has $aai.- the pair; bcr J^anbirfju"^, the glove ; 



ba§ >^^emb/ tlie sliirt ; bcr ^afe, the cheese , 

bie <§al5binbe, the cravat ; fccr 'Bd)inkn, the ham. 
Obs. The vrords ^fuiib, ^aax and S>ii|cnb are invariable when they 
are preceded by a number. — The English word of which follows tha 
names of weights and measures is not expressed in German. 

■SJ^einc d)lntttv ^at ber f)cnriette brci *paar ^aiibfcfjul^c, 
fec[)§ "ipaar ©tritmpfe; gtpet ©u^cnb §embcn mib eincn kovh 
feirfcfjeii gcfc^idt. Qn bie[em goffer jinb ^cfjn (Sllen ^^etn- 
iDanb, Dier S^afc^entiidjer imb fec^S ^aBlnnbem dTctln ^v\u 
ber ^at ginei ^aar (gcfjulje unb eiit ^aar (Sttefel gcfaiift. 
SBir ^aben bem greitnbe unferu Dn!el§ Slrangtg 'ipfunb 3itcier 
imb gefjtt glafcfjeu SBein gefdjidt. ©eben ®te mir ein ^tM 
^dfe, eine 5'^a[^e ^ter imb etn tnetttg @enf. 5d) ^)^^c cin 
@ta5 SJetn getrim!en xtnb cin (Stitc! ©djinfeu gegej'fen. 2Btr 
I)abcn bei itnfcrcr greunbm eine Slaffe ^affee getntnfen. 
©ebeu <Bk mtr cm ®ta§ S5}affcr imb cm (BtM ^ndcv. 
OJtctne ©d)irefter Ijat gtnct ^>fimb ^irfi^en imb ein $fmtb 
^flanmen gefcmft. Sir Ijabcn ein S^u^^enb @tiil)Ie bci bcm 
5^ifcf)(er imferS £)n!e(^ gcfauft. 3d) Ijcbe iwn bcm ©cirtner 
cinen ^orb iBhmtcn erljatten. 

GG. 
The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa 
and two pair of boots for William. AVe have drunk two 
glasses of wine and three glasses of beer. Give me a 
bottle of water and a little meat and bread. Will you 
have a piece of ham or cheese ? Mj aunt has bought 
a dozen of cravats, two dozen of shirts and ten pair of 
gloves and stockings. How many shirts have you ? I 
have three dozen. This linen is very fine; how many 
yards have you bought ? I have bought twenty yards. 
That is not enough for ten shirts. My uncle has given 
to Henry a penknife, twenty pens, two cravats and a pair 
of gloves. Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six 
pounds of coffee and two yards of -ribbon. Will you have 
a cup of coffee or a glass of wine? Give me, if you 
\")lease, a glass of water. 

67. 
Sing, gutcr, gutc, gute»; Flur. gntc. 
- Sd;lctf)t, bad ; l-iortrefllirf), excellent . 

fait, cold ; itcbcnsunirbig, amiable , 

bxibjd), pretty ; ^ bag -ijavier, the paper ; 

tcbt/ dead ; ba^5 ©cjc^ciyt, the affair, businso 



S6 

Ohs. If the Adjective is not preceded by an article or any othei 
determinative word, it takes the terminations of bicfeV/ bufe, bteftS. 

§icr tft gutcr @cfjin!en, gutc (Suppe iinb fjutcS ^rob 
g)abcn ©ie gittc§ papier imb gitte ' i)mtc ? SBir ^aOcii 
[cfjiecfjten SBetn nnb gitteS ^ier getnmfcn. Unfer ©cirtncr 
I)at t)ortreff(t(J}e§ Dbft. llufere DJIagb l)at guten (Senf, aber 
d}(erf)teix '^feffer gefauft. (5buarb I)at gutc greunbe imb 
itiit^tidje iBiicfjcr. 9}tcm Dnfct I)at fdjone ©drlen imb grojle 
43ciu[er. Guer 92a(f)bar ^at trcue ,^^unbe. ^o^^^nn, gcbcn 
(§ie mil* ctn (^Ia§ Gaffer ! SBolIen (2ie !alte§ ober iimrme^S 
SBafj'er ? 3)^etne ©cfjiDefter ^at em ^aar Ijiibfdje »5anbf(i)itl)e 
gefauft. (Suer ^ruber f|3iic^t immer Don gittem ^etrt imb 
gitter (^uppe, abcr nii^t t3on itiiyidjen ^iii^ern, tioit 5Iufgabcn 
imb @efd)dften. ^^art§ unb Sonbon finb jd}one @tdbte. 
^cimnd) Ijat ein ^aar neite ©dm^e erf)alten. 
68. 

Have you any good mustard ? We have good bread 
and good meat. Your gardener has very fine flowers. 
These children have fine dresses. We have faithful 
friends, amiable brothers and useful books. Give me 
some better cheese and better beer. At (bet) this mer- 
chant's one finds pretty gloves, fine penknives, and good 
pens. Iron and silver are very useful metals. You 
always have excellent Tvine. My brother is not gone out, 
he has too many affairs. Henry has bought good paper 
and good ink. We speak of good cofiee, of excellent 
fruit and new dresses. 

69. 
6'in gutcr, cine gutc, cin gutcs. 
@olben, of gold, golden ; gefunb, healthy, wholesome ; 
jtlbern, of silver ; fcin, no, none. 

Ohs. If the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article, by fed) 
Dr by a possessive pronoun, as : mein, bein, unfer, &c., it takes in the 
JN'ominative Sing, the terminations er, e, c^, and in all other cases en, 
except the Accusative fern? and neuter, which is the same as the 
Nominative. 

Unfer ©lirtncr tft eiu guter SJ^ann. (Sure ©cirtneriu \^i 
cine gute gran. Gmilte tft ein gnte§ ^inb. Sir f)aben eincn 
.;]nten S3ater nnb cine gnte 5D^ntter. §ctnrtd) I}at ein fdjoncy 
^^sfcrb nnb einen fdji)nen §nnb. Sonife \)^i gro^e ^i\\)mf 
aber cine Heine rg)anb nnb cincn Keinen gn§. gerbinanb 
tft mit mcincm jitngcrn iBrnbcr au'3i]cgangen. ^p^^'^^'i^^^f 



ift init uietuei' dltcren (Scljiucftcr abgcreift. ©cbcn @ie Mc[c3 
^rob cinem annen iTinbe. SDicfe^ gebermeffer geI)ort^ etnem 
jungen 9}Zar[ne, ber bet unferm 9tasi)bar woljnt. Subii^ig ift 
hex (2oI)n etne^ reicfjen £aufmann§. |)aben (2ie guten SSctit 
ober gute§ ^ier? SStr Ijabcn feincn gittcn Sent unb !cut 
giiteS ^tci\ SBer ^at rnctne filberne U!}r nnb ntemcn golbe* 
licit &Hng genominett ? Sir Ijaben im[ertt beften greitnb t)er* 
lorcn. Giire fleincit ^inber fmb fcljr gefmib. S§ giebt Teinc 
giiten £irf(f)en bie[c5 S'a^r. 9)tcin £)n!el I}at feine fc^i)nftcti 
|)ferbe tierfaiift. ^ift bitmit bciiten tteueu ©tiefeln gitfriebcn? 
|)aft bit fdjctt uon un[ent gittcn ^^paitmctt gcgeffen? 

70. 
Charles is a good boy. Henrietta is ii pretty girl 
That is a happy mother. That is an excellent wine. 
Where is my little Henry, my good Louisa ? We have 
a very rich uncle. William has an old father. Iron 
is a useful metaL The dog is a faithful animal. I 
have received a new umbrella and a gold watch. My 
neighbor has done much business this year. Give this 
bottle of wine to a poor man or to a poor woman. I have 
no friend in this town. Have you no good pens for this 
child? Our best friends are dead. This joiner makes 
no good chairs. 

71. 
X\x gutc, hk quk, ta§ gute. 
©cjlern, yesterday ; tcx ^djiikx, the pnpil, schoolboy 

f)cute, to-day ; bt'c ^d}ule, the school ; 

id) ikhc, I love, I like ; 'i^aS Sckn, the life. 

Obs. When the adjective is preceded by the definite article, oi 
any other determinative word, wliich baa the same termination, as 
biefcr, jencr, &c., it takes in the Nominative Sing, the final e, and in 
all other cases en, except the Accusative Sing. fern., and neuter. 

S^er gate ^ctnrid) ift fraitf. S^te fteine ^opI)te ift fefjr 
(ieben§initrbig.^ S)a§ arme ^inb Ijat feine dJlnikv berforcii 
©a§ ift ber ijocfjfte ^aitm in iinferm ©arten. Sifette ift hit 
flei^igfte t)on unfern 3}lagben. liefer retdje (Sngldnber 
inoljnt bei meincnt DttfcL So Ijaben (^te btefe golbcnc 
)}}ahcl gefunbcn? Sem gcbjort btcfe§ groge §an^ nn'b jcner 
fdionc ©arten? gran^ ift mit bent !(einen Sari au^gegan^ 
gen. Sir Ijaben geftern bet ber gnten Sntilte fcirfdjen gc* 
geffen. Ser inoljnt in biefcnt fdjonen ^cf)(offe? Ste IjeisJ 



• 38 

biefe I)u6[ii}C ^luinc? 2^0o Ijaku ^ic btcfcit fcfjiec^ten ^etii 
imb bie[e^ fc[)(eajte ^icr gefauft? -3d} ^^^-^c bie f(ei6tgen 
©cfjiiler imb bie treiteu greunbe. S^cr SoiDe unb ber Si^tger 
finb hk ftcidften 2:i)tere. ®a§ finb bie glitdlidjftett ZaQZ 
meineS §eben§. ©eben ©ie biefcm armen [S^anne ein ircnig 
Sein. Seiljcn (^ie biefcm Heinen 3}labcl]cn -SlFcn^^egenfcfjirm. 
72. 
E\evy one, Sebcrmaun. 
The diligent pupil is loved by every one. The idle 
child is loved by nobody. The good king is loved by 
his people. This poor woman has no bread for her 
children. This rich merchant has given much money 
to the poor. I like the pretty flowers and the pretty 
children. I do not like the fine dresses. This fruit is 
not wholesome. My brother has found this gold ring 
to-day. Lewis is gone out with his little brother. The 
father of this young man is a shoemaker. The daugh- 
ter of this old woman is ill. Have you drunk of this 
excellent wine ? Will you (have) some of these fine 
plums ? Which hat have you taken ? I have taken the 
white hat. Which watch have you sold ? I have sold 
the silver watch. 



S)cr crfie, tlie first ; unartig, nauglity ; 

ber jtDcite, the second ; bcjd^nbcn, modest ; 

ber britte, the third ; ber S!f)ei(, the part ; 

ber vierte, the fourth ; ber S3anb, the vohime ; 

ber le|te^ the last ; nur, only ; bte Jllafje, the class. 
S)er tDiestclfte ? what day of the month ? 
Obs. Of before the name of a month is not expressed in German. 

■Dtcfcr junge 3jZami ift fel)r ffeigig: er ift ber erfte in ber 
Ilafl'e. kaxi tft ber ^tneite; ber befdjcibene §etnrid) ber 
brttte; ^o^^i^^t ift ber Dierte; ber !(eine SKilfjcIm ift ber 
fiinfte; "ip-aul ift ber fei$^3te ; Sranj tft ber adjte ; ©itftati ift 
ber neunte ; ber unartigc (Ebitarb tft ber elfte iinb ber faule 
Sitbmig tft ber leljtc. ^wti tft ber fititfte Zfjdl t^oit ^eljit. 
gitnf ift ber Dierte 3:(}ett t)ott stDanjtg. (Sin 3:ag ift ber fie* 
beitte 3:i)ei( einer Sodje. ^en inteDielften be§ 93?onat§ ^aben 
\mv Ijeitte? Sir t)aben ^eute ben brei3ef}uten ober ben t)ter^ 
^ebnten. .^ft e§ ntdjt ber ^tpanjtgfte ? SJteiit il^ater tft ben 
britten Tlai abgereift Tlcln On'fcl ift ben icljnkn Tc3cntbcr 



angcl'ommcn. pahm (gie ben erften nub iwdim ^anb? 3^ 
fjabe mtr hen erften. 

74. 

Louisa is the first in the class ; Maria is the second ; 
the good Josephine is the third ; Plenrietta is the fifth ; 
the modest Sophia is the ninth ; Matilda (D}latl}t(be) is 
the fifteenth ; the naughty Caroline is the last. Three 
is the sixth part of eighteen. A week is the fourth part 
of a month ; and a month is the twelfth part of a year. 
What day of the month is it (have we)? It is to-day the 
eleventh or the twelfth. We departed on the second of 
May and arrived on the sixteenth. Which volume have 
you taken? Have you taken the third and the fourth? 
I have only taken the third. 
75 

Singular. Plural. 

S^cv r.icmige, bie mcinigc, ba5 mcmtgc, mine ; btc mcinigcn ; 

bcr bcmige, thiue ; ber un[rigc, ours ; 

bcr fchugc, Lis ; ber ciirige, Sl)Ttge, yours ; 

bcv {fjrige, hers ; bcr ifjrigc, theirs ; 

(ctd}t, easy, light. 
Obs. Instead of: bet mcinige, bcr bctnige, &c. may be said, incincr 
mcinc, incmcS or mcing, with the terminations of btcfcr, bicfc, btefcS.— 
Tlie declension of bcr mcinige, bcrjcntge, &c. is the same as that of the 
adjective, preceded by the definite article. 

:Dcm 23ater ift grower, al§ bcr ntetntcje. 93cctne 3}2ntter ift 
fieiner, a(5 bie beinitje. Unfer ^ucfj ift nii^Ucfjer, a(§ ba3 
3f}rii3e. Widw (Sol}n ift ntcfjt fo a(t, a(g ber betntge. (5ncr 
^5ferb ift iiinger, a(^3 h([^ nnfrige. Unfere ^ndjcr finb niit^U^ 
cljcr, a(3 bie enrigen. Warn S3ater Ijat feine lU)r berloren ; 
^cinrid) I)at and) bie fetntge t^erloren. Wamt (Sdjtnefter 1^ai 
bie iijrige t)er!anft. 93Zctn ^ater I)at betnen -^rief unb htw 
mcinigcn gelefen. 93teine Si^ante ^t iljren ©arten nub hzw 
unfrigen nerfanft. §nt betn ^ruber meinen ©tocf ober hzw 
fcinigen gcnommen? ^ai Sontfe ntetncn gingerl)ut ober bet 
ifjrtgen gefnnben? S^eine Slnfgaben finb (etdjter, a(^3 hk mci 
uigen. S^iefe ^ctnme finb fjoljer, a(y bie unfrigen. Q\\ unfcs> 
rcr 'gtabt finb mcljr 5(cr3te, o.It^ in bcr eurigen. 

76. 
I^Iy thiml3ie is as f.ne as yours. Your umbrella is not 
so large as mine. Islj son is more diligent than thine 



40 

My friend has sold his house and mine. My sister hag 
eaten her apple and thine. Has Louisa taken my pen 
or hers ; my pencil or hers ? Henry has read my books 
and yours. Your sisters are younger than ours. We 
speak of our friend and of yours. Is my room smaller 
than thine ? I have promised a book to your son and to 
mine, to your daughter and to mine. I speak of my 
tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to my uncle and 
to yours. 

77. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. cr, he ; fie, slie ; c3 it ; fie, they ; 

Ace. \i)\\, him ; fte, her ; c§, it ; fie, them ; 

®c()a&t, had ; gcfannt, known ; ja, yes ; 

gclefcn, read ; ge&racl}t, brought ; nein, no. 

§aben @te meinen (Stod? ^a^ id) Ijabe ilju. §aben 
Sie tiietue UI)r? 9tcin, ic^ ^be fie nidjt. §aben <Ste metn 
S3'Je[fer? ^i^j ^)^^^ c§ ^^^^)^* §akn Ste inetne (Sdntlje? 
3ci, id) Ijabe (ie. SKo tft mein ^mib ? ^6) Ijabe tl)n uidjt 
gefeljen. 3Ser I)Qt mctne geber genommen ? ^ein ^rnber 
^at fie genommen. ^o I)aft bu btefe§ S^afdjentud) gefunben'j 
^d) Ijabe zx> in i()rem 3^^^^^^* gefunben. S)iefe S3oge( finb 
felir [rfjon. SSon incm I)aft bu fie er^altcn? S^etne (gdjiDefter 
ift'fe^r fletBtg; meine 93Zuttcr IxtU fie fef)r. §aben (Sie met* 
nen £){)eim gefannt ? ^6) \)aht iljn nidjt ge!annt. !4Dte§ tft 
ein nitl3(id)e§ ^\\6:)] Ijaben @te e§ fc^on gclefen? iBo tft 
mein gingerljnt? -3^^ M^^ ^f)^ Q\)xtx (g'c^mefter gegeben; 
fie I)at tl)n tierloren. ^at ^^ntanb meine ®abc( genommen ? 
^arl Ijat fie genommen. Sem I)at ber ©artner al(e biefe 
tinmen gefdjtcft? (Sr I]at fie 3^)1'^^' 3}tutter gefdjtcft. ^at 
petnrid) beinen -53(eiftift ge!)abt? Dlein, er l)at iljn f)eute 
\M]i ge^abt. 

78. 

Has the shoemaker brought my boot? Yes, he has 
brought it. Hast thou already done thy task? I have 
not yet done it. Have you seen my new room ? No, 
[ have not yet seen it. Where hast thou bought these 
pretty rings ? I have bought them in Paris. Who has 
had my penknife ? I have not had it, your brother has 
had it. I have received a letter from my aunt, have 
you read it? Have you already seen the king ? I have 
not yet seen him. You have a good pen ; lend it to 



41 

my sister. There is your brotlier ; do you see him ^ 
Do you not see him ? Where are your gloves? Lend 
them to your aunt. Where is 3^our umbrella? Give 
it to this child. My aunt is dead ; did you know her ? 
Which books have you there ? Have you read there '^. 
Where is thy dog ? jMy father lias sold it 

79. 
Scf) Vxw gctncfcn, I liave been ; 
bu btft geWcfcn, thou hast been ; 
cr (ft gewcfen, he has been ; 
\X)[x finb getttcfcn, we have been ; 
\l)X fcib gewefen, you have been ; 
fie finb gcVocfcn, they have been. 
S^.iXX, Mr. ; jufammcn, together ; 

bcr •§crr, gentleman ; lii^igC/ long? ^ loi^g time ; 

^fraulcin, Miss ; bcr IX'orgcn, the morning ; 

baS ^Tdulcin, the young lad}- ; 'i:a^ 93tcrtcl, the quarter ; 
?Juibame, Madam,''Mrs."; ' ciu Ijalbcr, c, c§, half a. 
bic 2)amc, the lady ; 
JDaS crilc D?cal, the first time ; ^^o.^ Ic^tc ?ucal, the last time ; ctn 5,ltal, 
once ; jvoct 9}ta(, twice. 

Obs. The word «^crr takes in all cases of the Singular n, and in 
all cases of the Plural cu. It is also used with the article in the sense- 
of Mr. In speaking politely, the words ^err, %xaVL and TVraulctn ar« 
used as a title, as in French, for instance: 3f)r <§cn: S3atcr, yoin 
father ; 3()tc ^rau 23LUtter, your mother ; 3I)rc ^raulcin (Hcl}li\*ftcrn, 
your sisters. 

3£>cr ift Tjicr c^clvcfcu? §crr Widli ift Ijicr gcrocfcu; cr 
Ijat biefcig ^udj gcbracljt. ^ift bit Bet bem @ci)itl)macf)er %C' 
incfen? 3(^ tun fjcitte bei bciuem (Scfjulimadjcr geiDefeu; cr 
I)at 3^i*^ @ttcfc( fcfjoit Qcmacljt. 2Bo feib tl)r blefen [Otorgcu 
gcUKfen? ^\i finb kt un[crm grcunbe £ar( geir-cfctt, incdiicr 
feljr !ran! ift. i^icfcr §crr ift bret ^a\)xz in Sicn cjcmcfcu, 
nnb feine ^riibcr finb fel)r lange in ^'onftanttno^cl gemcfcn. 
©n Bift nicijt f(cij3tt3 gen^cfcit, bu Ijaft betne ^itfgaBcn noclj 
iitcfjt gemadjt. Q^) bin cjeftcrn bet iOlcibame 9iober gelrefen; 
fie ift cine fcljr ItebcnSUntrbige grau. . ^\i grctnlein 9L ofl 
in biefer (Stabt gcipcfen ? (S'ie ift fi^on brei D^2al Ijier gc^ 
luefcn. §)aben (£ie 'i^tix ^errn (ScfjoH oe!am:t ? ^dj fj^ibf 
i()n in -Berlin gefannt ; linr finb oft jnfammen anvgcgongcn, 
S3ie (ange finb (5ie in SJtabrib geirefcn'? -3d) ^^^ i^itr ein 
brdbcu ^oXyc "i:^^ geinefen, abcr id) bin brei S$iertc( -Safjr \\\ 
[dffabon geinefen. ^^^htix €ie bie ^Jerren ?io((ct fdjon ge^ 
geftevn bci cincin mcincv grennbe gefclien 



42 

80. 
Have tliey (lias one) brought my slioes ? Yes, they 
have brought them. Has the tailor been here ? 'No, he 
has not yet been here. Hast thou been at the joiner's? 
No, I have not yet been there. We have many flowers ; 
v^^e have been in the garden of (the) Mr. Nollet. Have 
you also been at Mr. Moll's ? My brother has never been 
more contented than to-day ; he has received from his 
uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a dozen pocket- 
handkerchiefs. How long have you been in Paris ? We 
have been there six months. These gentlemen have done 
much business ; they have been very happy. Are Messrs. 
N. already departed for Cologne? They have departed 
this morning with their uncle ; I have seen them at 
Mrs. Sicard's. 

81. 

Sd) Wax, I was ; 
bu Waxft, til oil Yv-ast ; 
cr 'coax, he was ; 
wix Voaxm, we were , 
ii)r \rtarct, you were ; 
ik Xoaxm, they were. 
(il}cmai<o, formerly ; tuarani, why ; ai§, when. 
Obs. When a sentence begins wiVa ai§, when, the verb is placed 
at the end of the phrase. 

So tr^arft bu bic[en ^orgeu '? gd) roar bet metucm bet- 
ter, roeldjcr coit granffitrt augcfommen ift. 'SRm -^rubcr 
mib id), mv iDCtren hd betnem S3ater. Ql]xt Xank tDar ]djon 
abgereift. §err Tloii wax el)cmal§ fel)r retcTj; er I)at feit ^cIjh 
3'af)ren Utel i)erloren. SBareu ©ie nocl; nicvt bei^crrn 3}2ab{lj? 
Qd) bin oeftern ba cteluefen, aber er roar ait§i3eganc!en. 2Bic 
ait wax 3()r ^ruber; aU er in It'otu iDar ? (5r wax jelju 
ober elf Qalyct alt 2Btr waxm nidjt ^nfammeti ; er wax in 
^oUi imb id) wax in !Duffe{borf* Wcim (Sc^lDeftcrn iDarcit 
lange in ^ritj'fel bet §errn ^loKet. SSarum finb ©te geftcrn 
md)t gefommen ? 3d) wax geftern !ranL SSaren biefe ^Jerrn 
immer fo xdd) ? §aben (Bk tmmer fo Dtele grennbe gefjabt ? 
Sarft hn btefen D32orgcu in bcr (Sdjitle? -3'd) ^^^ f/^ute nidjt 
in ber (gdjule gelDcfcn. 

82. 

I was formerly much happier ; I was young and strong. 
Wast thou always as contented as to-day ? My father was 
formerly very rich. You were gone out, when I came (I 



43 

am come.) Where ^yere you, ^^lien we (are) arrived? 
Mj sisters Tfere very ill yesterday. IIo',y old vrere you 
when you were at N. ? I was fifteen years and six 
months old. Was my room open when you came (you 
are come)? 'No, but the vfindows were 023en. This p'iri 
was much prettier when she was young. John and Wil- 
liam were always my brother's friends. Viere you not 
with my brother, when he (has) lost his handkerchief? 

83. 

3d) ^attc, I had ; 

tn l)atU]t, thou hadsfc ; 

cr hattc, he had ; 

Jinr {jatteii; we had ; 

T()r ijattct, you had ; 

fie Ijatten, they had. 
5^ic (SItcrn, the parents ; bet 23c[ud)^ the visit; 
ter <^^anbc(; the cominerce ; bcr anbere, the other. 

Sir fjCdtzn biefe SBodje bci: ^efucf) bcr §erren Moti, 
mldjt init iiyax fed^roeftcr ange!ommeu finb. Qf)v Ijattet 
Dicle greiinbe, aU ity: nod) jiing waxct Sir Ijattcn me^r 
JBiiiJjcr, a(§ il)r. Unfcr Onfet I)atte eljcmal^ t>ic(e ^^fcrbe 
itnb §unbe. S^u inarft fcl)r fietgig, al'3 bu nod) bctne QU 
tern IjQtteft. 5^iefe gir-ct f nnf(cute limren e!)CUTa(§ fel)r rcidj; 
fie fatten einen groBen §anbeL Qdj l)atte giuet 53riiber; 
ber etne mar in ©ien, bcr anbcre in Berlin, ^paft bn rneine 
gtnet ^rllber gcfannt? Sd) W>^^ benjentncn gefannt, Xd^U 
d}cv in iSerlin lx>ar; ber nnbere mar jiinger, a[§ id). So 
ift eiicr S3ctter, ber fo niele 23oi3c[ I)atte? (Sr ift feit einem 
Qal}vt in ^riiffeL DJtein Sebcrmcffcr mar loerloren ; Qi}v 
^rnber Ijat cS gefnnben. ^attct il}r cure ^ricfe fdjon ge- 
[djriebcn, aU wiv au^gegangen [inb? Sir Ijaticn fie nod) 
nidjt gcfdjriebcn; mir Ijatten feine guten gebern unb !etn gnte^ 
papier. 

84. 

2^cr 33crflanb, the intellect ; bie ®xite, the kindness. 
Mr. Maury was formerly much happier, he had many 
friends, maich money, many horses and dogs. Henry 
is dead ; he was a good boy, he had so much intellect 
and kindness, he was loved by everybody. We were 
often in his garden ; his sisters were very amiable and 
they had many flowers and books. His parents were 
not rich, but they had a great trade. I was ill yester- 



44 

daj: I had eaten too much fruit. Hadst thou not yet 
done thy exercises when I came (I am come)? No, I had 
not yet done them. My brother had ah^eady done his^ 
when thou camest (art come.) 
85. 

5}tir, to me, me ; if)m, tc liim, liim ; 
t^tr, to thee, thee ; ii}r, to her, her. 
ju, to. 
iTaufcn, to buy ; fd)rcil3cn, to write ; 

lun-faufcn, to sell ; Icfcn, to read ; 

gcbcn, to give ; ~ fct)en, to see ; 

icil)en, to lend ; (bte) Suft, a mind ; 

tlyan, to do ; fcie 3dt, the time ; 

inad)cu, to make, to do ; baS 23crgnugen; the pleasure. 
3d) I ami, I can ; tu fannft, tliou canst ; er fanrt, he can ; toiv fonncn, 
vn-c can ; ii}x loimct, you can ; fie fonncn, they can. 

Obs. The infinitive is placed at the end of the sentence. 

fannft bu intr btefe§ ^ud) leiljen ? S^] ^^nn bir bicfc^ 
^udi ntdjt Ieil}cn; e§ gcl)brt meinent better ^etnridj. S^cr 
!ann bieicn ^rief Ie[en? ^d) ton il)n tefen; cr ift feljr 
(]ut gefdjrieben. 25ir fonnen bte[en Djtorgen nid)t fdjreiben. 
23arum Bnnet iljrnidjt fdjreibcn? ^ir Ijabcn fcine "A^intc. 
f onnen @ie mcinem ^rnbcr S^)xz Illy: let^cn? Qd) !nnn 
i[)in meine UI)r nid^t (clljcn, id) l)0.ht fie bcm gerrn ©. Dcr^ 
toft. §abcn ^k metner (Bd]\vt]kv cine gcber gecjclicn? 
3d) IjCiBe iljr fcine gcber gcgebcn. §aben Sie 2nft, bicfen 
§unb 3U faufcn? 3d) Ijcibe fcine 2nft, if)n ^u fanfcn; cr ift 
nid)t trcu. § at ii)r ^rubcr I) cnte nid)t§ 3U tl)nn? Qv lyat 
brci ^ricfe 3n fd)rciben. Sir Ijabcn nod) jmci ^nfgabcn 3n 
madjcn. -3d) ^)t^be gcftcrn ba§ feergniigcn gcl)abt, Qi}v gran* 
lein (gd)n3cftcr 3U fctjcn. §abcn (Sie ^eit, bicfen ^ricf 3n 
Icfcn? -3d) J)cibe je^-t nidjt ^cit, i^n 3U (cfcn. fonncn (Sic 
mir cinen Dtcgcnfdjirm gebcn? -S'd) ton QI)ncn fcincn gctcn, 
id) I)abe nur cinen. -3(}r gcrr ^^rnbcr Ijat bie ©ittc, mir hen 
feinigcn 3n (cil)cn. 8inb %ie geftcrn bci nteiner 3:ante geroe? 
fen? 9tein, id) irar acftcrn nidjt bci iljr; idj ^-atte 3n inclc 
©cfc^afte. 

SG. 

Can you do that? Yes, I can (it); but my brothcr 

cannot. Will you lend me joiiv penknife ? I cannot 

lend thee my penknife ; my sister has taken it. Have 

you given a pen to my cousin? Yes, 1 have given hini 



45 

one. Hast tliou sold tliy dog to my sister? I have not 
sold her my dog. Canst thou not do thy exercise ? I 
cannot do it to-day. We can read this book. These 
gentleman cannot ^yrite their letters ; they have no 
paper. Hast thou a mind to buy a pair of boots ? Has 
your brother a mind to sell his ring? Have you had 
the kindness to give a glass of water to this poor man ? 
My friend has had the pleasure to see his parents. I 
have not had time to read all these letters. My father 
has had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou 
seen it? I have not yet seen it. Have you been with 
Ferdinand to-day? I have been with him this morning. 
87. 

X\n§, to ns, us ; cud), Sfjncn, to 3-011, jou ; {r)ncn, to tlicm, them 

@cf)ert, to go ; ()aBcn, to have ; 

fommcn, to come ; fctn, to be ; ir)cnn, if; 

trinfcn, to drink ; unwcl}!, indisposed ; 

cffcn, to eat; jc|t, now, at present. 

3d) \xnf[, I will ; bu Will]!, thou Tvilt ; cr iinll, he will ; \vix VOcttcn, we 
\7ill ; ii}X Wiolkt, you will ; ftc ii^oKcn, they will. 

Sitlft bu mit mir gcl)en? -Sd} 'fiinu nidjt mtt btr ocljcit, 
id) Ijak fetuc ^cit S^] Wiii btr ciii fcfjoncS -^uc^ (ci^cn, 
menu bu fleigtg btft. <^ann bctn ^rubcr fjcute nic^t !ommcu? 
(Sr Ijat !eiue Suft ju !ommcu, cr ift uuinolji. Sir tDoKen jcljt 
unfere Slufgabeu madjen. SoIIeu ^k ciu @(a§ SSJein trinfeu? 
gd) I)abe fdjou ein ®(a§ iBier gctruufcn. -3d} inid etn (gtilcf 
^ki\d) ober f a[e effeu. SBotfeu Sie ciu iDcntg (^enf unb 
©a(3? ^'omieu ©ie vM bic[cu (Stocf letljcu? S^) ^'^uu 
-3l)ueu bte[en (Stoa ntdjt (edjen, utctu ^ruber Wiil itjxi Ijaben. 
IDta !auu nidjt ungliidlidjer fetn, al^3 bte[er juuge 2J2anu; er 
()at fciue (5(teru unb fetue ^riiber unb (Sdjtijcftcru t>alo'cm, 
Ser tDitl btefeu ^pfcl Ijaben? Q-dj inill t^n Ijaben. 2Bau 
iDtllft bu jet-t ttjun ? Qd) witi ein :paar iBriefe fdjrciben. Qd) 
win end) einen ^orb ^tr|djen geben, iDcnn ifjr flctBtg fein 
icoKet. SSoden (Ste bie ©iite Ijaben, niir etne Dlabel gn 
gebeu? Qd) Ijahz je^t !eine, tdj !ann Ql)im\ feine gcbcn. 
§aben (Sie ^ett, tntt un§ 3U geljen? Qdj ^abe I'eine ^dt, init 
Sljuen 5U geljen. §aben ©te ben§erren9L fd)on einen -53efnd} 
gcmac^t? Qd) §abe iljuen biefen 2}|orgen einen -©efndj genta^t. 
88. 

What hast thou to do ? I have nothing to do. Wilt 
thou read this book ? Yes, I n'ill read it. How is thy 



46 

brotlier? He is indisposed, lie cannot come. Where 
can one buy tliese fine penknives? One can buy them 

at tlie merchant's who lives at our neighbor's. Yfill you 
give me a little ink ? Can j^our sister lend me her pen- 
knife ? What do tliese gentlemen want (what will, &c.) '? 
These ladies will buy an nmbrella. One cannot be more 
mihappy than I (am) ; one cannot have more misfortune 
than I. Give us something to drink. What will you 
(have)? Will you have wine or beer? I have lent you 
my stick. Where are your brothers ? I have sold them 
my dog. This man is very rich ; all tliese houses belong 
to him. 

89. 

3}tiCi), me, Biyself ; bid), thee, thyself. 

im0, us, ourselves ; cuc^, you, yourselves ; 

firfj, one's self, him- her- itself, themselves. 
Scbcn, to prcaise ; gclo&t, praised ; 

lieben, to love, like; gcltebt, loved; 

hcind)Q\\, to visit; bciud)t, visited; 

jd)lav3cn, to beat; gcid)lagcn, beaten; 

fid) jd)[agcn, to fight; bcr £'ci)rer, the master; 

ir)ajd)cn, to wash ; gewai'd)en, washed. 

Sjer 2el}rer I)at hid) gclo&t, tmii bu fleigig gelt)e[en btft. 
t)ein ^ruber ift ein bi)[er £nabe; er ^at mtrf) geftern (\c^ 
fdjlagen. gaft bit bid) jdjon geii^afcljeu ? Sd) ^^be iiitaj 
nod) md)t gelDafdjen; aber geinrid) f)at fid) fc^oit fett einer 
©timbe gert)a[djen. Sarnm iDtilft bu meineu §unb fdjiagen? 
Qv ^at utetit ^rob genommen. llri[ere dltan finb luifere 
befteit grcunbe; mir tooUm fie imnter lieben. 2avt, bu bift 
fel^r unarttg; man !ann bid) ntdjt Ueben» SBte t)tete ©Hifer 
SBetn !}aft bu getrunfen? Sd) |cibe nur eine Ijalbe glafdje 
getrunfen. So bift bn btefen SJcorgen gelDefen ? Sd) bin mit 
meinem ^attx bci §crrn 91. getDcfen. 3ft $err 9L nod) immer 
nniDoIjl? (Er ift feit gcftern ein iDentg beffer; aber er !ann 
nod) nid)t effen, nod) trinfen. SDer Slrjt mar I)ente ^mcimal 
6ei il)m. -3d) ^iH tl)n ntorgen and) be)"nd)en, ober i^m etnen 
fleinen^rief fd)reiben. 5Iber tnarmn I)aben ^ie nn§ nod) nid)t 
befuc^t? S^^ W-^^ ^o^y ^^^^^ S^^^ O^^jt^bt, <Bk gn befnd)en. 
90. 

Who has beaten thee ? Your cousin has beaten me. 
With whom wilt thou fxp;ht? I will not fio;ht. I have no 



47 

mind to figlit. Lewis will figlit with Ilenrj. The ser* 
vant has not yet washed my shirts. She will v»^ash 
them now. I have sold yoii my penknife, but you have 
not yet given me the money. Your children have been 
very good (artic^) to day; the master has praised them 
very (much) ; he has given them a beautiful book, and 
a basket of cherries. Why has the master not yet vi» 
sited us? He has no time; he is alv/ays in his school 
lie is an amiable man: he is loved by all his pupila. 
There is Ferdinand; hast thou washed thyself, my 
child? Yes, mamma, (3}^ama) I have already washed 
myself. 

91. 

©agcn, to say, to tell ; glaiiBcn, to believe ; 

fd)iSen, to send ; ivi[)en, to know. 

23iuf[cn, nrast ; id) mu0, I must ; bu mu^t, thou must ; cr ViU'.f; he 
must; luir luui'^cn, we must; ii)v muffct, you must; fie mu[)cn, they 
must.' 

OIjs. The Accusative of the personal pronoun is placed before the 
Dative. 

^^'onuen Sie mlr [agen, \vo §crr Woti rooljut? Qd] !ann 
e§ 3f)^^cn nid)t fagcii. ©oKen ^k iittr btefe g^cber Iciijeu ? 
3d) taim fie 3I;''^*icn ittdjt leiljcn, fie gcljbrt mlr nta)t. Qo) 
nmg ^cute bcin grciitiein ®. eincu ^efiicf) macfjen, jte ift gc- 
ftcnt mit il)rcr SQhitter nngefonmieu. djlii\^t bit jeijt fcljon 
gef)en? 3So finb uietne ^dju^c? ^at ber @d)ul)inad)er fie 
nod) rddjt gcbradjt ? ^Dtcin, er witi fie btr in einer (Stiuibc 
fdjicfcu. 2I:ie !annft bu ba^^ rotffen? Gr Ijat e§ mir gefagt. 
Qd] famt cQ nidjt giaubcn. S^ciu ^ritber ntuJ3 nod) fetne ^^(iif- 
Qahcn tnadjen. Sir niiifieii 'McQ t()iin, li3a§ mifcre Gltcni 
imb *^cl)rer inoden. S\)x miifjet mcinen ^atcr ctnniat bcfudjen ; 
er ift fett bret Sodjcu !rani §cinrid) itnb 2Bi(I)eIin miiffcii 
mk ^iid)er ^abcit. SBcr Iiat btr btcfeu ^ing gegcbeit? £Oicine 
5;:ante I)at ti)it mtr gcgebcn. Soiiife, id) will btr ctlnaS fageu ; 
bit I)aft ineiite ©djecre gcuommen. Qd) I)cbe c§ fd)ott gcfeljeii^ 
?Jtiittei\ SBolIcit (Ste tnciner ed)ir)cfier biefeit gingerl)ut ge* 
bciiy -3d) iinll il)n i()r jcl^t gekn, Scr f)at 3^ji^cu biefen 
^:}uc\ gcjdjricben? S)Zciiie -53afc Ijat ilju luir gc[d)ricben. 
92. 

My friend has had the kindness to send me a basket 
of cherries. You have not yet sent me my book. I have 
not yet had time, to send it you. Who has taken my 



43 

pen? I cannot tell (it) thcc. Wilt tliou not believe me? 
This penknife belongs to my brother; thou must give 
it him. Cha^rles will not lend me his umbrella. Why 
will he not lend it thee? My uncle is arrived. Your 
brother has told (it) us. Who must do that? Your 
sisters must do it. You must tell it to Mr. MoU. This 
iettsr is not well written; I cannot read it. Hast thou 
mj stick? No, I have it not. I have lent it to you. 
You have not lent it to me. 



PART III. 



93 



Set) WbCf I praise ; I am praising, I do praise ; 

bu lobcft, bii iohft, thou praisest, &c. ; 

cr lobct, cr lobt, be praises ; 

Wix lobcn, we praise ; 

il)r IcBct, ffjr lo6t, you praise ; 

fte loben, they praise ; 
^•[nbcn, to find ; ba§ !5'ud), the cloth ; 

U">of)ncn, to live, to dwell ; bie ©tra^e, the street ; 

brinc]cn, to bring ; |ucf}ctt, to seek, look for. 

t(}cucr, dear ; 

Sa§ fudjcn (Sie? S^^) \^*'^)^ mdm gcber. Mdn ^ruber 
fudjt feinen ^(etjtift. Sir fucfjen itnfern §imb. 3Dte[e ^in^ 
bcr fudjcn i^re ^itcfjer. So faiifen @te ^Ijr papier? Sir 
faufeu mtfer papier bet bent ^ttc^^anbler. Qd) finbe meincn 
Btod nidjt Ser fjat ttteinett ©tod Genomtnen? Qd) glaube, 
bag Q\}X ^ruber i^n genommen f)at. Qd) (tebe biefen ^naben 
iiidjt, er tft immer unarttg. !©u Itebft beinen Se^rer* @ott 
licbt bie guten ^2enf(f)en. @ute ^inber Iteben t(}re (Eltern. 
3 ft e§ U)a|r, bag S^r Dn!el feiu §au0 t)er!auft? Ste teener 
t)cr!auf?n @te bie (^lle t)ott biefem 'Zndjt? Qd) t^erfaufe bie 
Gde biefe§ Xnd)z§> ^u t)ier Zljakv. ©a§ ift fel)r tljeuer. gin^ 
beft bu ntdjt, §einrtdj, ha>^ ha§> fcljr ttjeuer ift? Q-a, id) ftubc 
e§ fef)r tl)euer. Sir Derfaufen aber Diel Dott biefem 2:ud;e. 
^cbermantt ftnbet e§ fdjon. (^djtcfen (Bit mtr brct itnb ctiic 
haihc (Slle. Stffeu (Sic, Wo id) \voI)\k1 Sa^ @ie nvoiincn in ber 
$cter^ftra§e. Wlnvx DJtaa^ hm c^o Qljncn Ijcitte nod) bringen. 



49 



3:'abc[u, to Liamc ; ^iik§, all, every thing , 

arbetteu, to work ; SlKcS teas, all that. 

What are you doing? I am reading the book, which 
your brother has lent me. Ycu read too much. Why 
do you not write ? I have ah-eady written three letters. 
My cousins never write. You always blame your cou- 
sins; one must blame nobody. What art thou doing? 
I am doing my exercise. AVhat is thy sister doing? 
She is working. What do you drink? I drink wine and 
my brother drinks beer. We drink no wine. I eat 
cherries. My brothers eat plums. You are always 
eating, but you do not work. Can you tell me, where 
Mr. N. lives? He lives in (the) William-street. Livest 
thou with thy uncle? No, I do not live with him. 
Dost thou go to Paris ? No, I do not go to Paris. I do 
not like this young man; he always blames his friends. 
He will never lend me his penknife. I lend him all 
that I have. We lend everything to our friends. You 
always beat my brother; you are very naughty. These 
boys beat everybody. Do you sell paper? I sell paper, 
pens, and ink. What do you say? I say, that you have 
taken my knife. 

95. 

3d) toBte, I praised, I did praise, was praising ; 

hi tcbtcft, thou praisest, &c. ; 

er lobte, he praised ; 

\mx lobtcn, we praised ; 

tl)r Icbtet, you praised ; 

f[c lobteit, they praised. 
<Bi?tcIcn, to play ; tie ©efi^ic^te, the story ; 

lad)en, to laugh ; bcr Slbeni), the evening ; 

tatijen, to dance ; fo fe^r, so much ; 

erjdf)Ien, to tell, relate ; gcinj, quite, whole ; 

t^eilen, to share, divide ; V[§, till, until ; 
erlaubcn, to allow, permit ; haf, that. 
Ols. The adverb jo, which connects two sentences, is not translated 
in English. 

!Deitt ^ruber unb i^, tDir itio^ntett ^u 9Z. in bem ncim* 
Udjcu §aufe. 2Sir iraren ben gangett 3:ag ^ufammen. SStr 
mac[)ten mifere ^ufgaben gufamnten, totr fptetten jufantmen 
imb fatten !ctn groJereS 2)ergnugen, aU tnenn Wiv ^ufammen 
inaren. (Sr UeBte mic^ imb id) Uebte iljit fo fe^r, bag tt)tr tpie 
3 



50 

53ritbcr luareit. SBenu fetu Satcr ifjin ct\va^$ fdjid'te, fo tl)cil» 
ten mv c§, 3^^) arbeitete oft fiir i^n mib er arbeitcte fitr mtcf>. 
©er 2el)rer lobte unb (tebte un§. Wt guten 'Sc^iiler inaren 
im[ere greimbe ; fte befu(^tcn xm§ jebcn S^ag ; mtr erjaljlten 
un§ fdjbne @e[d)tc^teu unb ladjten nnb tansten, bi§ e§ Slbenb 
roai\ S)u fdjid'teft itn§ oft pbfcbje ^ncf)er, iDclcrie im§ ttet 
S^ergniigen mac!)ten. ^ir Ijattcn fe^r oft ^dt 3U (efen. Sena 
tinv unfere Slufgaben gemacfjt :^atten, eriaubte ber Sefjrer unS 
tnimcr gu fptelen ober ein nlt^lidje^ ^mi) gu lefen. 

96. 

2Baf)Ien, to choose ; ha§ <£^tel, tlie play, the game ; 

ioetnen, to cry, to Aveep ; \x»af)renb, while, during. 
Obs. The ISrominative is always placed after its verb, in a sentence, 
which serves to complete the preceding one ; toenn cr fommt, ge{)e id) 
mtt ii}m. 

When we were young, we lived in this house. Your 
sister bought some ribbons and chose the finest for 
you. Formerly I loved play, but at present I love 
books. This people always loved their king. Thy cou- 
sin was still looking for his hat, when we (are) de- 
parted. The merchant, whom thou soughtest yester- 
day, has been here. Thy brother sold his penknife 
this morning. While we were crying, you were laughing 
and dancing. My father allowed me always to read 
good books and to play with my friends. We often 
worked together, when you were liviug with your 
uncle. I danced better than you, but you did your 
exercise better than I. Thou wast often idle, and 
thou hadst not always a mind to read and to write. I 
told thee pretty stories, but thou lovedst play too much, 
thou didst play the whole day. The master blamed 
thee often, and the good scholars did not love thee 

97. 

3d) tnetbe Wbcn, I shall or I will praise ; 

hi tr>trft [06 en, thou wilt praise ; 

CT iritb Icben, he will praise ; 

toix tDerben loBen, we shall praise ; 

il}X trcrbet loBcn, you will praise ; 

fie irerben loBert, they will praise. 
Ohs. SBerbcn, taken in an absolute sense, signifies to hecome ; but 
,vhen constructed with another verb, it answers to the English auxil- 
iary verb shall Di' wvl. 



51 

^dj iDcrbe bie[en Slbcnb haQ ^^crQuitgen Ijabcit, lue'mcn 
Dn!el gu fe()en, S'd) itterbe bir btefeu Ijiibfc^en $Hmg geben, 
iremt bit fleiglg fein totrft ^etnridj wixh mtr f)eute etn 'f aax 
fc^one §anbfcfju!)e faitfen. ©eine ©djmefter inirb 3itfrteben 
fein, ii^enn fie iljre SlufgaBe gemadjt l)at, SGcnn \v\v in 91 
fein irerben, merben Wiv ml 23ergniigen I)aben. Sann wcv* 
ben ©ie mid) befuc^en? S^ glanbe, inir iDerben @ie morgen 
befudjen. 9}^eine ^riiber iuerben and) I)ente ober morgen !om* 
men. (5§ mirb meinem 25ater fef)r Die! 3Sergniigcn mad)en, fie 
noc^ etnmat pi fel)en. SKann itterben @ie 3'I)^em grennbe 
l^'art fdjreiben? Qd) fdjreibe il)m in ad)t bi§ Dier3cl)n S^agen. 
SBoKen @ie bie ®itte I)aben, mir ba§ ^nd) gn fdjiSen, tr)eld)e^ 
©ie mir t)erfprod}en ()aben? Q'd] iDerbe e§ ^Ijnen l)ente 
fd)t(fen, grdnlein. dJltin ^ebienter iuirb e§ S^j^en bringen, 
^^d) ^atte e§ einem grennbe gcliel)en, ber e^3 bi§ Je^^t gel)abt {)at, 
98 

SJtubc, tired, fatigued ; ha§ 2Better, the weatlier; :^[etl)er, hither. 

Shall you go with us ? I do not believe, that my fa- 
ther will allow me (allows it to me). Has the shoe- 
maker brought my boots? No, he will bring them to you 
this evening. What shall we do now? We will drink 
a glass of wine. Will you have the kindness to lend 
me your horse? I shall lend it you with much pleasure. 
We shall play to-day in the garden of our uncle; he 
will allow (it) us. I shall tell you a beautiful story, if 
you are good and diligent. Wilt thou work to-day ? I 
believe that I shall not work to-daj^ Come hither, my 
children ; you will be very tired. If your cousins are 
departed, they will have fine weather. Thy exercise is 
badly done; the master will blame thee. All (the) 
scholars will go to N. to-day. Charles, thou miust wash 
thyself, if thou wilt go with Henry. Yes, Mamma, I 
shall wash myself at present. 
99. 

3c5) ^utbe tcBett, I should or would praise , 

bu wiirbejl to&en, thou wouldst praise ; 

er iriirbe loben, he would praise; 

ivir triirbcn loben, we should praise ; 

if)r wurbet loben, you would praise ; 

fie imirben Icben, they would praise. 
9Beuii id) Ijattc, if I had ; irenn id) ixsare, if I were; gern, williucjlj; 
3b, if. 



52 

Obs. After the conjunctions iuciin and tfo, if, the Subjunctive Mooil 
IS used in German, when, tlie verb is in the Imperfe3t or in the Pluper- 
fect tense. 

^dj iDitrbe i](u(f(tcf)cr [ein, iDcnu id) ^iidjcr itub greimbe 
Ijilttc. -3d} unirbe mz\)X ^ergniigcn Ijaben, xozim meine S3et* 
tent Ijicr indrcn. SDu roiirbei't ntdjt fo reid) fetn, tnenn bit 
iiidjt fo Dic(e ®cfd)dfte gcmadjt Ijdtteft Scnn ^Jeinrtd) ©e(b 
I)dtte, iDitrbe er btefe DJcefj'er faufcn. ^^) iDiirbe betnen ^x\u 
hzx bcfudjcn, iDcmt idj ^^^t I)dtte. S^u ii^itrbeft btefen §iinb 
nidjt fo fel)r Ueben, lucmt er nidjt fo treu indre. iBtr iDiirbeii 
bid) nid)t tabein, tx^enn bit fleiBtger gelijefen it)dreft. S^ein 
Ditfel fagte mir, bu tpiirbcft movgen tttdjt fommen, 25>e(d)eit 
t)oi: biefeit ©tocfeit luiirbeft bit ira^ten? S[Bem initrbet if}r 
cure ^lumen geben? SBa§ ii^ltrbeft bu fageu, ineuu id) mci* 
\m\ ^uub t)erfaufte? Q6) initrbe btr eriauben gu fpie(eu, 
incuu bu bciue ^ufgabcu gemad)t Ic^'^i^t S^iefe ^iuber iDiir^ 
bcu fe^r ineiucu, tnenn i()re 9}httter abgereift iDdre. S^eiu 
Skater iniirbe itu§ eine fd)one @ef(^id)te er3af)Ien, inenn lyir 
artiger gemefen iDciren* '^Btxm bu 3^^^ 3^ ^^f^rt f)dtteft, unirbe 
id) bir eiu niil^Iidieg ^ud) (eil)eu. Q6) iDltrbe geru mit bir 
gc^eu, aber lueiu 2el)rer iDill e§ uidit erlaubeu; x^ muj f)eute 
uod) brei ^riefe fd)reibeu. 

100. 

Louisa would be very (mucli) pleased, if she had all 
these flowers. Henry would not have so many friends, 
if he were not so kind (gut) and good (artig). We 
should not yet have (be) come, if we had not received 
a letter from our father. "VYe should not have sold our 
house, if my father had done more business (pi.) The 
master would blame thee, if thou hadst not done thy 
exercise. I should not believe it, if thou hadst not seen 
it. If we had an apple, we would share it. We should 
go with you, if we were not so tired. If I had some 
money, I sUould buy a pound of cherries. If you loved 
me, I should love you also. If you told me, where 
Mr. N. lives, I would give you a glass of wine. Would 
you believe that I have done this ? Would you do me 
this pleasure, if I allowed you to play this evening? 
I would do it willinglv, if I had time. 
101. 
?( u § a e I) en, to go out 
3cl} <^d)t aii5, I go out ; 



bu gcf))! axi§, thou gocst out 
er gc[)t axis, he goes out ; 
Xoix gc^en au§, we go out ; 
i{)r gcf)et au§, you go out ; 
fte Qci}cn an§, they go out. 
?[ufmad)en, to open ; abl'd^rciBcn, to copy ; 

jumad)cn, to shut ; mittl}cilcn, to communicate ; 

junu-ffd^tifen, to send back ; art,^icl)cn, to put on ; 
an(]ene()m, pleasant ; jdparj, black ; 

hk ^lad)xid)t, the news ; friUjer, earlier, sooner. 

Oijs. The compound verbs are tormed by the addition of a particle 
which modifies the sense of the simple verb, and which is detached 
from it in the Present and Imperfect tenses of the Indicative Mood. 
unless the sentence begins with a conjimction or a relative pronoun. 

Qd) ge^e :^eitte nidjt au^ ; ba§ Setter tft 311 fc^Iedjt. Tldn 
iBniber voiti audj md]t au5gel)en. Senn ba^3 Setter fdjoner 
tuare, initrben wiv gcrn au§gel)en» §etnrid), bu madjft nie 
bie 3;:()ure 3it> l^annft hn btefe ^ommobe aufmadjen? Qd) 
iimclje mein dimmer 31:, vomn id] auSgefjc. Qd) \d)idc ^'Ijnen 
bie[eu 5lbenb ba§ ^iidj ^nxM, irelcf)e§ @ie mir ge(ie!)eu 
l^alien. 93tem S3ctter fdjidte mir geftern ben ©tocf 3urucf, 
ben id) i^m gelieljen I)atte» (Sujretbft bn alle biefe ^rtefe ab? 
2)^u6t bn alle§ ba§ abfdjreiben? Qd) fdjreibe nur fo Diet ah, 
<i(3 id) iind. Qd) inlirbe bte[e ^nfgabe nod) abfdjreiben, tnenn 
uiein Celjrer e^3 mir crtanbte. S^) nntg ^D^ien etma^ mit^ 
tl)eilen. Sa§ molten ©ie mir mitt^citen ? Qd) t^eite ^^j^en 
cine angencl}me 9iadjrid)t mit, Sarnm ttjeitten ©ie mir ha^ 
nid)t friiljcr mit? Se(d}e^3 ^leib gicljft hn ^ente an? Qd) 
3iel)e metn fdjmar^e^ Itleib an nnb meine ©d)mefter mirb iljr 
meige^^ ^leib an^ieljen. So ift ba§ ^leib, metdjc§ ©ie an* 
§tel)en? §ier ift e§. 

102. 

S)tc ©c\rcl)nr)cit, the habit ; au\]id}m, to get up ; 
2)er (Spajiergancj, the walk ; \T)cggc()cu, to go away ; 
eincn Spajtcrgang madden, to take a walk. 

Do you not yet get up? No, I am indisposed; I sliall 
not get up to-day. You always get up very late, that is 
a bad liabit. I go away; I have much to do. I shall 
also go away. The weather is so fine, that I have a 
mind to take a walk. Shut the door, if you please. 
Open the window. Your brother always opens the door 
and the windows. Do you not go out to-day? I shall 
not ^p out to-da}^ My lather wishes (will) it not. My 



54 

brother goes out twice every day. I shall send you back 
your umbrella to-morrow. Send me also back the cane, 
which I have lent you. What is my son doing ? He 
copies the letters which you have written this morning. 
My uncle is arrived; I shall communicate to him the 
good news. Put on your new dress ; Mr. N. comes to 
see (visits) us to-dav. 

103. 

S'^ctrii gen, to deceive; g^rret^cn, to tear ; 

bclcibtgcn, to offend; irtaTten, to wait; 

I'^crlicrcn, to lose; rmwcnben, to employ; 

l^cr&cffcrn, to correct; ranicfgcbcn, to give back; 

I'crbictcn, to forbid; bie @efcl('!cl)aft, the company; 

crSjic{)cn, to bring up ; bic (Bcrgfalt, the care ; 

ai)altcn, to receive ; jcgtcirf), immediately, at once. 

Obs. The syllables Be, gc, cnt, cr, »er and jcr serve to form the 
derived verbs, and are not detached from the simple verb. 

S}ie[er ^^aufmann tft etn ^etriiger, er betriigt ^ebermartn. 
Man mu§ 9ciemanb betriigen. SSir bctriigen 5)(iemanb. T:n 
be(etbtgft mid) tmmer. ^eiu S3ctter bcleibtgte gefteni bie 
ganje @e[et(fc[iaft, SBarum beleibtgen (Ste bie[en DJiarin? 
Qd] crl}a(te i}mtt eiiien ^rtcf Don meinem grcunbc in £o(n. 
S3tr erl)a(teu alle S^age ))lad')Xid}t uon intferm S3ater, S'd) 
inerbe ntorgcn ©elb erl)attcn. !4^icfe STciitter er^tcljt i()re 
l^tnbcr mtt mkv ©orgfalt. SScnrt wiv roollen, ha^ imfere 
.finber gut iDcrben, mii[feu wiv fie mit *SorgfaIt erjie^en. 
2Ba§ fudjft bit, ^arl? -3^} I)abc mcincn 9^ing uerloren. SDit 
uerlterft tmmer etina^. ^omm, toiv mii[fen gcl)en, ii^ir fonneu 
nidjt Icinger luarten ; bii fannft ben 9^ing fpttter fnc^en, @el)en 
Bk nnr, id) !omme fogleidj ; id) iDcrbe ben 9^tng ftnbcn. 
333arnm gerreiBeft bn btcfcS papier? ®a§ "papier tft ntctn, 
id) !ann e§ gerreiBen, -3c^ uerbiete btr e§, e§ ^u 3erreiBen. 
Sttlft bn bie ©lite I)aben, mtr meine 5lnfgaben ju tierbcffern? 
©ein ^rnber t)erbefferte mtr tmmer mctne ^nfgaben, aU cr 
nod) {)ter iDar. SBann geben ®te mir metnen ^tetftift ^uritc! 
!I^eine-Q3ruber geben nte jitritdV wcS man t[)nen {eti)t. $i>enbc'i 
enre Qdt gut an. SJtan m\\^ feine Qc'it tmmer gut anipenben, 
104. 

I will not wait (any) longer. I lose my time. Shall 
you play to-day? No we shall not play, we always lose. 
You would not lose, if you played better. We should 
play better, if you played oftener If I receive my money 



65 

I shall play once more (noct) etmnal). Does your fatliei 
not forbid you to play? No, he does not forbid (it) us. 
This child is very naughty ; he tears his dresses. My 
neighbor brings up his children very badly. I do not 
like this young man; he always offends me. Henry 
corrects his exercise; he employs his time well. He 
who employs well his money, is wise (ineife). If you 
give me back my pencil, I shall give you back your pen. 
One must always give back, what is lent us (what one 
lends us). 

105. 
2BoI)nen, to dwell; getooI)nt, dwelfc, been dwelling; 

Bclctbigcn, to offend; Beteibigt, offended; 

aniucnben, to employ ; angeiDcubct, employed. 

Obs. The past Participle of simple verbs is formed by the addition 
of the initial syllable gc, and the final syllable et or t. In compound 
verbs ge is placed after the particle ; the derived verbs take only the 
final et or t. 

§aben ©ic 3'f)rc 5iufgabe fd)on DcrBeffert? ^c^ Ijabe fic 
noci) ntcfit lierBe[fcrt ; id) merbe fie fogtetd) t)crBef[enL SlV- 
^ruber l)at mid) gcftcnt beleibtgt; id) iviit md)t^ ntcljr mit 
il)m 3U tijun Ijaben ; tion Ijeute (an) tft er itiein greunb ntdjt 
tneljr. Sir woUcn cinen ©pajiergang jufammeu maiden. 
Qd) !amt in btefem S[ngenb(i(f e ntdjt au^ge^eit; id) ^abe biefen 
5J^crgen fdjou einen ©pa3tcrgang gemadjt. SSarum l^abett 
15k mir mcin gebcrme[fer nod) ntc^t ^uritdgcgeben ? 2Ber ^at 
bte 2:i}itre anfgcmad)t? Ser I)at Qfjmn bic[e 9^ad)rtd)t mit- 
getl}ci(t? Qljv ^atcr r)at un§ geftcrn cine artige @efd}td)te 
cr3dl)(t. Tlcim 9}2nttcr ^at mir erianbt, bie[en Ibenb nac^ 
^1, in ge^en. ©inb (Ste geftern ^ti meinem S5etter getrefen? 
Qa, \vk I)aben hzn ganjen S^ag bei i()m gefptett, ge(ad)t unb 
gctanjt. 5lbcr l)abt tl]r ani^ gearb-eitet? -3d) glanbe e§ nidjt; 
ber Seljrcr l]at bid) fd)on mef)rere ^lak getabelt, betne (Sd)inc* 
fter I)at e§ mir oft gefagt. Ser ^at end) biefen ^orb i!trf(^en 
gcfd)id"t ? §aft bu beinen !ran!en grennb nod) nidjt befud)t? 
Wldn OnM 1:)at ein neneS ^ferb geranft ; er ^at ba§ alte bcm 
^ntfd)er nnfer$ 9tad)bar5 fitr aifanjig S^f)a(er t)cr!auft. 

1C6. 

(Sinjtg^ single, only; nidjt mefjr, no more; ^ad)c, SDing, thing. 
Thou hast employed thy time very badly, my dear 
Henrv. I see that thou hast not done a single exercise 



56 

r have always praised thee, but I shall praise thee no 
more. Have you played together, my children ? Yes, 
mamma, -we have been playing and working. That is 
very well (out); I shall give you some cherries and 
plums. I wall divide them. We have divided them 
already. Why have you shut all (the) windows? The 
weather is so fine ; I shall open them. Who has copied 
these letters ? I believe that Henry has copied them, 
Have you been waiting long? We have waited (for) 
half an hour. Mr. N. has sent back the umbrella, which 
you had lent him. I have received a letter from my aunt 
which I have not yet opened. Your cousin is arrived ; 
he has told us (a) hundred things. One must not believe 
all that he tells. I have not believed all. 
107. 

X!m Jtt, iu order to, to ; 

urn jii loBen, in order to praise, to praise ; 

urn anjutuenben, in order to employ. ^ 
SBunfc^en, to wish ; abreijcn, to depart, set out ; gefdilig, obliging , 
fonbem, but (after a negative pbrase). 

Ohs. The preposition ju, whicli generally precedes tbe Infinitive, 
is placed in the compound verbs between the particle and the verb. 

Qd) fomme, itm btr 3U facjen, bag xdj morgett abreife. Qd) 
I)aBe tneincn ^ebicnten gefdjidt, urn mix ein ^funb ^udcv gu 
raitfen. Sir leben nicfjt, urn in effen, fonbern mir effen, itm 
3u ieben. Um glltdUd) ^u fetn, ntuB vxan ^ufrieben fein. Um 
{yreunbe gu fjabert, mu| man gefdlltg fetn. Sdj ^^^ ^^W- 
3ett, au§3ugef)en. §akn (Sie Me (3ntt^ bte[e ^wd ^rtefe 
ab3u[(^reiben. SBoIIen (Bk fo gut fein, bte Zfjixxt auf3U- 
mad)ml 2Btr l)abm Suft, eiuen fletnen (^pagiergang in 
mad)tn. ^}m '^ladjHv Ijat itod ^ferbe ^u tjerfaufen. SBer 
fjat btr eriaubt, fo frit!) ireg^ugeljcn? Q\t e§ nod) nid]t 3ett, 
auf3uftel)en ? Qdj ^abe ba5 S3ergnitgeti gel)abt, bett §erni 
2}ccU in fe:^en. Situfj^ett ©te ntit metnem ^ater 3U fprec!)cu? 
Qd) iDunfdjc mtt ^^rer grau SJZutter in fpredjen. §aben 
(gie @elb, um btefen ^tug gu faufen ? §aft bu 3^Jt, utir 
meiue ^lufgabe in t)erbefferu? §at betu S3ater btr biefe^ 
\3tth gcgeben, um c§ fo fd}(edjt au3uiiieubeu? 
108. 

Sa0 Unglucf, the misfortune ; ber ©cgcnftanb, the subject. 
It is no subject for laughter (in order to laugh). It is 
very difiicult. I have had the pleasure to dance vrith Miss 



67 

N. Mr. Nollet has had the kindness to lend me his 
iiorse. Do you wish to go out with me ? I have no time 
to go to N. We have much to do to-day. My brother has 
six letters to copy. I have good nevfs to communicate 
to you. Have the kindness to send me back my book 
It is time to set out. Which dress do you wish to put 
on ? AlloYf me to open the window, it is so warm. I 
•:im come to see, if you are well (iPoljl). I am very (much) 
indisposed; I have too much to do. You have the bad 
habit, to get up too late. A young man must get up 
earlier. My friend has had the misfortune to lose his 
parents. I come to bring you your boots. That is very 
^yell ({lui). I had no mind to v\^ait (any) longer. 

109. 

3ct) 'ii^crbe gcltclit, T am loved ; id) iinirbc gclicBt, I was loved , 
bii wirft gelicbt, bu wurbcft o,dkht, 

cr wirb gclicbt, cr tinirbc gcliebt, 

Wix wcvtcn gch'cBt, linr iinirbcn gclicBt, 

il)r wcrbet gcliebt, ii}x tmirbct gcliebt, 

fie wcrbcn gcliebt, fie tuurbcn gcliebt. 

ScIot)ncn, to reward ; ftrafen, to punish ; acl)ten, to esteem ; i.uTad}ten, 
to desi^ise ; gefcf}ic!t, clever ; imiDi)7enb, ignorant. 

Obs. The verb iretben constructed with the past participle formg 
the passive voice. Thus the verb to be is translated by iucrbcrt, when 
the subject is sensible of a certain action; and by fctil, when he finds 
himself in a certaiu condition. I am paid in the sense of: they pay 
nie, is expressed by: id) ipcvbe be^at;lt; but in the sense of: they have 
paid me, it is expressed by: id) bill bcja^lt. 

3(i) inerbe t^oit mctncm ^ater geloM, incmt idj ffetgicj unb 
artit] bin. !^u iDirft t)on betnem i^cljrer gctabctt, ineil bu 
iinmer faut btft. §einrid) inirb oeftraft, Wtii er unarttt] ift. 
SJe(d}er d^lami intrb cjctobt itnb rjeldjer mirb getabelt ? '2:cr 
nefdjicfte Wilann unrb getobt unb ber nmpiffenbe getabe(t. 
2^1>e(d)e Unaben inerben be(oI)nt unb Xdtldjt iDcrben geftraft ? 
^^iejcnigen, wddjc fletStg finb, iDcrben beloljnt, unb bte, voddjt 
fan! finb, geftraft. 33ir iDcrben uon unfern (SItern geliebt; 
;i}r inerbct t)on ben eurigen gctabelt. Mmxz ^rliber iDerben 
uon ^'sbermann geadjtet. Sir merbcn t)on unfern geinbcn 
Deradjtet. 2Birb btefeS ^inb nie gcftraft ? S)on teem tnerbet 
il}r gelobt? ®eine Sdjipcfter wixh mn i^rer 3}?ntter getnbelt, 
iDcil fie nicfjt arbeitet. 3d) iintrbe immer mn metnem Sefjrer 
gcUebt imb gelobt, tveil id; ftet^tg unb arttg Yoav, §etnric5 



58 

iDiirbc iimncu ton [ctncui 53atcr G^ftvaft, inciiu cr nidjt nr- 
bcitctc. 

110. 

3cJ) Bin gclicBt ircrbcn, I bare "been loved ; 

bu bift gclicbt ivcrbcn, 

cr ift c\dkbt.\voxhax, 

\x>ix finb gcltcbt toorben, 

i^r fcib gclicbt inorben, 

fie finb geliebt ii^orben. 
5cbtcn, to kill ; cr[unben, invented ; cntbccft, discovered ; bie 3)tui)e, 
the trouble, pains ; ha§ ^^^uber, gunpowder ; metjrere, several. 

-3d} inn t)on inctnem ^citer geftraft inorben, iDcil id) biefe 
:53rtcie nidjt abgcfdjrieben I)abe. !4}u bift t)on bcinem Onfel 
bcloljnt inorbcn, meit bu feine lU)r gcfunben {)aft §einric^ 
ift fiir feine 9}^ii[)e md)t betoljnt iDorben. S^iefe ))lad)xid)t ift 
im§ bitrd) §errn SJlod mitget^eilt tnorben. 53on tnem ift 
biefe Sliifgabe tierbeffert iDorben'? SBir finb t)on bicfem DJIcn^ 
fdjen me()rere 9}?a(e beleibigt tt)orben, !l:iefe |)erren finb 
geftern in ber ©efellfdjaft fel)r gctabett tDorben. Siefe§ ^inb 
ift Don feiner DJtntter geit)afd}en iDorben. (5§ ift mir gefagt 
morben, bag (Bit cinen ^ebienten fnc^ten* ^on tDent finb 
biefe ^inber gefdjicft .trorben? S^iefe §dufer finb geftern 
al(e t)er!anft iDorben. Sir finb oft t>on nnferm Ce^rer ge^ 
lobt iDorben, ineit wiv imraer nnfere ^Infgaben mac^ten. 
@nftat) 5Ibolp!) ift bei Sit^^en getobtet morben. ^a§ ^]3u(oer 
ift t)on .^ert^olb ©djmarj crfnnben iporben. 5lmcrifa ift uon 
do(nmbn§ entbedt JDorben. 

111. 

(Bid) fvcnen, to rejoice. 

Sd) freuc mid), I rejoice ; Sd) i^a^Q mid) gefrcut, I Lave rejoiced ; 

bu freuft bid), bu f)aft hid) gcfreut, 

cr freut fid), cr I)at fid) gcfreut, 

ttjir freuen ung, \m ijaben ung gefrcnt, 

i{)r frcuet cud), iijx ijabt cud) gefreut, 

fie freuen fid). fie I)aben fid) gcfreut. 

eici) irren, to be mistaken ; fid) Befinbcn, to be, to do ; fid) irunbern, to 
be astonished ; fid) anfleibcn, to dress (one's-self ) ; fid) untcrl)alteu, to 
be amused ; banfcn, to tliank ; jweifcln, to doubt ; iincberfcl)cn, to see 
again ; feltcn, seldom ; auf, on, upon. 

®nten ^ag, (ieber §einrid). S^^^) fi'i^^^c ^n'^^}^ ^^ i^^c* 
ber3nfe(}en. SBie ge(}t eo? Sie befinbeft bn bid)? S^ 
hank bir, id) befinbe mid) fcl)r moijt, fcit id) anf bem Sanbe 
roofine. Sa§ mad)t betn -^rnber? Q]t criuol)!? Qa, tx 



59 

bcfinbct fidj fel)r tDoI}(. ©a§ tl)u[t bu, ^ublxng? ^ci) fleibe 
mid} an. ^teibet 3^'-' cud} nod) ntdjt an ? ^ir irerben nn§ 
fpciter anfktben. §abcn (Bk fid) fdjon geinafdjen, ^enriette? 
3d) f)abe mid) nod) nid)t genia[d)en, aber meine <Bd)\vt\kv l)at 
fic^ fd)on geniafd)en. 3ft ^^^ i^^ut ^vnber, ber ba mit bem 
ijcrrn 9L !ommt ? Sie irren fid), e6 ift nid)t Qljv ^rnber, 
3d) glaube nid)t, bag id) mid) irre. 3d) irre mic^ fetten. 3d) 
Ijabe mid) nod) nie gcirrt Sir geljen biefen 5lbenb na(^ 91. 
3d) aiDcifIc nid)t, ha^ tnir nnS gut unterf)alten tnerben. 2Bic 
f)aben @ie fid) geftern in bem (Concert unkxl)altml ©ef)r gut, 
|)crr 9h I)at fc{)r gut gefpielt. 3^ ixmnbere mid), bag (gic 
nid)t ba traren. 3d) ^atte noc^ ^ie(e§ 3U tf)un; id) bjabe bis 
3e{)n lU)r gcarbeitet. 

112. 
Art thou not yet dressed, Charles ? I shall dress my- 
self at present. Why hast thou not yet dressed thy- 
self? I had still two exercises to do. I rejoice to see, 
that thou art so diligent. I love him, who rejoices 
when his friend is praised. I saw your brother yester- 
day. You are mistaken ; my brother is no longer here. 
I am not mistaken, I have seen him with his friend Fer- 
dinand. Why have you not w^ashed yourself? I should 
have w^ashed myself, if I had had any water. We were 
in the country yesterday; we have been very much 
amused. How does your sister do ? She is very well, 
since she has been (is) with her uncle. And how have 
you been, since I saw you ? I have been very well. I 
am astonished that you are not yet departed. I shall 
set out this evening. 

113. 

(Ss rccjnct, it rains; eg frcut mid), I am glad, happy; 

eg ld}neit, it snows ; eg t^ut mix Icib, I am sorry ; 

eg Wgclt, it hails ; eg ift mix fait, I am cold ; 

eg bli|.t, it lightens ; eg ift mix tvcirm, I am warm ; 

eg bonnert, it thunders ; eg fjimgert mid), I am hungry ; 
eg friert, it freezes ; eg turftet mid), I am thirsty. 

^c[e{)len, to command ; fcleiben, to stay ; ertoarten, to expect ; ju 
lJ?vit';ag effert, to dine ; lefccix (£ie ti^cf)(, fare-well, adieu. 

9iegnet e§? 9cein, e§ regnet nid)t. (SS regnete, aU id) 
gelommen bin. (S'§ I)at bie ganje 9lad)t geregnet. Ss inirb 
morgen geipi^ regnen. 3d) ghiube, bag e§ fd)neit. §at e§ 
gefd)neit? SBenn e§ fdineitc, iriirbe e§ nic§t regnen. (S^ mxb 



60 

Dicfe DIadjt frieren, bcun co i\t fel)r !a(r. Qd) mug Quggclien, 
abcr c§ fjagelt, role id) feljc. Wdv ift feljr inarm ; e§ bli^t, 
fogtcidj urlrb c§ bonnern. Sir tnoKen nad) §f^i^^^ gefjen. d^ 
frcut mid), bog id) (Sie fiube; abcr e^3 t[)ut mir leib, bag id] 
nid)t mit SDi'^^i^ 9^^^^ !ann» [Dlein Onfel ift geftern Slbenb 
angciommen imb ii3unfd)t, bag iDir I)cute bei il)m ^u 2}cittag 
effcm §^^^-*^^ ^'^^ md)t^ 5it trtnt'en, mid) hnx]kt fel)r. Sim* 
fdicn Sie cin @(a§ ^ier ober 2Ba[fcr ? (Sie I)abcn mtr 311 be* 
fcijlen; Ijicr ift, tx)a§ 'Bk umnfd)cn. 5(ber mid) f)migert aud); 
geben (Ste mir ein (Bind Bdjinkn unb cin menig -^rob, Bk 
ijahm ba fd)one ^irncn imb ^pamticn. (S§ gie'bt biefeS S^^)'^ 
Did £}b)t Solkti Bk I)citte bci un§ bfciben ? -3dj ^^^^^'^ 
3f)ncn, id) I)abe meincm 33cttcr t)crfprod)en, l)eutc mit if)m 
nad) B, 311 gefjcn; er ir-irb mid) gcinig fd)on erlDartcn. £^cbcn 
Bk liioI)L 

114. 

23a§ far SBctter i]t ce ? What kind of weatlier is it. 
AYhat sort of weather is it ? It is bad weather ; it is 
raining (it rains). It did not rain when you came. It 
will rain the whole day. It has been raining this morn- 
ing. Does is snow ? ISTo, it does not snow. It would 
snow, if it were colder. I believe that it freezes. The 
weather is finer to-da}^ ; it is warm. I am very warm. 
It has lightened ; it will thunder later. I am sorry that 
you did not come sooner. Art thou hungry? Yes, I 
am hungry and thirsty. I have taken (made) a long 
walk. I shall drink a 'glass of wine, if you (will) allow 
it. My sister will be happy to see you again. She has 
often spoken of you to me. Will your nephew come 
also? I doubt whether he Avill come (comes). He has 
too much to do. 

115. 

SQk ind ll^T ift es ? What o'clock is it ? 

c§ i^ icd)§ ilbx ; it is six o'clock ; 

cS ift i)alb fieben ; it is half past six ; 

c§ i\i ein 93tertet auf fteBcn ; it is a quarter past six. 

5(u|ilcf)cn/ to get up ; fd}la[en gcijcn, to go to bed ; au§xui)m, to repose: 
jpajicrcn, jpa^ieren gcfjen, to go to Avalk ; ju Slbenb e[]en, to sup. 

Um une uici Uf)r ftcljen ^ie geli)of)nIid) auf ? ^d) ftcljc 
iebcn DJtorgen um fcd)§ U[)r auf unb gcl)c nm 3cf)n U^r 
ld)Iafen, ^inb Bk fpa3iercn gcpocfen ? ^a^ ^^) V^^ ^^i^^ 
gtunbe in bcm Salbe fpa^icrt. ^dj bin fc[)r mitbc, id) 



61 

linll cut wcnlo, nu^rnljcn. SBie Diet UI)i ift e§? (S6 ift ad}\ 
lXi)v; cu ift nod) ntcfjt l)alb mnn, Um \vk Diet lU)r finb (£ie 
augefommcn? S'^ ^^^^ i^^i^ c^^i SSiertel auf fed}§ augefommcn. 
?jtetne (2d]Utefter ift um brei 23iertel auf adjt abgereift SCie 
lawQC bleibeu ©ie I)ier? ^i^j irerbe uur 3U)ei bi^ brei Zac\t 
bleibeu. Um \vk ml lU)r effeu mir ^u 3}tittag? Qd) glaube 
itm 5U3oIf U^r obcr um ^Ib ein^3. Um brei UI)r triufeu uur 
^rcaffce uub um fieben Ul]r effeu wiv ju "^ihmh, 

116. 

3aT)lrcici), numerous; yor, before; nad) «§au[c, home. 

Have the kindness to tell me what o'clock it is. It is 
not yet eleven o'clock; it is half past ten. I must depart 
at twelve o'clock, or at half past twelve. Have you al- 
ready dined? ISTo, I shall dine w^ith my cousin; we dine 
generally at two o'clock. At what o'clock do you sup? 
I shall sup at nine o'clock. Have you a mind to walk 
a little ? If it does not rain, I w^ill walk a little with you. 
It is fine weather ; we will go to 'N., we shall find there 
a numerous party (@cfel(fd)aft). Are you already tired? 
I am very tired ; it is too warm. If you allow (it) I will 
repose a little. Get up ; it is time to go home. I must 
go to bed before ten o'clock, in order to get up to-morrow 
at five o'clock. 

117. 

Ace. Dat. Bat. and Ace. 

%\\X, for; au§, out of; art, at, of; 

burd), hx, tlirough; mit, -^ith; auf, upon, on ; 

ol)nc, "without; iiad), to, after ; in, in, into; 

gcgcn, to, towards, against ; l^cn, from ; untcr, under. 

Svtcbrtd), Frederick; bcr 9}taTft, tlie market; bcr SBtUctt, the will; fcct 
JUUev, the cellar; bie ilxic^c, the kitchen; Viz ^ird)c, the church; Icgcn, 
to put, lay; filjcn, to sit ; bcnfcn, to think ; iDc, where; VDoIjin, where 
to ; vcc^cr, where from. 

Ohs. The propositions an, m], in, untcr, govern the Accusative, 
when the verb of the phrase denotes a movement or a direction to- 
-vards an object; and the Dative, when it does not express this 
movement. 

gitr lueu finb biefc ^iidjcr? 5^-icfc§ ift fitr mid] uub jcuc^ 
ift fiir mciuc (^djUU'fter. ST^o ift bcr juuge 9j2auu, fiir bcu 
8ie n((e bicfe (2ad}cu gefauft [jabeu? ©urdj lueldjc ^trage 
miiffcu unr ocljcu, um auf bcu WioaU i\\ fommcu? S^urc^ 



62 

bte griebncljC^ftraf3C obci* bie SUTjcImSftra^c? ©efieu (Sie 
ofjHc Diegcnfdjtrm aii^3? (2<3 inivb fogleicl) regneit. 2Ba§ ift 
ba^o ?cbcu oijue cinen greunb? S^) ^^-i^^ oI)ne bid) ntdjt 
(cbciu S^it bift gegcn ben SSiKcn bcine§ 33ater§ ait^gegangcn, 
ilBannn ift bcin ^ntbcr immcr gegen mid}? Soljer fommfl 
bit? 3d} fomme nom (Spa3iert3ange, au§ bcr cSd}uIe, ait^ ber 
Kird}e. '^k ))MaQt} fommt au§ bcm teller, ait^3 bem ©artcn, 
any bcr fcltc^e. DJcit luein fcib i(}r auSgegangen? dTdt bcm 
£ntd, mit ber 5;;ante, mit S^ji^f^i^- ^lacf) bem (Effen gcl}en 
iinr ait§. 2i>ann fommen (Sie juritd? ^ommcn (Sic Dor 
ober iiad) mi§ ^m'ud? SSir inerben iiac^ Q^mn gmiicf^ 
fommcn. 2Bo ift mcine ®d}iDcfter? ®ie ift in bcr llirc^e, 
in bcm ©arten, onf bcm 3}car!te. SBof)in ficl}t bcine S^cutter? 
(Sie gel}t in bie ^iic^e, in ben ll^eflcr, auf ben d^laxit So^in 
]^aft bn mein ^nd) gelcgt? Sd] ^^^^ ^^ "^^^f ben S^ifc^, nnter 
ben (Stnt)( gelegt. SSo ift bie Keine Sonife? (Sie fi^t auf 
bem @tnl}Ie, untcr bem 3:^ifd}e, an ber Xf)nxt, (gd}reiben Sie 
an S1:)xm 55etter ober an Si]^x ^afe? 5{n inen benfen (Sic? 
3^ benfe an bie arme gran, tDcldjc id} geftern bei Sfy'^^^ 
gcfel}cn I}abe. 

118. 

^et (Sd}ranf, the closet ; unbanfbvir, ungrateful. 
This is for me, that is for you. He who is not for me, 
is against me. I cannot do this without him, -without 
her, without you. I shall arrive before 3^ou; you will 
arrive after me. You are ungrateful towards us. I al- 
ways think of 3^ou, hut you never think of me. There is 
thy little sister ; hast thou nothing for her ? You do not 
love my brother, you are always against him. Where 
is your son ? This fruit and these flowers are for him. 
Where have you been? We have been at (in the) 
church and at (in the) schooL Where are you going? 
We are going into the garden, to (on the) market, into 
the kitchen. Where do these children come from? They 
come from the public walk (^pajiergang), from church, 
from the garden. Where have you put my stockings 
and shoes ? I have put them on your chair, on the 
table, in the closet. Have you seen my brother? I 
have seen him at the public walk, in the garden, at the 
door. I write to my uncle and aunt. "\7e often speak 
of him and of her. 



63 
119. 

3m instead of in bcm; nm instead of an bem; 

ing in bag ; an§ an bag ; 

jum ju bem ; ijcm i^on bem , 

jur ju ber ; unterm unter bem* 

5)ag i^euer, the fire ; \id) fieHcn, to place one's-self, to stand. 

Obs. The quickness of the pronunciation has introduced the custom 
of contracting the definite article with certain prepositions. 

5Die DJMgb ift tm teller ober tm ®arten. SKtr ge^en biefeii 
llbcnb inS Z^catcv ober m§ (Concert ©djttfen @te ben ^c^ 
bientcn ^itm (gdjuljmac^er ober gum (Sdjneiber ? @el}en tr»ir 
Ijeute gitr STante ober bleiben linr gu §aufe? SSaren @te 
geftent bei bem 3}^inifter? £ommen ©ie gu mtr ober gu 
metnem iBruber? SSarmn fit^en @te immer betm gener? 
3ft 3^uen fo Mil SKaS ^aben @te am Sluge, amgu^e? 
Sarmn tragen ^ie eine geber am§ute? ©teilett (Sie fid) 
an bte 3^I)iire ober an§ genftcr. §aben (Bk btefe iBtmne Dom 
©cirtner erijaltcn? (Bk arbeiten oom SJZorgen bi§ gum Slbenb. 
SSa^ madjen ©te unterm S^ifdje? -3d} fi^Sje meine ^tetfeber. 
^arl Ijat fie {n§ 'edjreibgeug getcgt. 
120. 

SBolicn, of what ; bafcn, of that, of it ; 

ircmit, with what^. bamit, with that, with it 

Wo^u, for what ; bajn, for that, for it ; 

\rcran, at what; baran, at that, at it; 

ircrin. in what ; bavin, in that, in it ; 

nicburd), hj what ; baburd), by that, by it. 

^crab, f^inab, down ; 
Ijcrauf, ^inauf, up ; 
therein, tjinein, in. 
93rancT)en, to use; gefvtod)cn, spoken ; gcbadjt, tlionght; gtng,went; ftcl, 
fell ; t)a§ Matikx, the piano. 

Obs. 1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined 
with the adverbs \VG, ha, f)cr and f)in. If, in the formation of these 
words, two vowels meet, an r is inserted, to avoid the hiatus. 2. ^tv 
denotes a movement towards the person speaking ; ^in a movement 
from the speaker. 

2Bot)on fpredjen (Sie? -3ft ^tc§ ba§ iBudj, n30t)on 8ie 
fpredjen? SSomit I)aben ^ie ba§ gcmadjt? .3ft ^^^ ^k 
geber, momit Bk biefen ^ricf gefdjrieben tjaben? SBogn 
braudjen @ie ba§? 2i}oran benfen (Ste benn? .3ft ^ft§ ba^ 
§au§, iDorin -3I)r Onfet lr)of)nt, bte @tabt, inoburd) Bk ge* 
fonmten finb? ipat man Don metnem Ungliicf gefprodjen? 
3a, man {)at bauon gefprodjen. §abcn Bk an meine Badjc 



64 

f|cbad}t ? Diciii, icf) (jalu nicljt baran gebac[)t. 'etnb Sie mil 
3[)rem iicitcn .^itauier ^ufrieben? 9ccin, icfj bin nicfjt 3111'nebcn 
bamit. 3ft nod) S}ein in bcr glafdje? Dccin, c3 ift fetner 
me^r bariiL ^^Ic mi Glicn muffen @ie 311 etnem nciten $}^ocfe 
l^abcn? Qd) mit^ bret imb cine ^albe (Sde ba3U Ijaben. 
i^ommen @ie I)eraiif. ©eljcn (Sie ^umb, f)tinmter. SBarmn 
fommen (^te nidjt f)crein? SBarmn gcf}cn Sie ntdjt I}tncin? 
!l)er l^uabe gincj gu nal)' an§ 3Ba[fer imb fic( I)tncin. Serben 
(Bk bte[en ^Ibenb tn§ 2;f)eatcr gei)en? Sir ii^erben nicfjt Ijtii; 
gcfjcn, abcr ^cinrici) itnb ^var( oeljcu l)in. 
121, 

23ttten, to beg, to ask; ber ^rieg, the ^ar; ba§ ^c^aufvtcf, tlie play. 
Do you knovr of what I speak, of what I thmk? That 
is not the same street, through which we came (are 
come) this morning, the same house where we were 
yesterday. Do you speak of (the) war ? Yes, we speak 
of it. Do you think of the concert ? We do not think 
of it. Are you pleased with this ring? I am very 
(m.uch) pleased wdth it. Why do you not coQie up? 
Tell your brother that I am coming down directly. 
Come in, my friends. I beg you to come in. Do you 
go to the play this evening ? We shall not go there. 
Do you know, where this gentleman lives, where he goes 
to, and where he is? We do not know it. 
^ 122. 
^a 3:'ijcO, tlio table ; ba§ ^■i[d}d)cn, the little table. 
©ie 2'auBe, the pigeon ; vfl^i-injen, to plant; cben, jo cbcn, just now-, 
just. 

Obs. Diminutives are formed by adding the syllable d)cn, and 
softening the radical vowel. If the primitive word ends in e or en, 
this termination is omitted. 

^malie Ijat t()r ^iitcfjen berloren. 2Bir Ijaben bret Ijiibfdjc 
^^ditmdjen geppatiigt. Sent geb;ort biefeS arttge ©artc^cn ? 
Sie Dte{ f)aft bn fitr btefcS 2;;dubd)en begaljlt? Soljtn .i]el}en 
bicfe §errd)en? ^omm, 2oitt§d)en, inir iDodcn gn ber 3:antc 
ge()en, fie I)at etn neneS Uti^djen nnb cin neueS gitnbdjen. 
^d) f)abe ebcn ein -53ricfd)en uon nteiner (gdjincftcr erl^altcn, 
iportn fie mid) intkt, il)r ein 9}|efferdjen unb ein ^offeldjcn gn 
hnfen. Sd) ^^^^ii ^'^d)t artig fein, 9}|itttcrdjcn, roenn bn mir 
ein neneS ^(eibdjen !anfft. ■Trage bicfc^S Xijcljdjcn in ben 
Garten, §enriette, unr liioilcn ein etiinbdjcn barin arbcitcn. 



65 

Selcf)c<5 :r:orfc[jcn fclje i^ ba imten tm ^albe? SSeldjc^ 
^inb l]at bic[e @cfjuf)d)en uedorcn? grtebrid) Ijat cut arttge^ 
23ooe(cf]cn mm ©drtncr erljalten. S3ent geljoreit alle bic[c 
SUimcfjcn? So tft bein ©cIjUKftercIjen, 3'of)Q^^^'^'? 
123. 

iJlotI)i9 f)a'6cn, to want; jicf) fcf}amcn, to be ashan:ecl of; Ipfkt^en; to 
nse, to be in the habit of; fd)lafrtg, sleepy ; Siirft ^a&cn, to be thirsty; 
bcr ©^.Htjtcrgang, the walk, the public Avalk ; jcl;cinen, to shine ; fru^^ 
aarly ; jpdt, late ; id) mbd)t^, I should like. 

^euirtd], I)aft bu Suft, ehten (Spa3terc5aitg mit mir ^u ma^ 
djcn'? 3d) fj^^e i'ctne iOuft, jc^^t au§3ugel)en. S^) ^i^ fcfjldf=* 
rig. (Sdjdmft bu btdj nidjt, fo fan! gu fein? ^omm, iDtr 
inollen in ben ©artcn nieinc§ Dn!el5 geljen. Sie t)ie( lUjr 
ifteS? (S§ ift erft fed}§ llijv, bie ®onne fc^eint nodj. ®u 
I)Qft ^icdjt, e§ ift nodj frni), id; luill mit bir gcf)cn. 3d) ^-'^P^ge 
jeben SIbenb einen (^pajiergang 3U ntadjen, el)e id) gn ^ette 
gcf)e. ©a§ ift eine gitte @en30^nl)cit. (S§ ift mir aber fe()r 
tpann; inir gc^cn gn gefdjtninbe. 3dj ^)ci^<^ G^'o^^J^ S^urfr, 
id) modjte einma( trinfcn. SSenn man Wavm ift, muj3 man 
nidjt trinfcn. Qii) Ijabe notljig, ein incnig an§3nrul)cn; id] bin 
fo miibc, ba^ id) widjt mcljr fort !ann. !^u mnjt einen fau 
genb(i(f ©ebulb Ijabcn. ilomm, i^ fitrdjte gn fpdt nad) 
cganfc jn !ommen. 

124. 

To have patience, ©cbiilb I)a'6cn; to fear, furcf)tcn; to be hard- 
hearted, ^artl)erjig fein ; to have the head-ache, jvcvfiucf) Ijatcn ; to 
take pains, fid) bemiifjcn; the moment, bcr SUigcnblic! ; some pretext, 
ein 23crinanb, (masc.) ; directly, fcglctd) ; the advice, hex diatl). 

How, you are still in bed ? Are you not ashamed, to 
sleep so long ? I should be ashamed to get np so late. 
I cannot get up to-day, I have the head-ache. You are 
a little idler (^auden^er). When you must go to school, 
you always look for some pretext. You are in the 
habit of going to bed early and getting up late. That 
is a bad habit. I beg you, to have patience (for) a 
moment. I shall get up directly. I have no mind, to 
^Yait (any) longer. I fear to come to church too late. 
You are very hard-hearted ; you have no pity for a poor 
patient (bcr ^ranfc). You are not ill; you have no mind 
to go to school. You are right my friend ; I shall take 
pains to get rid of this fault (biefcn gcfjlcr ab^nlegcn) and 
to follow 3'our good advice. 



125. 

©lau'&en, to believe, 
I believe tliat it is already late. We do not believe 
it. Keither does my brother believe it. Do you believe 
it ? I do not believe it. If I did believe it, you would 
laugji. I have never believed this. Who would have 
believed that ? I should believe it, if you told me so 
(it me). It is an incredible thing. You would believe 
it indeed, if you saw it. These gentlemen do not be- 
lieVe it. How will you have me (that I should) be- 
lieve it ? Your brother believed every thing that was 
told him (all that one told him) ; he was too credulous. 
He would not believe it, if he knew you. 

Keitlier, aud) lii^t ; laugh, ki^^en; would have, l^atte; incredible, 
imglciubltd) ; indeed, it»ci>t; saw, fe^cn; credulous, (etcl;tgldxibig ; 
knew, lounte. 

126. 
(Bag,m, to say, to tell. 
I have something to tell you. AYhat have you to say 
to me ? I tell you nothing. Tell (it) me only. I shall 
tell you another time. You will not tell my brother, 
what I have written to you ? Do not tell him, that I 
am still in bed. AYhat has he told you ? Have I not 
told it you ? You have not yet told (it) me. Do you 
wish (will you) me to (that I) tell it ? One must not 
tell everything that one knows. He has told it me in 
a whisper. Your uncle told me yesterday, that he 
would sell his house. What do you say to that? I 
would tell you with pleasure, if I knew it. If I said 
otherwise, I should lie. 

Only, nut; knows, \feif; in a whisper, inS £)I)r; if I knew, Irenn 
id;tr>u^te: otherwise, anl^erl ; lie, liigen. 

127. 

28unfd)ett, to wish ; f)C^m, to hope. 
I Avish, that your enterprise may succeed. We often 
wish (for) things, which are hurtful to us. I should 
wish to be able to serve you. I hope that our friend 
will obtain the situation that he wishes (to get). She 
did hope to win her law-suit, but she was mistaken. 
My cousin has nothing more to hope. We hope every- 
thing of Providence. My sister hopes, that you will do 
U'hat you have promised her. Never wish jfor) what 



67 

jou cannot have. What do you wish? (For) what do 
you hope ? I believe that my father will arrive to-day 
We must hope it. These gentlemen wish that we 
should depart. Does your sister wish to go with us? 

May succeed, gclingcn; Imrtfal, [d)dbud} ; to be able, fonncn; to 
serve, btcncrt, niV^Ud) fein; obtain, er()alten ; sitnation, ©telle (fern.); 
'svin, (^eunnncn: lav,^-suit, ^^roje^; Providence. S3oxjeI)ung (fem.) ; for 
-^]iat, iuovauf. 

128. 

Sd}rctBcn; to Avrite ; id) fd)ttcB, I wrote; gc[d}rtcbcn, written; 

Icicn, to read ; ki) ia§, I read ; gcle]cn, read. 

I am writing a letter to my brother. My mother 
will vrrite to him to-morrow. You wrote better for- 
merly. What have you written to him ? Have you not 
yet written to him, that our friend Henry is dead? 
Write that to him. If I had a good pen, I should 
write also. You write too fast; write more slowly. 
Show me what yea have written. You must write 
once more. What do you read? I read an amusing 
book. Wliat didst thou read yesterday, when thou wast 
with thy uncle? I read the fables of Gellert, which 
are very well written. We should read oftener if we 
had more time. How must we (one) read this word? 
Remember well, what you have read. Would you like 
(will you) me to (that I should) read this letter to you ? 
I should like to know how to read like you. 

Formerly, fru()er, fonjl; fast, fc^ncU; slowly, lartgfam ; show, jct'gcn; 
once more, nod) einmal; amusing, iinteTt)altcnb ; fable, %ahci (fern.); 
remember, bel)alten; I should like to know how, i^ mod}te fonrten; 
like, tine. 

129. 
©e'f)crt, to see ; id) faf), I saw ; gcfcfjcn, seen ; 

fcnncn, to know ; id) fannte, I knew ; gefannt, known. 

What do I see? Do you not see it? I see nothing. 
But do look. It is well worth the trouble to see it. I 
saw your cousin yesterday. Have you not seen him? 
Do you see how I do this ? Your cousin does not see 
me. If I saw my friend, I should tell him that you are 
here. Would you like (will you) me to (that I) bring 
(a) light; or can you^ee still? I have seen Mr. IST. to- 
day. Does he know me ? I believe that he knows you. 
He has greeted me. Have you also known my uncle? 
Have you not told me that ^^ou knew him? I should 



know him again if I saw liim. Your brotlier has 
recognized me by my voice. These children do not 
know me (any) more. 

Do look, fcf}cn (iic tccl) ciumat; ^vcll worth the trouble, tticfjt btn 
?Di{iI)e Wcxti) ; to greet, gri'i^en ; to know agaia, to recognize, tcicbct 
cvfcnncn; bj the voice, an icx ^tinimc. 

130. 

@cl}en, to go ; ic^ girtg, I went ; gegangen, gone ; 
trcggetjcit, to go away ; augge^cn, to go out. 

lYhere are you going? I am going to my aunt, and 
my brother goes to schooL Where did you go this morn- 
ing with your cousin? We went to church. I shoukl 
willingly go to walk, if you would go with me. I shall 
go with you, but do not go so fast. Where is your sis- 
ter? She is gone to see her uncle. We should have gone 
together if I had had time. Shall you not go to N. to- 
morrow? My father does not wish (will not) me to (that) 
I should go there. I go away. Do you go away already? 
Henry does not yet go away. yfilli3.m is already gone 
away. Go away. I must go away. I believe that your 
friends are gone away already. At what o'clock do 
you go out? I go out every morning at seven o'clock. 
And at what o'clock dost thou go out? I went out 
yesterday at six o'clock. Is your brother already gone 
out? To-morrow I shall go out early. I must go out 
at half past one. My mother did not wish (would 
not) that I should go out (went out). 

To go to walk, fpajicrcn gcfjcn ; to go to see any one, ju Scnicinbcm 
geljcn. 

131. 

£ommcn, to come ; id) fam, I came ; gcfcmmcn, come ; 

juviicffomiueu, to come back ; aufcmmen, to arrive. 

Whence do you come so late? We come out of the 
garden. Eliza does not come to-day ; she is gone into 
the country with her father. Come to see me this af- 
ternoon. It is possible that I may come. I should 
wish that you came early. Formerly you came every 
day. I should come oftener if I had not so much to 
do. My brother is not yet come back. He will come 
back this evening. My uncle does not come back (any) 
more. We saw your uncle, when we came back from 
the country. At what o'clock does the post arrive ? I 



69 

(jelieve it arrives at three o'clock. Yesterday it came 
very late. Formerly it arrived at two o'clock. My 
sisters will arrive to-day from Liege. 

Eliza, ©tie; to come to see, bcfuc^cn; afternoon, S^ad)mtttag- pos- 
sible, moglid); evening, $lbcnb ; the post bte ^o]t; Liege, £utticy. 
132. 
Srinfcn, to drink ; id) tranf, I drank ; gctrunfen, drunk ; austrtnfcn, 
fe) finish (a glass, a cup, &c.) ; e[]cn, to eat ; id) ap, I ate ; gegc[|cn, 
aten ; ju SJiittag c[)cn, to dine. 

Have you nothing to drink. I drink no wine. We 
drink only water, and my brother drinks beer. You do 
not drink. I have the honor to drink your health. 
When I was young, I drunk nothing but (only) milk. 
This gentleman has drank a little too much. He does 
not eat much, but he drinks much. Who has drunk 
out of my glass ? I will drink no more. We will drink 
another glass. The wine which we drank yesterday 
was so good, that every one drank a bottle. Finish 
your glass. Y^ou have not yet finished your glass. 
Drink again. Have you no appetite? Eat a little ham. 
I have eaten enough, I have no more appetite. You 
will eat another piece of meat. This child eats the whole 
day. We ate some days ago (some) delicious fish. At 
what o'clock do you dine ? I dine generally at two 
o'clock, but to-day I dine at four o'clock. After dinner 
I drink a cup of cofiee and then I go out to walk. 

To your health, auf il)re ®cfunbf)ett; the honor, bie @§re; another 
glass, ncd) ein ®laS ; every one, 3eber; again, nod) einmal; the appe- 
tite, bcr Slppettt; some days ago, i)or etntgen JX^agen ; delicious fish, 
fcftlid}e %i\d)C'y the dinner, "baS 3Jiittage[ien ; then, baniu 

5i6nncn, to be able, to know ; id) fcnntc, I could ; gcfonut, been able ; 
tntfien, to know ; id) \)^u§te, I knew ; geWu^t, known. 
Can you tell me what o'clock it is? I cannot tell (it), 
you, I have not (got) my watch with me. If I had it 
with me, I could tell you exactly. I shall not be able 
to go out to-day; my father is ill. My brother will 
not be able to come. I should wish, however, that he 
could come. I should be able to lend you this book, 
if it belonged to me. Lewis can carry this letter to 
the post-office. I could not go out yesterday. My 
friend could not answer your letter, because he had 
too much to do. Do you know when my father will 



70 

come back? I do not knovr. Does your sister know it? 
We know all, that we must die. Do you know (how) to 
dance? I have known it, but I do not know it (any) 
more. My father knew several languages. Henry can 
speak German. These boys know neither how to read 
nor how to write. The men do not know (how) to em» 
ploy their time. I did not know that your brother w^as 
departed. I shall soon know w^ho has done that. How 
can you suppose (will you) that I should know this? 
I should wish that you knew it. (I w^ould, &c.) 

Exactly, ^cium ; hov/ever, jebcd) ; I should wish, trf) ll^cKte ; to be- 
long, ge[}cren; answer, anttrorten auf (Ace); because, Weil; to dance, 
tanjcn; to speak German, beutjct; ]prcd)en. 

134. 

2,I)un, to do ; ici) tf)at, I did ; Qdi)an, done ; 

mi)mm, to take ; id) naf}m, I took ; genommen, taken. 

What are you doing? I do what you have ordered 
me (to do). W^hat were you doing when I came in? I 
was lighting the fire. What w^ill you do this evening ? 
I shall do nothing this evening. Your brother does 
nothing but run. These children do nothing but drink 
and eat. When one has done one's duty, one has noth- 
ing to reproach one's self (with). You have done a good 
action. Why are you in bad spirits ? What have they 
done to you ? One must do the will of God. You w^ili 
write to him; in your place I should not do it. 1 
shall do my best to satisfy him. I take this for myself. 
How many books, do you take? Your brother always 
takes my pen. W^ill you take my place ? Take what 
you wish. Take this child by the hand. Who has 
taken my copy-book? Your cousin took my cane yes- 
terday. I shall take one of these apples, if you allow 
(it). I have taken the liberty to write to him. We 
took some chairs and we sat down. If I took these 
books, my father would scold me. 

To order, 6efc{)lert; to come in, I)cremfommen ; to light, anjunbcn ; 
nothing but, nict)tg al§; one's duty, feme ^flid}t; to reproacli one"3 
eelf, fid) tJortnerfcn ; action, t^anbhmg, 5i{)at; in bad spirits, I'ibiet 
l:'aune; in your place, an S^rer SteKc; to do one's best, fein SJicgtid); 
jleg tf)un; to satisfy, Sefrtebtgcn; myself, mid) ; place, ^Ici^ (ni.) ; by 
the hand, bci bcr -§aitb; liberty, ?STet{;cit; to sit down, fid;> fc|cn ; to 
SCO Id any one, nii't iScmanbcni fd^makn. 



71 
185. • 

(^rfyfafen, to sleep ; id) [dyitef, 1 slept : gcfd)(afcn, slept ; 

brcdjen, 5cr6rcd)en, to break; id) brad), I broke; gcbroftjen, brokeu. 
We sleep too much ; jou. sleep less than we. I sleep 
generally (for) seven hours. Formerly I slept longer. 
Sly brother slept yesterday till eight o'clock; but to- 
morrow he will not sleep so long, because he must 
depart for Cologne at four o'clock. Our mother does not 
allow us to sleep longer, than till six o'clock. I sleep 
scundly. You were very uneasy in your sleep last night. 
This child sleeps very peaceably. We have no knife to 
cut our bread; therefore we break it. You will break 
this stick, if you bend it so. I do not believe that it 
(will) break. I should not like it to (that it did) break. 
This boy has broken a pane. He broke two last week. 
This servant is very heedless; she breaks something 
every day. Yesterday she broke two glasses, and on 
Sunday half a dozen cups and saucers. 

Less, ireniger; soundly, fcf)r fcjl; to be uneasy in one's sleep, unvuf)i(| 
fd)tafen; last, yortg; peaceable, fanft; to cut, fc^neibcn; therefore, fcc^; 
i)alb ; to bend, beugen; I should not like, id) mcd)te nic^t; pane, (Sc^ietbe; 
heedless, xinbebad)t; on Sunday, am <£cnntag ; cups and saucers, 3;!a[[cn. 

^' 136. 

91atf)cn, to advise ; id) rietf), I advised ; geratl)en, advised ; brtttgcn, tc 
bring; id) ferad)te, I brought; gcbrad)t, brought; emp[cf)len, to re 
commend ; id) emy[al}(, I recommended ; ciTH}[of)tcrt, recommended. 

I do not know what to resolve ; what do you advise 
me to do ? One advises me this, the other that. They 
advised me yesterday, to give up a part of my rights, 
I should like you to (that you advised) me; in you I 
have the greatest confidence. Because you wish me to 
(that I advise) you, I tell you that the most unprofit- 
able accommodation is better than the most favorable 
law-suit. I shall bring you the fruits which you desire 
(to have). I believe they have brought them to me 
already. They brought me yesterday some lettera 
from Berlin. When you come back, bring your sister 
with (you). Mr. N. will bring his son with (him) to- 
morrow. They brought their aunt with (them) from 
Vienna. I should wish you to (that you brought) the 
young man with (you) of vfhom you have spoken. He 
recommends his son to rae. You rccoriimended your 



72 

business to him. I have recommended him to* "NvatcL 
over him. 

What to resolve, toc^u ic^ mic^ cntl'djlicfcn fclf; onC; lliey, man; 
even, fcgar; to give up, abtretcn; the right, ha§ 9'ied}t; I should like, 
id) mcdte; in you, ju 31)ncn; the greatest confidence, bv"i§ mcifte 3xu 
traucn ; the most unprofitable accommodation, &c., eiit magercr S3cri 
{\kid) tft Bcffcr, ai§ etn fetter ^rcjc^; to_desire, ixninjcijen; the business, 
las ®e[d;a[t; to watch, wadjcn; over, iibcr. 



EXERCISES FOR KEADING. 



1. THE LITTLE DOG. 

(Sin grciulein, mxt 92amen Caroline, ging etnft an bem Ufer 
clncd gluffeS fpa^teren. ©te begegnete ^ter etnigen Bofen 
^naben, bie etn §imb(^en ertrcinfen tDoIlten; fie Ijatte 3i)ZitIeib 
mil bem armen S^^^iere, fanfte e§ nnb natim e§ mit \id) auf hiv3 

SDa§ §i:nbcfjen I)attc balb mit fetner nenen ©ebtetertn ^e^ 
fanntfc^aft gemacfit unb teiiieg fie !etnen Slngenbli(f me^r. 
(5ine§ ^benb§, aU fie fic^ gu ^ette legen inollte, fing hcS 
gitnbdjen plo^ti^ an ^n bellen* -Caroline na!)m ha§> ^id)t, 
fa(} unter ha^ ^ttt unb erbticfte einen 0)Zenf^en, t)on fiirdjter- 
iidjem S(u§fel}en, ber fid) ^ier t^erborgen Ijattt. (2§ tear ein 
©ieb. 

Caroline rief nm ^iilfe nnb alle ^ett)of)ner be§ (SdjIoffe§ 
eilten auf il)r ©efc^ret ^erbei. (Sie crgriffen ben Stdnber nnb 
itberUeferten i^n ber @ered)ttg!eit. dv geftanb in feinem S5er* 
F)ore, bag e§ feine 5Ibfi(^t gettn^fen irdre, ba§ grdnlein ^n er^ 
morben unb ha^ (Si^Iog ^n :|Dliinbern. 

Caroline banfte bem §immel, baj3 er fie fo gliicflic^ geret* 
tct Ijabe, unb fagte: 9^iemanb fjdtte gegtanbt, ba^ H^ arme 
^{)ierd)en, bem id) ba^ Seben gcrettet I)abe, mir ani^ ha^ ukU 
nige retten n)iirbe. 

2. THE GOOD NEIGHBORS. 

©er !(eine ^nabe eine§ ^iil(er§ nar)erte fid) 3n fel)r bem 
^ad]t unb fie( ^inein. !Der (Sc^mieb, n)c((^er jenfeit be$ ^a- 
d)e§ iDo^nte, fa^ et% fprang in ba^ Saffer, 3og ba§ ^inb 
{)Ci"au§ unb hxad]k c§ bem 93atcr. 



t^ut<yal}r baraiif hmdj indfjrenb ber ))la<i)t ^yeuer in bn 
©^mtebe au§, 3Da§ §au§ ftanb gan^ in glammen, elje ber 
©(^rnteb e§ ttterfte. (Sr rettete fief) mit grau unb llinbern. 
9te fein fleinfte^ Zo^kvdjcn f)attc man im erften ©i^recfeu 
t)ert3effen. 

^a§ ^inh fing in bent Brennenben §anfe an jn fd)reien; 
allein fein Tlm]d) tDolIte fitf) ^ineinn^agen. 5)a fam plol^licl) 
ber 2}2it{Ier, f prang in bie gtammen, bracf)te ha^ ^inb glitd licij 
^cran§, gab e0 bent ©cfimieb in bie ^rme nnb fagte: 

@ott fet gelobt, iia^ er mir ©elegen^eit gab, dnd) meine 
^anfbarfeit p ben^eifen. ^()r ^abt nteinen (2o^n an§ bcni 
SBaffer ge^ogen, unb id) ^abc mit @otte§ §i:(fe (Sure Xodjtcv 
an§ bent gener errettet 

3. THE BROKEN HORSE-SHOE. 

(Sin ^aner ging ntit feinent @o^ne, bent !(einen 2^^onta§, 
in bie ©tabt (Bid), fagte cr untent)eg§ ^u i^nt, ba (iegt ein 
Btixd t3on einent §nfeifen an ber (Srbe, l^ebe eg anf nnb ftc(!c 
c§ in bie Za\d)c. ^a^, Derfe^te 2^^onta§, tiaQ ift nic^t ber 
9}21t^e incrt^, bag man fid} bafitr bitcft SI)er Skater ern}ieberte 
mrf)tg, na^nt ha^ (Sifen, nnb ftecfte c§ in feine Safi^e. ^m 
na(|ften S^orfe t)er!anfte er e§ bent (gc^miebe fitr bret §eller 
unb fanfte baflir ^irfc^en. 

§ieranf fe^ten fie i^ren SBeg fort, ^ie (Sonne niar bren^ 
nenb ^ti^. 9)2an fal) n?eit unb breit toeber §au§, noc^ ^alb, 
nod) Quelle, S:^onta§ merging t)or 3)urft unb fonnte feinent 
^ater nitr mit 9}2it^e folgen. 

!Da lieg biefer, inie burc^ S'^^cilt, eine ^irfc^e fallen. 
^]^oma§ l^ob fie fo gierig anf, a(§ ujcire e§ ®oIb, unb ftecfte 
fie fd)nell in ben 3)2nnb. (ginige (S^ritte toeiter lieg ber 55a^ 
ter eine streite ^irfi^e fallen, voctd)t 3::^oma§ mit berfclben 
©ierigfeit ergriff. !t)te§ baucrte fort, big er fie atte aufge^ 
l^oben ^atte. 

3(t§ er bie le^te ber-^eljrt l)atte, inanbte ber ^akv \id) 31 
il)m ^in unb fagte: ©iet), ii»enn bu hid) ein eingigeg Tlal fjdt- 
tcft biid'en tDotten, um bag §nfeifen aufgu^eben, fo iriirbeft bn 
nic^t nbt^ig ge^abt ^aben, eg Ijuttbert d)lai fitr bie ^irfi^en jn 
tfjnn. 

4. THE HIDDEI^- TREASURE. 

il'urj 'Dor feinem Sobe fagte ein ^auer ^n feinen brei Boly- 
ncn: Siebe ^inber, id) faun end) md)t^ ^interlaffen, a(g biefe 
4 



74 

5)uttc imb bcii S33einberg, ber baraii ftojst. 2(I(ciit in bicfein 
feemberge liegt ein ©clja^ iierborgen. ©rabct fletjig nad}, 
[o uicrbet i^r tl)n fiubcn. 

Dkd) bem S^obe be§ S3ater§ gntben bie eb()ne ben gan^en 
Weinberg mit bent gro ^ten gteije nm, abcr fie fanben iDeber 
®olb nod) @ilbei\ !^a fie aber ben ^oben noc^ nie mit fo 
niet ©orgfatt bearbeitet ^tten, fo brai^te er eine foldje ^^enge 
S^ranben ^ert)or, bag fie bariiber erftannten. 

Sci^t erriet^en bie (Sb^ne, \va§> i^r ^ater mit bem (Sd^a^c 
gemeint Ijatte, nnb fie fd)rieben an bie Z^ixxt be§ SBeinbergeg 
mit gvogen ^nc^ftabcn : 5(rbeitfam!eit ift ber grbgte (Bdjai^ 
bc§ Mcn\d}tn, 

5. THE OAK AND THE WILLOW. 

)Radj ciner fef)r ftiinttifi^en '^'laii)t ging tin ^akv mit 
feinem (^oljne auf ba§ gelb, nm gn fe!)en, treldien (Si^aben 
ber (Sturm t)ernrfad)t I)abe. , (Bid) boi^, rief ber ^nabe, ha 
tiegt bie groge, ftarfe (Sic^e anf bem ^oben ^ingeftredt, toa^* 
renb bie fdjinadje Seibe am ^ad)t no^ anfredjt bafteljt. Qd) 
fjcitte geglaubt, ber (Stnrmn)inb irnrbe Ieid)ter bie SKeibe als 
bie (5id)e niebergeriffen ^ben, 

dJlcin <So^n, fagte ber 23ater, bie ftotjc (Eid)t, bie fid) nidit 
biegen !ann, mugte bredien; allein bie gefdimeibige SSeibe 
^at bem (Sturmininbe naa^gegeben nnb ift baf)er t)erfd)ont 
geblieben. 

6. THE GEATEFUL LIOK. 

($in armer (eflat)e, ber an§ bem §anfe feine§ ^errn ent^ 
f(o^en mar, innrbe ^nm STobe t)ernrt^eilt, dJlan fii()rte iljn 
anf einen grogen $Ia^, \vtld)zv mit dJtautvn nmgeben wax, 
nnb lieg einen fnrdjtbaren Sbtren anf i^n Io§, Si^anfenbe t)on 
2J2enfd)en ftiaren 3^ii9^^ hit\t^ (Bd)au\piti^. 

!Der SbiDe fprang grimmig anf ben armen SJ^enfd^en ^n ; 
aHcin plb^Iid^ blieb er fte^en, iDebelte mit bem ©(^tneife, 
Ijiipfte t)oI( grenbe nm i^n ^ernm nnb ledte il)m frennbtid) bie 
.^cinbe. S^^^^it^cinn tiertnnnberte fid), nnb fragte ben ^Btia* 
uen, it)ie ha^ !omme» 

S)er @!(at)e er|dl)lte: W,^ id) meincm §errn entlanfen 
ttiar, eerbarg ic^ mid^ in einer §of)(e mitten in ber SKiifte. 
X)a !am anf einmal biefer Sortie l^erein, minfelte nnb geigte mir 
fcine 3:at^c, in ber ein grof?er ^^^'orn ftaf. Qd) jog iljm ben 



75 

S^ont I)erait§ iiub Doit bcr ^cit an Derfal) mid) ber Soiwe mil 
SSUbpret mtb iritr lebten in ber §ol)(e fvicb(id) gufammen. 
^ei bcr te^ten Qao^b mxxhm U)ir gefangen unb t)on einanbcr 
getrennt 5Jlun freut \\d) ba§ gute S^ljier, mic^ iniebcr gefim^ 
ben gu f)aben. 

5lIIe§ 33o(f iDar ubcr bie S:)an!Bar!eit bie[e§ iDilben 3:i)iere§ 
cntgltdt, unb bat laut um @nabe fiir ben ©flaoen nub ben 
Sdiren. S)er (SflatJe tDurbc frei getaffen unb rcid}(id) be^- 
fii)enft 3^er Some folgte i^m n)ie ein §iinbcf)cn unb bliefi 
ftet^ bci if}m, oI)ne 3«^^"»5 ci^i Sstb ju tl)un. 



COLLECTION OF WORDS. 



1. THE 

S)ie Stabt, the town;- 

bie SBorftabt, the suburb ; 

ha^ %^Dt, the gate ; 

ber ^la^f the square ;. 

ber Maxtt, the market-place ; 

bie 6tra^e, the street ; 

bag ^flafter, the pavement ; 

"ba^ ^au^, the house ; 

ha^ ©ebdube, the building ; 

bie iiirc^e, the church; 

ber 3:^urm, the tower, spire ; 

bie S)Dm!ir(^e, the cathedral ; - 

bie $o[t, the post-office ; 

2. THE 
S)ag ^au§, the house ; 
bie S^J^ilr, the door ; 
bag Zliox, the gate ; 
bag (S(^Id^, the lock ; 
ber S(^Iu[jeI, the key ; 
bie ^lingel, the bell ; 
bie S^reppe, the staircase ; 
eine 6tufe, a step ; ^ 
ein Sitrtmer, a room ; 
ber Saal, the saloon ; 
bag %en\teXf the window ; 
bie Saben, the shutters; 

3. THE 



TOWiT. 

\ia§ Soiii)an§, the custom » 

house ; 
bag 2^I)eater, the theatre ; 
bie 33Drfe, the exchange ; * 
bag Spitat, the hospital ; 
'i)a§> 2Birt[}g^aug, the inn ;^ 
"tia^ ^a[feef)aug, the coffee: 

house ; 
ber $ala[t, the palace ;■ 
bie 2Rauer, the wall; 
bie ^eftung, the fortress ; 
ber $afen, the harbor ; 
bie Umgegenb, the environs. 

HOUSE. 

bie S)edte, the ceiling ; 
ber ^'U^boben, the floor ; 
bie 2Banb, the wall ; 
ber <,^amin, the chimney ; 
bie Md}e, the kitchen ; 
ber teller, the cellar ; 
ber 6peid^er, the garret, loft ; 
taS^ '^i^aii), the roof; 
ber ^of, the court-yard ; 
ber @arten, the garden ; 
ber Stall, the stable ; 
ber Srunnen, the well. 



FURNITURE. 

5)er %i\d)f the table ; bie ^ommobe, the chest of 

ber 6tuf)I, the chair ; drawers ; 

ber Spiegel, the looking-glass ; bag ^anapee, the couch ; 
ber Sd^ran!, the wardrobe ; bag ©emdlbe, the picture; 



77 



bie 6tanbur;r, the clock; 
t^a§ a3ett, the bed; 
i^ie SJhtra^e, the matress ; 
bie S)ecte, the bed-cloth; 
ber D[en, the stove ; 
ber Seuc^ter, the candlestick ; 
ber Scfjel, the spoon ; 
bie ©abel, the fork ; 
ba» ^Tteffer, the knife ; 
bie %c^\i^, the cup and sau- 
cer; 



ba^ 2;ifd)tu(^, the table-cloth , 
ba§ %^lkxtu(i|, the napkin ; 
ba^ .^anbtud), the towel ; 
bie Sic^tfc^eere, the snuffers; 
ber 5ie[Ier, the plate ; 
ba» M\']en, the pillow ; 
bag S3ettud}, the sheet ; 
bie SSorfjdnge, the curtains ; 
ba§ ©lag, the glass ; 
bie ^la[(^e, the bottle ; 
ber Roxhf the basket. 



4.. THE PROFESSIONS. 
Da» .gianblDer!, the profession ; ber 8d)Ii:f]er, the lock-smith ; 



ber ^cinbmerfer, the artisan ; 
ber SJIer^ger, the butcher ; 
ber Sdder, the baker ; 
ber DJluIler, the miller ; 
ber ^utmad^er, the hatter ; 
ber 6d)rteiber, the tailor ; 
ber Sd^ufter, the shoemaker ; 
lex Sarbier, the barber; 
ber Bdjxdmx, the joiner ; 
•^ber 3iii^"^ermann, the car 

pentir ; 
ber (5)la[er, the glazier ; 

5. 
Sa§ S3rob, the bread ; 
bay 2Rel)t, the meal, flour ; 
ba» ^leifc^, the meat ; 
ber Sraten, the roast-meat ; 
^albfleifc^, veal ; 
9]inbfleif(^, beef; 
t^ammelfleifd^, mutton ; 
ber ^i\<i), the fish ; 
bag Gi, the egg ; 
ber Salat, the salad ; 
ber Bcr\\, the mustard ; 



ber Sd}mieb, the smith ; 
ber $u[f(^mteb, the farrier ; 
ber ©attler, the saddler ; 
ber ^Bottd^er, the cooper ; 
ber ©erber, the tanner; 
ber ^aufmartn, the merchant ; 
ber 33u^l;dnbler, the book- 
seller; 
berSu#inber, the bookbinder; 
ber SJIaurer, the mason ; 
bie 9]dt)terin, the seamstress ; 
bie 2Bd[d}erin, the laundress, 
THE VICTUALS. 

bag Salg, the salt; 
"i^a^ Del, the oil ; 
ber Gffig, the vinegar ; 
(£(^lt)eineflei[(^, pork ; 
ber 8(^in!en, the ham ; 
bag ©emiife, the vegetable ; 
bie 6uppe, the soup ; 
ber ^dI}1, the cabbage ; 
bie .^artoffel, the potato ; 
bie (Srbfe, the pea ; 
bie Scl;nc, the bean ; 



78 



t)er iluc^en, tbe cake ; 
ba!3 Db[t, the fruit ; 
ber ^>fe[ier, the pepper ; 
bie Sutter, the butter ; 
ber .^dfe, the cheese ; 
bie 2RiIc^, the milk ; 
ber 2Bein, the wine ; 

6. 

^er diod, the coat ; 
bay iiteib, the gown ; 
ber 9}kntel, the cloak ; 
bie 2Be[te, the waistcoat ; 
bie ^ade, the jacket ; 
ber (Bd)U^, the shoe ; 
ber 8trump[, the stocking 
ber ©tiefel, the boot ; 
ber ^antoffel, the slipper ; 
bag t^emb, the shirt, shift 
bie Sdjiir^e, the apron ; 



THE 



V^ 



bag Sier, the beer ; 
bag 5rii^[tii(f , the breakfast ; 
bag DJZittaggeffen, the dinner; 
bag S^egperbrob, the after- 
noon's luncheon ; 
bag Slbenbeffeti, the supper. 

CLOTHING. 
bag %a^d)entndjf the handker- 
chief: 
ber .^nt, the hat; 
bie D}iii|e, the cap; 
bie U^r, the watch ; 
ber 9iegenfd}irm, the. umbrella ; 
Hv 6Dnnen[(^irm, rke parasol;, 
ber ^-dc^er, the fan ; 
ber 6c^^teT, tb^oveil ; 
ber StoS^ ^e,cane; 
ber^utel, the purse; 



^ S3rine, the spectacles. 



ber cOanbfd^uf), the glove ; 

ber 9ting, the ring ; "^"^^ 

7. THE HUMA^ BODY. 
%a 2)lenfd}^ the m^ ; ^ ^, ^^ hex $alg, tht neck ; 
ber ^orper, the body; * v ^ 'bi^c^mtJr^ me shoulder; 
ber .^Dpf, the head; ' tfer dinden, the back; 



bag .^aar, the hair ; 
bag ©efid}t, the face ; 
bie Stirrte, the forehead; 
bag 2ttige, the eye ; 
bie 5Ra[e, the nose ; 
bag^br, the ear; 
berlSSfeb, the mouth ; 
bag ^inn, the chin: 
ber Sart, the beard; 
bie Sippe, the lip ; 
ber 3iibn, the tooth; 
bie o^i^'S^? t^-i° tongue; 



ber Slrm, tl^e arm ; 
bie .ganb, the hand; 
ber e^inger, the finger; 
ber 3^agel, the nail; 
bie Sruft, the breast ; 
bag ^er^, the heart; 
ber 2Ragen, the stomach , 
bag S5ein, the 'leg; 
ber 5'UJ3, the foot; 
bag Jinie, the knee , 
bie S^^J^r *^e toe ; 
bafj 0)cl;irn, the brain 



/U- 



79 



8. THE QUADRUPEDS. 
'S)a^ %\)\ti, the animal; ber ^\i\^, tlie stag; 



ba» $ferb, the horse ; 

ber Gfel, the donkey; 

ier .^unb, the dog ; 

bie M%^, the cat; 

bie ^atte, the rat; 

bie 2}tauy, the mouse; 

ber DJtautourf, the mole ; 

'1^0.^ Scbrjein, the hogT 

bie, Siege, the goat; 

bie (Semfe, the chamois ; 

ber .^afe, the hare ; 

ba^ (Sid^f}orn, the squirrel ; 

ber Slffe, the monkey; 

9. THE 
Ser SSogel, the bird; 
ber .^atjn, the cock ; 
ba» §u!)n, the hen ; 
ba^ ^li^nd^en, the chicken ; 
ber Sd^man, the swan; 
bie ©aux^, the goose; 
bie G'nte, the duck; 
bie 2:aube, the pigeon ; 
ber ^fau, the peacock ; 
bie SBai^tel, the quail; 
bie Sd}nepfe, the snipe ; 

10. THE 
Serg-ifc^, the fish; 
ber ^t^l, the pike ; 
ber ^d}§, the salmon; 
ber ^var^fen, the carp; 
bie Sd}leie, the tench ; 
ber %oi; the eel ; 
*-bie ^crelle, the trout; 
bie iTrote, the toad; 
ber iyrcfd}, the frog; 



bag Dief), the roe ; 

ber Dd}fe, the ox ; 

ber (Stier, the hull ; 

bie .^11^, the cow; 

•^^0.% MVq, the calf; 

bag <Sd)af, the sheep ; 

ba» Samm, the lamb ; 

ber i^ud;^, the fox ; 

berSBoIf, the wolf; 

ber 33dr, the bear ; 

ber Sclue, the lion ; 

bag .^ameel, the camel ; 

ber GIepf;ant, the elephant. 

BIRDS. 

bag 5^ebl;ii[;n, the partridge; 

ber ilrammetsijogel, the field 

fare. 
bie 2(m[el, the black-bird ; 
bie %tx^t, the lark ; 
bie 3ia(^tigal(, the nightingale ; 
bie Sd}ipall)e, the swallow; 
ber Seil'ig/ the green-finch; 
ber ginf , the finch ; 
ber Sperling, the sparrow. 



FISHES AND INSECTS. 

ber SSurtn, the worm ; 
bie^aupe, the caterpillar; 
bie 2lmei[e, the ant ; 
bie Spinne, the spider; 
ber .faring, the herring; 
bie 2liifter, the oyster ; 
bie •Dhifd}el, the muscle-fish ; 
ber ,^ret»g, the craw-fish; 
bie '3d)Iange; the snake; 



'^a 



80 



lie ^liege, tlic fly; 
bie Siene, the bee; 



t)ie 2Be5pc, the wasp, 
berSc^tnettciiing, the huUerfly 



11. THE TREES AED FLOWERS. 



5)ei* Saum, the tree ; 

tet ^pfelfcaunt, the apple-tree; 

fcer ^inibaiim, the pear-tree ; 

vex 5|>f(aumenbaitm, the plum- 
tree; 

bei" ,^irf(t)baum, the cherry- 
tree ; . 

ber 3lu^I?aum, the nut-tree ; 

bie Gid^e, the oak-tree; 

bie ^ic!)te, the pine-tree; 

bie 2;aHtte, the fir-tree ; 

bie ^iid}e, the Tbeech; 

bie Ulrtte, the elm ; 

bie ^appel, the poplar ; 

bie ^Bliime, the flower ; 



bie D^ofe, the rose; 

bie 31ei!e, the pink; 

bie Sxilpe, the tulip ; 

bie Silie, the lily; 

bie Seijfoje, the stock ; 

'i)a§ SSeilc^en, the violet; 

bie SJiaibluJTte, the lily of the 
valley ; 

bie i!ornb(ume, the corn-flower ; 

ber ^lieber, the lilac ; 

bie <BonmnUxme, -the sun- 
flower; 

'S)a§ ©eisWatt, the honey 
suckle. 



12. THE COUNTRY. 



^a§> Sanb, the countr}^, land ; 

U§ g^elb, the field; 

bie (Segenb, the country ; 

bie Qhene, the plain ; 

ber SSerg, the mountain ; 

bal %'^al, the valley ; 

ber 2Balb, the forest ; 

ber S3ufd), the copse 

ber 2Beg, the road ; 

ber 33a(^, the brook; 

bie 2Biefe, the meadow ; 

bie cgaibe, the heath ; 

ber ^Jilgel, the hill ; 



bie ^iltte, the cottage ; 

ba^ S)Dr[, the village ; 

ber gleto, the borough ; 

bag Sd}lD^, the castle ; 

ber 2)leier|)of, the farm ; 

bie mtW, tbe mill ; 

'ba§> .^orit, the corn ; 

ber SBeijert, the wheat; 

bie ©er[te, the barley; 

ber §afer, the oats ; 

"ta^ Strol), the straw ; 

'^a^ ^tn, the hay; 

bie S^raube, the bunch of grapes ; 



81 



EASY DIALOGUES. 



1. EATDTG AiS-D DPJNKI^^G. 



Are you hungry ? 

I have a good appetite. 

I am very hungry ? 

Eat something. 

What will you eat ? 

What do you wish to eat ? 

You do not eat. 

I beg your pardon ; I eat very 
heartily. 

I have eaten very heartily. 

I have dined with a good ap- 
petite. 

Eat another piece, 

I can eat no more. 

Are you thirsty. 

Are you not thirsty ? 

I am very thirsty ? 

I am dying of thirst. 

Let us drink. 

Give me something to drink. 

Will you drink a glass of 
wine ? 

Drink a glass of beer. 

Drink another glass of wine. 

Sir, I drink to your health. 



I have the honor, 
your health. 



to drink to 



4* 



<3inb Sie I;ungr{g ? 

3^ ^ciW giiten Slppettt. 

^c^ bin fef)r I)ungrig. 

Gfien Sie ettva^, 

23ay tncllen Sie effen ? 

2Ba§ tniitif^en Sie 311 effen? 

Sie effen nic^t. 

^(^ bitte urn S5er3eif)img, id} w'f^^ 

fefjr i?iel. 
^6j l)ahe fefir loid gegeffen. 
^d) l:)abe mit giitem Stppetit gu 

DJiittag gegeffen. 
Gffen Sie nec^ ein Stiicfd^en. 
^d) !ann ni(^t» mel}r geniefien. 
Sinb Steburftig? >. 

^aben Sie fcinen S^urft? 
3^ bin fe^r burftig. 
^d) ijergef^e i?cr Sutft. 
Saffen Sie un^ trinfen. 
©eben Sie mir gu trinfen. 
SBoHen Sie ein ©Ia» 2Bein trin 

fen? 
Strinfen Sie ein ©{a» Sier. 
Srinfen Sie ncd) ein ©la^ 2Be{n 
3}Iein .^err, ic^ trinfe auf i^r 

©efunb^eit. 
3(^ ]^aU bie S^re, auf i^re ©e< 

funb^eit gu trinfen. 



82 



GOIXG AXD COMIXG. 



Where are 3'ou going 1 

I am going home. 

I was going to your house. 

Where do you come from ? 

I come from my brother's. ^ 

I am coming from church. 

1 just left the school. 

Will you go with me ? 

Whither do you wish to go ? 

We will go for a walk. 

We will take a walk. \ 

With all my heart, most will- 
ingly. 
What way shall we take ? 
Any way you like . 
Let us go into the park. 

Let us take your friend along 

on our way. .. 
As you please. 
Is Mr. B. at home ? 
He is gone out. 
He is not at home. 
Can you tell us, where he is 

gone ? 
I cannot tell you, precisely. 

I think he is gone to see his 

sister. 
Do you know when he will 

come hack? 
No, he said nothing about it, 

when he went out. 
Then we must go without 

him. 



2Bcf)in gel)en Sie? 

2Bol)er fomtnen Sie? 
^d) fomme >oon meinem 33ruber, 
^d} !omme an§> ber ^ird?e. 
^d) fommefo eben aug ber Sd)ule. 
2Bo(len Ste mit mir ge^eti ? 
SBofjin mollen 6{e gel)en? 
SBir hJoUen fpa^ieren gel}en.^ 
2Bir iPoHen einen Spajiergartg 

(Sel;r gern, mit SSergnugen. 

SCelc^eti 2Beg tooden h)ir nel)men? 
SBelc^en 2Beg <Bk irollen. 
Saffen Sie un§ in ben ^axl 

gef)en. 
Saffen Sie un^ im 35Drbeigef)cn 

if)ren ^reunb abl^olen. 
2Bie e^ ^Ijnen gefdllig i[t. 
Sft^erra 3u.§au[e? 
dx i[t au^gegangen. 
Gr ift nic^t gu $aufe. 
i^onnen Sie un^ fagen, it»obin er 

gegangen i[t? 
^d) tann e^ ifjnen nidf)t geit>i^ 

fagen. 
^d) glauBe, ha^ er gu feiner 

Sd^mefter gegangen ift. 
SDiffen Sie, n^ann er inxud- 

tommt ? 
9tein; er !f)at nid^t^ bat>on ge« 

fagt, a(» er ging. 
Sann ntuffen irir cl^ne i|n 

ge^en. 



83 



3. QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. 



Come nearer; I liavc some- 
thing to tell you. 
I have a word to say to you. 

Listen to me. . 

I want to speak to you. 

What is your wish 1 

I am speaking to you. 

I am not speaking to you. 

What do you say ? 

What did you' say ? 

I say nothing. 

Do you hear 1 

Do you hear what I say 1 

Do you understand me ? 

Will you be so kind, as to 

repeat. . . . ? 
[ understand you well. 
Why do you not answer me ? 
Do you not speak French ? 
Very little, Sir. 
I understand it a little, but I 

do not speak it. 
Speak louder. 
Do not speak so loud. 
Do not make so much noise. 
Hold your tongue. 
Did you not tell me, that. . . ? 
Who told you that ? 
They have told me so. 
Somebody has told it to me. 
I have heard it. 
What do you wish to say ? 
What is that good for ? 
How do you call that ? 
That is called 



S:reten 6ie nd[;er, id} I;abe 3t>' 
nen et\va§> gu fagert. 

[agen. 

§Dren Sie rtiid^ an. 

^d} mod^te mit ^l;nen fpredjen. 

2Ba§ ftef)t 311 ^fjren S)ien[ten? 

^c^ fpred)e mit ^f'tien. 

^d) fprec^e nid}t mit St'iien. 

2Ba§ fagen Sie? 

■2Ba§ l^aben 6{e gefagt? 

3c^ fage md;t5. 

.^oren (Sie? 

33er[tel;en 6ie, iray id] fage? 

SSer[tel;en Sie mic^? 

SBollen Sie [0 gut fein, 311 me-- 

berI;oIen ? 

'3d} i:er[tel;e Sie irol}!. 

SBariim antirorten Sie mir iud}t ^ ^ 

Spre($en Sie nic^t franjofifd}? 

Sel^r menig, mcin ^err. 

^d) »er[tel)e e§ ein irenig, abet 

id) fpre(^e ey nit^t. 
Spred^en Sic laiiter. 
Sprec^en Sie nic^t fo>Iaut. 
2}tad}en Sie md}t fo i^iel 2axm. 
Sd}n3eigert Sie. 

Sagten Sie mir nid)t, ba^ ? 

2Ber f)at ^^nen ha^ gefagt ? 
dJlan 'i^at e^ mir gefagt. 
(^§ 1)at mir'^ ^emanb gefagt. 
^d) ^abe e5 gebcrt. 
Sffia^ tDoHen Sie fagen? 
SBogu fell ba§ bienen? 
2Bie nennen Sie bag? 
^a^. beif3t 



84 



May I ask you . . . . ? 
^Yllat do you wish ? 
Do you know Mr. G.? 
I know him by sight. 
I know him by name. 

4. THE 
How old are you ? 
How old is your brother ? 
I am twelve years old. 
I am ten years and six 

months old^ 
Next month I shall be sixteen 

years old. 
I was eighteen years old last 

week. 
You do not look so old 
You look older. 
I thought you were older. 
I did not think you were so old. 



S)arf id) Sic fvagen ? 

2Baa toilnf(^en Sie? 
^ennen Sie .germ 6. ? 
^d) !enne if)n i^on Slnfe^en. 
^d) fenne ibn bent, dlarmn wadf. 

AGE. 

2Bie altfinb eie? 
3Bie alt ift ^fjr $err Sruber? 
^d) bin gtoolf ^afjre alt 
^d) bin §e^n unb ein Ijalht^ 

^dl)x alt, 
^m ndi^ften dJlcnat tuerbe tc^ 

fed}5e^n ^al^re alt. 
SSergangene SBoc^e bin ic^ ad)U 

3ef)n i^afjre alt getoorben. 
6ie fel)en nii^t fo alt axi§. 
Sie fel;en alter au§. 
^d) I)ielt fie fur alter. 
^d) f)ielt fie nic^t fixr fcf alt. 



How old may your uncle be ? 2Bie alt mag ibr D^eim fein? 
He may be sixty years old. Gr !ann etma fecfj^ig ^a^re l^aben 
He is about sixty years old. \ Gr ift imgefd^r fed^^ig ^al)xe alt 
He is more than fifty years old. (5r ift iiber fiinf^ig i^al^re alt. 



He is a man of fifty and up- 
wards. 

He may be sixty or there- 
abouts. 

He is above eighty. 

That is a great age. 

Is he so old ? 

He begins to grow old. 

5. 



dr ift ein SRann »on ffinfjig unjj 

einigen 3<^^ren. 
Gr !ann etin^a fed^jig ^al;rf 

laljkn, 
JSr ift liber ad^t^ig ^al^re alt. 
Sal ift ein l^olje^ Sllter. 
Sft er fo alt? 
dx fdngt an ju altern. 



THE TIME.^ 
What o'clock is it? 2Sie tiel U^r ift e§? 

Pray, tell me what time it is ? ^c^ bitte, fagcn Oie m\x, tvdd) 

3eit eg ift. 
It is one o'clock. (fy ift ein lll)x. 



85 



It is past one. 

It has struck one. 

It is a quarter past one. 

It is half past one. 

It wants ten minutes to tyro. 

It is not yet two o'clocl^ 

It is only twelve o'clock, l 

It is almost three o'clocl?. 

It is on the stroke of three. 

It is going to strike three. 

It is ten minutes past three. 

The clock is going to strike. 

There the clock strikes I 

It is not late. 

It is later than I thought. 

I did not think it was so late. 

6. THE 
What kind of weather is it ? 
It is bad weather. 
It is very cloudy. 
It is dreadful weather. 
It is fine weather. 
We are going to have a fine 

day. 
It is dewy. 
It is foggy. 
It is rainy weather. 
It threatens to rain. 
The ^y becomes very cloudy. 
The sky is getting very dark. 
The sun is cominor out. 



The weather i 

again. 
It is very hot. 
It is sultry. 



cle 



©^ ift ein U^r t)crbe{. 

G» i]'t ein SSiertel auf md, 
(§y i[t l)alh iidd. 
(S» fef)len gefjn DJIinutcn an gJuei 
(5» {[t nc^ iud)t giuei U^x. 
QS i[t er[t stUDlf. 
Qx> ift beina^e brei. 
a^ ift gegen brei. 
G» mirb gleic^ brei lll;r fd}Iagen 
(E§ ift 3ef)n 2}linuten nad) brei, 
5)ie Vii)x toirb fcgleid; fc^lagen. 
S^a fd}Idgt bie U\)x I 
Q§> ift nic^t fpdt. 
as ift fpdter, all id) )ia&jU, 
^d^ bad}te nic^t, bai3 c§> fo fpdJ 
mdre. 

WEATHER. 
ma§ ift el fiir 2BetterV 
QB ift f(^re(itel SBetter. 
^m ift triibe. 

©I ift ein abfc^eulid}el Setter. 
(SS ift f(^5nel SBetter. '^• 

2Bir it»erben einen fc^onen %ag^ 

l^aben. 
(fl l^aut. 
6» ift nebelig. 
(I» ift regnetifc^ el SBetter. 
(51 hxc'i)t 3U regnen. 
S)er fiimmel um^ie^t fid). 
2^er .^immel tuirb bunfet. 
6ie Sonne fdngt an fid} gu 
geigen. 
up S^al SBetter fidrt fid} tt?ieber auf 

ei ift fe^r ^ei^. 

Gl ift eine erftidenbe $i|e. 



86 



It is very mild. 

It is cold. 

It is excessively cold. 

It is raw weather 

It rains. 

It has been raining. 

It is going to rain. 

I feel some drops of rain. 

There ure some drops of rain 

falling. 
It hails. 

It snows ; it is snowing. 
It has been snowing. 

It snows in large flakes. 
It freezes. 
It has frozen. 
It begins to moderate. 
It thaws. 
It is very windy. 
The wind is very high. 
There is no air stirring. 
It lightens. 

It has lightened all night. 
It thunders ^ 
The thunder roars. 
The thunderbolt has fallen. 
It is stormy weather. 
We shall have a thunder- 
storm. 
The sky begins to clear up. 

The weather is very unsettled. 
It is very muddy. 
It is very dusty. 
It is very slippery. 
It is bad walking. 



G^ i[t fe^r milb. 

G^ i[t fait. 

6'» ift eine iibermd^ige Miit* 

^§> ift raufjeg SBetter. 

©g regnet. 

GS f)at geregnet. 

6v luirb gleid} regnen. 

3c^ [Af)Ie Df^egentropfen. | 

G^ [alien 9^egentrop[en. 

^§> I;agelt. 

^§> fc^neit; e§ fdllt 6(!)nee. 

Gio ^at gefc^neit; i§> ift B^utt 

gefallen. 
G^ f(^neit in grcf^en g-Iotfen. 
G^ friert. 
Gg I;at gefroren. 

^§> fdngt an gelinber ju merbcn. , 
^§> tl^aut ayx'i, 
dg ift \t\)i iDinbig. 
^er SBinb wel)t ftar!. 
6» \ot\)i !ein £ii[t(^en. 
(?^ blip. 

®» I;at bie ganje Dlad^t gebli|t. 
(5^ bonnert. 
^er S)Dnner rollt. 
©» 1[)0.t eingefc^Iagen. 
(5-S ift ftiirmifd)e^ SBetter. 
SBir ^ irerben ein ©etoitter be* 

!cntmen. 
^er ,§immel fdngt an, fid; auf 

3ul;dtern. 
^a^ SBetter ift fel;r nnbeftdnbig, 
G» ift fe^r fd^mulng. 
Gi3 ift fel)r ftanbig. 
^§> ift fe^r glatt. 
G^ ift fd}led}te§ @e^en. 



87 



It is day-light. 

It is dark. 

It is night. 

It is moon-light. 

Do you think it will be fine 

weather. 
1 do not think that it will 

rain. 
I am afraid it will rain. 
I fear so. 



G^ {ft %aq, 

(^§ ift bunfel. 

m ift dla^^t 

S)er Tlonh fc^eint. 

(^lauben Sie, ba^ e» gutel 2Bet« 

ter geben tuirb? 
^d) glaube nic^t, baJ3 ey regnen 

mtrb. 
^c^ fiirc^te, e§ mirb regnen. 
oc^ fiirc^te e§. 



7. THE SALUTATIOIS". 



Good morning, Sir I 

I wish you a good morning. 

How do you do ? 
How is your health ? 



©uten SRorgen, mein ^err! 

gen. 
2Bie befinben 8ie fic^ ? 
2Cie gel^t e^o mit ^f)rer ©efunbi 

^eit? 
Sefitiben Sie fic^ immer mof)!? 



Do you continue in good 

health ? 
Pretty good ; and how is 3^cinltd) tr»cl}l, unb Sie ? 

yours 1 
Are you well ? 
Very well, and you ? 
I am perfectly well. 
And how is it with you 1 
As usual. 

Pretty well, thank God. 
I am very happy to see you 

well. 



einb eie too!}!? 
Sebr tDD^l, unb Sie aucf)? 
^d) befinbe tnid^ fel^;' vooU, 
Unb trie gebt e^ mit 3^nen? 
S)ie geirDf)nl{(^. 
3temli^ gut, (^s^tt fei S)an!. 
6'^ freut miii) fef)r 8{e lncf)( gu 
fef)en. 



8. THE VISIT. 



There is a knock. 
Somebody knocks. 
Go and see who it is. 
Go and open the door. 
It is Mrs. B. 



Q§ !lDpft Semanb. 
©e{)' unb fief), mer ba ift. 
©el/ unb Dffne bte S;i)ur. 
e=§ ift SRabame 33. 



I wish you a good 



mornino;. 



I am Iiappy to see you. 

I have not seen you this age. 

It is a novelty to see you. 

Pray, sit down. 

Sit down, if you please. 

Take a seat. 

Give a chair to the lady. 

Will you stay and take some 

dinner with us ? 
I cannot stay. 
I only came in to see how 

you are. 
I must go 

You are in a great hurry. 
Why are you in such a hurry ? 
I have a great many things 

to do. 
Surely you can stay a little 

longer. 
I will stay longer another 

time. 
I thank you for your visit. 

I hope to see you soon again. 



^d) roiinfcbe ^Imn guten OJ^ori 

gen. 
G^ freut tnidf), 8ie gu fel()en. ' 
(Sy i[t ein ^afjrfjunbert, [eit ic^ 

(bie md}t faf). 
(5^ i[t eine Selten^eit, Sie 511 

fef)en. 
8e^en Sie fic^, ic^ bitte. 
6et^en Sie fic^ gefdlligft. 
3^el;men Sie $Ia|. 
©ib 2Jlabame einen StuI;L 
SBcUen Sie gum 2)littag§e[|en 

bet ung bleiben? 
^d) !ann nic^t bleiben, 
^d) bin nur gefommen, urn gu 

er[al)ren,4t3te Sie fic^ befinben. 
^d) mu^ ge|)en. 
Siq finb fe^r eiHg. 
aSesljalb finb Sie [0 eilig? 
^d} f)abe i^iel §u tl;nn. 

Sie !5nnen iDoI}! ncd) einen 2Iu; 

genblid bleiben. 
Gin anber 2Ral n?i(I id) Idngei 

bleiben. 
^d} banfe ^l^nen fiir ^Fjren Se^ 

fud}. 
^d) Ijoffe Sie balb n^ieber 311 

fel;en. 



9. THE BREAKFAST. 



Have you breakfasted ? 

Not yet. 

You are come just in time. 

You will breakfast with us. 
Breakfast is ready. 



$aben Sie gefruMtudt ? 

dlod) md)t 

Sie fcmmen gerabe 311 redjtei 

Beit. 
Sie merben mit nni§ friibftiicfen. 
^a§ ^yriifjftitd i[t bereit. 



89 



Do you drink tea or coffee 1 
\Yould you prefer chocolate '? 

I prefer coffee. 

What can I offer you ? 

Here are rolls and toast. 

What do you like best ? 

I shall take a roll. 

How do you like the coffee ? 

Is the coffee strong enough ? 

It is excellent. 

Is there enough sugar in it ? 

If there is not, do not make 

any ceremony. 
Do as if 3"ou were at home. 



^Trinfen Sie 3;f)ee cber i?a[fec ? 
2Bc((en Sie i^iellcid^t Itcber (^IjO' 

fDlabe? 
^d} 3iel;e ben ilafiee ^ox, 
5Ba» !ann id} ^^neu anbieten? 
t^ier finb SJlild^brobc^en unb ge« 

rc'ftete ^Brcbf^nittc^en. 
SBag mcgen Sie am liebften? 
^d} iperbe ein 58r5bd^en nefjmen. 
SBie finben Sie ben i^afjce? 
S[t ber ilaffee ftar! genug ? 
(?r ift i^ortrefflic^. 
3ft genug 3uder barin? 
Sl't e^ ni(^t, fo mac^en 6ic 

!eine ^lomplimente. 
3:F)un Sie, al^ cb Sic ju .^anfc 

it)dren. 

10. BEFORE DINNER. 



At what time do we dine to- 
day ? 

We shall dine at two o'clock. 

We shall not dine before 
three o'clock. 

Shall we have anybody at 
dinner to-day 1 

Do you expect company ? 

I expect Mr. B. 

Mr. D. has promised to come 
if the weather permits it. 

Have you given orders for 

dinner ? 
What have you ordered for 

dinner ? 
Have you sent for fish ? 
I could not get any fish. 



Unt vodiije B^it e[[eii mt I;eutc 

3u2}littag? 
2Bir trerben unt gloei Uf)r ef[en. 
2Bir toerben n{d}t )ocv brei Uljr 

ejTen. 
SEerben tolx I;eute gum Gfjen 

^emanben bei un^ I)aben? 
Gmarten Sie Gefellfd^aft? 
^(^ eriDarte ^errn 35. 
ijiexx S). 'i)at ijerfprod^en gu Urn-- 

men, menu e» baS ^Better 

eriaubt. 
t^aben Sie bie Sefel^le gum dJllU 

tagyeffen gegeben? 
2Ba» ^ahen Sie 311m Q]\cn he-- 

ftellt? 
.^aben Sie %\\d) befcrgen laffen? 
3c^ \)abe feinen ^-ifc^ beFommea 

fcnnen. 



90 



I fear, we shall have a very ^d) Befcrge, ba^ Wix !ein fon« 
indifferent dinner. berlid}e§ 9}tittagye[]en 1)dbcr\ 

tnerben. 
We must do as we can. 2Bir miiffen im5 bei^elfen. 



11. DIXNER. 



What shall I help you to ? 
Will you take a little soup ? 
No, I thank you. I will trou- 
ble you for a little beef. 
It looks so very nice. 
Which piece do you like best ? 

I hope this piece is to your 
liking. 

Gentlemen, you have dishes 
near you. 

Help yourselves. 

Take without ceremony what 
you like best. 

Would you like a little of 
this roast-meat ? 

Do you choose some fat ? 

Give me some of the lean, if 
you please. 

How do you like the roast- 
meat? 

It is excellent, delicious. 

What will you take with your 
meat ? 

May I help you to some ve- 
getables ? 

Will you take peas or cauli- 
flower ? 

It is quite indifferent to me. 

I shall send you a piece of 
this fowl. 



2Bay foil id} ^\)\Kn t»DrIegen? 
SBoaen Sie etm§ Suppe? 
3d} ban!e. :^c^ irerbe 6ie urn 

etmag S^iinbfleifd) bitten. 
©» fiel)t fo gut an§, 
2SeI(f)eg 8tiict i)aben Bk am 

liebften? 
^c^ |)D[[e, ba^ bie» 'Bind nadj 

Severn ©efd)made ift. 
2)^eine ^erren, bte (Sd^iifj'eln 

fte^en ccr Sf'^^i^. 
^Bebienen Sie fic^. 
3tef}men Sie Df)m Uinftdnbe, 

tDa§ 3f)nen beliebt. 
2BoEert Sie ein iuenig i^cn bie^ 

fern $8raten? 
SBollen Sie^^etteB? 
^ehen Sie mir 2)lagere», tDcmi 

e» 3^nen gefdKig ift. 
2Bie finben Sie ben Sraten? 

G^ ift ^ortrefflid^, foftlid?. 
2Ba^ mlinfc^en Sie pm ^leifd; ? 

^ar[ id} 3f)nen ©emiife gcben? 

SBi'mfc^en Sie (^rbfen Dber ^liu 

nienfcbl? 
(?» ift mir ganj glcid). 
^d} irill 3f}"sn ein Stfiddfjen 

itcn biefem ©ef(iige( reid}en. 



91 



No, thank j^ou, I can cat no ^d) ban!e, id; !ann iud^t» mebr 



more. 
You are a poor eater. 
You eat nothing. 
I beg your pardon, I do honor 

to your dinner. 
You may take away. 



efi'en. 
6ie finb ein ji^toad^er Gffer. 
6ie effen gar nid^t^. 
3d} bitte iim 3Ser3eif)img, 

mac^e ^I^rem Gffen dfjre. 
^l)v fonnt aliC^bann abbeden. 



i* 



12. TEA. 



Have you carried in the tea- 
things ? 
Everything is on the table. 
Does the water boil ? 
Tea is ready. 
They are waiting for you. 
Here I am. 

We have not cups enough. 
We want two more cups and 

saucers. 
Bring another tea-spoon and 

a saucer. 
You have not brought in the 

sugar-tongs. 
Do you take cream ? 
The tea is so strong. 
I shall thank you for a little 

more milk. 
Here are cakes and muffins. 
Do you prefer some bread 

and butter ? 
I shall take a slice of bread 

and butter. 
Pass the plate this way. 
Ring the bell, if you please. 
\Yill you kindly ring the bell ? 

We want some more water. 



$a[t bu Sides gebrad)t, \va8 ^um 

3;bee gel)ort? 
G5 i[t Sides auf bem 5:{[d;e, 
Siodjt ^a§> 2Baf)er? 
S)er Z^ee ift fertig. 
©ie irerben emavtet. 
.^ier bin id). 

2Biv fjabcn n{d}t ^afj'en genug. 
2Bir mfiffen n^dj girei %a^en 

Ijahcm, 
93ringe ncd} einen 3^l;eel5ffel unb 

eine Untertaffe. 
^u f)a[t bie S^^^^^^Q^ ^ic^t 

gebrac^t. 
9Ie!)Tnen 6ie 9ial)m? 
Ser 5i^ee ift fo [tarf. 
^d) merbe ncd) um etiuaS Wild:} 

bitten, 
c^ier ift Sind)en urtb 33rcb!ud^en 
Gffen Sie lieber Sutterbrob? 

^d) n?erbe ein SButterbrcb nebs 

men. 
^dj'uh ben Zdkx ]^ier|)er. 
8cbeden 6ie gefddigft. 
SBclIen €ie giitigft bie ilfingel 

giel^en? 
2Bir brau^en nc^ mefjc SCaffcr. 



92 



Bring it as quickly as possible. 
Make haste. 

Take the plate with you. 
Is your tea sweet enough ? 
Have I put sugar enough in 

your tea? 
It is excellent. 
I do not like it quite so sweet. 
Your tea is very good. 
Where do you buy it ? 
I buy it at ... . 
Have you already done ? 
You will take another cup ? 

I shall pour you out half a 

cup. 
You will not refuse me. 

I havft already drunk three 
cups, and I never drink 
more. 



S3riiic3e c^^ jo [d^nell aU rnQQliif. 

33eei(e bid). 

Tdmm ben teller mit. 

3[t bev 3:l;ee filfs gemig? 

^abe id) genug 3^^^^ i^ 3^r^w 

%l)ee getljan? 
Gr i[t cortrefflid). 
^d) 1;)aU iljn md)t gem fo [u^. 
3I;r 2:l)ee i[t fef)r gut. 
2Bo !au[en Sie i^n? 
^(^ ^aufe {f}n bei 
6inb 8ie [(^on ferttg? 
Sie iDerben nod} eine 3:affe 

nef)men? 
^(^ h?erbe Sf).nen ncc^ eine ^^albe 

Saffe einfd^enfen. 
Sie irerben e§ mir mc^t abs 

fd}Iagen. 
^d) hahe fd}on brci Xa^en ge* 

trunfen, unb me^r trinfe ic^ 

ffiie. 



A NEW 

PEACTICAL A^D EASY METHOD 

OF LEARXH^-G 

THE 

GEKMAN LANGUAGE. 

BY 

F. A H N, 

DOCTOE OF PUILOeOrnY AXD PKOFESSOR AT Tira COLU:QE O? NECES. 



SECOND COUESE. 

FIEST AiTEEICAN, rROil THE EIGHTH lOXDOX EDITION 



NEW YOEK: 
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 



549 & 551 BEOADTTAT 

18?2. 



INDEX. 

Theoretical Part. ^""^^ 

Chapter I. — Of the x^rticle 7 

Chapter II. — Of the Substantive . 8 

1. Of the Gender of Substantives 8 

2. Of the Declension of Substantives 10 

3. Of the Formation of the Plural 13 

4. Of Proper Names 16 

5. Of the Formation of Feminine Nouns 17 

6. Of the Diminutives 17 

Chapter III. — Of the Adjective 18 

1. Declension of the Adjectives 18 

2. Degrees of Comparison of the Adjectives. . . 20 

Chapter IY.— Of the Numbers 21 

Chapter V. — Of Pronouns 23 

1. Determinate Personal Pronouns 23 

2. Indeterminate Personal Pronouns 24 

Ckaptefo VI. — Of Adjective and Relative Pronouns, 25 

1. Demonstrative Pronouns 25 

2. Possessive Pronouns 27 

3. Relative Pronouns 27 

4. Interrogative Pronouns 28 

Chapter VII.— Of the Verb 29 

1. Preliminary Notions 29 

2. Of the Conjugation of Assonant Verbs 30 

3. Of the Conjugation of Dissonant Verbs ... 32 

4. Of the Conjugation of Irregular Verbs 38 

5. Of the Formation of the Compound Tenses . . 41 

6. Of the Conjugation of Passive Verbs 44 

7. Of Reflective Verbs 46 

8. Of Impersonal Verbs 48 

9. Of Compound Verbs 49 

Chapter VIII. — Of Prepositions 51 

Chapter IX. — Of Adverbs ,,,..,.... 56 



PAGB 



Chapter. X. — Of Conjunctions 68 

Chapter XI.— Of the Use of the Moods 59 

1. Indicative Mood 50 

2. Subjunctive Mood 59 

3. Imperative Mood 60 

4 Infinitive Mood 61 

5 Participles 62 

(^tiAPTER XII.— Of the Use of the Tenses 63 

1. Present Tense 63 

2. Imperfect Tense 63 

3. Perfect Tense 64 

ChaptePw XIII. — Of the Construction 64 

Table of all Irregular Forms of the Irregular Yerbs, 69 

Practical Part. 
Alphabetical List of all those words which are to be 
met with in the 136 exercises of the first course, 
and with which the pupil is supposed to be quite 

familiar • 81 

Exercises 84 

Diverse Exercises 106 

1. The Cane-pipe 106 

2. The Three Eobbers 106 

3. The Pilgrim 107 

4. The Kobin-Redbreast 108 

5. The Voice of Justice 108 

6. The Peaches 109 

7. The Desert Island 110 

Vocabulary 114 

Collection of much used Phrases 118 



THEORETICAL PAET. 



CHAPTER I. 



PRELIMINARY ITOTIONS. 

§ 1. The German Language is composed of eight 
kinds of words, called the ^arts of speech. They are : 
the Article, the Substantive, the Adjective, the Pronoun, 
the Verb, the Adverb, the Preposition, and the Con- 
junction. 

§ 2. There are in German two numbers: the Sin- 
gular and the Plural; three genders: the masculine, 
the feminine, and the neuter ; four cases : the Nomina- 
tive, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative."^ 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

§ 3. We distinguish in German two kinds of Ar- 
ticles: the definite Article bcr, bie, baS, and the indefi- 
nite Article ein, eine, ein. 

I. DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 







Singular. 






Plural 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


for 


all genders. 




Ifoni 


bcr, 


btc, 


^Oi§, 




bic. 


1>he, 


Gen. 


be4 


iev 


bc§. 




bcr. 


of the, 


Dat. 


bent, 


ber, 


bcm, 




ben, 


to the, 


Ace. 


bert, 


Vu, 


ba5, 




Viz, 


the. 




2. DECLENSION 


OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 






N'om. 


em, 


emc. 




cin. 


a, 




Gen. 


cirteS, 


ctner, 




eines. 


of a, 




Dat. 


einem, 


cmcr. 




cincm. 


to a, 




Ace. 


einett, 


eine, 




<tm, 


a. 



• Tlie Nominative answers to the English nominative case, the Accusative to 
tb€ objective case, and the Genitive to the possessive case. 



8 

It is to be observed that almost all declinable words, excepting the 
Substantives, take the same terminations as the definite article, viz. • 
Masc. Fern. Ncuf. 

Norn. cr, t, c§, 

Gen, c§, cXf c§, 

Dat. em, cr, em, 

Ace. en, e, c^. 

The neuter Gender differs from tlie masculine only 
in the Nominative and Accusative. The Accusative 
of the feminine and neuter genders is always the same 
as the Nominative. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
I. OF THE GEI^DES OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 4. Of the masculine gender are : 

1. The substantives, which denote a male being as 
well by nature as by condition or occupation. Ex.: 

ber (Ho^n, the son ; ber <S(^neiber, the tailor ; 

bcr «§irt, the herdsman , bec (Btier, the bull. 

2. The names of the seasons, months and days. Ex.: 
ber SBinter, the winter ; ber Wlai, May ; 

ber '§crlr|^, the autumn ; bcr (2onntag, Sunday. 

3. The Substantives ending in alt, e(, er, eft and 
i u g» Ex. : 

35cr ^all, the ball ; bcr ^utfj^er, the coachman ; 

ber ©tad, the stable ; ber S)cgcn, the sword ; 

ber Soffel, the spoon ; ber Dfett, the stove ; 

ber <Sd)luf|cI, the key ; ber ©^erling, the sparrow ; 

bcr «§ammer, the hammer ; ber «§dring, the herring. 

Exceptions from the preceding rules : 

hk ®aBeI, the fork ; Ht ©d^ufjel, the dish ; 

bie ^artoffel, the potato ; bte ^eier, the festival ; 

hk Seiter, the ladder ; bte Seier, the lyre ; 

ba§ Sftuber, the oar ; iiaS ^iffcn, the cushion ; 

bag Sllter, the age ; ha§ 3et(i)en, the mark ; 

ba§ ^enfter, the window ; ta§ @ifen, iron ; 

ha§ %hhcx, the fever ; ba§ SJJefjtng, brass. 



§ 5. Of tlie feminine gender are: 

1. The Substantives which denote a female being, aa 
well by nature as by condition or occupation. Ex.: 

2){e 2'ocJ)tcr, the daughter ; bie 9}?agb, the maid-servant ; 
bie 9Birtf)m, the hostess ; fcie 3icgc, the she-goat. 

2. The Substantives ending in ei, ^ett, !ett, fdjaft 
ng,tnandui§. Ex.: 

2)ie 2)ru(Jeret, the printing-office ; bie <§offnung, hope ; 
fcte Slbtei, the abbey; bie ^ontgin, the queen; 

bic ©ejunb^eit, health ; hk •^errin, the mistress ; 

bic 'BauhzxUitf neatness ; bie J^enntni^, knowledge ; 

i)k ^eunbjd)flft, friendship • bte (Srlaubnif, the permission. 

Exceptions : 
!t)a§ 38eiB, the woman ; ba§ S3unbni^, the alliance ; 

ba§ ^Tauen,^immer; the woman ; ba^^efcnntnif , the confession , 
ba§ 53ilbni§, the image ; ba§ Sciigni^, the testimony ; 

t)a§ 93cr^dltnif , the proportion ; baS «§inbcrni^, the obstacle ; 
baS Scburfnif , the want ; ha§ ©reigni^, the event ; 

ba0 ©lei^ni^, the similitude ; ba» S3egrdbnif , the burial. 

§ 6. Of the neuter gender are : 

1. The names of metals, countries, towns, and letters, 
Ex.: 

S)a§ (SiTen, the iron ; ^etcrS'Burg, Petersburgh ; 

ba§ @olb, the gold ; ^iireii^en, Prussia ; 

U§ 51, ba§ ©, the A, the B ; ^Ddanb, Holland. 

2. The Substantives ending in 1 1) lint, fa( and fe(. 
Ex.: 

2)a§ Sttttcrf^um, chivalry ; ba§ ^^idial, fate ; 
iia§ 9(ltertf|um, antiquity ; t^a§ ^aU)\d, the riddle. 

3. The diminutives in ^en and (ein. Ex.: 

JDa§ (itii^td)en, the little chair ; ba§ S3acJ)le{tt, the little brook ; 
ba§ So^nc^en, the little son ; i^a§ ^dulein, the young lady ; 
bas 9}Jdbcl)en, the girl ; ba§ ^ndblein, the little boy. 

4. The Substantives beginning with the syllable g e, 
Ex,: 

2)a§ ©efc^rcf, the clamor ; ha§ ®ett»6If, the clouds ; 
ba§ ®cbct, the prayer ; baS ©ebddjtnif , memory. 

5. All kinds of words taken substantively. Ex.: 

S)aS 3©ixriim, the why ; ha§ Srtnfcn, drinking ; 

bag ^dn, the no ; ba§ 91u|iici}e, the useful. 
Exceptions : 

©er (Stat)!, the steel ; ber ©ebartfe, the thought ; 

ber J^ombacf , tombac ; ber ®eruct), the odor, smell ; 

ber 3inf, zinc ; ber @efd)madE, the taste ; 

tit ^latina, platina ; ber ©ebraucf?, the nse ; 



10 

hex ®c'^Ov[am, obedience ; tie 3;urrci, Turkey ; 
kr ©cWinn, the gain ; tic ^^falj, Palatinate ; 
tcx ©cfang, tlie song ; bie SDcclbau, Moldavia ; 
tie ©cftalt, the shape ; bie <Scl}Weij, Switzerland ; 
tie ®efal)r, the danger ; bcr 3rrtf)um, the error ; 
bte ©cbuib, patience ; bcr 9leici)t^um, wealth. 

§ 7. Compound Substantives take the gender of their 
last component. Ex. : 

®cr <§au§^crr, the master of the house ; 
bie «^au§[rau, the mistress of tlie house ; 
has hlid^i^ans, the town-house. 

Excejjtions. The following words, although terminated 
by the masculine Substantive, ber SJ^Utl), the courage, are 
of the feminine gender : 

^tc Slnmutf), gracefulness ; bte Sanftntut:^, meekness ; 
btc JDemutt), humility ; bie 3BeI)mut£), sadness ; 

h\^ ©ro^mutl), generosity ; bte (id)Wermutf>, melancholy. 
The other words compounded with SJZutI), are mascu- 
line. Ex. : bcr §0(f)mitt^, haughtiness. 

§ 8. There are some Substantives which have two 
genders, but with diJBTerent meanings : 

5)er S3anb/ the volume ; \i<xS S3anb, the ribbon ; 

bcr S'rBe, the heir ; ba§ (Srbe, the inheritance ; 

bcr ©d)Ub; the shield ; ba§ ^^\\^, the sign (of an inn) ; 

bcr %^^X, the fool ; 'i)a§> S'f)or, the gate ; 

bcr 33crbien|i, the gain ; \i<x% 93erbienjl, merit ; 

ber "Sec, the lake ; btc (Bee, the sea ; 

ber belter, the guide ; bte better, the ladder ; 

bcr ^V^Z, the heathen ; btc '^eibc, the heatL. 



II. OF THE DECLENSIOIT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 9. In general there are three declensions admitted 
for the German Substantives : 
The first forms the Genitive in C>. 
The second forms the Genitive in n. 
The third is in the Genitive like the JSTominative. 

First Declension. 

§ 10. The first declension comprehends : 
1. All neuter Substantives without exception. 
2 All masculine Substantives, which do not follow 
the second declension. 



11 

1, Genitive in §, 
JSToru. ber ©^iegel, the mirror ; 
Gen. bc§ (SpiegelS, of the mirror ; 
Dat. tern ©piegel, to the mirror ; 
Ace. ben Spiegel; the mirror. 

To be declined in the same way: 

S)er <§immcl, tlie sky ; baS ^enfier, the windoAv ; 
ber 93ater, the father ; ba§ 5luge, the eye ; 
bcr 5)egen, the sword ; ba0 3}tabd}en, the girl. 

2. Genitive in c§» 

When euphony demands it, the § of the Genitive may 
be preceded by an e, and this e must be preserved in the 
Dative. In familiar style this softening is almost always 
neglected, but it is necessary in the Genitive of all those 
Substantives the terminations of which would be too hard 
without this half-mute e. Ex. : 

ISTom. bcr Z\\^, the table ; ba§ .^mb, the child ; 
Gen. be§ %i\^)<i§, be§ 5linbe§, 

Dat. bem %\\ii:)t, bcm ilinbc, 

Ace. ben %\\6)» 'Ho.?, ilinb* 

To be declined the same way : 

S)cr %ix^, the foot ; "i^a^, Serf, the village ; 

bcr «§iit, the hat; ba§ ^anb, the country; 

ber Slrjt, the physician ; ba5 «§auS, the house. 

3. Genitive in n§. 

The following masculine Substantives : 

ber 9lame, the name ; ber QBiUe, the will ; 

ber ©ebanfe, the thought ; ber ©laube, the belief; 

ber ?^infe, the spark ; bcr (Sdjabe, the damage; 

ber §ricbe, the peace ; ber 53ud)ftabc, the letter ; 

were formerly terminated in e n in the Nominative (bcr 
Seamen, ber bitten) and are even now often met with in 
this obsolete form, from which they derive their other 
cases; ber ^lamt, be§ D^amen^v bem Xiamen, ben 9lamen. 

The two words : ber (gcfjmerj, the pain, and ba§ ^er^, 
the heart, are in the Genitive be§ ^djmerjen^, or ©djmer* 
je§; be§ ^erjenS; in the Dative bem (Sdjmerge, bem §er3eit 
or ^erje, and in the Accusative ben ©c^mer^, ba^ ^erg. 

Second Declension. 

§ 11. The second declension comprehends only mas 
online nouns. The Genitive is in n or en. The other 
cases of the Singular preserve the termination of the 
Genitive. Ex.: 



12 

1, Genitive in n* 
Koni. bcr £'otric, the lion 
Gen. tcS £ctrciv 
Dat. bem £'ctr»en, 
Ace. ben £ctrcn. 

2. Genitive in en. 

In most Substantives of this declension, wliicli end in 
the Nominative by a consonant, the it of the Genitive is 
preceded by an e» Ex.: 

Nom. bcr ®raf, the count ; 

Gen. beg ©rafcn, 

Dat. bem ©rafcn, 

Ace. ben @ra[en. 

§ 12. The second declension comprehends : 

1. -All masculine nouns of men and animals, termi- 
nating in e, as : 

2)er .KnaBe, the boy ; ber ®urgc, the bail ; 

ber (Sr6e, the heir; ber Siffe, the monkey ; 

ber ^0te, the messenger; ber «§afc, the hare. 

2. The names of nations ending in e: 

S)er 2)eutft^e, the German ; bcr Sact)fc, the Saxon ; 
S)er grangcfc, the Frenchman ; ber Sd^webe, the Swede. 

Those ending in er follow the first declension: ber 
©panier, be§ ^panterS. 

3. The following nouns of men and animals : 
S)er <§elb, the hero; ber ©efell, the partner; 
ber ®raf, the count ; ber ©cc!, the dotard ; 
ber i^urft, the prince ; bcr 2't)Dr, the fool ; 

bcr ^iitf the herdsman ; ber 9tarr, the fool ; 
bcr ^ienjd), the man ; ber 53ar, the bear ; 

1: cr 't err, the gentleman ; ber £)^6, the ox. 

4. Most nouns of persons derived from foreign lan- 
guages, and terminated by a long syllable: 

2)cr Solbat, the soldier; ber ^atfjclif, the catholic ; 

bcr 3efuit, the Jesuit ; ber 2'^colcg, the theologian ; 

ber ?lbjutant, the adjutant; ber ^^tlofopf), the philosopher; 

ber Stubent, the student ; bcr Slftronom, the astronomer. 

Third Declension. 

§ 13. The third declension comprehends all feminine 
Substantives. It is distinguished from the two former 
ones, by not taking any inflexion in the Singular. Ex.: 

Is om. %'\.t .§anb, the hand ; 

Gen. ber <§anb, 

Dat. ber <§anb, 

Ace. bie -C^anb. 



13 

To be declined in the same manner: 

5D[e ^xaVL, the woman; bic Siiv\d)C, the cherry; 
bte ©tabt, the town; btc ©abet, the fork; 

hk £u[t/ the air ; bie S^ugenb; the virtue. 

in. OF THE FORMATIONS OF THE PLURAL. 

§ 14. In order to form the Plural of German Sub- 
stantives, e, er, en or n is added to the Singular; some- 
times also the Nominative Plural is the same as the 
Nominative Singular. 

1. Plural in e. 

1. All monosyllables, save a few exceptions: 

2)er >§unb, the dog ; bie «§unbe, the dogs ; 

hk <§anb, the hand ; bie «§dnbe, the hands ; 

has 33eirt, the leg ; bic ^eine, the legs. 

2. The Substantives ending in nig, fal and tng, as 
(V'ell as those beginning by cj e and ending by the radical 
syllable : 

2)ic 5vcnntnif, knowledge; bte .^cnntniffe, knowledge; 

iia§ (S^eufal, the monster; hk (Scf)cufale, the monsters ; 

ber ^TCinbling, the stranger ; bie i^TcmblingC; the strangers ; 

tia§ ©ebet, the prayer ; bie ©cbetc, the prayers ; 

ba§ ®efd}cuf, the present ; bte @cfcf;cnfe, the presents. 

2. Plural in er : 
1. The Substantives ending in f^um: 
$Dcr 9lcid)tf)um, wealth ; bte 9letd}t-^iimer, the riches ; 

fe«r 3rrtf)um, the error ; bie Sut^umer, the errors. 

% The following monosyllables: 

Ser ©eij^, the mind ; bcr Slanb, the border ; 

2)er 2cib, the body ; ber SBalb, the forest ; 

S)er @ott, the god ; bcr SSiirm, the worm ; 

bcv 2}?ann, the man; bcr Dxt, the place 



2)a§ Stmt, the office ; baS '^a^, the cask ; 

bag Q3anb, the ribbon ; baS §clb, the field ; 

has ^iih, the image ; ba§ ®ia§, the glass ; 

ta§ 53rett, the board; bag @lteb, the limb; 

bag ^urf), the book; bag ®rab, the grave ; 

bag ©a^, the roof; bag -^aug, the house ; 

has Serf, the village ; bag «§ut)n, the chicken; 

bag ffilatt, the leaf; bag kaib, the calf; 

bag ^inb, the child ; bag <3c1)Id^, the castle ; 

bag ^Icib, the dress ; bag '^i)ai, the valley; 

bag Sieb, the song ; bag 33oIf, the people ; 

bag Sod), the hole ; bag SBcib, the woman. 

5* 



14 

3. Plural in n : 

8. All Substantives of the second declension, which 
take u in the Genitive of the Singular: 

S}cr J^naBe, tlie boy ; bte ^naBen, the boys ; 

ber 2)eutld}e, the German; bte 2)cilticl)en, the Germans. 

2. The feminine Substantives in e, el and er: 

hit Sicnc, the bee ; bie Stcnen, the bees ; 

bte (Sc^irtejler, the sister ; 'iik ©d)tx)cftern, the sisters ; 

bte ©aBel, the fork ; bie ©aBcln, the forks. 

4. Plural in en : 

1. All Substantives of the second declension, whicb 
take e n in the Genitive Singular : 

2)cr T^iitfi, the prince ; bte j^utftcrt, the princes ; 

ber Solbat, the soldier ; bte (£otbatett, the soldiers. 

2. The Substantives ending in ^ e i t , !ett, f^aft, in 
and ung: 

bie %tii^i{i, liberty; bie ^ei^eiten; 

bie Sirtigfeit, politeness ; Vit Strtigfeiten ; 

bie STeunbfd)aft, friendsliip; bie ^^eunbfdjaften; 

bie ffi}irtf)in,* the hostess ; bie S^irtl)innen ; 

bie 2)ieinung, the opinion ; bte 2}kinungen. 

8. The following Substantives : 

2)a§ Sett, the bed : bie ^rau, the woman ; 

ba§ t§emb, the shirt, Vit (id)lacf)t, the battle; 

ba§ ^ixi, the heart : bie 3Sc[t, the world ; 

ba0 £)\)Xf the ear ; bie %^<x\, the deed; 

^k S(vt, the kind ; hk ©C^rtft, the writing ; 

bie Wi^t, the duty; Vxt (£d)utb, the debt; 

Vi^ XX^X, the watch ; hk 3eit, time ; 

"iik 3fti)l/ the number; bie dual, the torment, 

5* Plural like the Singular. 

1. The masculine and neuter Substantives in er, el 
and en: 

!Der Spiegel, the mirror ; bie (B!picgcl, the mirrors ; 
ber Stbler, the eagle ; bie Stbler, the eagles ; 

bas 2)tdbd)cn, the girl ; ^k 9}tdbd)en, the girls. 

2. The tw^o feminine nouns, bie 33cutter, the mother, 
bie ^odjter, the daughter, which make their Plural: bie 

SJcutter, bie ZM)itx, ' 

* "Words ending in in double their final consonant in the riural. 



15 

§ 15. When the Nominative Plural terminates in 
n, all other cases have the same termination; but ^yhen 
it does not terminate in n, only the Dative takes this 
letter, and the Genitive and Accusative are like the 
Nominative. Ex. : 

IS'om. bie ©rafen, the counts ; bie ^anbe, the hanas , 

Gen. ber ®xa^cn, of the counts ; ber -^dnbe, of the hands ; 
Dat. ben ©rafen, to the counts ; ben t^dnbcn, to the hands • 
Ace. bte @rafcn, the counts ; hk «§dTibe, the hands. 

]S"om. bte t^dujer, the houses ; 

Gen. ber <§dufer, of the houses ; 

Dat. ben <§dufern, to the houses ; 

Ace. hk -^dufer, the houses. 

In this way are declined the Plurals of 

!Der <£d)uf), the shoe ; ber '^clb, the hero ; 

ber ^iid), the table ; bie ^c()u(b, the debt ; 

i)a§ kin'i), the child ; ha§ Di}X, the ear. 

§ 16. Most Substantives change in the Plural the 
radical vowel a into ci, o into o, it into il and an into iut. 
Of this number are : 

1. All Substantives which take the ending e r : 

5)cr 9}tann, the man ; bie 9}?dnncr, the men ; 

ber 3rrtl)um, the error ; bie 3rrtf)umcr, the errors ; 

"i^aS ^cdjf the hole ; bie 2cd}cx, the holes ; 

has •^avLS, the house ; bie <§du|er, the houses. 

2. The masculine and feminine Substantives, which 
take the termination e : 

©ic <$anb, the hand ; Die tgdnbc, the hands, 

ber (Bof)n, the son ; bie ^6t)ne, the sons ; 

ber ^ut, the hat; ik ^iite, the hats. 

The following masculine Substantives are exceptions: 

©er 5(rm, the arm ; ber ^toff, the stuff; 

ber !^aut, the sound ; ber S^uf), the shoe ; 

ber Sold), the dagger ; ber ^unft, the point ; 

ber >§unb/ the dog ; ber Xa^, the day. 

8. The following Substantives, which do not change 
m the Plural : 

Ser 5(pfet, the apple ; ber 33ater, the father ; 

ber 2)ZangeI, the want ; ber 33ruber, the brother ; 

ber S^agel, the nail ; ber ®arten, the garden ; 

ber (Battel, the saddle ; ber ^aben, the thread ; 

ber ?0?antel, the cloak ; ber £)fen, the stove ; 

ber SSogel, the bird ; hk Wlutkv, the mother ; 

ber '§aminery the hammer ; bie ^cd?tcr, the daughter. 



16 







TABLE 




of the drfferer 


t inflexions of German Subatantivos 




I. 


Singular. 




1. 




2. 


3. 


Nom. — 




— 





Gen. § or 


e§ 


n or en 


— 


Dat. — oi 


e 


n or en 


— 


Ace. — 




n or en 


— 




11. Flural. 




1. 




2 




3. 


4. 


Kom. e 




cr 




n or en 


— 


Gen. c 




er 




n or en 


— . 


Dat. en 




m 




n or en 


tt 


Ace. e 




er 




n or en 


— 



IV. OF PROPER NAVIES. 

§. 117. The proper names of persons are declined 
with or without the article. If declined with the article 
they do not change in the Singular. Ex. : 

Kom. ber ^axl, Charles ; fcer 'Bd)ilkx, Schiller ; 

Gen. hcS ^axi§, of Charles ; fcc0 ^djUkx, of Schiller ; 

Dat. bem ^axi, to Charles ; fcem (ic^tller, to Schiller ; 

Ace. ben ^axl, Charles ; ben <B^Hkx, Schiller. 

Used without the article, proper names take no other 
inflexion than an § in the Genitive. Ex. : 

Is^om. ^axl, Charles ; (HdjiUer, Schiller ; 

Gen. ^ax[§, (Bd)ilkx§, 

Dat. Maxi, <Bd)ilkx, 

Ace. Siaxi, S(^t{(er* 

The proper names of w^omen are declined like those 
of men, except those ending in e, which take in the Ge- 
nitive n^f and in the Dative tt. Ex. : 

Nom. Sopi^ie, Sophia : Caroline, Caroline ; 

Gen. (Ecpt)ien0, ^aroUnenS, 

Dat. (Bcivi)kn, ilarolinen; 

Ace. (Sopijic, Caroline. 

When proper names are used in the Plural, the 
masculine ones take the termination e, and the feminine 
the termination n or ett. Ex. : 

Subwig, Lewis ; bte ^ub\t»iC[e, 

Slbelt)cib, Alice ; hk Stbel^eibcn. 

The names of towns and countries are always declined 
without the article, and only take § in the Genitive. Ex. : 

Sftom, Rome ; SiomS, of Rome ; 

Sf^eapel, Naples ; S^capcb, of Naples. 



17 



V. OF THE FOEMATION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 

§ 18. In order to form the feminine of a masculine 
noun, the syllable i n is added to the latter. Ex. : 
(Bin ^ontg, a king ; cine ^lonigiit, a queen ; 

ein ©^aufpiclcr, an actor ; cine (Sc^aufpielerin, an actress. 
If the masculine ends in e, this termination is omit- 
ted in forming the feminine. Ex.: 

^cv ®attc, the hnsband ; hie ©attin, tlie T^ife ; 

ter £oWe, the lion ; Me Sijtnin, the lioness. 

Mostly, in adding in the vowels a, o, it are changed 
into ct, 0, it. 

Set ®raf, the count ; bie ©raftn, the countess ; 

bet S3auer, the peasant ; tie 33duerin, the peasant-wife ; 

ber 'Hiw, the fool ; bie Xt^bxin, the fool. 

From this rule are excepted all Substantives derived 
from foreign languages. Ex.: 

2)cr ©encral, hie ©cneralitt; 

bcr ^rofeffor, bie ^rofeffcrin. 

There are in German, as in English, some feminine 
nouns, which are not derived from their masculines. 
Ex.: 

2)er 9}?ann, the man ; bie ^xan, the woman ; 

bcr 93etter, the cousin ; hie S3afe, the cousin ; 

bcr 9Ieffe, the nephew ; hie 9ii^tc, the niece. 



YI. OF THE DIMINUTIVES. 

§ 19. The German language is very fond of dimi- 
nutives, and particularly in familiar conversation they 
are frequently used. They are formed by adding the 
syllable dj e tt or I e t tt , to the primitive word. Ex. : 
^er %i\d), the table ; bo^ Xi\d;)^en, the little table ; 

bcr 2)Zann, the man ; ha§ Wlann^jen, the little man ; 

bie i^cber, the feather ; ha§ i^cbcrrfjen, the little featlier ; 

has ^inh, the child ; bag ^inblcin, the little child, 

If the primitive word ends in e or e tt , this termina 
tion is suppressed in forming the diminutive : 

S)tc ^anhe, the pigeon •, ha§ S'anbd^en, the little pigeon j 

bcr ©arten, the garden -, ha§ ®drtrt)cn, the small garden. 

Almost all diminutives change n, o, u into (i, o it. 



18 

CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

I. DECLEJN^SIO^'T OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
§ 20. The Adjective is employed either as an attri- 
bute or as an epithet. In this phrase: My father is 
good, the adjective good is an attribute ; in this other 
one : A good father loves his children, it is an epithet. 

The Adjective employed as an attribute is invariable 
in all genders and numbers. Ex.: 

!Der 93ater tfi gut, tlie father is good : 

bte SJ^utter \\i gut, the mother is good ; 

bte jlinber finD gut, the children are good. 
The Adjective employed as an epithet always pre- 
cedes its Substantive, and is declined in three difierent 
ways, according to its being combined with the definite 
article, with the indefinite article, or as it is without any 
article. 

1. If the Adjective is preceded by the definite article, 
it takes in the Nominative Singular the ending e and in 
all other cases. Singular and Plural, e n. The Accusa- 
tive Singular of the feminine and neuter genders, however, 
is the same as the Nominative. Ex.: 
SINGULAR. 
Masculine. 
N. ber gute SQJann, the good man ; 
G. be§ gutcn 9}^anne§, of the good man ; 
D. bem guten SOlanne, to tne good man ; 
A. ben gutcn 3}?ann, the good man. 

Femmine. 
N. bie gute ^rau, the good woman ; 
G. ber gutcn %x<x\\, of the good woman ; 
D. ber guten §Tau, to the good woman ; 
A. 'iii^ gute grau, the good woman. 

Neuter. 
N. ba§ gute ^mb, the good child ; 
G. be§ gutcn 5linbe§, of the good child ; 
D. bem guten ^inbe, to the good child ; 
A. "titx^ gute ^inb, the good child. 

PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. 
N. bie guten 9}cattner, ^raucn, timber ; 
G. ber gutcn 23Janner, ^rauen, ^inber; 
D. ben guten 9}?dnnern, ^raucn, yiinbern ; 
A. ^\z gutcn 9?tdnncr, "^vauen, ilinbcr. 



19 

The Adjective is declined in the same manner, if it 
is preceded by any determinative word which has the 
terminations of the definite article, as: biefer, jener 
this, that; Jeber, every; li')eld;.er, which. 

2. If the Adjective is preceded by the indefinite 
article, it takes in the Nominative of the Singular the 
ending er for the masculine, e for the feminine, and 
§ for the neuter. All other cases take C n, except 
the Accusative feminine and neuter, which is like the 
Nominative. Ex. : 

Masculine. 
N. cin ganjer Sag, a -whole day ; 
G. ctneS gangen '^aqeS, of a whole day ; 
D. ctnem ganjen Xa^t, to a whole day ; 
A. eincn ganjcn 2^ag, a whole day. 

Feminine. 
I^. erne ganje 9ivid}t, a whole nighfc ■, 
G. einer ganjen dladjt, of a whole night ; 
D. ctner ganjen 9Ucl)t, to a whole night ; 
A. cine ganje Sladjt, a whole night. 

Neuter. 
N. cin ganjea 3al)r, a whole year ; 
G. etnes ganjcn 3af)re§, of a whole year ; 
D. cinem ganjen 3af)rc, to a whole year ; 
A. cin ganjeS 3af)r, a whole year. 

The Adjective is declined in the same way, when 
preceded by the determinative word fein, no, or by one 
of the possessive pronouns inein, betn, [cin, unfer, euer, 
iljr, my, thy, his, our, your, their. If preceded by any 
of these words in the plural, it takes the termination c n 
in all cases. Ex.: 



Plural for all Genders. 

K. feme guten 2Jtanner, ^rciiten, ^tmber ; 

G. !einer guten SOMnner, i^rauen, 5tinber; 

D. feinen guten SJiannern, §raucn, ^inbern; 

A. feine guten 2Jtdnner, ^rauen, ilinber. 

3. If the Adjective is preceded by neither an article 
nor by any other determinative word, it adopts the 
terminations of the definite article and is declined in the 
folio win f^ manner : 



20 



Masculine. 

N gitter SBcin, good wine or some good wine ; * 

G. gutcn SSctncI, of good wine ; t 

D, gutcm QBeine, to good wine ; 

A. gutcn SBein, good wine. 

Feminine. 

N. frtf^e 9J?it^, fresh milk ; 

G. frijc^er 2}^ild), of fresh milk ; 

B. frifct)cr SOiilc^, to fresh milk ; 
A. frifdje SJitld), fresh milk. 

is"". f^ttJargcS %\X&j, black cloth ; 

G, fct)warjc6 Suct)e0, of black cloth ; 

D. jd^iDarjem Zu&jt, to black cloth ; 

A. \&iXoaxlt^ ^uc^, black cloth. 

Plural for all Genders. 
K. fd)6nc S3lumetT, fine flowers ; 
G. fd)dner tinmen, of fine flowers ; 
D. fcf)Dnen ffilumen, to fine flowers ; 
A. fd)5ne ^lumen, fine flowers, 

Participles, used adjectivelj, are declined like ad« 
jectives. 

II. DEGREES OF COMPAPJSOJT OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

§ 21. The Comparative of an adjective is formed by 
adding tlie termination cr, and the Superlative by 
adding the termination ft e, Ex. : 

Sflcid), rich ; rcldjer, richer ; bcr rcidjfle, the richest , 

fd)5n, fine ; f(^oner, finer ; bcr fd}6nfte, the finest ; 

milb, mild ; milber, milder ; bcr mitbefte,1: the mildest. 

The radical vowel of the Positive is softened in the 
Comparative and Superlative : a changes into (i, o into 
ci, u into ii» Ex.: 

SUt, old ; alter, older ; bcr dltcfie, the oldest ; 

9V0§, great ; greyer, greater ; bcr gro^te, the greatest ; 

jung, young ; jimger, younger ; bcr ixmgfte, the youngest. 

* The word some before a Substantive, is never translated m 
German. 

t In the Genitive masculine and neuter they employ at present 
more frequently the termination en, giitcn SBcineg, fd)tr»arjen 2iuc}ic5. 

1 Instead of ft e, we add c ft e , when euphony demands it. 



21 

The following Adjectives are exceptions: 

2SaI)r, true ; \ad)tc, soft, slow ; 

fdjlanf, slender ; iaxc\, stingy ; 

fc{}laff, lax ; runb, round ; 

fan[t, soft ; bunt, motley ; 

matt, faint ; ftumpf, blunt ; 

^ad), flat ; frc^, joyful ; 

falic^, false ; I)olb, gracious ; 

bla§, pale ; rof), raw ; 

glatt, slippery ; toU, mad ; 

gerabe, straight ; Kod, full ; 

as well as the Adjectives ending in bar, ^cift and 
fain. Ex.: banfbar, grateful; baufbarer, more grateful; 
bo§()aft, malicious ; bo^^after, more malicious ; fparfam, 
economical; fparfamer, more economical. 

§ 22. The following Adjectives are irregular. 

©lit, good ; Bcfjer, better ; bcr bcfic, the best ; 

nai), near ; na()cr, nearer ; bcr ndd)fte, the next ; 

'ijodj, high ; l^o()er, higher ; bcr ^5d)fte, the highest ; 

»iel, much ; . mc{)r, more ; bcr meifte, the most. 

§ 23. Comparatives and Superlatives are declined 
according to the same rules as the Adjectives in the 
Positive. Ex.: ber Heme Xi]d)f the small table; ber 
fletnere S^tfcf), the smaller table ; ber Itetnfte S^ifcf), the 
smallest table: etn fleiner Xi]d)f a little table; etn 
!(etnerer Zi\dj, a smaller table; ein fd)one§ ^itc^, a 
beautiful book; ein fcfjonereS ^ndj, a more beautiful book 



CHAPTEE lY. 

or THE NUMBEKS. 

§ 24. The cardinal numbers are ; 

1 cin§, 11 elf, 

2 j»et, 12 jttjcif, 

3 brei, 13 btetjcfjn, 

4 V)kv, 14 oierjc^n, 

5 finif, 15 funf^ci:)n, 

6 fcd}§, 16 fcd)§scf)n, 

7 ftcbcn, 17 ftcbenjefjn, 

8 ad^t, 18 ad)t5cl)n, 

9 ncun, 19 neunjcf)!!, 
10 ,^c{}n, 20 i^imn^ig, 



22 

21 ciu unb J^^anjig, 80 ad)t^ig, 

22 gli^ci uub jwanjig, GO ncuujig, 

23 brci unb jiranjtg, 100 {)unbcrt, 

24 mx xiub jwanjtg, 101 l}unbcrt cin§, 

25 fiinf unb ^wanjig, 102 ^unbcrt i\rct, 
80 bvcipig, 103 l)unbcrt brct, 
40 i^terjtg, 200 jtijetfjunbert, 
50 fiintsig, 1000 taufenb, 

60 fcd^^ig, 2000 jweitaufenb, 

70 fiebenjig, 10,000 jcl)ntau|cnb. 

859 taui'cnb ad)tl)unbcrt ucun unb funfS'S/ or arf}tje(}ii Tjunbcrt neun utiii 
fiinfjig; a million, eine SJcilUcn. 

(Sm^3 is the neuter of ein, and is only used when no 
object of determinate masculine or feminine gender is 
understood, ^^v^i and bret, if not preceded by any 
determinative word, take in the Genitive the termina- 
tion er, Ex.: bie ^(u§[age ^ttieter 3(^1^9 ^i^r the deposition 
of two witnesses. The other cardinal numbers remain 
unaltered, except in the Dative, where they sometimes 
take the termination e n. 

§ 25. The ordinal numbers are adjectives, and are 
derived from the cardinal numbers by the addition of the 
syllable t e or fte. From two to nineteen is added tc, 
the rest take ft e. 

!j)cr crj^e, the first ; bet* gVt^anjigjle, the twentieth ; 

fccr ^'(imtc, tlie second ; bcr cin unb jtcanjigfle, the twentj- 

ber britte, the third ; first ; 

bet incite, the fourth ; ber breif fgfle, the thirtieth ; 

bcr funftc, the fifth ; ber fiinfjigfte, the fiftieth ; 

ber ad)tc, the eighth ; bcr Ijunbcrtfte, the hundredth ; 

ber stcolfte, the t^velfth ; ber taufenbfte, the thousandth. 

From these are derived, by the addition of n § , the 
ordinal adverbs : 

(Srf!en§, firstly, in the first place ; 
3wetten§, secondly, in the second place ; 
©rittcnS, thirdly, in the thira place ; 
S3iertcnS, fourthly, in the fourth place. 

§ 26. The other numbers are: 

1. Multiplicative Numbers. 

(Sinfad), single ; jcl)nfad), tenfold ; 

jrocifact), double ; * l^unbcrtfac^, a hundredfold ; 

brcifad), treble ; taufcnbfad}, a thousandfold. 

* Instead of jlrcifad) K. may be said : jirciiaUig, taufcnbfattt'g ic. 



We may add to these the adverbs which are formed 
by the substantive DJMI, time : 

(Sinmal, once ; incrmat, four times ; 

gtiicimal, twice ; I)unbcrtmal, a hundred times ; 

Bvcimal, thrice ; taufcnbmal, a thousand times. 

2. Distributive Numbers. 
.^alB, half; cin.^cln, one by one ; 

bte "^alfte, the half; viaarwcife, by pairs ; 

has ©rittct; the third part ; jc brct unb brct, by threes ; 

ba§ Sicvtel, the fourth part ; bulpenbweife, by the dozen. 
Add to these the adverbs, formed by the old word ( c i 
which signifies sort or kind: 

©inetlet, of one kind ; :nand)crlef, of several kinds , 

gtrctcrlei, of two kinds ; inclcrlet, of many kinds ; 
breierlet, of three kinds ; aderlct, of all kinds. 

Observe also the following ways of speaking of the 
Germans : 

9lnbcrtf)aI6, one and a half; 1)0.^ chlS, half past twelve 
brittl)alb, two and a half; I)alb JWet, half past one ; 

5;tcrt()al&, three and a half; l)aih brei, half past two. 

§ 27. The ordinal numbers are used as in English; 
after the names of sovereigns, and in dates : 
S)cr i)terte St^ril, the fourth of April ; 
bcr acl}tc 2}cat, May the eighth ; 
^ub\t>tg bcr clfte, Lewis the eleventh ; 
«^cinrtd) ber inerte, Henry the fourth. 



CHAP TEE V. 

OF PRO^S'OUIs^S. 

1. DETERMINATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
§ 28. The first person is expressed by ic^, I; Plural, 
Mm, we; the second person by bit, thou; Plural, i^r, 
you ; the third person by cr, he ; fie, she ; e§, it ; and 
lie, they ; Plural for all genders. They are declined in 
the following manner. 

Singular. 
First person. Second person. 

N. idj, I ; bit, thou ; 

G. meincr, of me ; bciner, of thee ; 

D. mix, to me ; btr, to thee; 

A. iiiid), me ; bttt, thee. 



24 

Plural. 
N". \x*[r, we ; ii^x, yon ; 

G. wnfcr, of us cucr, of you ; 

D. un§, to us ; end), to you ; 

A. nni, us ; curf), you. 

Third person. 
Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

N, er, he ; fte, she ; c§, it ; 

G. fcincr, of him ; ii)xex, of her ; fciner, of it ; 

D. t()m, to him; t()r, to her ; if)m, to it; 

A. {|;n, him. fie, her. c§, it. 

Plural tor all Genders. 
E". ftc, they ; 
G. t^rer, of them ; 
D. x^nen, to them ; 
A. fte, them. 
§ 29. The reflective pronoun of the third person fid), 
himself, herself, itself, has no Nominative, and is declined 
thus: 

Masculine and Neuter. Feminine. Plural. 

G. fciner, of himself; t^rcr, of herself ; if)rer, of themselves ; 

I>. fid), to himself; fid}, to herself; fid), to themselves ; 

A. fid), himself. fic^, herself. fid), themselves. 

Sometimes the word fctbft, self, is joined to the perso- 
nal pronouns. Ex.: ic^ felbft, myself; bu felbft, thyself ; er 
felbft, himself; fid) felbft, one's self; \v>iv felbft, ourselves. 
In joining the word fe(bft to a verh, the pronouns are 
not repeated as in English. Ex. : (gr fjat e§ felbft gcfagt, 
he said so himself; fie l)at e§ mir felbft gcfagt, she told it 
to me herself. 

§ 80. The pronoun bit is used in intimacy or con- 
tempt. When the Germans speak to a person who de- 
serves respect, they employ @te and Sljnen, that is t-r 
say, the plural of the pronoun in the third person. Ex, 
(Sic l^aBcrt c§ mix gefagt, you told me so ; 
i^ fenne ©ie Ttid)t, I do not know you ; 
id) toiii eS 2^nm gebcn, I will give it to you. 

2. INDETERMINATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

. 81. The indeterminate personal pronouns are: 

2}?aTt, one, they ; ^cbermann, every one ; 

Semanb, somelDody ; Siner, some one ; 
^icmanb, nobody ; Reiner, no one. 



I 



93?an is indeclinable ; 3'^'^^^'li^^'itt'-^ takes in tlie Genitive 
an ^; ^^emanb and 9tiemanb are either invariable or take 
the endings of the definite article. Ex.: 
SBcnn man reict) i\t, fjat man ^^rcunbc. When one is rich one has friends 
Setermann tr»irb e§ tf)nen fagcn. Every one will tell you. 

(S§ i)at Semanb nad) 31)ncn gefvagt. Somebody has asked for you. 
9}ian mu§ Dltemanben Ijaffcn. We must hate nobody. 

Reiner iwcip, cb cr morgcn noc^ Icben No one knows, if he will live till 

lt)irb. to-morrow. 

§ 32. Add to these pronouns the following words : 

(StttJaS, something, anything ; 

nid)t§, nothing ; 

jcbcr, jebe, jebeS^ every, each, every one ; 

aikx, alk, aikS, all, everything ; 

folder, fot^e, fold)cs, such ; 

manner, mand)c, man^cS, many a, many a one ; 

mctjrere, several; 

irgenb cin, any, some 

etntge, some ; 

^k meiften, the most. 

Examples. 
3d) 'ijobi ct\va§ ^cm§ i?cvnommcn. I have heard something new. 
3ct) I)abe nid)t§ ge^ort. I have heard nothing. 

Sebcr mu§ fcinc *J|5^id)ten crfuHcn. Every one must fulfil his duties. 
3cbcg i'anb i}at fcine @cbrdud)e. Every country has its customs. 
SU(e 2)tcnfd)cn ftnb ftcrblid^. All men are mortal. 

5UIcS i^ lu^rloren. Every thing is lost. 

(Sin folc^er 33erlufi if! unerfclttd). Such a loss is irreparable. 
Slianc^er jdct, ber nic^t ernbtct. Many a one sows, who does not 

reap. 
3d) T)abe manc^cn STag lierlorcn. I have lost many a day. 

©cben (Sie mtr cinige ^cbcnt. Give me some pens. 

£cil)cn Sic mir irgenb cin 33ud). Lend me some book. 
93i£in ©ruber Ijat mel^rere ^Teunbe. My brother has sevei*al friends. 
^k mcifien 2}ccnfd)en xirtl)eilen nad) Most men judge according to ap* 
beni (£d;ein. pearances. 



CHAPTEK VI. 

OF ADJECTIVE AND RELATIVE PKONOUNS. 

1. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUITS. 

§ 83. The demonstrative pronouns are : 

For near objects : 
biefcr, bie[e, biefe§, this, this one. 

For distant objects : 
jener, jenc, ienc§, that, that one. 
Ex. ©icfcr 9}cann, this man ; bte[e %xau, this woman ; btefe^ 5?tnb, 
this child ; jener ^ifd)/ that table ; jcne Sober, tliat pen ; |ene§ S3uc^/ 



26 

Aat book. S)ie[cr iji gluc!lid}, Sener ijl imgludlid), this oue is liappj 
that one is unhappy. 

The demonstrative Pronouns have the same termina- 
tions as the definite article, and are declined in the 
same manner. 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Neuter. 


Plural 


]S^ biefer, 


btcfc, 


biefcS, 


bic'e, 


G. btcfeg, 


bicfer, 


bicfc0, 


bicfer. 


I), biefem, 


biefcr, 


bicfcm, 


btcfen, 


A. biejeit, 


bieje, 


btcjeS, 


bieje. 



Instead of btefe§, one may say bteS in the Nominative 
and Accusative Neuter : bie^ -^udj, this book. 

§ 84. Instead of biefer and jerter the article ber, bie, 
6a§, is very often employed, on which in that case a 
greater stress is placed. Ex. : 

2) C r 2)iatttt, this man ; b t e %X<XVi, this woman ; 
ha.^ itinb/ this child. 

When ber, bte, ba§, taking the place of btefe§ or j;ene§, 
does not accompany a substantive, it is declined as fol- 
lows : 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Plural. 

N. ber, Vx^, 'i^'X§, btc, 

G. bcffen, beren, bc])en, bcrer, 

D. bem, bcr, bent, bencn, 

A. ben, bie, "i^^i^:, bic. 

§ 35. With the adjective pronouns are also numbered: 
S)crienige, bicjentge, basjcntgc, the one ; 
berfelbc, biejclbe, baji'clbe, the same. 
These words are compound of the definite article which 
is declined in all cases, and of {enige and felbe, 
which are declined like adjectives. Ex.: 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 
K berfelBe, biefelBc, bafjctfee, btefclben, the same ; 
G. belfelben, berfelben, bcgfelbcn, bcrfelbcn, of the same ; 
D. bemjclbcn, berfelbcn, bcmfelben, benjelben, to the same ; 
A. benfelben, biefelbc, baSfelbe, biefelben, the same. 

§ 2>Q. S^erieuicje, &c. is always construed with the re- 
lative pronoun ir)e(d)er, iT^eldjC, &c. and answers in this 
construction to the English; he who, that which, the one 
who or which. Ex. : 

S)erientge, n^elc^er fommt, he who comes ; 
biejenige, itield}e lpTid}t/ she who speaks : 
bagfcnige, "vodd^^ id) meinc, that wliich I mean ; 
btcjenigen, ixtetdje bcrcit fi^^; those who are ready. 



27 



2. POSSESSIVE rEOXOU:N'S. 



§ 87« The possessive pronouns are either joined to 
a substantive or they stand alone ; or in other words 
they are either conjoined or disjoined. 

The conjoined possessive pronouns are the following : 



lasculinc. 


Feminine. 


Neuter. 




mcin, 


meirtc, 


mdn, 


my; 


betn, 


beinc; 


bein, 


thy; 


fCtlt; 


fcinc, 


fcin, 


his; 


ii)x, 


it)rc, 


il)r, 


her; 


fcin, 


feine, 


fein, 


its; 


unfer, 


unfere, 


unfcr, 


our; 


cuer, 


eiicrc, 


euer, 


your ; 


\i)X, 


if)re, 


i^r, 


their. 



§ 38. The conjoined possessive pronouns take the 
same inflexions as the article ein, eine, ein. Ex.: 

Singular. Plural. 

jS". mem 93ruber, my brotlier ; tneine S3rxibcr, my brothers ; 

G. nteineS 53rubcr0, mctner ^rubcr, 

D. metnem 53rubcr, incinen S3rubertt, 

A. ■meinen S3rubcr, mcine ^ruber. 

§ 89. The disjoined possessive pronouns are derived 
from the conjoined ones, by adding the syllable tg. 

bcr meinigc, bte ntcmtge, t)<x§ ntcintgc, mine ; 

bcr beinige, bic bcintge, 'ta^ beintge, thine ; 

bcr feinige, bie fcintge, 'i)o.§ [cinige, his ; 

bcr if)rige, Viz tljrtge, ba§ if)rige, hers ; 

ber fcmtgc, Vit feinige, "ii^Q feinige, its ; 

bcr unfrige, V\t unfrige, baS unfrig-e, ours ; 

ber eurige, bie eurige, ba§ curigc, yours ; 

bcr i^rige, bie i^rige, ba§ i^rige, theirs. 

Instead of ber rnetmge, ber beinige, &c. they say very 
frequently bcr ntetne, bcr betne; or without the article, 
mctner, mctne, tnetne§; beiner, bcine, bcine§ or betn§. 

3. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 40. Relative pronouns always refer to a preceding 
substantive. There are two of them in German : 
«^e., |^,„^ «.cM,e, ,^,„^ «,cM,c., ^ ,,,,,„, ,,,, 

SBelc^er, incline, tnelc^e^ are declined like the definite 
article; ber, bie, ba'3 are declined like the demonstra- 



28 

tive pronouns, ber, bie, ha^, with tlie only difference tliat 
in the Genitive Plural it has always beren, Ex. : 

®cr SOJann, tnclc^cr atBeitct, the man -who works ; 

bie ^'xan, trclci)e tr»cint, the woman who is crying ; 

has jtinb, it)clc^c5 jp'iclt, the child that is playing. 



2)er itnabe, ben (Sie loBcn, the boy whom yon praise ; 

ber ©artcn, treldjen (ite fefjen, the garden which you see ; 
bie «^au[er, iv)eld}e (2te faufcn, the houses which you buy 



©er S3cbiente, bcm ^ie c§ ge^ the man-servant to whom you 

geben Ijahm, gave it ; 

i)k 2}iagb, tx»elc^cr (Bie e§ gc; the maid-servant to whom you 

fagt ^aben, said it ; 

bie ^Teunbe, benen ir*ir fd)reiBett, the friends to whom we write, 

§ 41. One may use indiff*erently it)et(i)er or ber, ex- 
cept in the Genitive, for which ireldjer is not used. 
Whose of whom and of which are always expressed by 
beffen and beren. Ex. : 

Set 3}iantt, bejfen (So^n !ran! i^, the man whose son is ill ; 

bie %t<xvi, beren ^inber geftorben the woman whose children have 

ftnb, died ; 

bte^inber, bcrcn SJiutter angefonti the children whose mother is ar- 

men ift, rived. 

4. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUISrS. 

§ 42. The interrogative pronouns are ; 

\OtX, who ; tt»a0, what ; 
Xod^ix, iceldje, WelcijeS, which, 
^er and inaS are never accompanied by a substjwative ; 
\dzx is declined like the demonstrative pronoun ber ; and 
ina^ is ordinarily indeclinable. 

3Bcr ifl ba ? Who is there ? 

9Ser if^ biefcr SKann ? Who is this man ? 

3Ber ift btefe ^au ? Who is this woman ? 

SBcflen «§au0 ift bieS ? Whose house is this ? 

SBciu fd)reibcn (£ie? To whom do you write? 

SBen jud^en ©te ? Whom do you look for ? 

aOaS finbtrtir? What are we? 

SBaS fagcn ©ie ? What do you say ? 

The interrogative pronoun Inelc^er, which is usually 
accompanied by a substantive and is declined like the 
definite article. Ex. : 



29 

5ffictd}er 5(rjt i\i angcfomntcu? Which physician is arrived? 

SBeId)e §eber ij^ bie mcmtgc? Which pen is mine? 

QBeldjcS 'QaiiS ift ju scrfaufcn? Which house is to be sold? 

2Bcld}en «^ut Wd()len (£te '? Which hat do you choose? 

Sficld)er 53(ume gcBcn ©ie ben 23oi*- To which flower do you give th« 

jug '? preference ? 

2Scld)er l^Olt fctefen ©drtcn ge'pvt Which of these gardens belongs 

Sijnen? to you? 

2BcId}e§ bort bic[cn «§dufcnt ii^cKeu Which of this houses do you 

©te faufcit ? wish to buy ? 

Seld^cm »otl btefcn JlnaBcn l^ajl bit To which of these boys hast thou 

bein 53rob gcgcben? given thy bread ? 

3d) f^ahe bcin i^ebermejjcr ctrtcr I have given thy penknife to one 

bettier (£d)h)ejlent gegeb^en? SQcU of tliy eisters. To which (of 

d)er ? them) ? 

§ 43. The pronoun \va^, accompanied by the inde- 
finite article etn, and the preposition fiir, may equally 
be employed as an interrogative, and answers to the 
English : what Mnd of, Ex. : 
3i3a§ fur citt S3ud) liefefl: '^\x% What or what kind of book do 

you read? 
2Ba0 filr etn 3}?atttt ivar (SofratcS ? What sort of man was Socrates? 
2Sa6 fur cine Scber fud}|l bu? What pen do you look for? 

iffivtS fiiv einen «§unb l^crfaufft bu ? What dog do you sell ? 

In the Plural the indefinite article disappears: SBa3 
fiir 2jidnncr ? What kind of men ? 

§ 44. The interrogative Pronoun iDcr is often used 
instead of berjeuiiie tnetdjer, he who, and ina^ instead of 
ba^ientcje ItdcWjcS, that which. Ex.: 

9Scr jufrieben ifi, tfi glucflic^. ^ He who is contented, is happy. 
&Ba§ fd)5n \^, ift nid}t imincr nu^; That which is beautiful is not al- 
lid), ways useful. 



CHAPTER VII. 

OF THE VERB. 
1. PEELIMIXAET NOTIONS. 

§ 45. German verbs have only three moods : the In- 
dicative, the Subjunctive, and the Imperative. 
The Indicative Mood has but two simple tenses, viz.: 

The Present Tense : \^) fd)rc{Be, I write ; 

The Imperfect Tense; \^Cj fdjttcb, I wrote. 

6 



80 

All other tenses are formed by means of tlie auxiliary 
verbs. Ex. : 

Perfect Tense : t(^ ^abc gefc^rtcljen, I have written. 

Pluperfect Tense : id) ^attc gefdjrtebcn, I had written. 

1st Future Tense: ic^ Werbe fd)reibcn, I shall write. 

2d Future Tense : id) trerbe gejd)tieben ^ahm, I shall have written. 
The Subjunctive Mood has the same tenses as tho 
Indicative Mood. The Potential or Conditional Mood 
is expressed either by the Imperfect tense of the Sub- 
junctive mood or by a circumlocution. 

§ 46. The Infinitive of all German verbs terminates 
in en; by taking off this termination we find the root of 
the verb. Ex. : ^d)xtih is the root of the verb f djreiben, 
to write ; fag the root of the verb f agen, to say. 

§ 47. The regular German verbs are divided into 
assonant and dissonant verbs. 

We call assonant those verbs, in which the modi- 
fications of tenses, persons, &c. are marked by terini' 
nations or initials added to the root, without this root's 
suffering any alteration. 

We call dissonant those verbs, whose Imperfect and 
often also the Imperative and Past participle are formed 
by changing the vowel of the root. 

2. OF THE CONJUGATION OF ASSONANT VERBS. 

§ 48. The Present tense of the Indicative Mood of 
assonant verbs is formed by the following terminations : 

Sing. 1. — e 

2.-fi 

3.— t 
Plur. l.~en 

2.— t 

3.— en. 

The Present tense of the Subjunctive Mood is like 
that of the Indicative Mood, with the exeption that the 
third person Singular is like the first, and that the ter 
minations ft and t are always preceded by an c. Ex.: 

Sing. 1. — c 

2.— cjl 

3.— e 
Plur. 1.— en 

2.— et 

3.— en. 



81 

The Imperfect tense of the Indicative as well as of 
the Subjunctive Mood is formed bj adding the followincr 
terminations : 

Sing. 1.— tc 

2.— tell 
«* 3.— te 
Plur. 1.— ten 

2.— tet 

3.— ten. 

The Imperative Mood is formed by adding to the 
root of the verb an e for the Singular and e t for the 
Plural. 

The present participle is formed by adding enb to 
the root. The past participle is formed by placing the 
initials g e before, and the termination t after the root- 



MODEL OF CO^^JUGATIOK 
Soktt, to praise. 

Present Tense. 
Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mooi. 

t^ loB — e, I praise, I do praise, id) lo& — t, (if) I praise. 

[am praising, 

bu loB— fl bu tcB— cjl 

cr Icb — t cr Icb — e 

ft)tr lob — en ir>tr lob — en 

il)r Icb — et tjir Icb — et 

fie lob— en fie lob — en. 
Imperfect Tense. 

id) lob — te, I praised, I did praise, icE) lob — te, (if) I praised. 

[was praising, 
bn Icb— tei^ bu lob— tejl 

cr lob — tc er lob — te 

tr>ir lob — ten nirlob — ten 

i^r lob— tet i:^r lob— tet 

fie lob — ten fie lob — ten. 

Iraperatiye Mood: loB — t, praise (thou); lob — ct, praise (je). 

Present Participle : lob — enb, praising. 

Perfect Participle : ge — lob — i, praised. 
Observation. "When the euphony demands it, the terminations of the 
Imperfect, as well as those of the Present Tense in t and \t, are pre- 
ceded by an e. Ex. : 3^ tebc, I speak; bu rebejl:, thou speakest; et 
rebet, he speaks ; \))x rebel, you speak. Scl) rebete, I spoke ; bu rebeteft; 
thou spokest; er rebete, he spoke; it»ir rebeten, we spoke; il)r rebctet, 
you spoke ; fte rebeten, they spoke. In those verbs, the root of which 
ends in b or t this softening always takes place. 



82 

§ 49. There are assonant as well as dissonant verbs, 
which do not take the initials cj e in the Perfect Parti- 
ciple. Of this class are : 

1. The verbs, which have the foreign termination ire 11 
Drier en. Ex.: j, 

regicren, to govern rcgtert, governed 
fpajicrcn, to walk fpajiert, walked 

abbircn^L to add abbirt, added. 

2. Those derived verbs, which begin by one of the 
particles be, ge, ent, tmp, cr, ber, ^er.* Ex.: 

Be[ud)ett, to visit Bcfud)t, visited 

erlangert, to attain erkrtgt, attained 

ijetirteilert/ to stay setiDeilt, staid 

jcrftorcn, to destroy gCrftort; destroyed. 

3. The verbs, "which are compounded with an inse- 
parable preposition or adverb. Ex.: 

unterrtd)ten, to instruct xintcrrtd)tct, instructed 
Itibcrlcgen, to refute it>iberlegt, refuted 

lioHcnbeU; to complete iJoKenbet/ completed. 

In verbs, which are compounded with a separable pre- 
position or adverb, the syllable g e is placed between the 
verb and the preposition or adverb. Ex. : 

aBfurjcn, to shorten abgefurjt, shortened 

onflagcn, to accuse angcflngt, accused 

fortjageit, to send away fortgejagt, sent away. . 

§ 50. Conjugate the following verbs : 
fagcn, to say ircincn, to weep 

iieben, to love Iad)cn, to laugh 

glaubert, to believe fii^lert, to feel 

ttji'mf^en, to wish t)orcn, to hear 

f)oftcn, to hope jpielen, to play. 

3. OF THE COIS^JUGATION" OF THE DISSONANT VERBS. 

§ 51. The number of dissonant verbs is about 150 
and they take in the Present Tense of the Indicative 
and Subjunctive Moods the same terminations as the 
assonant verbs. 

The Imperfect Tense of the Indicative Mood in dis- 
sonant verbs is formed by changing the radical vowel 
or diphthong. The first and third person Singular 

* See the Chapter on derived and compound verbs. 



take no inflexion, the other persons take the same as in 
the Present tense of the Indicative Mood. 

The Imperfect tense of the Subjmictive Mood is 
formed by softening the vowel of the Indicative (a into 
(t, into d, U into ii), and adding the terminations of tlie 
Present tense (Subjunct. Mood.) 

The Imperative Mood takes commonly the same tenni* 
nations as in the assonant verbs; sometimes also it is 
formed by changing the radical vowel. 

The Present Participle is always the same as in the 
assonant verbs ; but the Perfect Participle terminates in 
en instead of et and very often undergoes also an altera- 
tion of the radical vowel. 



MODEL OF COXJUGATION. 
Xxxnkn, to drink. 

Present. Tense. 
Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

tcf) ix'ml — c, I drink, am drinking, id) trinf — c, (if) I drink, 

hi tvinf — ft tu trinf — zit 

cr trinf — t cr trinf — e 

lr>ir trinf — en \x>\x trinf — en 

if)r trinf — t \\)X trinf — et 

fie trinf — en jte trinf — en. 

Imperfect Tense. 

id; tranf, I drank, did drink, vas \6,) trdnf — e, (if) I drank. 

[drinking. 
tu tran! — j^ bit tranf — c|! 

cr tranf er tranf — c 

ir>ir tranf — en irir tranf — en 

if)r tranf — t if)r trdnf — et 

fie tranf — en fie trdnf — en. 

Imperative Mood : trinf — e, drink (thou) ; trinf — ct, drink (jo). 

Present Participle : trinf — enb, drinking. 

Perfect Participle : ge — trunf — en, drunk. 

Observation. The e of the Imperative may be suppressed : tttnf| 
irinft; lob', lc6t. 

§ 52. The Singular of the Imperative Mood is some- 
times formed by changing the radical vowel (§ 51), but 
the Plural always keeps the form of the assonant verbs : 
gcben, to give; gib, give (thou) ; Qebct, give (ye). 



84 

Every time the Imperatiye Mood is formed hy 
clianging the radical vowel, the 2d and 8d Persons of 
Present Tense, Indicative Mood, undergoes the same 
change: gcbeit, to give; gib, give (thou); bit gibft, thou 
givest; er gibt, he gives. Ex.: 

(Sterben, to die. 



Present Tense. 



Indieative Mood. 
\6,) ftcrb — e, I die. 
bu ftirB— ft 
cr ftirb— t 
iuir ficrB — en 
iijX fterb— t 
fte ftcrb — en 



Subjunctive Mood. 
[&) fierB — c, (if) I die. 
bu ftcrB — <i\t 
cr ftcrb — e 
iiJtr ftcrb — en 
il)r ftcrb— et 
fie ftcrb — en. 



Imperative Mood : ftirb, die (tliou) ; ftcrb — et, die (ye). 

§ 53. The dissonant verbs change, in the Imperfect 
Tense of the Indicative as well as the Subjunctive Mood, 
their radical vowel either into o, t, a or u. Hence we 
have four diflerent classes of dissonant verbs. The Per- 
fect Participle either keeps the vowel of the Imperfect 
Tense, or takes back that of the root, or differs from 
both, as is shown in the followins; table. 



Class. 


Imperf. 


Perf. Fart. 


1. 
2. 
3.* 

4. 




. i 

a 

u, a, I. 




I 
u or 
radical yowel. 



FIRST CLASS. 



The first class comprehends those dissonant verbs, 
which change their radical vowel into a long or short o : 

1. Ion or. 



Infinitive. 


Imperfect. 


Perfect Part 


fc^tcben, to pusli 
bicqcn, to bend 


fcl)cb 
beg 


gcfd)cbcn 
gcbcqcn 


f[icgen, to fly 
ir>tcgcn, to weigli 
frtcren, to freeze 
ycrlicren; to lose 


frcr 
lu'rfcr 


gcflcgcn 
gcwogcn 
gcfroren 
iHTlorcn 


bictcn, to offer 


bet 


gcboten 


|ilic()cn, to flee 
jte^cn, to draw 


fief) 


gejicl)en 
gc^ogen 



fd)erett, to shear 
fd}Wdren, to swear 
faugcn, to suck 
iiigen, to lie (sjDeak an 

tintruth) 
6ctvugeU/ to deceive 

2. 

fd)lc0en^ to shoot 

^ie^cn, to pour 

gcntc^en, to enjoy 

fd}lie|cn, to shut 

ycrbric^en, to grieve 

jpric^en, to germinate 

frierfjcn, to crawl 

rlec^en, to smell 

triefen, to drip 

ficbcn, to boil 

jcc^ten, to fight 

ficd^ten, to plait, to braid 

quellen, to spring 

fd}ir>e((€tt, to swell 

f aufett, to drink (to animals) fcff 
Observalion. Most verbs of the first class have { c for their radical 
vowel. The verb jiel^en changes in the Imperf, Tense and in the 
Perfect Part, f) into g ; ttiefctt/ ficbcn and faufett double the end-con- 
sonant of the root, in order to make the o short. 
SECOND CLASS. 
The second class comprehends those verhs, which 
change their radical vowel into i (t short) or into ie (i 
long). 

1. i short 



ld)ov 


gcfd)oren 


fd)ivoc 


ge djworctt 


H 


ge ogen 


log 


gclogcu 


Betrcg 


fcctrcgen 


short. 




fd)o$ 


gcfd)of|c)t 


600 


gcgoffcu 


qcno§ 


gcnclfcn 


\dm 


gcfd}lof|cn 


Vcrbvcp 


ycrbroficti 


fprojj 


gefproffeit 


frod) 


gcfrod)eix 


rod) 


gerod)cu 


trcff 


gctroffen; 


fott 


gcfottcit 


fo^t 


gcfod^ten 


|iod)t 


gcj!od}tcii 


quote 


gcquollcn 


c^woU 


gcfd^woUett 


) fcff 


gcfoft'cn. 



Infinitive. 


Imperfect. 


Perfect Part. 


Vfcifctt, to whistle 


m 


gt^^fiffett 


greifen, to seize 


flriff 


gegriffett 


tnetfen, to pinch 


fniff 


gefniffett 


fd)lcifcn, to grind 


fc^Ujf 


9cfd}ancit 


fect§en, to bite 


Big 


ge&iflen 


rci^en, to tear 


rig 


gertfictt 


fd)lci0cn, to split 


Wi^ 


gefc^liffett 


jd)mci§en, to throw 


f^mig 


gefc^mif)ert 


gleid^en, to resemble 


gli^ 


gcglic^ctt 
gefd)li^ett 


fd}lcid)cn, to sneak 


mi^ 


ftreid)en, to stroke 


fkidj 


gcftrtdjcu 


ireid)cn; to yield 


irtd) 


getiiid;cit 


glcitcn, to glide 


g(itt 


gcglittett 


rctten, to ride on horsebacL 


: ritt 


gerittcn 


fd)retteii, to stride 


fc^rtft 


gefc^rittcK 


fheiten, to dispute 


ftritt 


geftritten 


Icibcn, to suffer 


litt 


gciitten 


fd)nctbcn, to cut 


fd}nitt 


gcjc^nttten 



36 



2. ic long. 

Inftrdtivc. Imperfect. Verject Pert. 

bfctbcn, to stay blt'cb gc'blicljen 

rcibcn, to rub ricO cjcrtcben 

|d}reibeTt, to Tvrite |d)ricb gcfcl)ricbcu 

treibcn, to drive tric& gctrtcben 

meibcn, to avoid micb gcmicbcn 

fd}etbcn, to part fd}icb gcfd)lcben 

ftcfgen, to ascend ftieg gcfticgcn 

fdjiveigen, to be silent fd^lxneg gcfdjwtegcn 

Icifjcn, to lend Itel) geitcl)cn 

jci^en, to accuse jict) gejiefjen 

gcbei^en, to thrive gcbicT) gebte_^cn 

fd)emen, to sbine jd}tcn gejc^icneu 

iDctfen, to show iuieS gcwicfcn 

Vreifcn, to praise ipticS gcpTtcJen 

fc^reten, to cry fc^rte gej^ricen 

fV^eien, to spit fpte gefpieett. 

Observation. All verbs of tL 

vowel, those which change it 

of their root ; except d) and ^» 

THIRD CLASS. 
The tliird class compreliends those verbs, which 
change then- radical vowel in the Imperfect Tense intp 
a, and in the Perfect Participle into U or © : 

1. a and it. 

Imperfect. 



e second class have ^ t for their radical 
into { short double the end-consonant 



Infinitive. 
binbcn, to tie 
fituben, to find 
fd}it>inbctt, to vanish 
tr)tnbeTi, to wind 
bringen, to press 
gclmgert, to succeed 
hingen, to sound 
ringert, to wrestle 
fd}[mgcn, to sling 
fd)tDingen, to swing 
fingen, to sing 
fprmgen, to spring 
swingcn, to force 
ftnfcn, to sink 
ftinfcn, to stink 
trinfcrt, to drink 



brcd^crt, to break 
fted;crt, to sting 
fprcd;cii/ to sjK'.ak 



banb 

fanb 

fd)iranb 

ii^anb 

brang 

gclang 

hang 

rang 

fd)lang 

fc^tDang 

fang 

jprang 

^\rang 

fan! 

ftanf 

tranf 

a and 0. 



Perfect Part. 
gcbunben 
gcfunbcn 
gefd)tr>unbcn 
gewunJjcu 
gct)rungen 
g clung en 
gcflungcn 
gerungen 
gefc^lungcn 
gcfd)ti3urigen 
gcfungcn 
gefpningen 
gcjwiingen 
geUinfcn 
gcftunfctt 
gctrunfcn 



brad) 

fvrad? 



gcbrcd)cn 
gcftcd)cn 
gcjprcd)cn 



Imperative. 
brtd) 
fttd) 
fprtc^ 



37 



I)cf[cn, to help 


ijal] 


gcljolrcn 


l)itf 


f^clten, to be worih 


qait 


(^cgoltcn 


gilt 


fd^'Uen, to chide 


fd)a(t 


geid)oltcn 


id)ilt 


ftcxhm, to die 


ftaxh 


gcftcrben 


ftirb 


iccrbcn, to enlist 


Waxh 


gcu^orbcn 


iinrb 


Vcvbcr&en, to spoil 


tcrbavb 


ycvbcvbcn 


licrbtrB 


it^crfen, to throw 


tiHirf 


gcirorfcn 


\inrf 


bcrqcn, to hide 


barg 


gcborgcn 


birg 


trcffcrt, to meet 


traf 


gotroncn 


trifi 


nc(}mcn, to take 


na()m 


gcnoinnicu 


iiimm 


ftdjkn, to steal 


\W 


gcftc(}lcn 


ftic!)t 


bcfe{)lcn, to command 


bcfaf)! 


'bc[o()lcn 


bcftci)f. 


bcginncn, to begin 


bcganu 


bcgonncn 




rtnnen, to flow 


rann 


gcvonncn 




fpiuncn, to spin 


fpann 


gcfponncn 




[mncn, to meditate 


fann 


gd'onncn 




cjcinmncrt, to gain 


c^cirann 


gcwonncu 




fdjinimmcn, to swim 


fd^wamm 


gcfd}irommciu 





Observation. All verbs of the third class have i or c for their radi- 
cal vowel ; those which have e change it in the Imperative Mood into 
1, and this t is pi*eserved in the second and third persons of the Pre- 
Bent Tense of the Indicative Mood (<J 52) : tumin, bu nimuift, ei 
nimmt; ftkljl, hn ftidjift, er fitc^lt, 

FOURTH CLASS. 

The fourth class comprehends all those verbs, which 
have in the Imperfect Tense it, ci or ic, and which take 
back their radical vowel in the Perfect Participle : 



Infinitive. 


Imperfect. 


Perfect Part. 




fafircn, to ride in carriage fuT)r 


gefal)rcn 




graocn, to dig 


grub 


gegraben 




fd)lagcn, to beat 


fd;lug 


geid)lagen 




tragcn, to carry 


tvug 


gctragcn 




labcn, to load 


lub 


gelaben 




lrald)cn, to wash 


, irufd) 


genjafdjcn 




lrad)l'cn, to grow 


lriid}g 


gerDad)fen 




bacfcn, to bake 


bu! 


gcbacfcn. 


Imperative. 






gcbcn, to give 


gab 


gcgebcn 


gib 


treten, to step 


trat 


gctreten 


tritt 


lei en, to read 


la^ 


gelcfen 


lies 


fc^cn, to see 


\a^ 


gefel)en 


m 


gefd}C^crt, to happen 


gcfcfja^ 


gefd}cl)Ctt 


— 


cffcn, to eat 


a^ 


gegcficn 


t§ 


freffen, to eat (of ani 


mals) fra^ 


gefreffen 


frif 


inc[fen, to measure 


ma^ 


gcmeffen 


mtp. 


bitten, to beg 


bat 


gcbeten 




fttjen, to sit 


fa0 


gefcffen 




iicgcn, to lie doAvn 


lag 


gelcgcn 




fommcn, to come. 


fani 


gcfcmnicn. 





6* 



88 



blalcn, to bio^v 


blicl 


gcbtafcn 


fallen, to falj 


ficl 


gcfaUcn 


bratcn, to roast 


brict 


gcbraten 


ratl)cn, to advise 


rtetf) 


gcratl)cn 


:^vTltcn, to hold 


I}iclt 


gcl^altcn 


jct)lafcn, to sleep 


fcJ)ltcf 


gejct)lafett 


iaft'cn, to let 


iic§ 


gclaffcn 


I)vingcn, to hang 


b/tng 


gctjartgett 


fangcn, to catch 


nng 


gcfangen 


taufeU; to run 


lief 


gelaufen 


rufcrt, to call 


rtef 


gerufcn 


^ei§en, to be called 


^ic^ 


getjei^en 


ftc^en, to push 


m 


gefto^en 


l)aua\, to hew 


m 


gel)auen. 


Observation. The verbs of the fourth class whicli have a for theii 


radical vowel, soften this letter 


in the second and third person Sinpj. 


of the Present Tense Ind. Mood ; 


i)VL faf)rft, 


cr fabrt: bu fdUft, er fdUt. 


The same thing is to be observed 


in the verbs laufen and ftofien, which 


make: fcu tauf]l, er lauft; Jju ftcfef!, er fto^t 


. The verb fallen takes a 


b in the two Imperfect Tenses. 






§ 54. There are still six verbs -^^liicli, though chano;- 


ing their radical vowel, take the 


terminations of the 


assonant verbs : 






fcnbcn, to send 


fanbte 


gefanbt 


if enben, to turn 


loanbte 


gewanbt 


rcnnett; to run 


rannte 


gerannt 


nennen; to name 


nanntc 


gcnannt 


brennen, to burn 


brannte 


gcbrannt 


fennen, to know 


fannte 


gefannt. 



The Imperfect Tense of the Subjunctive Mood is 
formed without altering the radical vowel, fenbcte, 
luenbetc, ncnntc, brcmite, &c. 

4. OF THE CO^'JUGATIOI^ OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 55. There are in the German language but fifteen 
irregular verbs : 

1. DJIiil'fen, must, to be obliged; bitrfen, may, to be 
allowed; fijnnen, can, to be able; mdgen, to wish, to like; 
are conjugated in the following manner: 

Present Tense (Indicative Mooi). 
I can 
ic^ fann 



I must 
id) mu^ 
bu muit 
er mu| 
it>ir niuffen 
iJ)r muft 
flc mufiett 



I may- 
id) barf 
bu barfft 
cr barf 
UMr burfcn 
\{)x bi'irft 
fie bfirfen 



bu fannjl 
er fann 
unr fonnen 
[i)x fount 
]k fonnen 



Hike 
ic^ mag 
bu magfi 
cr mag 
inir mogen 
i^r mogt 
fic mogctt 



39 



(if) I mvist 


(if) I may 


(if) I can 


id) muffe 


id) burfc 


id) fonne 


fcu muffcfl 


hn bur[c|1 


bu fonnc]! 


er niu[[e 


cr burfe 


er fiinne 


Wix muffett 


tntr biirfcn 


ivir fbnneit 


ijr muffct 


il)X biirfct 


ihx fonnet 


fie miifien 


[te burfctt 


fie fonnen 



Present T ens e^Sidtj unci. Mood). 

(if) I like 
ic^ mogc 
bu mcgeft 
er moge 
h3tr mogett 
i^r moget 
fie mogett. 

Imperfect Tense {lad. Blood). 

id) mu§te id) burfte id) fonnte id) tiiocl)te. 

Imperfect Tense (Subj. Mood). 

id) mu^te id) biirftc id) fcnntc id} modjte. 

The Imperative Mood is wanting. 
The Present Participle is regular. 
Perfect Participle ; gcmu§t; geburft, gcfomtt, gemodjt. 

2. SSil'fcu, to know, is conjugated as follows : 

Present Tense. 

Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

id) tuctf, I know id) tt3i|je (if) I know 

bu trei^t bu wi[fcft 

er tt>eip cr icifje 

xoix wtffcn wir tntjfcit 

ifir tni§t if)r tDifjet 

fie tinffcii fie toiffen. 
Imperfect Tense. 

id) XoVi^k, I knew. id) Xdu^it, (iO I knew. 
Imperative Mood: toiffe, know (thou); triffet, know (ye). 
Present Part. : toiffenb, knowing. 
Past Participle : gewu^t, known. 

8. Pollen, will, to be willing; follen, shall, ought; 
are irregular only in the Pres. Tense, Ind. Mood. 

id) trin, I will fc^ fcf(, I ought 

bu teiilft bu fodft 

er tnt(( er foil 

tinr wcUcn iinr foffen 

il)r mat i^x foUt 

fte aoUen fie foHen, 

The Imperf. Tense of the Subj. Mood is like that oi 
the Indie. Mood: id) tnollte, I would, (if) I would; id) 
fodte, I should, (if) I should. 

4. -^rtngen, to bring; ben!en, to think; ge^cn, to go; 
fte^en, to stand, and tf)mt (contraction of tfjuen), to do ; 
are only irregular in the Imperf. Tense and in tho 
Perfect Participle : 



40 

bringcu brad}t^ gcbradjt 

tcnlcn bad)te gcbad)! 

gci-icn ging gcgangcn 

]\cb,cn ]tant gcftanbeu 

ti^mx tfjat gctl)mu 

The verb tijim has in the Present Tense of the Ind. 
Mood : id) tf)ue, bu tijitft, er tijiit, wiv ttjun, xi]v tl)i\t, fie 
ti)nn. In the Present Tense Subj. Mood the contraction 
does not take place : ic^ t1:}m, bu t()ueft, cr tl)itc. 
5. ^cin, to be, is conjugated as follows: 

Present Tense. 

Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

id) bin, I am [6:) \d, (if) I be 



bu bift 




bu fettt 


cr ift 




cr fei 


ivir ftnb 




\t>ir feicn 


\i)x fctb 




ifjr feiet 


fte finb 




fte jeien 




Impcrfec, 


t Tense. 


\6.) \oox, I was 


ic^ iuarc, (if) I were 


bu toarft 




bu irareft 


cr \var 




cr ware 


lt>ir t'oarcn 




irir iriarctt 


i{)r \r>arct 




\i)x tndrct 


[ie warcn 




fte trdren. 


Imperative Mood : fei, be 


(tbou); j 


[cib, be (3'e). 


Present Participle : fctcub, 


, being. 




Past Participle : gctoefen, 


been. 




6. §abcn, to have 


J is con^ 


jugate d thus : 




Present Tense. 


Indicative Mood. 


Subjunctive Mood. 


\6) fjafcc, I b; 


are 


\6:j f)abe, (if) I fea-re 


bu I) aft 




bu ^abcft 


cr I) at 




ei ^^ht 


itjir ^abcn 




teir I)aben 


t()r ^abt 




i^r Ijabct 


ftc f)aben 




fte {)aben. 



Imperfect Tense, 
id) Ijvrtte, I had i^ ptte, (if) I had. 

The Imperative Mood and the two Participles are irregular. 

7. 29cvben, to be, to become, is conjugated thus: 

Present Tense. 
Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. 

id) Werbc, I become id)\ncrbc, (if) I become 
bu \inrft bu \i?crbcft 

cr \invb cr \x>crbc 



41 

\mx toerbcn \xiix tocrbcn 

ii}v toerbet il)x tuerbct 

fie tt)crbcn fie iiDcrbcn. 

Imperfect Tense. 
id) knirbc, I became. \6.) ti^urbc, (if) I became. 
The Imperative Mood and Present Part, are regular, tlie Past Par. 
ticiple is geWovbctt, become, and \uorbctt, been. 

In order to facilitate tlie researches, Vfe have added at 
the end of this part of the Grammar, an alphabetical list 
of the Imperfect and Present Tenses, the Imperative 
Moods and Past Participles of the dissonant and ir- 
regular verbs, indicating also the Infinitives to -which 
these Tenses belong. 

5. OF THE FORIMATIO^ OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 

§ 56. The Germans have three auxiliary verbs; fein, 
to be; l)abcn, to have; iDcrben, to become, shall or wilL 
The verb feiu serves to form the Perfect Tenses of most 
neuter verbs; Ijakn to form those of the active and 
reflected verbs ; and iperben serves to form the Future 
tenses and the Conditional Mood* of all verbs without 
distinction. Ex.: 

1. 2^rlu!cn, to drink. 

Perfect Tense. 
Iml. Mood. Subj. Mood. 

3c() I)a"be gctrunfcn, I liave drunk. id) IiaBc cjctrunfcn, (if) I have drunk, 
bu I)aft gdrunfcn, k. bu Ijabcft getrunfcn, jc. 

Pluperfect Tense, 
id) Tjcittc getrunfcn, I had drunk. id) 'i^atk getrunfcn, (if) I had drunk. 

tu l)atk\t getrunfcn, k. H fjiittcft getrunfcn, jc. 

First Future Tense. 
id) ircrbc trinfen, I shall or will id) trerbc trmfen, (if) I shall or will 

drink. drink, 

bu \vix]t trinfen, k. bu ivierbefl trinfen, )c. 

Second Future Tense, 
id) 'lucrbc getrunfcn IjaBcn, I shall id) ^erbc getrunfcn tjaben, (if) I shall 

or will have drunk. or wili have drunk, 

bu \vix\i getrunfcn J^abcn, jc. bu ivcrbcft getrunfcn IiaBcn, k. 

* The Conditional Mood is, properly speaking, only another way 
of expressing the Imperfect and Pluperfect Tenses of -the Subjunct. 
Mood; inasmuch as it is quite the same if we say: id) l^atte or \di 
r^iivbc f)aKm; id) fiatte gcfjabt, or id) rourbc gcf)al't (jabcn. 



42 

First Conditional Tense. 
icf) luurbc tvinfcn, I should or would drink, 
ba lijurbcft trinfen jc. 

Second Conditional Tense. 
id) ft>urbc gctrunfen ^a&cn, I should or would have drunk.- 
bu iriirbcft gctrunfen Ijaben, :c. 

2. ^ommen, to come. 

Perfect Tense. 
Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood. 

?d) bin gcTommcn, I am come. ic^ fci gefommcn, (if) I be come, 

bu bift gefommcn, k. bu feift gefommen, k. 

Pluperfect Tense. 
[^) timr gcfommen, I was come. t^ tnare gefommcn, (if; I were come. 

bu warft gefommcn, jc. bu lodrcft gefommcn, k. 

First Future Tense, 
id) tDcrbe fommcn, I shall or will ic^ it>erbe fommen, (if) I shall oi 

come. will come, 

bu lohft fommen, k. bu tocrbefl fommcn, jc. 

Second Future Tense, 
id) toctbc gefommcn fein, I shall or id) trcrbe gefommcn fcin, (if) I shall 

Avill be come. or will be come, 

bu itjirft gefommcn fein, ic. bu Vocrbejl: gefommcn fein, ic 

First Conditional Tense, 
id) tinVcbe fommen, I should or would come, 
bu ioiivbeft fommen, }c. 

Second Conditional Tense, 
id) tourbc gefommcn fetn, I should or would be come, 
bu toiirbcft gefommen fein, jc. 
By the two preceding models we see : 

1. That the Perfect Tense is composed of the Present 
Tense of f)aben or fein and of the Perfect Part, of the 
verb ; 

2. That the Pluperfect Tense is composed of the 
Imperfect Tense of ()abcn or fein and of the Perfect 
Participle of the verb ; 

3. That the first Future Tense is composed of the 
Present Tense of toerben, and of the Present of the 
Infinitive of the verb ; 

4. That the second Future Tense is composed of the 
Present Tense of lr»erben and the Perfect of the Infinitive 
of the verb ; 

5. That the first Conditional Tense is formed of the 
Imperfect Tense, Subj. Mood, of Uicrben and the Present 
of the Infinitive of the verb; 



43 

6. That the second Conditional Tense is formed oi 
the same Tense of iDcrben, and of the Perfect of the 
Infinitive of the verb. 

§ 57. As to the formation of the composed Tenses 
of the auxiliary verbs, ^abm and fein form their Perfect 
Tenses of themselves, and iperben forms them by the 
auxilir.ry fein. Ex.: 

1. §aben, to have. 

Perfect Tense. 
3cf} IjaBc get)abt, I have had ; 
id) I;abc Qd)aht, (if; I have had. 

Pluperfect Tense. 
id) T)vittc gct)abt, I had had ; 
\6:) ^dtte yel^abt, (if) I had had. 

2. ^ein, to be. 

Perfect Tense. 
Set) ¥m gcircfett, I have been; 
i&) fct gcwefen, (if) I have been. 

Pluperfect Tense. 
tci) tear getucfeit; I had been ; 
ict) irarc gcttsefen, (if) I had been. 

3. SSerbett, to become. 

Perfect Tense. 
Sd) Bin getootben, I have become ;* 
id; fct geirorbeit; (if) I have become. 

Pluperfect Tense. 
id) trar getrotben, I had become ; 
id) t»dre gctccrben, (if) I had become. 

The two Future and the two Conditional Tenses are 
formed like those of the other verbs by the auxiliary 
inerbcn. Ex. : 

First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. 

3(^ teerbe l^a&en, I shall have ; id) toerbe ge{)abt Ijaben, I shall have 

had; 
ic^ trcrbe fein, I shall be ; id) if erbe gc\t)c[en fein, I shall have 

been ; 
l^ ircvbe ircrbcn, I shall become ; id) incrbe gcirotbcn fcin, I shall have 

become. 

* Instead of gctrovben we say simply toorben, when the verb Werben 
'b constructed "with an other verb and only has the function of aK 
auxiliary 



44 



First Conditional Tense. Second CcndiLiond Tense. 

Id) \TJurbe l^aBcii; I should have ; icf) tuurbe gcljabt IjaBcn, I should 

have had ; 
id) it'iirbe \d\\, I should be ; ic^ twurt'e gcvocjcn fcin, I should 

have been ; 
\d) itifirbc ii?crbcn, I should become i(^ wiirbe gewotbcn [cin, I should 

have become. 

§ 58. Besides the verbs Ijakn, fern and iDerben, the 
Germans employ also, like the English, iPoUcn, will ; 
Ia[]"en, let; mogen, may; foKen, shall, and mitffen, must, as 
auxiliary verbs, in order to express different respects ol 
Moods and Tenses. 

£a^t im§ gel)en, let us go ; 

\t)ir ivoUcn gcl)en, we Avill go ; 

bu foHft fterben, thou shalt die ; 

bit mu^t fterben, thou must die ; 

ic^ tnunfd)e, ba§ cr c§ CT^alten moge, I wish that he may receive it : 

mcge cv gliicfiic^ anlonnncn, may he arrive safely. 

§ 59. Conjugate the following verbs in all cheir 
Moods and Tenses : 

Assonant. Dissonant. 

3a'[)Ien, to pay leibeit, to suffer 

Icben, to live fwgcn, to sing 

faiifen, to buy Voerfcn, to throw 

arbciten, to work fa((cn, to fall 

Icrncn, to learn fcmmen, to come. 



6. OF THE C02syUGATI0X OF PASSIVE VERBS. 

§ 60. Transitive verbs have two forms: the active 
form and the passive form. If is in the active form, 
when the subject does the action which the Verb ex- 
presses, it is in the passive form when the subject suffers 
the action expressed by the verb. In the sentences: id) 
liebe, I love, and ici) inerbe geltebt, I am loved, the verb 
(iebeu is presented in those two forms. 

§ CI. We have already in the preceding paragraphs 
shown the conjugation of the active form of verbs; it is 
therefore only left to represent their passive form. The 
verb in the passive voice has but composed Tenses, which 
are all formed by means of the auxiliary Uicrbcn, and the 
Perfect Part, of the verb. 



45 



MODE OF THE C0XJUGATI0:N^ OF A PASSIVE VERB. 

©clicbt li3erbcn, to be loved. 

Present Tcme. 
Indicative Mocd. Saojunctivc Mood. 

3d) tvcrbc gcliebt, I am loved ; id) Wcrbc gclicfct, (if) I be loTod ; 

tu \mx]t Qdkht bii ttcrbcft c^dkht 

cr wixh geltebt cr ^vcrbc gcUcbt 

roir WcxUn gcHcBt iinr tijerbcn gelteBt 

i()r inerbet gdtebt il)r inerbct gelicb.t 

fie rocrben gcltcbt fte Werbcn geltebt. 

Imperfect Tense, 

id) tourbe gclicbt, I T»'as loved ; id) mirbe gcltcbt, (if) I were loved 

bu \rurbeft geltcbt bu iriiTbeft gcltcbt 

cr iviurbe gcltcbt ' er inurbe gcltcbt 

MUX iijiirben gcltcbt Wix tcurbcu gcltcbt 

il)r tmirbct gcltcbt ii)x xonxtd gclicbt 

fie ixnirbcn gclicbt. fie i\)itvbcn gcltcbt. 

Perfect Tense, 

id) bin gclicbt ti^crbcn, I have been id:) fci gclicbt irovbcn, (if; I hove 

loved ; been loved ; 

bu bift gclicbt tnovben bu fcift gclicbt irorbcn 

cv i]t gclicbt tvorbcn cr fci gclicbt irorbcn 

wix ftub gclicbt ircfbcn inir feien gclicbt worbcn 

il)r fcib gclicbt \rcrbcu il}r feict gclicbt \t»orbcu 

fie finb gclicbt u^crbcn. fie fcicn gclicbt ivorben. 

Pluperfect Tense, 

id) Wax gclicbt ii:crbcn, I had been id) ir»are gclicbt ii^crbcn, (if) I had 

loved ; been loved ; 

bu \t»arft gclicbt irorbcn bu Wdrcfi gclicbt tt»Drbcn 

cr Wax gclicbt irorben cr indrc gclicbt tt»orbcn 

Wix waxm gclicbt inorbcn wix waxen geliebt lijorben 

it)r iraret gclicbt tvorbcn i^r Waxd gclicbt \t*crbcn 

fie iDarcn gclicbt ircrbcu. fie Waxen geliebt irorbcu. 

First Future Tense, 

id) \vctbe gclicbt iucrbcn, I shall be id) tocrbc gclicbt ti^crbcn, (if) I slinD 

loved ; be loved ; 

bu ^itirft gclicbt h^erbcn bu tecrbeft gclicbt tocrbcn 

cr \t»irb gclicbt trcrbcn er Werbe geliebt werben 

Wix wcrbcn gclicbt irerbcn Wix K»erben geliebt tncrbcn 

il)r ircrbet geliebt wcrbcu ii)x tyerbet geliebt luerben 

\ic wcxicn gclicbt ii^cvbcn. fie ir>erben geliebt irerbcn. 

^Second Future Tense. 
id} ivcrbe geliebt ircrbcnfciu, I shall id) WcxH gclicbt ircrbeu fcin, (if) I 

have been loved ; shall have been loved , 

fcu iinrft gclicbt ircrben fcin bu \i3crbcft gclicbt ^rcrbcn jcin 

er wivb gclicbt tvcrbcn jcin er ircrbe gclicbt rocvbcn fcin 



46 

mx \vcrbctt gcIicBt k^orbcn fciu Wix hjcrbcn gcticBt ircvben fcitt 

ii}x tvcrbet gclicbt lijcrben ^cin iijx ft^erbet gcliebt tt»orben fein 

fie \rcrbcu gdtcbt iijcrbcn jcin. ftc ircrbcn gclicbt tx^orben fcin. 

Conditional Mood, 

First Tense. Second Tense. 

id) iin"irbe geliebt toerben, I should id) Wiixht gclicbt toorben fein, I should 

be loved ; have been loved ; 

bii iriirbeft gclicbt tncrben bu ttJiirbejl gclicbt tttorben \dn 

er iviirbe gclicbt tnerbcn er tniirbc gclicbt tcorben fein 

tnir wiirbcn gcliebt tTocrbeu Wix voiixbcn gclicbt worben fcin 

ibr wiirbct gclicbt tnerbcn il^r tourbet gcliebt ttJotben fein 

jtc it)iirbcn gclicbt iverbcn. fie iviivbcn gclicbt tvorbcn fcin. 

Imperative Mood. 
ircrbe gclicbt, be (thou) loved. 
la:crbct gcliebt, be (ye) loved. 

Participles. 
Present : getiebt toerbenb, being loved. 
Perfect : gcliebt ioorbcn, been loved. 

7. OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 

§ 62. Yv^hen a transitive verb expresses an action 
which falls back directly or indirectly upon the person 
who performs it, we call it a reflective verh. The re- 
flective verbs like the transitive verbs take fiaben for 
their auxiliary and the second pronoun, -which is the 
Accusative of the first, is placed now before and now 
after the verb. 

COXJUGATIO]^ OF THE REFLECTIVE VERB. 

(Sicfj freuen, to rejoice. 

Present Tense. 
Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood, 

^d) freue mid}, I rejoice. id) frcitc ntid^, (if) I rejoice, 

bu freiift tid) bu frcucfi bid) 

er freut fid) er freue jtd) 

Wix freucn mi§ iuir freuen iins 

ibr frcut znd^ ibr freuct euc^ 

fie freucn fid). fie fi-eucn jid). 

Imperfect Tense, 

id) freute mid), I rejoiced. id) freutc mid), (if) I rejoiced. 

tu freuteft tid) bu frcutcft hid) 

er freute fid) er freute ^id) 

)X)ix freuten una \m frcuten un§ 

ii)X frcutet end) il)r freutct eud) 

fic frcuten fid). fie frcuten fid). 



47 



Perfect Tense. 
Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood. 

id) I)afce mid) gcfvcut, I have re- kl) f)aBe mid) cjcfrcut, (if) I bavo 

joiced ; rejoiced; 

bu Ijaft V\6) (^cfrcut bu Iiabcfi bid) gcfreut 

cr i)at fid) gefreut cr i)K\hz fid) gcfreut 

linr l)abcn iing gcfreut ivir f)abcu uu§ gefreut 

i()r t)abt cud) gefreut ij)r ^abct cud) gefreut 

ftc ()vibcn fid) gefreut. fie I)abeu fid) gefreut. 

Pluperfect Tense. 



id) I)attc mid) gefreut, I had re- 
joiced ; 
bu t)atteft Vi6:j gcfreut 
cr f)atte ftc^ gcfreut 
iinr Ijattcu ung gefreut 
i(}r Ijattet cud) gcfreut 
fie I)attcn fid) gefreut. 



id) l^atte mid) gefreut, (if) I had 

rejoiced ; 
bu ()dttcft bid) gcfreut 
cr ()dtte fid) gefreut 
\x>ir t)dtten \m^ gefreut 
il)r l)dttet cud) gcfreut 
fie f)dtten fid) gcfreut. 



Wcj trterbc mid) frcuen, I shall re- 
joice; 
\:\x \riirft 'ii'i^) freucit 
cr wirb fid) freucn 
unr trcrbeu un§ freucn 
if)r trerbet cud) freucn 
fie tverbcn fid) freucn. 



First Future Tense. 

\6) toerbc mid) freucn, (if) I sIibU 

rejoice; 
bu tocrbcft bid) freucn 
cr tt»crbc fid) freucn 
iinr tnerben un§ freucn 
il)r werbet cud) freucn 
fie tccrben fid) freucn. 



Second Future Tense. 

id) tverbe mid) gcfreut I)aBen, I shall \6:} ircrbc mic§ gefreut :^aBcn, (if) I 

have rejoiced ; shall have rejoiced ; 

W \o\x\t bid) gcfreut :^aBctt bu tocrbcll bid) gefreut ()vrben 

cr tvirb fi(^ gcfreut i)aben cr trerbe fid) gefreut t)abcn 

trir werben un§ gcfreut f)aBen nnr ttjcrbcn ung gefreut ()aBcn 

if>r werbct cuci) gefreut t)abctt i^r n?erbct cuc^ gcfreut ()abcn 

fie n^erbcn fid) gefreut t)abcn. fie tocrben fid) gefreut f)abcn. 

Conditional Mood. 



First Tense. 
d) toiirbe mid) freucn, I should re- 
joice ; 
bu ttturbci"} bid) fi-cucn 
cr nn'irbe fid) freucn 
irir nuirbcn ung freucn 
il)r nnirbct cud) freucn 
^e \uurbcn fi^ freucn. 



Second Tense. 
[^ iriirbc mid) gcfreut r)aBcn , 

siiould have rejoiced ; 
bu tourbeil bic^ 0efrcut ^aBen 
er tnurbe fid) ge|reut \)o!btxi 
Xo'ix wiirben un§ gcfreut I)aBen 
i{)r tniirbet euc^ gefreut ^abcn 
fie tr»iirben fid) gefreut I)a&cn. 



Imperative Mood. 

freue bid), rejoice (thou), 
frcuen tuir ung, let us rejoice, 
frcuct cud), rejoice (ye). 



48 

Participles. 

fid) [rcucnb, rejoicing. 

fid} gcfreut fjabcrt, liaving rejoiced. 

Conjugate in this manner: 

fid; be!lagcn, to complain. 

§ 63. There are some reflective verbs, whose second 
pronouns are in the Dative, as fid) fdjincidjclit, to flatter 
one's self. Ex.: 

[6.) fd)metd)Ic mix, I flatter myself; 

bu jd)mct^elft bir 

cr 1d)metd)clt fid) 

ivir fd)mei(^cln mts 

il)r fd}mcic^elt cud) 

fie fd}mcid}eln fid). 

8. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

^ 6-i. Impersonal verbs are those, which can only be 
used in the third person Singular and with the neuter 
pronoun c§, it. Their composed Tenses are formed by 
means of the auxiliary Ijaben. Ex. : 

Indie. Mood. Siibj. Mood. 

Pres. T. c§ rcgnet, it rains ; eS rcgne, (if) it rain ; 

Imp. T. e§ rcgnete, it did rain; c§ regnetc, (if) it rained ; 

Perf. T. c§ ^at gercgnct, it lias eg t)aht gcrcgnet, (if) it have been 

been raining ; raining ; 

Plnp. T. c§ I)attegcregnct, itliad cS I)dtte gcregnct, (if) it had been 

been raining ; raining ; 

1st Fut. T. eg toirb rcgncn, it will c§ ii:tcrbe regncn, (if) it will rain ; 

rain ; 

2d Fut. T. c§ trirb gcrcgnet I^aBcn, e5 ii^erbe gcrcgnet '^aBcn, (if) it will 

it will have been raining. have been raining. 

1st Cond. T. c§ tourbe regncn, it would rain ; 

2d Cond. T. e§ ttiiirbe gcrcgnet ^abcn, it would liave been raining ; 

Imperat. T. eg rcgne, may it rain ; 

Perfect Part, gcrcgnet, rained. 

§ 64. There are verbs which are impersonal by their 
nature, as : 

rcgncn, to rain. fdjncicn, to snow, 

bcnncrn, to thunder. nebcin, to be fogg3^ 
blit^cn, to lighten. ^agcln, to hail. 

There are also others, which are employed imperso- 
nally but in certain ways of speaking : 



49 

gcben, to give ; c§ giBt, there is, there are ; Ca ^vib, there was 

there were, 
fcin, to be ; c§- i]t, it is, there is ; c§ l\t Warm, it is warm ; cS toat 

fa[t, it was cold. 

Some verbs are employed impersonally in German, 
"nliicli are not in English: 

t§ tft mix hjarm, I am warm. c§ ijl inir licb, I am glad. 

e§ friert mid), I am cold. c5 tl;Ut mir Icib, I am sorry. 

c§ id}ldfcrt mi(^, I am sleepy. cS frciit mid), I am glad, 

mid) t)ungert, I am hungry."* cS wunbert mid), I am astonished, 

mid) buritct, I am thirsty. mir tiJtib iibel, I feel sick, 

mir i\t bange, I am afraid. cS rcut mif^, I repent. 
eS gclingt mir, I succeed. 

All these verbs can express the three persons of Plu- 
ral as vrell as of the Singular. Ex. : 

c§ frciit mid), I am glad. c§ gclingt mir, I succeed. 

c§ frcut bid), thou art glad. eS gelingt bir. 

c§ frciit i()n, he is glad. e§ gelingt if)m. 

c§ frcut un§, we are glad. e§ gclingt un§. 

c§ frcut cuc^, you are glad. eS gclingt cud). 

c§ frcut fie, they are glad. c§ gclingt if)ncn. 



9. OF COMPOUND YEEBS. 

§ 66. A simple verb becomes a compound one by 
the addition of certain particles vrhich are joined to it 
and precede it. 

There are two kinds of compound verbs : 

1. Those, the joined particle of which remains always 
attached to them in all Tenses and Moods : these verbs 
form their Perfect Participle without adding the syllable 
g e, and are called inseparccble verhs. 

2. Those whose particle is not always joined to the 
verb, but is detached from it in certain Tenses : those 
ones are called separable verls. 

§ 57. Inseparable verbs are those , whose accent 
rests on the verb and not on the particle. There are 
but very few of them, and they begin either by the 
prepositions Ijinter and roiber, or by the adverbs off en 
and DO 11. Ex. : 

* "When an impersonal verb is constructed with a personal pronoun, 
llie word e § ma}^ be omitted. 



50 

iuibctj)3red)ett, to contradict; id) tctbcr[prcd)c, id) f)a6c iinbevi^n'ocf)en ; 

Ijintcrbringcn, to inform; id) f)mtcrbringe, id) t)abc ^interbvad}!; 

vodcnben, to complete ; id) yoKcnbe, id) I)abc t?cUcnbct ; 

cft'enbaren, to reveal ; id) offcnbarc, id) f)abc cjfcnbart. 

The compound verhs must not be confounded with 
the derived verhs j the latter are formed of a verb 
and a prefixed syllable, that is never detached from 
•t. Ex.: 

ad)ten, to esteem; i5evad)tett, to despise; id!) i?evad}te, I despise; 
fagcrt, to say ; cntfagcn, to renounce ; id) entjagc, I renounce. 

§ 69. Separable verbs are those, whose accent resta 
on the particle and not on the verb. Their number is 
very great, and they begin either by one of the prepo- 
sitions ab, an, auf, au§, bet, ein, mit, nad}, bor, gu, or by 
one of the adverbs bar, fort, Ineg, l^in, fe^l, Io§, and nteber, 
Ex.: 

abfc^rcibcn, to copy. l^ctllenen, to represent, 

anfangen, to begin. gufc^reiben, to ascribe. 

aufftet)en, to get up. barbicten, to offer, 

auslcgen, to explain. fcrtid}ttfen; to send away, 

beifiigen, to add. ~ it)cgge^en, to go away. 

einfiil)rctt, to introduce. fef)lid)lagett; to fail, 

mittljeilcn, to communicate, loioma^en, to detach. 
nac^fe()en, to revise. niebertDerfen, to throw down. 

§ 69. The compound verbs, which are formed by the 
prepositions burd), f)tntcr, it&er, um, itnter, are sometimes 
separable, sometimes inseparable, according to their hav- 
ing the accent on the verb or on the particle. Ex. : 
iiber j e | c tt , to translate ; t^ uber[e|e, t^ 'ijO^^ uberfe^t ; 
uberfe^ctt, to cross (a river); id) fe^e uber, id) f|abe ubergefe^t. 
Practice only can make up this rule. 

CONJUGATIOjS^ of a compound separable VEPvB. 

^bfdireiben, to copy. 

Present Tense. 

Indie. Mood. Suhj. Mood. 

3d) fd)reibe a^, I copy ; id) f^reibe cA, (if) I copy; 

bu fd)rcibfl ab bu fd)Tcibeft ab 

er fd)rctbt al er fd)reibe ah 

inir fd)reiben ah \X)ix fc^rcibcn ab 

il)r fd)rcibt ah i\)x fd)reibct ah 

jte fd)rcibcn ab. fiic j^veiben ab. 

Impeifcct Tense, 

id) \d)XKh ah, I copied id) |d)t{cbc ah, (if) T copied 

bu jdjriebft ab, u. bu jd;ricbcfl ah, k. 



61 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses. 
i^ ijab^ a6gci'd)ricBen, I have co- id) fjaBe abgefc^xicBcn, (if) I have 

pied; copied; 

id) ^attc a&gcfc^rieBert, I liad co- ^ id) tjatte at^gcfc^rtcBcn, (if) I liad 
pied. ' copied. 

First d?id Second Future Tenses. 

id) Wcxhc ab\d)xd^cn, I shall copy ; id) tt»crbe at)fc^rct6eu, (if) I shall 

copy; 

id) rtierbe aBaefdjricBcn I)a&cn, I shall ic^ it*crbe a6gcfd)rtcBen IjaBcn, (if) 
have co]3ied. I shall have copied. 

First and Second Conditional Tenses. 

j(^ tourbe a6fd}reiben, I should id) tt)urbe abgef^rtcDen I;a6cn, I 
copy. should have copied. 

Imperative Mood. 

f(^retBe aB, copy (thou) ; Ia§t un§ aBl"d)rciBcn, let us copy ; 
fc^reiBt aB, copy (ye). 

Participles. 
aBi'djrciBenb, copying ; aBgefdjrteBcn, copied. 

If tlie compound verb is reflective, tlie particle ts 
always placed at the end. Ex»: 

fic^ CtnBilbctt, to imagine. 
Present Tense. 

id) Btlbc Tinr citt, I imagine ; 

bu Bilbeft bir etn 

cr Btlbet fid) dn 

ioir Bilbcn unS cin 

il)r Bilbct eud) d\\ 

ftc Bilbcn jtd) ein. 



CHAPTER YIII. 
OF PEE POSITIONS. 

§ 70. The prepositions are invariable words which 
are placed before the nouns or pronouns in order to 
express the relations which would not be sufficiently 
pointed out by the cases. They are : 

1. Either primitive words, as an, at, to; auf, upon 
in, in; fiir, for; mit, with; 

2. Or derived or compound words, as aiif^er, out of; 
^\in[djcn, between; obei1)a(b, above; anftatt, instead of ; 



52 

8. Or words taken from otlier parts of speech, like 
fraft, by virtue of; tvoi^, notwithstanding; giifolcje, in con- 
sequence of. 

§ 71. Nouns or pronouns, whose relations are defined 
by a preposition, are always placed either in the Geni- 
tive, or in the Dative, or in the Accusative. Some prepo- 
sitions govern but one case, others govern two, according 
to the kind of relation we wish to express. 

1.^ rREPOSITIOXS GOYERXIXG THE GENITIVE. 

llnirctt, ii?ar)rmb/ 
minds, lxa\t, 
laut, i^ermcge, 
inncrf)alb, aii^tx'^alb, 
cbcrf)a(b, unkxi)alb, 
btesfeit, jenfeit, 
lt)dben, wcqm, 
imgea^tet, ftatt. 
UnVocit, not far from : iimrett beg (Sd)lo[[c§, not far from the castle ; 
untt?ett bcr Stabt, not far from the town. 

SBafircnb, during : irdl)renb be§ (Summery, during the summer ; "Kcily^ 
rcnb bcr d'lad}i, during the night. 

2}iittcl§, mittdit or tJermittelf^, by means of: mfttel^ 3f}rc§ S^ciftanbcS, 
3f)rer «§ilte, by means of your assistance. 

5;ra[t or t»ermcge, by virtue of: fraft hc§ ®c[c|c§, b}- virtue of the la^v ; 

l^crmcgc feineS ^c\d)l§, by virtue of his order. 
£aut, according to : laut metnc^ ^<i)xdlcn§, according to my letter. 
CBcrfjall), above; imtcr^alB, below; inner^alB, on the inside; mt^cr- 

Ijalb, on the outside : au^evf)alb beS «§aii]eg, on the outside of the 

house. 

^ki\dt, on this side of ; ieiijcit, on that side of : bieg[eit bcS ^liiffe^, 
on this side of the river. 

«§aIBeTt, l^alBer or U)egen, on account of, by reason of; precede or fol- 
low their substantive : ber §(rmut^ fjalBen, by reason of poverty ; 
ii^cgcn femes filters or jeincS Sdters irtcgen, on account of his age. 
When ]^alBett or iriegcn are preceded by a personal pronoun, the 
final r of the pronoun is changed into t and the two words drawn 
together: mcmctf)alBen, beinetoegcn, femetfialBen, SI)rettt?egen, for 
my sake, on my account, &c. XInfer and cuer keep their final r be- 
fore the t : unfcrt^alBen, euertir cgcn or curettDcgen, for the sake of us, 
of you. 

Ungcacl)tet, notwithstanding, is placed before and after its substantive 
or pronoun : ungeac^tct jeiner ltufd)ulb, notwithstanding his innocence ; 
alk§ be[[en ungead)tet, notwithstanding all this. 

(Etatt or artjlatt, instead of : ftatt or anficitt meincs ^rubetS, instead of 
my brother ; an md\UX '^cl)\x>c]kx ^tatt, in my sister's stead. 



^ 53 

There are three more prepositions, which govern tho 
Genitive or Dative indiscriminately; lang^, along; y.u 
fotge, in consequense of, and trol^, in spite of: laiuy$ bcm 
glu[fe or lancjg be§ g(u[fe§, along the river ; 3ufoIge be^ 
^ertrage^ or 3ufoIge bcm S^crtrage, in consequence of the 
treaty; tro^ fetnen SSorftellimcjen or trolj fctuer ^orftdlim* 
gen, in spite of his remonstrances. 

2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 

Wlit, iteBf!, fammt, 
bet, feit, 'oon, nad), 
auSf au^er, ju, jmnibcv, 
entgegen, gegenubev^ 
2)tit, with : er ifi mii metnem Sniber angc!ciumcn, he is arrived with 
my brother ; id) getjC mit bir, I go with thee. 

91c6jl or fammt, with, together with : er, neBf! fciner (Hd)it»cf}cr, he and 
his sister ; tie 3}2utter neBj^ or fammt i()rcn ^inbern, the mother with 
her children. 

S^d, near, at, with : er ittar Bci mir, he was with me, at my house ; 
t>ei ten 3tomcrn, with the Romans ; Bei S3ertin, near Berhn, 

Sett, since : feit fctner 3uruc!funft, since his arrival ; \dt gtwci Saljreu, 
for two years ; feitbem, since then. 

SBon, of, from : id) ^abe c§ ijoit bcm ©rofcn cxi)cdkn, I have received it 

from the count ; dw Jtinb t)On bret 3af>ren, a child of three years ; 

id) fomme i?Ott S3ertin, I come from Berlin. 
dlad), after, to, according to : er fant nad) mix, he came after me ; wad) 

bem ^]\cn, after dinner ; nad) bent ®efe|e, according to law ; id) ge^c 

nad) Berlin, I go to Berlin. 
9(it§, ont of, from : iinr fcntmcn axis bcr '^d)uU, we come from schorjJ , 

au§ bem 'Bd)xanU nef^men, to take out of the cupboard ; aul aVi.m 

£rd[ten, with all (one's) power. 

?(uf er, out of, besides : cr ino^nt auf er ber ^taht, he lives out of town ; 

id) :^abe feinen ^Teunb aufer S^nen, I have no other friend but you. 
3n, to, at : ^ommen ^te ju mtr, come to me ; fe^en <Bic ftd) ju mct= 

nem 93rnbcr, sit down by my brother ; toofjnen 'Bit gu Snttic^ ? do 

you live at Liege? Sft 3^r SSater ju «^aufe? is your father at 

home? 
3u\T?{bcr, against, follows always its regimen ; ber 93erorbnung jtiit»ibcr, 

against the ordinance ; ber SBein ift mir juiciber, I dislike wine, 
dntgegen, against, to meet; gcgeniiBcr, opposite, follow generally 

their regimen ; er fam mir entgegen, he came to meet me ; er JDoI)nt 

mir gegenuber, he lives opposite me. 



54 



3. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE 

S)ur^, fiir, inn, 
c{)ne, jonbcr, 
gegcn, toibcr. 

5)ur(^, through, by means of: biird) ba§ 2)orf gcl)cn, to go through the 
village; burrf) btc^ ifi errcid) gcworben, by means of you (by your 
help) has he become rich ; tiaB ganje 3a^r bitrc^ or l^inburc^, the 
■whole year through. 

%nx, for: biefeS 33uc^ ill fiir mid), this book is for me ; fur biefeS ©ell 
iuid id) mix ^ud)cx faufen, for this money will I buy books. 

Urn, round, about, at : unt bie .^irc^e, iim bie (Stabt gel^en, to go round 
the church, round the town ; unt S^cujatjr, urn £)ftem, about New- 
years-day, about Easter; tim iX)iet>iel Uf)r ? at what o'clock? 
unt funf \\i)x, urn 2}t{ttema^t, at five o'clock, at midnight ; urn bie 
3eit ber S'ntbte, at harvest-time. 

Df)nc, fonber, without : tc^ fann ttic^t leBcn o'^ne bic^, I cannot live 
without you ; toaS ifi bag £ekn c6ne einen STeunb ? what is life 
without a friend ? (Bonbcr is no more used except in poetry ; fonber 
3tueifel, fonber ^u^e, without doubt, without trouble. 

©egcn, iriber, to, towards, against : bie ^j!id)tett aegen bie ©Item, the 
duties towards parents ; nttlbtf)at{g gegen hk mmen, charitable to 
the poor ; gegen Slbcnb, towards evening ; iviber hk 2)iauer, against 
the wall ; iciber hk ®efe|e, against the laws. 



4. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND ACCU 
SATIVE. 

5(n, auf, in, 
iibcr, iinter, tior, 
ij'mtcx, nefeen, ^ttiifc^en. 

These prepositions govern the Accusative, when the 
verb of the sentence denotes either a movement or a 
direction towards an object, and the Dative, when it does 
not denote this movement. 

S(n, at, on : with the Dative : tx ^d)t an ber X^ux, he stands at the 
door ; biefe (£tabt licgt ant 9lf)ein, this town is situated on the 
Rhine ; an bir 'i^ab^ id) einen ^eunb, in thee I have a friend. With 
(he Accusative : fe^e ben 2!o^f an bas ^euer, put the pot by the fire; 
id) bacf)te an bicj), I thought of thee ; er iijenbcte fxd) an ben ^onig, 
he addressed laimself to the king. 

§(uf, on, upon : uith the Dative : fie fl|t auf bent ^tuX)U, she is sitting 
on the chair ; ba§ ^nd) licgt auf bent %i\d)C, the book lies on the 
table ; tneitt S3ruber i]t auf ber Sagb, my brother is out hunting. 
With the Accusative: fc^cn (£ie fid) auf biefen <£tuf)t, sit down upon 
this chair; legcn (£te bag ^nd) auf bcnZi'\d), put the book on the 
table ; irir gcf)cu I)cute auf btc 3agb, we go out hunting to-day. 



55 

SU/ in, into; with the Dative: ev \V)oI}nt ill bcv (italjt, lie lives in the 
town ; er iuo^nt \\x bcr 3Jtittc fcincr ilinbcr, be lives surrounded by 
his children ; fie \\i 110^ im S3ctte, she is still in bed. With the 
Accusative: icf) gcf)e in bte (£d)u[e, in ben ©arten, I go to school, 
into the garden; t)Ci§, ^inb fid in 'im %[\i^, the child fell into the 
river; cr jagte CS mix in'g £)f)r, he whispered it into my ear. 

HcBer, above, over; with the Dative. baS ©cmaibe pngt iibcr be? 
1i)iir, ubcr bcm Spiegel, the picture hangs above the door, above 
the window ; ubcr mix tt>Df)nt ein ^unftlcr, an artist lives above me. 
With the Accusative: l^dngcn (Sie ben iiafig xiber bie 3;^f)iir; hang 
the cage over the door; xoix gcl)en iiber btefe ©riic!e, we shall pass 
this bridge ; bic (S()re gel)t iiber "iim 9leid)tl)um, honor is better than 
riches. 

Untet; under, beneath, among; with the Dative: mttcr bent %i\d)t 
Itegctt, to lie under the table ; <Sie too^nen untcr mix, you lodge 
beneath me ; unter bcr Dlegierung £iibn)ig'§, in the reign of Louis ; 
imter ^^^eunben, among friends. With the Accusative: fieKe bid) 
imter ben 53aum, place yourself under the tree ; SBafj'er imtcr 'i^m 
SGcin t^Utt, to put water with the wine. 

SSor, before ; with the Dative : ijor 'i}zm -^au^e flel)! d\\ Saitm, before 
the house stands a tree; t)or bem ^tiege ivar er \d)X arm, before 
the war he was very poor; i6) Vm »or bir angefcmmcn, I am 
arrived before you; biefeS iji tor meinen Slugen ge|cl}c(}en, that hag 
happened before my eyes. With the Accusative : er trat iDor "iitw. 
©piegel, he stepped before the looking-glass ; yor "im 9ticl}tcr riifen, 
to summon before the judge. 

Winter, behind; with the Dative: Xoix \ct:>[)mxi I){ntev ber ^ird)e, Ave 
live behind the church ; er fam fjinter mir, he came after me. 
With the Accusative: er ftcllt ficf) Winter bie %i)\ix, !f)intcr mid), he 
places himself behind the door, behind me. 

DieBen, by the side of; icith the Dative: er \a^ ncBcit mir, neBcn 
meiner <Sd}Wefter, he sat by the side of me, beside my sister 
With the Accusative : er fe^te ftd) nebcn mi&}, lie sat down beside me 

3toifd)eTt, between, among; with the Dative: jttiifd)en bem «§aii[e unb 
bem ©arten i\i ber "^of, between the house and the garden is tlie 
yard; e5 entjianb jtnifd)en bem SOtannc unb ber %xavi ein Streit, 
there arose a quarrel between the man and the woman. With 
the Accusative: er fe|te 'Hm ^\^x^ gtr>ijd)ctt bie ^tx^m S'il'd^c, he 
put the chair between the two tables ; ber D^ing ftel j\\)ifd}en bie 
©teine, the ring dropt among the stones. 

§ 72. Frequently tlie prepositions are united in one 
>Yord -witli the Dative or Accusative of the Article 
Ex.: 

am instead of Oin bem vcm instead of ijon bem 

ans — — an ba§ fiirS — — fiir bag 

§um — — ju bcm Beim — ■ — 6ei bcm 

jur — — ju bcr bnrdi§ — — burd) "^o.^^. 



56 



CHAPTER IX. 

OF ADYEIIBS. 



^ 73. The -Adverbs are divided into three principal 
classes; Adverbs oi^lace, oitime, and Oii quality. 



1. ADVERBS OF PLACE. 



SBC/ where 
%hx, here 
\)Qi, tcrt, there 
\uett, fern, far 
nal)C, near _ 
{^inteit; behind 
torn, before 
obett, above 
unten, below 



irgcnbltJO, anywhere, somewhere 

nirgenbwo, nowhere 

liBerad, everywhere 

jurucf, backward 

»orwdrtg, forward 

feitwdrtS, sideways 

rucftx)drt0, backwards 

linfS, on the left 

vect;t§, on the right, (fee. 



2. ADVERBS OF TIME. 



5ffiann, when 

^cute, to-day 

morgcn, to-morrow 

ubermorgen, the day after to- 
morrow 

geftertt, yesterday 

Dorgcftern, the day before yester- 
day 

]c|t, now 

eI)emaU, formerly 



bamalS, then, at the time 

eft, often 

nie, never 

^mreilcn, sometimes 

tmmer, always 

gusor, before 

fci}on, already , 

friif}, early 

fpdt, late 

gleid;, foglcic^, directly^ <feo. 



ADVERBS OF QUALITY OR KIND. 



3Ste, how 
jo, thus 
gent; willingly 
gut, well 
jc^led;t, badly 



\t)aruTn, why 
bctnafje, almost 
jtrar, indeed, although 
gciril, certainly 
incUcic^t, perhaps, &c. 



This last class of adverbs is the most numerous ; it 
comprehends all adjectives, which can be employed 
adverbially, and which in English take the termination 
ly, Ex.: 

2){efc5 'Oail* tft ncU/ this house is new; 

bie^eS <§aug tft neu angcftrid;cn, this house lias been ixewly painted. 



or 

§ 74. The two adverbs Ijcr, here, (jin, there, are very 
often combined with other adverbs or w^ith prepositions^ 
and serve to form a great number of adverbs of place. 
iper denotes a movement towards the place, where the 
speaker is ; ^tn a movement from that place. Ex. : 

I)craB, :^ma6, down I)ictt)cr, ^kx^'m, this way 

I)crauf, f)mau[, up balder, baljin, there 

I}crcm, f)inetn, in bDTt()er, bcrt^in, from there, there 

IjcvaiiS, f)inau§, out iroijcr, tt)of)in, whence, where 

f)erunter, Ijmunter, down cbcn[)cr, obcnf)in, at the surface. 

The adverbs '^ier, here, ba, there, combined w^ith pre» 

positions and adverbs, serve likewise to form compomid 
adverbs. Ex. : 

^kxan, by this haxan, by that* 

I)ierauf, hereupon barauf, thereupon 

I)tcrbet, hereby babet, thereby 

^tcrburd), hereby baburd), by that 

lateralis, ont of this barauS, out of that 

:^tetin, in this barin, therein 

]^ierfur, for this bafiir, therefore 

l^iergegett; against this bagegen, against it. 

The adverb Wo, where, is combined in the same 
manner : 

icotan, at which ivoburd), whereby 

ir>orauf, upon which Vriomit, wherewith 

lr>orau§, out of which Iroran, wherefrom 

it)orm, in which '^o^u, for what 

tcobci, whereby \\3onad), after which.t 

§ 75. Some adverbs, and especially adjectives used 
adverbially, are susceptible of being compared, and form 
their degrees of comparison in the same manner as the 
adjectives : 

jpdt, late :, f^ater, later ; f*?atej^, latest ; 

oft, often ; c\kx, oftener ; c[teft, oftenest. 

The simple form of the Superlative in eft is little 
used ; we more frequently have recourse to circumlocu- 
tions, in which the adverb is replaced by the neuter of 
the adjective, preceded by the prepositions an or auf 
Ex.: 

* The primitive form of ba is bar, and is used every time w^hen, in 
the formation of these words, two vowels meet. 

t "When it>0 is combined with a word beginning by a vowel, an X is 
inserted, to avoid the hiatus. 



58 



am [pStcftcn, latest ; 
am oftcftcn, oftenest ; 



auf has gcnauefle, most minntely ; 
auf has gcfdjlinubcfte, most quickly. 



The Superlative sometimes also takes the ending cn^, 



Ex.: 



\xui}cftm§, at the soonest; 



i)bd)ftcn§, at tilt most. 

The following adverbs form their degrees of compari- 
son irregularly: 

gut, well ; bcfjer, better ; am Bejleit, best , 

K)id, much ; mef)r, more ; am meiften, most ; 

bath, soon ; eljer, sooner ; am efjeften, soonest ; 

Qixn, Avillingly ; Itcber, more willingly ; am liebften, most -willingly. 



CHAPTER X. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

§ 76. The following is a list of the principal con- 
junctions. 



1. SIMPLE CONJUNCTIONS. 



Unb, and ; cber, or; 

aber, aftem; but ; 

lonbcrU; but (after a negation) ; 

a(§, when, than ; 

benn, for ; ha, as ; 

ivcii, because ; 



it»enn, when, if; oB, if, whether; 

Vt)ann, when ; bann, then • 

ba§, that ; 

bocf), yet ; 

€l)e, before ; 

aifO/ thus, consequently. 



2. COMPOUND CONJUNCTIONS. 



S)amtt, auf ba^, in order that ; 
obcjleic^, obfd)on, although ; 
uad}bem, after; 
inbem, while ; 
mitfjin, consequently ; 



cntWebcr. . .ober, either. 
iDcber. . .nod), neither.., 
fowo^t. . .alS, as well. . , 
tr>ie. . -fo, as. . .as ; 
je.. .befto, the., .the. 



The conjunctions are followed now by the Subjunctive 
and now by the Indicative Mood ; some of them change 
the construction of the sentence, others do not change it 
(See the following Chapters.) 



59 

CHAPTER XL 
OF THE USE OF THE MOODS. 

1. INDICATIVE MOOD. 

§ 77. The Germans generally employ the Indicativ 
Mood, where in English, for the sake of brevity, the 
Infinitive and Present participle are used. Ex.: 

Set) glaube, t>af ev mx rcd}t[d}af|cner I believe him to be an honest 

2Jtann i\t. man. 

SStr ^aben immcr gcfim^cn; fcafj er We have ever foimd him to speak 

bte 9BaI)rf)cit fprarf). the truth. 

3(^ tt»ei§ nid)t, toa§ id) t'^un foil. I do not know what to do. 

Semanb, J^er in Scutfc^knb rcijle, Some one, travelling in Germany, 

fanb found 

5Bcil id) nidjt xdd) bin, ^cibe id^ ISTot being rich, I have no friends 

feine §^cunbc. 

ScJ) iiah^ c§ gejcf)cn, al§ id} !ocrbci= I saw it in passing. 

^an madjt ftc^ oft Ser'^aft, inbem Vf e often make ourselves hated by 
man Me SSatjrficit fagt. speaking the truth. 

(It will be remarked, that sentences of this kind are 
formed by circumscribing the English and adding either 
a relative pronoun, or one of the conjunctions, baj, ba, 
wcit, al§, iubem, ipenn.) 

SBcnn man lange franf gc^refen ij!, After having been ill for a long 

fu^It man ben SScrt^ ter ©ejunbs time, we feel the value of health 

i)cit befto me^r. the more. 

@[)e man rebct, mug man fcenfcn. Before speaking, you must think. 

Sometimes the Imperative is replaced by the Indica- 
tive Mood. Ex. : 

Subletbjl! Stay! 

3l)r fommt :^cr ! Come here ! 

2. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

1. When relating or quoting what has been said of 
done, the Subjunctive Mood must be used in German. 
Ex.: 

©r fagte mir, ha^ ex franf gcteefen He told me that he had been ill. 

trare. 

SKan fragtc \m§, trclcf)c§ imfcr 23a= They asked us, which was our 

terlanb ware. country. 



60 

3d^ glaufttc, hci^ ct frcin! iuarc. I thought he was ill.* 

2Str ^orten, bcv3ug fci abgcgangcn. We heard the train had started. 

2. After tlie conjunctions iDcnn and ob, if, wlien the 
verb is in the Imperfect or Pluperfect tense. Ex.: 

2Bcnn <Sie ct)cr gcfommcn ^arcn. If you had come sooner. 
aScnn i^ incle ^rcimbe f)attc. If I had many friends. 

3d) frvigte tl)n, ob cr c^ iniifte. I asked him, if he knew it. 

o. In exclamations and wishes, where the conjunction 
is understood. Ex.: 

«§dtte {(^ ®clb ! If I had money ! 

Std), Xoaxc id) gcfunb ! Ah ! if I were well ! 

4. Instead of the Conditional Mood. Ex.: 
3d) !6nntc reid) fein. I might be rich. 

3c^ toaxc glucfttd)cr. I should be happier. 

3d) l^atte mel}r i^rcunbe. I should have more friends. 

In general the Subjunctive Mood is used to express 
a thing of which we are not quite sure, and sometimes 
bj using either the Subjunctive or Indicative Mood we 
show our belief or disbelief of an event or a circum- 
stance. Ex.: 
3c^ I}abc gct^ort, bap bcr iCijntg a\u^^ 

gefommcn til. II have heard, that the king hag 

3d) l)abe gel)6rt, ba^ bcr ^ontg an; f arrived. 

gcfcmmen fei. J 

9}tan ^at iin§ gcfagt, bap ber ijrtebe^ 

gc[d}Io[)en i]t. I They have told us, that the peace 

SJ^att I)at m\§ gefagt, ber %xk'ic fei f is concluded. 

ge[d)lo[)en. J 

In the first case we express our belief of the news, in 
the second we merely mention it, without believing it yet 
ourselves. 

3. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

§ 78. The Imperative Mood, as we have seen, has 
only the second person of the Singular and of the 
Plural. When we wish to express a command to a 
third person, we make use of the present tense of the 
Subjunctive Mood, or of the verbs follen, shall, and 
mo gen, may. Ex.: 

* The Subjunctive Mood is likewise used in expressing the opinion 
we had of ourselves, but which we have no more at the time we are 
speaking. 



61 

(Ex fomme, j -rr in 

(Eie ntcgcn fommcu» Thej may come— let tliem come. 
In the first person of the ImjDerative Mood Tve employ 
the verb ia]]cn. Ex.: 

Sing. 2a^ un§ qcBcn. ) t *. 
Plu?. 2altum\c\m. [ ^et us go. 

_We may also say: geljcn linr; or: unr liio((en ge^cn, wo 
will a;o. 



4. INFINITIVE MOOD. 

§ 79. The German Infinitive is used with or without 
the preposition ju. It is used without 3U : 

1. When it is the subject of a preposition. Ex.: 
S3tct trinfcn i]t imgcfunb. To trink much is unwholesome. 

2. After the verbs bitrfen, idnncn, laffen, mo gen, 
mii[fen, folfen, iDcrben, tnoKen, Ijclfen, Ijorcn, (cloven, (crncn- 
fcljcn, fiifjlen. Ex.: 



3d) barf Ijcffcn. 
2)u fannft fct)rctBcn. 
(Sr mu^ arkiten. 
2Bir l)orcn il)n rebcn. 
21>tr faljen fie tanjcn. 
3}ccin ^rubcr tcrnt gcid^ncn. 



I may hope. 
Thou canst -write. 
He must work. 
"\Ye hear him speak. 
We saw her dancing. 
My brother learns drawi 



In all other cases the Infinitive is preceded by tho 
preposition 3U. Ex. : 

6'r lin"infd}t mit S^ncrt jit fprcd)cn. He wishes to speak to you. 

SSir (}ctfcn mcvgcn cincn ^ricf ju crs We hope to receive a letter to 

morrow. 
I beg you to get up for a mo 

ment. 
I fear to tell it him. 
It is sad to have no friends. 



We have still three miles to 



go. 



ijaitcn. 
3d) bittc ^ic, cmen SlugenBlic! aufju; 

ftet)en. 
3d) furd)tc c§ iijm ju fagen. 
(§5 ift traurig, fcine greunbe ju 

()aben. 
2Bir 1:)almi ncd) brct 3}ict(cit ju 

inad)cn. 

If we wish to indicate precisely the object, the motive 
of an action, um is added to the prep. gU. Ex. : 
3d) fcmme, um mit 3l)ncn ju I come in order to speak to you, 

fprcd)en. 
QBir leben nid)t, um ?u cj]cn, fciibcvn We do not live in order to eat 

Wix c)fcn, um ;u Icbcn. but we eat in order to live. 

7.. 



62 

Every German Infinitive may be taken substantively-, 
and be preceded by the article. Ex.: 

has Zxinkn, drinking ; ia§ S^anjcn, dancing. 

5. PARTICIPLES. 

§ 80. The present participle is mostly employed as 
an adjective. Ex. : 
S)er ftcrbenbe @retl ; the dying old man. 

5)te Icibenbe 9}Zenfci)|cit ; ' suffering humanity. 

S)a§ Icfenbe 5lmb ; the reading child. 

There are, however, cases, where the present Parti- 
ciple is also used in German to unite two sentences into 
one ; which, however, can only take place, when the two 
sentences have the same subject. Ex. : 

Sittentb fagte er mtr He told me trembling 

(Srrot^enb )?or (Bd)am cntfcrnte er Blushing with shame he with- 
fid^, drew. 

§ 81. The past participle serves not only to form 
the compound tenses of verbs, but it is also very often 
used as an adjective. 

(Sin gefronteS ^^ain^t; a crowned head. 

5)a§ gelicbte £inb; the beloved child. 

X'CX angefangcrte ^rief; the commenced letter. 

The past participle replaces sometimes the Imperative, 
the Infinitive, and even the present participle. Ex.: 

©etruTtfert, gcfpielt! Let us drink, play! 

2)aS ijd^t gearbeitet (instead of: That is called working. 

arbeiten). 
(5'r tarn gelaufcn, gefV'tungett. He came on running, jumping. 

Sometimes also the past participle of those verbs the 
Infinitive of which is used without gU (§ 79), is replaced 
by their Infinitive. Ex. : 
Sd) l^abe tfjn an!ommcn fe^en I have seen him arrive. 

(gefe^en). 
(Bx fjat be^afjlett muffen (gemuft). He has been obliged to pay. 
SStr t)aben if)rt fingen ^oren (gcs We have heard him sing. 

l)ort). 
<2ie i)at c§ ii]m ntd}t fagcn biirfcn Slie dared not tell him. 
(gebiirft). 

In rhetoric style, the past participle also serves to 
connect two sentences and to render the expression more 
concise and distinct. Ex.: 



63 

Son fcmen ^reunben ycvratf^cn, fon Betraj^ed by his friends, peree- 

jeincn i^cmben l^crfclgt, entjicf) cuted by his enemies, Themis- 

X(;cmtf^oflcS nad) ^eificn. __ tocles escaped to Persia. 

©ie Uttfct^ulb ift bcr (Scclc ©liicf; Innocence is the happiness of the 

Sinmal t>erfd}erjt unb aufgegcbcn, soul ; once forfeited and lost, 

33erld^t fie un§ tm ganjcn Vcbcn, it will leave us for ever, and 

Unb tcinc 9^eu' brmgt fie jurucf. no repentance can recall it. 



CHAPTER XII. 

OF THE USE OF THE TENSES. 

1. TEESENT TENSE. 

§ 82. The Present Tense is used in German as in 
English, and in addition in the following case, where the 
Perfect is substituted in English ; viz., when speaking of 
any length of time past, up to the present moment, and 
including it. Ex.: 
SBir n3oI)ncn [cit fimf 3aT)rcn in "We have been living in thii 

bicfcm «^aufc. house for five years. 

3:^r D^eim i\t fdjon elf SaTjve Their uncle has been dead these 

tobt. eleven years. 

Sd) f^abt c5 fc^on fcit nicincr I have had it from my childhood. 

i?inbf)eit. 
(icit tvann ftnb Sie r)ter ? How long have you been here ? 

3d) ttJatte bercitS fcit eincr <Stunbe I have been waiting for you this 
auf (2ie. hour. 

2. IMPERFECT TENSE. 

§ 83. The Imperfect Tense is used in German, 

1. In historical narrative. Ex.: 

^ticberid) fccr ©rcfc tear ein grower Frederick the great was a great 
T^clb^crr, afeer er licbte iinb hd general, but he also loved and 
f^ii^te and) i^k 3Bi[[cnfc^aften, protected the sciences. 

2. To express a time with relation to another. Ex.: 

Sd) fc^rieB, al§ bu !amii. I was writing when you came. 

5llg fie mid) \ai), fing fie an gu When she saw me, she began to 

treinen. cry. 

S55af)renb bet ©turm toBtc, fd^lief er During the noise of the storm he 

ganj fefi. slept quite soundly. 

8. To narrate events, of which the narrator was an 
eye-witness. Ex. : 



64 



^ 



©client crcigncte ftd) c(n [cnbcvBarcr Yesterday a strauge accideot 
SJcrfaU iiutcr meincm ^^cnfter. happened tinder my window. 

2)cr ^rc[c[[cr ijidt eine lange Sdcbc, The professor made a long 
iinb wix bcglcitetcn iljn nad) '^a\i\c speech, and we accompanied 
junicf. him home. 

3. PERFECT TENSE. 

§ 84. The Perfect Tense is used 

1. In relating events of which the narrator was not an 
€je-v/itness. Ex. : 

@g ijai fid) cin fonbetBarer SSorfall A strange accident Las hap- 

creignet. pened. 

2)cr ^rofcf[or I)at erne lange Olebe The professor has made a long 

gcljaltcn unb feine Bu^orer speech, and his auditors will 

trerben fte brucfen laffeti. have it printed. 

2!)cr <§erjcg tft gcftcrn in S. angc; The duke arrived at B. yester- 

foinmcn. day. 

2. In expressing any definite past time, without 
reference to another (when in English the Imperfect 
Tense is used). Ex.: 

3cl) bin I)cnte in bcr ^ird}C gctec; I was at church to-day. 

fen. 

2BiT ftnb gcjlcm angcfommcn. We arrived yesterday. 

Set) I}abc biefen ^^torgcn meinc I lost my pocket-book this 

^ricftafdje serlorcn. morning. 

93?cin §rennb Ijat i^crigcS 3ci!}r My friend performed a long jour- 

ctne grof e DvCife gcniadit. ney last year. 

(£inb ©te geftcrn iin c^^vCnjcrt gci Were you at tke concert yester- 

icefcn ? day ? 

§ 85. The Pluperfect and Future Tenses are em- 
ployed in German as in English. 

Observation. In English there are three forms for the Present and 
Imperfect, and two forms for the Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses ; viz.: 
I work, I am working, I do work, I worked, was working, did work ; 
I have worked ; I have been working ; I had been working ; — but in 
German they are all supplied by the simple form : id) avbeitc, id) aX'- 
Mkk, id) ^a&e gcarbeitct, id) f;atte gearbeitet. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

OF THE CONSTRUCTION. 

§ 86. The German construction differs in several 
points from the English. There are two principal 
rules to he observed: 1. that the word, expressing 



65 

the principal idea, is always placed after those words 
wliicli express only accessory ideas; 2. that the ex- 
pression w^hich is, so to say, the key of the sentence, 
and without which the sense could not he well under- 
stood, is always placed at the end of the sentence. 

PARTICULAR RULES. 

1. The adjective is always placed before its sub- 
stantive, and preceded by all those words which depend 
on it. Ex. : 

(^'m gccjen 3ebcrmann I)cf(td;cr A man, polite to everybody. 

^k 3f)itcn l^crgeftcnt jugefd)icftcTi The goods sent to you the day 
SBaaren. before yesterday. 

2. The Dative generally precedes the Accusative, ex- 
cept when both are personal pronouns, in which case the 
English construction is used. Ex.: 

©cbert <£fc bcm <§crTn ctrten (ituT)L Give a chair to the gentleman. 
3d) I)abc 3f}vcm -23rubcr ein S3ud) I have^lent a book to yonr bro- 
(^eltcl)cn. - ther. 

But: 

3d) fd)cnfe fie 3r)ncn. I give tliem to you. 

d^lan fafjte t§ una. They told us so. 

(Sr fd)ricb el mix. He wrote it to me. 

If one of the cases is a pronoun, it is placed before 
the noun. Ex. : 

3d) fann c§ mcincm yreunbe nid;t I cannot refuse it to my friend. 

at)fd}tagen. 
3d) Ieil)C bir mcine %t'i)cx. I lend thee my pen. 

8. The Nominative case is placed after the verb, or 
after the auxiliary, when there is a compound tense, 
whenever the sentence begins with any other word than 
the Nominative. Ex.: 

9?tOtgcn fommc id) nid)t. To-morrow I shall not come. 

S)ort l)i\Un Wix lange gettofint. We have lived there for a long 

time, 

^ctd) ij! er nid)t, abtx cT)rIic^. He is not rich, but honest. 

i^ur uicine Sreimbe ^/ahc id) icicle For my friends I have much 

©efdUic^feit. courteousness. 

^Tle S'auleit fann id) md)t aiiS- I cannot bear idle folks. 

f^el)en. 

^'cn a)tdbd)cn ftcl)t Uc (^iit\anu Modesty is becoming to girls. 

!eit an. 



66 

There are, however, some conjunctions which do not 
cause the transposition of the Nominative, such as unb, 
bcnn, ttber, alleiu, ba, and in general all those words 
which cause the verb to be placed at the end of the 
sentence. (§ 90.) 

4. The Nominative is also placed after its verb, in 
a sentence which serves as complement to the one pre- 
ceding it. Ex.: 

28enn cr fommt, cjc^e id) fort. When he comes, I go away. 

SBenn ©ie c§ befcfjlen, jo mu^ ev If you command, he must do it. 

c§ t^un. 

3e mel)r id) txinU, bcjio biirftiger The more I drink, the more 

bin id). thirsty I am. 

3Bcnn tie (Sinen getomncn, fo fcr^ When one party gains, the others 

(icrcn bie 5lnberu. lose. 

5. The Nominative is placed after its verb, when the 
conditional particle irenn is suppressed. Ex.: 

§{rbettct i^r md)t, fo befommt ii)V If you do not work, you do not 
and) fein ©elb. get any money. 

S3ift i>u md)t jietftg, fo mad)ft bu If thou art not diligent, thou 
feine ^ortfc^ritte. wilt make no progress. 

6. Interrogative sentences are formed without the help 
of any auxiliary verb, by merely placing the verb befor^i 
its Nominative. Ex.: 

®d)tn ©le fjeute au§ ? Do you go out to-day ? 

S3t([tgen ©ie c§ ntd)t? Do you not approve of it? 

5iommt ber dJtann md)t Wichcx ? Does the man not come back 
again ? 

Negative sentences are likewise formed without the 
help of auxiliary verbs. Ex. : 

ScE) trei^ tS nid)t, I do not know it. 

^r fommt nid)L He does not come. 

7. The Nominative is placed not only after the verb, 
but also after the adverb and other words depending on 
the verb, if the sentence begins with the neuter personal 
pronoun e§. Ex.: 

(B§ tarn gcjlern Scmanb. Somebody came yesterday. 

(SS erctgnct ftd) nt^t a((e Jl'age cine Such an opportunity does not 
fold)e ©elegen^eit. happen every day. 

( 87. The Germans place certain words at the end 
of the sentence, which are its Jce^/, and without which 
the sense would not be understood. These words are : 



67 

1. The attribute of the subject. 

2. The adverb referring to the verb of the subject. 

8. The preposition with its regimen or in its place the 
illative particles baran, baritnt, &c. 

4. The prepositions and separable particles with 
which the verbs are compounded. 

5. The Past Participle and the Infinitive. 

6. Lastly the verb of the subject. 

1) When the sentence begins with one of the conjunc- 
tions irenn, if; Wdi, because; obf(i)on, although; baj/ 
that; bamit, in order that; bet)or, e(]e, before; atg, ba, 
when; irctljrenb, while; nac^bem, after; bi§, until; 2) 
when the sentence begins with a relative pronoun ; and 
3) w^hen it begins with an interrogative pronoun or ad- 
verb, provided that the interrogation be indirect. 



Examples. 

1 3^ bin mcincn ^rcunbcn ge^ I am true to my friends, 
trcu. 

(Scib gegcn 3cbcrmann I}5f' Be polite to every one. 
ltd). 

2. Stcfe %xa\i Itcbt ifjrc ^inbcr This -woman does not love her 

nid)t. children. 

®cr .^ranfe Bcftnbct jTd) Bcfjcr. The patient is better. 

(2te fingt btefe^ I'ieb fc^ijn. She sings this song beautifully. 

3. 2Btr fpred;en imx unfcvn @c; "We speak of our affairs. 

2Ba§ mad)ert 'Bk bamit ? "What are you doing with it ? 

SScHen (£ie bai^on? Do you wish some of it? 

3d) befummere mid) ntd}t ia- I do not trouble myself about it 
rum. 

4. SO'tad^et bte 2'f)ure ju. Shut the door. 
<Sd)reiben 'Bk btefe Sricfe ab. Copy these letters. 

Sd) ftel)e alle 3}Jorgen jrii^ auf. I get up early every morning. 

5. Sd) I)abc l^eute ncd) nic^tl gcs I have not yet eaten anything 

geffen. to-day. 

(Sr i^atk mid) um (Erlaiibnif He had asked my permission. 

gcfragt. 

3d) i)iiht bie (St)te, mid) 3^ttGn I have the honor to wish you 

ju empfcf)len. good morning. 

6. SBcnn i(^ ®ud)cr unb ^Tcxmbe If I had books and friends. 

l)atte. 

3d) Wd^ nidjt, cb cr glucHid) I do not know if he is happy. 

Sllg ic^ ii}n jum cvflcit S^uile TThen I saw him for the first 

\ai}, time. 



68 

S[iBdr)venb cr auf tern Janbc Wax, While lie was in the cotmtiy. 

Sdj glaube, bag cr fcl)l' gufiic; I believe that he is very happy 

ben ift. 

S)erjcnt0c, trcldjcr sufrtcben if!, He who is contented, is happy. 

iff glucfltc^. 

2Bi|]en <Eie, irer bic[ctt S3ricf Bo you know vrho wrote this 

flefdjx iebcn l^at ? letter? 



TABLE 

OF ALL IRIIEGULAR FORMS OF DISSONANT AND 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Tlie first column contains the irregular form, the second the tense li 
which it belongs, and the third the Infinitive of the verb.) 



0?, i\U 

bdifit, bacft 
banb, banbc 
barg, barge 
bat, bate, 

befal)l, bcfcf}le 
bc(icl)lft, bcficfjU 
befli^, befii)ie 

bc^iffen 
betot)lett 
begann 

bcgonn, bcgonne 
bcgonneu 
bcircg, beWcge 
bc\rcgcn 
bin, bift 
birg 

birgjl, birgt 
bi§, biije 
bldfeft, bligt. 
blicb, bticbe 
blies, blicfe 
beg, bcge 
borft, bbrjlc 
bot, bote 
bract), brad)e 
bract)te, br ic> te 
brannte 
brdlft, brdt 



Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

Past part. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. 

Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Past Part. 

Imp. Ind. and ^ubj. 
Past Part. 

Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers, 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers, 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers, 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. 



cffen, to eat 
bacfen, to bake 
binbcn, to tie 
bergen, to hide 
bitten, to beg 
befe^len, to command 

do. 
fid; bcfici^en, to appl j 
one's self. 

do. 
befcf;[en, to command 
btgtuucn, to begin. 

do. 

do. 
beircgcn, to mo^e 

do. 
jein, to be 
bergen, to hide 

do. 
bct§en, to bite 
blajen, to blow 
blciben, to remain 
blafen, to blow 
biegen, to bend 
berften, to burst 
bieten, to offer 
bred)en, to break 
bringen, to bring 
brennen, to burn 
braten, to roast 



70 



brid) 


Imperative 


brict;!!, Biicljt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


brict, brictc 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


bad}te, bdd)te 


do. 


barf, barf ft 


Pres. Ind, 1st and 2d pers. 


brang, brdngc 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


brtjd) 


Imperative 


brifd)cfl, brifd)t 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


brcfd), brcjd)e 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


burfte, biirfte 


do. 


cinpfat}! 


Imp. Ind. 


em^fic:^t 


Imperative 


empncl}lfl, cmv^fteljlt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


empfol)!, empfctjie 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


empfef)len 


Past Part. 


erbltd), erblid;e 


Imp, Ind. and Subj. 


etblic^en 


Past Part. 


crlifd) 


Imperative 


erlifd)c|i, erlifc^t 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


crlcid), crlo jd}e 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


crlcfd)cn 


Past Part. 


erld)c(l, erfd^cHc 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


crfd}c((cn 


Past Part. 


erfd)raf, erfd;rdfe 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


erf^ttd 


Imperative 


erfc^rtcfj!, crfdjricTt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


erjd)rocfett 


Past Part. 


eni^cg, crwcge 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


erwogen 


Past Part. 


\a[)x\t, fd^rt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


daft, fdnt 


do. 


anb, fditbe 


Imp. Ind. and Scbj. 


fdngft, fdngt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


u-t}tft, ficl)t 


do. 


'id, fteie 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


inq, fingc 


do. 


iid}tft, fitd)t 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


ttod)t, fiod}te 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


fiog, flcge 


do. 


fiot}, m<^ 


do. 


H, ficife 


do. 


Dd}t, fcd)te 


do. 


ra^, frd^c 


do. 


ror, frorc 


do. 


xi% 


Imperative 


fri|ieft,Jri^t 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


ul}Xf fu^rc 


Imp. Ind. and Su))j. 


gab, gdbe 


do. 


gait, gdltc 


do. 



brcdjen, to break 

do. 
bratert, to roast 
bcnfcn, to think 
burfen, to dare 
bringen, to press 
brcf^en, to thrasb 

do. 

do. 
burfcn, to dare 
empfcljlen, to recom 
mend 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
crblctc^ett, to grow pale 

do. 
erlcfdjcn, to extinguish 

do. 

do. 

do. 
crfc^ alien, to sound 

do. 
erfd)re(fen, to be fright 
ened 

do. 

do. 

do. 
ertvdgcn, to consider 

do. 
fa^reit, to drive (in a 

carriage) 
fallen, to fall 
finben, to find 
fangen, to catch 
fcd)tcn, to fight 
fallen, to fall 
fangen, to catch 
^cd;ten, to braid 

do. 
fiiegen, to fly 
fiic^en, to flee 
flie^en, to flow 
fec^ten, to fight 
fre))en,to eat(of animals 
friercn, to freeze 
freffen, to eat 

do. 
faljren, to drive (in a 

carriage) 
gcbcn, to give 
gelten, to be v.'orth 



71 



gcbacfen 


Past Part 




bacfen, to bake 


cjcbar, gcbate 


Imp. 


Ind 


and SuLj. 


gcbarcn, to bear 


f^cbctct 


Past Part 




bcten, to pray 


(]cbicr 


Imperative 


gcbdren 


gcbtcif , gebicvt 


Pres 


Ind 


2d and od per 


3. gcbaren, to bear 
bet^cn, to bite 


cjcbtfjcn 




Past Part. 


fjcblafct: 






do. 


blafen, to blow 


gcbltebcn 






do. 


blctben, to remain 


gebogcn 






do. 


btcgen, to bend 


gcborcu 






do. 


gebdren, to bear 


gcborgcn 






do. 


feergen, to hide 


gcboriten 






do. 


Ijcriten, to burst 


gcboten 






do. 


btetcn, to offer 


gcbracl)t 






do. 


bringcn, to bring 


gcbranut 






do. 


Brcnnen, to bum 


gcbratcn 






do. 


bratcn, to roast 


gebrod)cu 






do. 


brcd)en, to break 


gcbunbcn 


. 




do. 


binben, to tie 


"gebad)t 






do. 


bcnfen, to think 


gcbicf), gci:»tct)C 


[mp. 


lud 


and Subj. 


gcbeif)cn, to prosper 


gcbic()cu 




Past Part. 


do. 


gcbvoidicrt 






do. 


bre[c^en, to thrash 


gcbrungcu 






do. 


■ l^ringcn, to press 


gc bun gen 






do. 


bt'ngcn, to bargain 
biirfen, to dare 


gcbuvft 






do. 


gcfaf)rctt 






do. 

do. 


faljTcn, to drive (in a 
carriage.) 


gcfafkn 






do. 


•anen, to^'fall 


gcfangcn 






do. 


'angen, to catch 


gcflccl)ten 






do. 


iicd)ten, to braid 


gcjiipgcu 






do. 


iiegcn, to fly 


gefto^cn 






do. 


itetjen, to flee 


gcflcfjcn 






do. 


iie^en, to flow 


gctcd)ten 






do. 


cd^tcn, to fight 


gcfrcilcit 






do. 


re[fcn,to eat(of animals 


gcfroren 






do. 


rieren, to freeze 


gcfunben 






do. 


inben, to find 


gcgangcii 






do. 


geljen, to go 


gcgcbctt 






do. 


gcben, to give 


gcgcfjen 






do. 


effen, to eat 


gcglid^en 






do. 


gteic^cn, to resemble 


gegltttcn 






do. 


gletten, to gUde 


gcglommcn 






do. 


glimmen, to glow 


gegcl)rcn 






do. 


gdfjren, to ferment 


gegotten 






do. 


gcltcn, to be worth 


gcgcfjcn 






do. 


gie§en, to pour 


gcgrabcu 






do. 


grabcn, to dig 


gcgnffen 






do. 


gretfen, to seize 


9cl)altcn 






do. 


i)alten, to hold 


gcfjaucn 






do. 


ijaum, to hew 


gc{}ci^cn 






do. 


^ct§en, to be called 


ge^obcn 






do. 


I)eben, to lift 


ge^clfcu 






do. 


I}clfcn, to help 



7-2 



gcFannt 


Past 1 


art. 


fcnncn, to know 


gcflcmmen 




do. 




flinimcn, to climb 


gcfUmgcn 




do. 




fltiu^cn, to sound 


gcfniffcn 




do. 




fnctfcn, to pinch 


gcfcmmcn 




do. 




fcmmcn, to come 


gcfcnnt 




do. 




fcnncn, to be able 


gcfrcdicn 




■ do. 




hicd}cn, to creej) 


gclvit'cn 




do. 




labcn, to load 


gelaiig, gctaiigc 


Imp. ind 


. and 


SuLj. 


gclingen, to succeed 


gclaffcn 


Past Part. ' 


Iviffen, to leave 


gclaufcn 




do. 




Iau[cn, to run 


gclcgcn 




do. 




Itegcn, to lie (down) 


gclcfcn 




do. 




Icfen, to read 


gcltclicn 




do. 




lcif)cn, to lend 


gelittcn 




do. 




Icibcn, to suffer 


gclcgcu 




do. 




liigcrt, to lie (speak an 
untruth) 


gchmgcn 




do. 




gclingcn, to succeed 


gcmal)lcn 




do 




mal)len, to grind 


gemeficn 




do. 




meffen, to measure 


gemtct)cn 




do. 




inetben, to avoid 


gcmoct)t 




do. 




mogen, to like 


gcmolfen 




do. 




nieifen, to milk 


gemuBt 




do. 




mufjcn, to be obliged 


gcnannt 




do. 




nmnen, to name 


Qtnas, genai'e 


Imp. Ind. 


and 


Subj. 


gencfeit; to recover 


gcnefctt 


Past Part. 


do. 


genommen 




do. 




ncljmen, to take 


genofien 




do. 




gentc^en, to enjoy 


geno^, genoffe 


Imp. Ind. 


and 


Subj 


do. 


gepiiffen 


Past Part. 


i?feifen, to whistle 


gepflogctt 




do. 




Vjiegcn (dlati) jc), t« 

consult 


ge^^rfcfcrt 




do. 




prcifcrt, to praise 


geqiiollcn 




do. 




queHen, to spring 


gcrannt 




do. 




rcnncn, to run 


gcrati) en 




do. 




rat()cn, to advise 


{|cricben 




do. 




rcibcn, to rub 


gerifjen 




do. 




Xci^m, to snatch 


gcvittcu 




do. 




veitcn, to ride (on horsa- 
back) 


gercrt)cn 




do. 




rtcd)cn, to smell 


gcrcnncn 




do. 




rinnen, to flow 


gcriifcn 




do. 




rufen, to call 


gcntngcn 




do. 




ringcn, to wrestle 


gcjanbt 




do. 




fcnben, to send 


0cid)atfcn 




do. 




jd)affen, to create 


gcid}al), gc[d;rci{)e 


linp. Ind. 


and Sub] 


gejd)cl)cn, to happen 


gcfd}cl)cn 


Past Part. 


do 


3cid)icbcn 




do. 




fdicibcn, to part 


acm)tc()t 


Pres. Ind. 


3dp 


ers. 


gcldici)cn, to happen 


gcid)icncn 


Past Part. 


jdicincn, to seem 


3eid}lafcn 




do. 




jd;'la[cn, to sleep 



73 



gclcl;licl;cu 

0clcl)Uffcn 

gcicl}li|]cn 

geicl}loffcn 

gcict)lungcn 

gcfc^mtlfen 

gcjcl}mcljcn 

geid)nittcn 

{Hcfcl}ncbcn 

gc idle ben 

geidicltcn 

gcidicrcu 

gcjd}c)]cn 

gcjd^rtcbcn 

gefd}riccn 

geid)rittcn 

gefd)unbcn 

gcfdmnegcn 

geid}n:tcUen 

gel'd)tt?cmmctt 

geld}ircreu 

gefd)iininl^cn 

gefd^nnuigen 

gclcf)en 

gclefien 

gcfcffcn. 

gcfcntictt 

gcfcttcn 

g tip tc en 

gelplinen 

gefpcnnen 

gei>rcd}en 

geiprcifen 

geipningen 

geftanten 

gefttegen 

gcitcdien 

geftcl)len 

geftcrben 

geftc^en 

geftrid)Ctt 

geftrittcn 

geftunfcn 

geiungctt 

gejimfen 

gcti)an 

getragen 

gctreten 

gctricben 

Getvcffen 



Past Part. 


fd}(agen, to beat 


do. 


fd}lctd)en, to sneak 


do. 


fd)leifcn, to whet 


do. 


fd)lct§cn, to split 


do. 


fd}Ucicn, to shut 


do. 


fd}lingcn, to devour 


do. 


fc^mei^cn, to throw 


do. 


fdjmeljcn, to melt 


do. 


fd)neiben, to cut 


do. 


fd}nauben, to snort 


do. 


fd}ieben, to push 


do. 


fd}eltcn, to scold 


do. 


jd}cren, to shear 


do. 


fd}ic^cn, to shoot 


do. 


fd)reiben, to write 


do. 


fd}rctcn, to cry 


do. 


id)reitcn, to step 


do. 


fd}inben, to flay 


do. 


fd}tr»c{gen, to be silent 


do. 


fdjWcUen, to swell 


do. 


fd)ir»immen, to swim 


do. 


|d}Wi3rcn, to swear 


do. 


jdjtrinben; to vanish 


do. 


fd}tx»ingcn, to swing 


do. 


fei)en, to see 


do. 


fi^en, to sit 


do. 


faufen, to drink (of ani 




mals) 


do. 


fmncn, to meditate 


do. 


'icbcn, to seethe 


do. 


pelen, to spit 


do. 


plei^cn, to split 


do. 


ptnncn, to spin 


do. 


fprcd)en, to speak 


do. 


fpric^cn, to germinate 


do. 


fpringen, to jump 


do. 


ftcl)en, to stand 


do. 


ftctgcn, to ascend 
ftcd}eit, to sting 


do. 


do. 


ftc^Ien, to steal 


do. 


ftcrben, to die 


do. 


fto^en, to push 


do. 


ftrcid}en; to stroke 


do. 


ftrciten, to contend 


do. 


ftmfen, to stink 


do. 


jfingen, to sing 


do. 


finfen, to sink 


do. 


tl)un, to do 


do. 


trvigcn, to carry 


do. 


treten, to tread 


do. 


treiben, to drive 


do. 


trcffen, to hit 



74 



gctrogctt 

cjctrimfctt 
gc»afd)ctt 
getcanbt 

gcwann, gc\t»annc 
gtni?ad)ien 
gctrekn 
gewid)cn 
geiricicn 
gcicogcn 
gewontien 
neworben 
gcttJorben 
geir»otfcn 
geinorrett 
getDunbett 
getuup 
gejie:^ett 
gqogen 
geiwungen 
gib, gieb 
gtbft, gibt 
gtitft, gilt 
ging, gtngc 
glirf), glid)c 
glit, gittte 
glomm, glontmc 
gc^r, gojre 
gcit, golte 
go§, ga§e 
grdbft, grdbt 
gnff, grtffe 
grub, gn'ibe 
f)a(f, f)ulfe 
pltft, f)d(t 
r)aft, f)at 
l)atte, f)dtte 
ftteb, f)tebe 
I)telt, f)te[te 

f)itfft, f)tl[t 

r)iif 

f)cb, l^cbe 
i^ 

f im, fame 
!.tnn, fannjl 
fannte, fonntc 
flang, flcinge 
flomm, ftontme 
fnift, fniffe 
fommi!, fcmwt 



Past Part. 

do. 
do. 
do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Past Part, 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 

ao. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Imperative 
Pres.Ind. 2d and odpers. 

do. 
Imp. Ind, and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pres.Ind 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj, 

do. 

do. 
Pres.Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pres.Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imperative 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imperative 

Pres.Ind.2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres.Ind. 1st and 2d pers 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Pros Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 



tvicgctt, h-ugett; to de 

ceive. 
trfnfcn, to drink 
ivafd)en, to wash 
iiU'nben, to turn 
getinnnen, to win 
lrad)fen, to grow 
fctn, to be 
ir»eid^cn, to yield 
itieijen, to show 
iDtegcn, to weigh 
gelfinnen, to win 
inerben, to enHst 
tDcrben, to become 
irterfen, to throw 
ti^irrcn, to entangle 
iriinben, to wind 
iriffen, to know 
jeil^en, to accuse, 
gie^en, to draw 
jtningen, to compel 
geben, to give 

do. 
getteit, to be worth 
gef)en, to go 
glet(^cn, to resem-ble 
gleiten, to glide 
gtimmen, to glimmer 
gdbren, to ferment 
gclten, to be. worth 
gic^en, to pour 
graben, to dig 
greifert, to seize 
graben, to dig 
l)cI[eTi, to help 
l^alten, to hold 
l;aben, to have 

do. 
f)amn, to hew 
i)alkn, to hold 
i^d^m, to be called 
l^cifen, to help 

do. 
l^eBeit, to lift 
efjen, to eat 

do. 
fommcn, to come 
fcnncn, to be able 
fcnncn, to know 
flingcn, to sound 
flinimen, to climb 
fncifen, to pinch 
fcmmcn^ to come 



75 



fonntc, Bnntc 


Imp. lud. and Su!)j. 


frod), h'odje 


do. 


lag, Icige 


do. 


lag, Idfe 


do. 


Idffeft, Id§t 


Pres. Iiid. 2d and od pors. 


Idufft, Iduf' 


do. 


lief, liefe 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


lies 


Imperative 


liefeft, (tef! 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


lic^, lic^ 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


litt, Ittte 


do. 


(eg, logc 


do. 


lub, lub 


do. 


mag, magfi 


Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. 


map, md§e 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


mtcb, micbc 


do. 


mifi 


Imperative 


mtffeft, mift 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


mod)te, mcdjte 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


muf , mugt 


Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. 


muBte, mu§tc 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


naf)m, nd{)mc 


do. 


uannte 


Imp. Ind. 


uimm 


Imperative 


ntmmj!, nimmt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


V^nff, pftffe 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


pfiog, pficgc 


do. 


pricl, priefe 


do. 


quiU 


Imperative 


qutdil:, quIKt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


quoK, quijUc 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


rang, range 


do. 


ranu, rdnnc 


do. 


rannte 


Imp. Ind. 


rdt()ft, rdtf) 


Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


rtcb, rlcbe 


Imp. Ind. and Subj. 


rief, ricfc 


do. 


rictl), rtct^e 


do. 


ti§, riffc 


do. 


rttt, ritte 


do. 


red), r5d)c 


do. 


a(), jdl;e 


do. 


luC'tc 


Imp. Ind. 


;ng, fdnge 


Imp. Ind. Subj. 


xnt, fdnfe 


do. 


ann, jdnne 


do. 


U^, id^e 


do. 


fdufft, iduft 


Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. 


{c^alt, id)dltc 


Imp. Ind and Subj, 



foiuicn, to be able 
fr(cd)cn, to creep 
licgcn, to lie (dowa) 
Icl'en, to read 
lafjcn, to leave 
laufeu, to ruu 

do. 
Icl'en, to read 

do. 
tafjen, to let 
leiben, to suffer 
li'igen, to lie (speak wj 

untruth) 
labcn, to load 
mogen, to like 
meffen, to measure 
meiben, to avoid 
mcl'ien, to measure 

do. 
mogen, to like 
muijcn, to be obliged 

do. 
ttc^mcn, to take 
nennen, to name 
uc()men, to take 

do. 
Vfeifctt, to whistle 
Vfiegcn 0iati) jc), to 

consult 
pretfcn, to praise 
queUcn, to spring 

do. 

do. 
ringen, to wrestle 
rinnen, to flow 
rennen, to run 
ratt)en, to advise 
rciben, to rub 
rufen, to call 
ratten, to advise 
rei§en, to snatch 
rciten,to ride (on iiorse 

back) 
rtcd}en, to smell 
fc()en, to see 
fenbcn, to send 
fingen, to sing 
ftnfcn, to sink 
finncn, to meditate 
fi^en, to sit 
jaufen, to drink (of 

animals) 
jdicltcn, to scold 



76 



fd}tcb, fd}icbe 


Imp. 


Ind 


L. and SuLj. 


\d/.cn, |d)icnc 






do. 


frt}iltft, fd}ilt 


Pres. Ind. 2d and od pcrs. 


\d)ia\]t, fct)taft 






do. 


fd)lagft, fd)ldgt 






do. 


^rfilaug, fd)ldnge 


Imp. 


Ind 


. and Suhi. 


fd)lid}, fd}ltd)e 






do. 


fd)lief, fd^liefc 






do. 


fdjliff, fc^liffe 






do. 


Id^lif, fdjltli'e 






do. 


1d)to^, fd)tD[[e 






do. 


fd}lug, fd)luge 






do. 


ic^milj 


Imperative 


la^miljcf}, fd^miljt 


Pres. 


Ind 


. 2d and 8d pcrs. 


fd)mi§, fc^miffe 


Imp. 


Ind 


. and Sub]. 


jd^molj, fd}m6l5C 






do. 


fd)nitt, fd^nitte 






do. 


fd^ttoB, fd)n6be 






do. 


fd)cB, fd)obe 






do. 


fd)alt, jc^olte 






do. 


fd)Dr, fc^ore 






do. 


fd}of, fdjofie 






do. 


td)rteb, fc^rieBe 






do. 


]d)xk, fc^rtee 






do. 


d)ritt, jd)ritte 






do. 


d)uf, jd)u[e 






do. 


d)ivamm, fc^indmmc 






do. 


c^wanb, fc^iudnbe 






do. 


d)ii3icg, fd}Wtege 






do. 


fd}Wtnft, jd}wiat 


Pres. Ind. 


2d and od pers. 


[lijiinU 


Imperative 


fd^iroU, fc^iT^oKe 


Imp. 


Ind, 


, and Subi. 


fd)Wor, fc^wore 






do. 


fd)raor, jd)Wore 






do. 


fd)wang, fc^wdnge 






do. 


fd}wur, fc^ivure 






do. 


m 


Imperative 


\id}}\ rid}t 


Pres. 


Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 


foff/ \m 


Imp. 


Ind 


. and Subj. 


^cg; I'oge 






do. 


iott, fotte 






do. 


jpann, jpat^ttc 






do. 


ivtc, fpice 






do 


fpli§, fpliffe 






do. 


^pr ad), fprdd)e 






do. 


f prang, jptdnge 






do. 


fpridji't, fprid}t 


Pres. 


Ind, 


. 2d and Sd pers. 


jprtd), 


Imperative 


fprc^, fprcffc 


Imp. 


Ind 


. and Sn1)i. 


ftad), ftvTd)c 






do. 


ftaf, ftdfe 






do. 


fta^l, ftdf}Ie 






do. 



fd)eibcn, to part 
fd^emcn, to seem 
fdjelten, to scold 
id)lafcn, to sleep 
fc^lagen, to beat 
fd}lingen, to devour 
fd)leid)en; to sneak 
|d)Iafcn, to sleep 
fd}leifett, to whet 
{d)let^en, to split 
|d)lic^cn, to shut 
id)(agen, to beat 
jd;mel^en, to melt 

do. 
f(^meif en, to throw 
fdjnieljcn, to melt 
td)neiben, to cut 
fd)nauBen, to snort 
fd}ie6en, to push 
fd)elten, to scold 
fc^eren, to shear 
ic^te|en, to shoot 
((^reibcn, to write 
|d)reiett, to cry 
fd)reiten, to step 
fd)affen, to create 
fd)it)immen, to swim 
fd}Winben, to vanish 
id)tt)eigen, to be silent 
fd;wcllen, to swell 

do. 

do. 
fd)\tidrert, to fester 
fd)it)oren, to swear 
fd)»tngcn, to swing 
fd)»oren, to swear 
je|ett, to see 

do. 
faufcn, to drink (of ani- 

mals) 
faugen, to suck 
jieben, to seethe 
Iptnnen, to spin 
fpcien, to spit 
fplei^ctt, to split 
tprcd)en, to speak 
jpringen, to jump 
fprcd;en, to speak 

do. 
fprtc§cn, to germinate 
ftcd}cn, to sting 
flcdcn, to stick 
ftc()(on, to steal 



77 



f!aub, jlanbc 
[tanf, ftanfe 
ftaxh, fti'ivbe 
fttd) 

fttd}fl, flt(I)t 
fticg, l^icge 
ftict)l, 
fticl)ltl, jltcT)lt 

\tixh\l, fttvbt 
ftirb 

ftoBtf , fto|5t 
jtrid), ftxid)i 
fixitt, firitte 
ftarb, ftiivbe 
tijat, tljak 
ti)n (e) 

{■()U|1, tf)Ut 

txa\, trdfc 
trdgjl, trdgt 
txanf, tranfc 
tvat, trdtc 
tricb, tvicbc 
ttiff 

tvtffll, trip 
trittft, tvitt 
tvitt 

h-cg, tr5gc 
trug, triige 
I'crbarb, ycrbiivbc 
l^cvbirb 

i^cvbtrbt'!, iicrbivbt 
ycrborbcn 
yerbroffcn 
ycrbroi, tjcrbrcffc 
l^crbarb, Derbiivbc 
licrga|, J;)crgdpe 
l^ergcffen 
tergiffcft, ycvgi^ 
lun-gif 
itcri;oI)fcn 
lun-icren 
i\xkx, vcvlcre 
\i\id}icft, \vad}]i 
tiHinb, ii\inbe 
toanbtc 
Mwx, Wvirc 
Yoaxh 
ivarb 

tiHirf,- toiirfe 
\vdid;cft, wdfd)t 



Imp. Ind. aiiJ Subj. 
do. 
do. 
Imperative 

Pros. Ind. 2d and 3d pcrs. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. 
Imperative 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
do. 
do. 
Imperative 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 

do. 
Imperative 
Imj). Ind. and Subj. 
do. 
do. 
Imperative 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d per^. 
Past Part. 

«' do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
do. 
do. 
Past Part. 

Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imperative 
Past Part. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Imp. Ind. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 



In 



. Ind. 



do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. 
Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. 



ftcfjcn, to stand 
fiiufcii, to stink 
ftcrbcn, to die 
ftcdjcn, to sting 

do. 
ftcigcn, to ascend 
ftc()lcn, to steal 

do. 
flc{3crt, to push 
jicvbcu, to die 

do. 
flciitctt, to steal 
fto^en, to push 
ftretd)cn, to stroke 
ftrciten, to contena 
fterbcn, to die 
tl)un, to do 

do. 

do. 
tvcffen, to hit 
tragcn, to cany 
trtnfctt, to drink 
trcten, to tread 
trcibcn, to drive 
trcjfen, to hit 

do. 
tvcten, to tread 

do. 
trugen, to deceive 
tvagen, to carry 
ycrbcrben, to spoil 

do. 

do. 

do. 
Dcrbricfcn, to vex 

do. 
»crberBen, to spoil 
tjcrgeffen, to forget 

do. 

do. 

do. 

»cr^cl)(en, to conceal 
Dcrlicren, to lose 

do. 
tradjfett, to grow 
h)inben, to wind 
inenben, to turn 
fein, to be 
iucrbctt, to enlist 
iDcrbcn, to become 
hjctfcn, to throw 
lrafd)en, to wash 
\inj[cn, to know 



73 



\mc§, tr»tcfc 
Win, tijiUjt 
\t^ixbft, wirBt 
h)irb 

h)irfj!, U)trft 

xocQ, tuogc 
JDurf)0, wuc^fe 
trarb, tnurbe 
irurbe, wurbc 
irufc^, wiifrf)e 
i\)ugte; wuftc 



Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 
Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and Sd pers. 
Imperative 

do. 
Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. 

do. 
Imp. Ind. and Subj. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

i!o. 



\ocid)cn, to yield 
iDcifcn, to sliow 
ttJoUcU; to be willing 
incvben, to enlist 

do. 
\\>crfctt, to throw 

do. 
toerben, to become 
trticgen^ to weigh 
toad^feit, to grow 
totxbm, to enlist 
iuerben, to becoma 
hjajc^en, to wash 
tci[)en, to know 
geif)en, to accuse 
jie^en, to draw 
j^aoingen, to compel 



PRACTICAL PART. 



ALPHABETICAL LIST 

OF ALL THOSE V70RDS WHICH AEE MET WITH IN THE 136 EXERCISE8 
OF THE FIEST COURSE, AND WITH WHICH THE PUPIL IS SUPPOSED 
TO BE QUITE FAMILIAR. 



1. SUBSTANTIVES 



5(ad)cn 
5lbcnb 
S-lmalte 

5lr5t 

Slugcublitf 

S3anO 

Safe 

SQaiiin 

S3crg 

S3cfuc^ 

*8icr 

93mic 

matt 

S3lct 

Slciftift 

Slumc 

a3rob 

Snibcr 

S3ruf)cl 

Slid) 

ging 

S)orf 

Qik 

eitci-n 

(Smilic 

(S'ngldut'cr 

Benfter 



Winter 


Stattener 


^•inqcr^ut 


.Vuffce 


%la]d}t 


^aih 


%kii(i) 


^Urt 


%xMdn 


5^ die 


^Tcunb 


^a^^ 


^rcunbtn 


Jtaufmann 


f^veUjeit 


teller 


^•ncbric^ 


^ittb 


^•rud;t 


^trc!^c 


%n^ 


^tridje 


©abcl 


Plainer 


©artcn 


^Ictb 


©drtncr 


^oln 


@clb_ 


^onic^ 


©cmufc 


.^onlgtn 


©cid)dft 


c^opfwc^ 


®cid)id}te 


^crb 


©cfcdfdMft 


i^ricq 


@circ(}n{)ett 


Jluti'd)cr 


©las 


i^ud;e 


©clb 


:ecbctt 


®utc 


£c()rcr 


^atgbinbe 


^etnwanb 


«§anb 


l^cd) 


•^anbct 


^'cifct 


<§anbl'd}uf) 


2croc 


^aus 


^'itbirig 


•^elnrid) 


I'cuife 


•^cntb 


£'uft 


^err 


£'utt(^ 


«|)uf)n 


SOidbd)ctt 


•^unb 


9?Jagb 
dnai 


•^ut 


3a^r 


9}tann 


3cf)ann 


2?iarft 



SKcffcr 

^Ictaii 

a\Mttag 

2}ionb 

2}ionat 

SJiorgcn 

a'ltuttcr 

aiiidjc 

9^ad)bar 

9iad)bartn 

5lad)vid)t 

Duibcl 

£bft 

Cnfcl 

C^aar 

Si>avtcr 

^i^rilaumc 

^sfcffcr 

^filid}t 

$funb 

^ubcr 

$Kcd}t 

5)icgcnfd;tnu 

gting 

^ad;e 

eal5 

Sd)n)ci!cr 

(id}uftcr 

(Sd)ncibcr 

(2d)rcmcr 

•Hdnif) 

ed;(ci 



82 



Sdjinfcn 


(ct'nmm 


^i)kx 


33or\pattO 


ed)u Ic 


(itocf 


3:l;uve 


93alb 


£ri)ulcr 


etra^e 


3:cd}ter 


QSafier 


Sd^ranf 


(Btrumpf 


3:ud) 


2i]ettcr 


Scnf 


etul)l 


lU)r _ 


aSetn 


gtlber 


•etunbe 


llngliuf 


men 


(Ecl)n 


etiic! 


Unrcd;t 


mif)chn 


(Bonne 


(guppc 


«atcr 


aSitlen 


S org [alt 


2ag 


Setter _ 


2Bdc^c 


epajtergang 


Xante 


93ct9nugen 


aSuritt 


epicgct 


3:afc^entud} 


ffierjtanb 


3at)n 


eptel 


2^aubc 


Sicrtcl 


3cit 


8ta()I 


Siger 


S3cgc(. 


3tnimcr 


eicUc 


!Jifd) 


a^olf 


3ucfer 


ettcfcl 


:it;ci( 


33cricrjung 






2. ADJECTIVES. 




alt 


X)axt 


nct^i'g 


treu 


angcncl)m 


f)od) 


nu^li'^ 


tbeurcr 


arm 


rjDJiid^ 


cffen 


unartig 
unban^bar 


bd'c^elbctt 


:^ubld) 


reic^ 


beic 


m^ 


rein 


unglaublid? 


beutjd; 


talt 


fd)dblid) 


ungludtic^ 


faul 


flcin 


fc^ldfrig 


unirifienb 


ficimg 


franf 


fd)lcd}t 


nnwobl 


gefdUig 


lang 


fd)ncn 


pcrtrejfltd) 


gefct)ic!t 


langfam 


fd)on 


ivarm 


gcfunb 


lcid)t 


fd)roarj 


tretg 


gliicfltd) 


(cid)tgldu'6ig 


fc^wer 


ja{)trei(^. 


golbcn 


Itebengmirbig 


itlbcrn 


jufrieben 


grcB 


mubc 


ftarf 




gut 


ncu 


traurig 






3. 


VERBS. 




abrcifcn 


beleiblgen 


erfinbcn 


gni§en 


abfc^rciben 


bclo^nctt 


cr batten 


baben 


ad}tcn 


Bemuf)cn, fic^ 


crtauben 


^agettt 


anflciben 


bcfud}cn 


erjdf)lett 


bci^en 


anfcmmen 


Betrugctt 


erjicben 


l^ungern 


anttrortcn 


bitten 


crwarten 


trren, f[^ 


anycf)cn 


bictbcn 


ciien 


faufen 


an^unben 


b(t|cn 


fatten 


fenncn 


anraenbcn 


braud)cn 


finbcn 


fcmmen 


arbcitcn 


bredjen 


freucn, ftd; 


fcnnen 


aufmadjen 


bringcn 


frieren 


tad)en 


aufrtct)cn 


ban fen 


iiird)ten 


tegen 


fluggefjen 


bcnfen 


geben 


leiben 


aueru^vn 


bcnuern 


ge()en 


Id'cn 


bcfc 1)1 en 


burrtcn 


gel)cren 


lieben 


Bcfiuben, f;c^ 


cnipfchlen 


geirttnnm 


to ben 


fcct)altcn 


cntbcifcn 


glaubcn 


tiigen 



83 



mi ttt)€i(cn 

mufjeu 

ncfjmen 

ratt)tnt 

rcgncn 

fageit 

fd}dmen^ |xd) 

fd}cineu 

ic^ icfen 

jd^lagen 

fd^neiben 

fdjneictt 



fd)rc(&cn 


trinfcn 


ci)cn 


untcvljaltcn, fid) 


cin 


t)crad)ten 


'e|€n 


»erbc[fcm 


'i|cn 


»erbietett 


)3ajicrcn 


ttcrfaufen 


pielen 


Dcrtieren 


i)rcd)cn 


»€rfprcd}ctt 


■tcdcn 


tt>arten 


ftrafen 


toa^d)m 


tabeltt 


todfjktt 


tanjett 


tocggc^cn 


t^cilett 


toeinen 


tobtctt 


toerbeu 



totebcr[e§en 

in if) en 

irof)ncn 

tvoKen 

tuunbcnt, fid; 

iuunfd)ert 

jeigcn 

jcrrei^en 

juma^ett 

guriicfgebeit 

juriidfommcn 

^urudfd^icfctt 

jweifcitt 



4. DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUXS. 



bcXf hkf ba€ 
biefer, jcncr 
mem, bcin, fcin, ic. 
bcinige, meinige, jc, 
berjenige, biejcnige, ic. 
id% bit, cv 
ii)\x, fie, eg 



mir, mi^f Hv, bid) 
ung, end), i§ncn 

tneldjer, tt»cld)e, tocld}c» 
man, nicmanb 
fcin, nic^t^ 
icmanb, mel^re 



anbcre, afie 
cin, einjig 
gtt^ci, brci, K. 
crftc, gn^citc, k* 
ganj, i)aib 



cAcXf fonbent 

all, fur 

auf, au§, an 

bei, big 

cben, focbcn 

ba, ba»on, bamit, K. 

burd), baburd) 

ef)emal§ 

geftcm, fieute 

oft, immer 

feltcn, fpdt 

fru(), fru^et 

gern, genug 



5. PARTICLES. 

gcfdHigf}, langc 
l^ier, bort 
I^erab, (lerein, jc. 
l^inab, l^inaus, jc. 
in, barin, tccxiix 
mit, tamitf k, 
ja, nein 
noc^, nid)t 
ob, ober, nur 
o{)nc, nad) 
f€t)r, fo fe^c 
fd}on, feit 
fcgleid?. 



unb, unter 
mi, ju »ie( 
toieoici, fooiel 
trcnig, trentger 
»on, »or 

toic, tcarum, Wil 
tto, wofjin, trofier 
hjooon, tt)omit 
tooran, \ttoju, ic. 
njann, Wenn 



EXERCISES. 



1. 

^'tc Slofe, tlia rose , bcr £na!)e, the boy ; tie ©ropmuttcr, tlie grand- 
mother; bic 9lcid)t, the night ; i)orig, last; IJefi^crt, to possess. 

'A)k Diofe ift eine jdjone iBdtmc. ^'oljans tft tin faulci 
^mhc, Somfe tft ein peiBtgc^ 3}Iabcf)cn. UMjere @rogmitt=* 
tcr tft etne aite grait. !Der §itnb ift cin nulj(t(^e§ 2^^tei% 
!Dtefer arme dJtann ift fc^r frattt 5)ie Donge 9?adjt irar 
fcljr Mt ^ctnrirf) ift mein alter greitnb> Zf)tvt\t tft metne 
jiingfte ©cfjiueftcr. ®er ©raf I)at etnen bitnbcn (So^n imb 
cine btinbe STodjtcr. QfjX 9ladjbar bcfi^t ein frfjone^ ^au$ 
itnb cincn Gvogcn ©artcn. 

2. 

3)er 53cbtcnte, the man-servant ; bcr ©crud), the smell ; tie (Spraclje, 
the language ; cugUfd), English ; franjofifcf), French ; betrol^nen, to 
inhabit ; Icrncn, to learn ; tijicbcrfinbcn, to find again. 

You liave a bad pen. Henry has a good father and 
a good mother. We have a faithful (man-) servant. 
Our neighbor inhabits a very small house. This flower 
has an agreeable smelL We learn the German lan- 
guage. My son has read a French book. My uncle 
has received an English letter. My sister has lost her 
black cat. Louis has found again his little dog. The 
(maid-) servant has made a good fire. 

3. 

^ciU; no, none, not any, not a. 

Tl^in ^ruber trtnft !etn ^ier itnb !ciitcn SBctn. S5?tr 
rffeit :^eute fctne (Suppe unb feiit S^ctfcf). §aBeit wtv !cin 
:^rob unb feincn 3^^"'^^*? 3^) ^ff^ "^^'^^^ fdjwar^c^ ^rob. 
.I^iefer §crr ift !cin gran^ofe. SDicfe SDanie ift fcine ($ng* 
(dnberin. D^cein Onfct {)nt !eine .^ttnbcr. -3f^ I)abe feine 
vnft fpa3icre]t ju gcljcn. Qd) l]aht fcin @elb hci mir. Ostein 



85 

53ruber Ijat and) feiuen ^^fennig. Tldm (So^ne ^ahzn feiiie 
^auben me^r. ^nr( fjat f'cineit greimb mel)r. Sir lefcn 
fetue beutfdjen ^iicfjcr me!)r. S^) ^^i^ ^^^^ ^i^b mcl)i\ S'^i; 
fprecfje fctn S^eutfc^. 

4. 

SaS 3Seif, the work. 
I liave no pen and ink. My cousin has no gloves. 
The birds have no teeth. This boy eats no fruit. This 
woman drinks no beer. This gentleman does not speak 
English. What are you drinking? We drink good 
beer and good wine. I have no more ink and paper 
This young girl has fine teeth. This poor mother has 
no more children. This man is not a shoemaker 
My son reads no more English works. 

5. 

®ic ^crfc, the purse, the exchange ; tie (id)uB(abc, the (''-awer ; "i^aS 
^anhf the country; jci)cn!cn, to give (as a present). 

2So {ft betn -53ruber? S<^ gfaube, bn^ er tm ©artcn ober 
in ber kndjc ift. ©iub Sie ifciitt in bcr @c^u(e gciuefen? 
DJtctite (SdjiDcfter ift feit brei ZaQcn aiif bcm Sanbe ; fie k- 
finbet fid) uidjt iuoI)L 3Bol)in cjcl)cn (Sic jcl^t? Qd) gcl)e 
mit mcincm ^niber in bie ^irdjc, nnb tion ha incrbcn mir ^nr 
i^orfe ge()en. S^ragen Sie bicfen ^ricf anf bie "ipoft, el)e ^ie 
in§ S^^^eater gel)en. SSoIjin I)abcn ^k mein g^ebermcffer 
gelegt? Qd) ^abe e§ in bie edjublabe ge(egt. S3}oI}er fommen 
bicfe ^naben? S^ g(anbe, fie fommen an§ bem SSatbc. 
33enn ^avi an§ ber (2d)n(e fommt, fo fdjicfen 2k \^n ^n mir. 
id) nnti if)m ein fd)one^ -53nd) fd)cn!cn. ■ 



'^tx (Btciil, the stable ; ter ^aU, the ball ; bag 5tonjcrt, the conwrt 
bag Srf)aui>icl, the plaj ; ha§ 3Sht^gl)au0, the inn, the tavern ; baf 
JcUcrtiid), the napkin ; ba§ S^tfdjtud}, the table-cloth ; ber S^cffe, th 
nephew ; gcf|en, to go, to walk. 

Where have you been, my children? We have been 
at school and at church. Is the coachman in the sta 
l)le? Is the (maid-) servant in the cellar? My mothei 
has been at the market, and my father at the post- 
office. We shall go to the ball this evening. My bro- 
thers will go to the concert or to the plav. My cousins 
8* 



86 

have been in tlie country these two months.^ This 
man goes every day to the tavern. Where do you come 
from at present? We come from a walk. My aunt 
comes from church, and my uncle comes from the 
exchange. Your nephew comes out of the garden. 
Put these napkins into the drawer and this table-cloth 
into the cup-board. Do not go out of the room. 

7. 

JT'cr %ki^f application, assiduity ; bte Se|d}eibenl)c{t, modesty ; bte 
^enntnif, knowledge ; bcr S3ertt3anbte, the relation ; ber ©aiicr, the 
peasant; bcr $alaft, the palace; i)a§ ®ut, the estate; ha§ I'anb, the 
Jand ; pvM}tig, magnificent ; Ijcxxiid), splendid ; arbeitfam, industrious. 

§aben (Sie SSergnltgeit auf bem :8anbe ge^abt? §aben 
8ie S3enimnbte in ^oln? Sir ^aben bort feine ^ertt)anbten, 
ab-cr Diele grcunbc. 9}^eiu Dlac^bar {)at ®e(b unb £rebit, unb 
er tft borf) nidjt ^ufrieben* ©iefer jimgc SOIann Ijat t)ielen 
Sb'crftanb unb mk ^enntniffe ; er tft \t^v ht\d)dhtn. Qd) 
Ijahz Unglitd geljabt; id) ^abe fd)(edjtc ©efdjdfte gemadjt, 
3I)re ^inber {)abcn gteij unb ^e[d)etben^eit ; fie n^erben Don 
^e^^^ii^^^^ getiebt nnb gelobt. Wttin D^eim befi^t groje 
(Sitter, prddjtige ^aldfte unb ^err(id)e ©cirten. Qn nnfernt 
l^anbe gibt e§ groge @tdbte, fdjcine !i)orfer, reidje ^anfiente, 
arbcttfamc ^aucrn nnb nortreffUdjcn SBcin. 

8. 

5)a§ ©liut, (good) luck, happiness ; bet SSerbvuf , vexation, trouble , 
miintcr, gay; yerfolgcn, to persecute; Bet, with, at the house of; bas 
Unglurf, bad luck ; c§ ift moglic^, it may be. 

You have been playing to-day; have you had good 
luck? We have had bad luck; we have lost every- 
thing. If we had money, we should also have friends. 
If you were in (bad) trouble, you would not be so gay. 
We should have had pleasure, if you had been with 
us. It may be that you have knowledge, but you arc 
not modest. If this man had had good luck, he would 
not be so poor. It is sad to have enemies, who perse- 
cute us. 

9. 

2)a0 <§dIj, the wood ; l>ou '^clj, I)^!^^"!!, of wood, wooden ; ba§ ®clb, 
the gold ; von @otb, golbeit, of gold, golden ; ber ©riff, the handle ; 
bie 33rucfe, the bridge : bie S'reppe, the staircase ; ber ^tcff, the stuff; 

* See 6 82. 



87 

tic (Scibc, silk ; bie S3aumironCf cotton ; btc ^cinivanb; linen ; baS Jcbcr, 
leather ; bcr ©tcttt, the stone ; bcr 2)iarmor, the marble ; baS Sifenbettt, 
ivory; bie Scitung, the newspaper; bic 2)cfe, the box; bcr ©efanbte. 
the ambassador; bcr ^atfcr, the emperor ; (£d)lc{ten, Silesia; Oejlrcic^/ 
Austria ; ruffifc^, Russian ; iicrtr»a^rcu, to preserve. 

^etitrid) l)at feme golbcne U^r oerbren. Soutfe I)at iljveu 
[Kbcrneu Soffet gerbrocljen. ^ie fetbenen Stoffe finb tl)eurer 
al5 bie bainmrtolleitcn. ©icfcy 9Jle[fer ^at etnen ^ol3erneu 
©riff. 2Bir l}aben eine fteinerne ^ritd'e unb eine ntarmornc 
S^reppe gefefjcu. @ebcn <Bk mtr meinc letnenen (Striinipfc 
nub meine (ebcntcn ©djulje. !Der 2:aba! t)enDaI)rt fic^ am 
beften in ciiter bteiernen 'i)o[c, §aben (gie bie cjeftrige ^^i- 
timg getcfen? !^ie ^eittige tft nocf) nic^t angefommen. SO^einc 
©cfjwefter ()at eincn e(fenbeiitcrnett ginger^ut, 3)Mn 33ater 
()at breigig (SKen fdjlefifc^e SeiniDanb ge!auft» :Der ijfterreic^^ 
ifdje ^aifer ipirb t>ou fcinem ^otfe geliebt !Der ruffifc^c 
(sicfmibte ift abgcreift. 

10. 

®te QBoHc, wool ; bcr (£aa(, the saloon, hall ; bic ^ilbjaiile, the statue ; 
bic 5^ctte, the chain; bic 33anf, the bench, the bank; bcr ilnopf, the 
button ; ta.§ <Stiitf, the piece ; haS 3Cerfjeug, the tool ; (Spanicn, Spain ; 
gldnjenb, bright, splendid ; ftclj, proud ; baucrl)aft, durable, solid ; 
i)oUdnbifcl), Dutch ; fc^miirfcn, to adorn ; gcfviUcn, to please ; Sjorjtet^cn, 
to prefer ; mcrgcn, to-morrow. 

I do not like (the) woolen stockings; I prefer cotton 
(ones). This hall is adorned with marble statues. My 
uncle has given me a gold chain. I am tired; I will 
rest a little on this stone bench. Do you prefer silk 
or metal buttons? Iron tools are more solid than 
wooden (ones). Our servant has lost two silver spoons. 
I like to-day's play better than yesterday's. (To-day's 
play pleases me more than yesterday's.) To-morrow's 
ball will be very splendid. We like the French wines 
and the Dutch cheese. The Spanish ambassador is 
prouder than the English. 

11. 

2Bcr, who ; tweldjcr, who, which ; bte SBrtcftafdjC/ the pocket-book. 

SKer tft biefer |)err? 3Ser ift biefe T)amcl Scr ^at 
S^nen btefen O^ing gegeben? Sem ^aben ©ie ^Ijren ^c^ 
genfd)irm ge(tel)en? S3on mem ^aben ®te btefe pbfdje ^rief- 
tafd)e er^alten? SBen fu^en @ie? gur tuen tft biefe fi^one 
l%? Seffen tinb ift !ran!? a^effen «uc^ ift biee? ^e(- 



i{;Ci Don biefcn (Stoden ift ber 3f}i-'^t3e? 2x>eldje t)on btefeit 
gebcrn ift bie befte? ^elc^eS t)on bicfett ^linbent ift 31)^ 
92effe? S)on inetdjcm bicfcr Offtstcre (jabcn (2ie ba§ 'f^ferb 
Oefaitft? SSa§ ^benSie bafitr bejafjlt? SBouon fpnc!)t3()i 
§3ruber? 2I?orau benfcn (Sic? ST^omit Ijaben ^ie bicfe^ 
Qcmaif)t? Sobitrcf) ift ber dJlaim fo itngliicilic^ getDorben? 

12. 

£ie SScmunft, reason ; baS ®cfccf)t, the battle ; tier 3et(^ncnlc])re?, 
ilie drawing-master; crfaf)rcn, to hear; liertuunbcn, to \vound ; ubcx^ 
ficbcn, to deliver; fcmmen imdj, to pass by; cs i]t btc S^icbe, they are 
talking. 

Who is that man? Who are these ladies? Of whom 
do you speak ? To Tfhom do you write ? Of what are 
you talking? Who has done that? To whom have you 
given my cane? For whom do you work? What do 
you seek? What did he answer you? What have 
you taken? What is man without reason? Where is 
Louisa? Does she not know that the drawing-master 
will come? What would he say, if she were not here 'J 
Who has been in my room ? To whom have you told it ? 
From whom have you heard it? By which towns have 
you passed? In which battle has your brother been 
wounded? Which of your brothers is arrived? With 
which of these gentlemen have 3^ou been in Paris? To 
which of these servants have you delivered the letter ? 

13. 

^ix or ircld)er, who ; bcfjcn, bcren, whose ; bte S'a^'^fcrfcit, valoi, 
bravery ; ber SBcrtf), the value ; tk Spi^e, the point ; ber (S'belftein, the 
precious-stone ; ber 2BetnI)dnblcr, the wine-merchant ; bcr (Sci)tnicgcrs 
|ol)n, the son-in-law ; fcreit, broad, wide ; geraumig, spacious ; rcttcn, 
to save ; rufjitten, to boast ; f^erben, to die ; anyertraitcn, to confide ; 
jiibrmgert; to spend ; abbrec^cn, to break down ; 'i^a unten, down there. 

§ier ift bcr junge OJcann, bcr baS l!inb unfer^ Dladjbara 
gcrcttet I}at, ©aS ^an^, tddd)c^ <Bk ha unten fcljcn, gcljorl 
mciner ^ante. X)k ^ii^t^ciV incldjc id) bcii30^ne, finb feljr 
gcraitmig. ^ennen (Bk hk S^amc, Don bcr irir fprcd)cu? 
So ift bcr arme ^liabc, bcm @ie ba§ ^rob gcgcbcn l^abcn? 
1}cr iScbicnte, bcm ic^ tncinc iBriefe ant)crtraut I}atte, ift nidjt 
5urltcfgc!ommcn. §aben (Sie ben (Solbatcn gcfeljcn. bcffeii 
DJ^uttcr gcftorben ift? !©cr }imge Offisicr, beffen S^apferfcit 
man fo fcl)r riil)mt, ift bcr <®(^tt)icgerfoI}n meinc^ 9la(^bari^. 



©er SSemljilubfcr, ben (Sie bet mir gefcljcit Ijabctt, iyat mu 
iwoif glafcfjcn ^orbcau^* gefcljicft. 5)ie ^ditbcr, bie (Sie mir 
gefc^icft fjaben, finb ^u breit. !©ie S^nge, lt)e(djc id) ntit ^tjuen 
gngcbradjt Tjabe, finb bie angcneijiuftcn inehte^3 Seben§ geinefen. 
!Da ift ber ^amn, imter bem linr fo oft au^geruljt Ijahm, 
SDa6 finb (Sbelfteine, bereu 333ertf} id) nidjt fenne. §ier ift 
btv3 9}ieffer, beffen (Spt^e .Qart abgebrodjen I)at. !l)a§ finb 
btc §crrcn, bcnen tvir bie Dtadjvidjt mit(]ctljctlt Ijabcn. 

14. 

2)te Seidjttgfcit, facility, ease; fcie S(lcd)tlid)feit, honesty. 

There is the little boy who writes so well. This is 
a young lady who speaks w^ith much facility. I do not 
like (the) children who speak too much. This is the 
physician that I have seen, the lady whom you know. 
These are the books which you look for. Where is the 
letter of which you speak? This is a man whose 
honesty I know. This is not the merchant of whom we 
have bought our ribbons. Tell me, to whom you have 
given my cane. Do you know to whom this beautiful 
garden belongs? I do not know of which garden you 
speak. Are these the children whose father is dead ? 

15. 

!DaS 'a\"t!3, that which, what; bcr Glummer, grief; bte ®el'unb()cit, 
health ; bcgc0ncu, to happen ; lu'rlangcn, to ask, demand ; {)oren; to 
heai" ; bcgrcifen, to conceive, to understand ; l?ermctben^ to avoid ; fc&t 
Icib t^un, to give great pain. 

^agen ^te mir, lim§ 3^^^^^^ ^'^^^ beften cjefdKt. (Sr3dl)(en 
^ic mir, \viv5 cr 3()i^s^t G^f^Qt Ijixt. 3d} ^^^B ^^^r ^^^'^ 
©ie iDoIIcn. Stiffen (Sie, \va^ 3^)1^ begegnet ift? ©eben 
(gie mir, \va^ (^ie mir uerfproc^en fjaben. (Sagen @ie mi§, 
\va§> (2ic baDon benfcn. ©(anben ©te nidjt 5lt(e^3, wa^ er 
fagt. (Sr Ijat mir feinen Summer nidjt anticrtranen inoUen, 
11HV3 mir fe^r leib tl)nt. §ter ift, \mv <Bk tierlangen. Tui}^ 
men (gie, lna5 (Ste luollen. (^r fpridjt Don Sttfem, n)a§ cr 
[}ort. S^a§ ift e^3, moriiber ic^ mid) frene. S)a§ ift c§ nid)t, 
inoran id) bcn!e. ^ahm (gie gcI)ort, ma§ er gefagt f)at? 
53egreifen (gie, lr»a§ er bamit fagcn witil ^crmeiben (Sie 
imnter ba§, \va<j ber ©efunblieit fd)db(td) ift. (gpredjen <2ii 
nie oon bcrn, mav Sie nid)t uerfteljcn. 



90 
16. 

23ctrul*t ii&cr, grieved at ; fid) bcflagcn iibcr, to complain of. 
I have understood wliat you liave told me. I shall 
give you what I have promised you. Do you know wdiat 
he wants (will) ? Has he told you what has happened 
to him? We do not speak of everything that we hear, 
\Ye do not always say what we think. That is all 
which I can tell you. Do you knovr of what I think, 
of what I speak? This it is, about which we rejoice. 
This it is, at which I am grieved and of which I com- 
plain. That which is beautiful is not always useful. 

17. 

@vinj, quite, all, whole ; ^[Uq§, evcT-tliing ; all, die, all ; hk SQtoBct, 
tlie furniture ; tcr 2BDf)itI)dter, the benefactor ; tcr 5lntt»efcnbe, the 
person present ; bci* @ebanfe, the thought, the idea ; angclcgt, ar- 
ranged ; firf) itienben, to apply ; alk Sage, every day. 

3c!) (jak mM geje^en. mk btcfe moM ftnb fcl)r fdjon. 
5H(e meine l!1nber finb au^gcgaifgeu. :Der gan3e ©arten ift 
gut angclcgt. Sir I)abcn ben gan^^en Zac^ unb bte ganse 
^laf!)t gearbcitet, §err 2h ift bcv SoI}ItI)dtcr al(er Ungllti 
(tdjen. Sir Ijaben c§ alien Slut^^efenben initget()eilt. Side 
unfere ^erinanbte finb abgeretft. 5U(e btejentgen, irel^e ^ter 
inaren, Ijabcn e§ geljcirt. ^§ ift berfetbe §err, ben lx»tr geftern 
gcfefjcn I)aben. (5§ ift tmmer btcfclbe ^(ntinort. dv fagt 
immcr baffclbe, S^) ^^^^ ^^^^ nam(i<^ien ©cbanfcn, id) iroflte 
ba§ 9tam{td)e tf)un. (3dmi ©ie niir t)on bemfelben Xiidjc, 
Don bcr ndm(td)en Seimuanb. Sir Ijakn c§ bemfelben ^anf= 
mann gefdjttft, berfelben gran e§ gcfagt (5r I)at fid) an ben^ 
fetben ^2(bt)o!aten gemcnbet. -3^} '^J^^^ ^"^ f*^ft)ft ge^brt. Sir 
incrbcn c§ -3^)ncn fetbft brtngen. ©agei^ 6ie e§ il)m felbft. 

18. 

T)te ?5^-imiIte, the family; fterBlid), mortal; iibet^ff^n^'mmt, inundated, 
overflowed. 

All is lost. The whole country is inimdated. The 
5vhole family are (is) in the country. All ra^n are mor- 
tal. All my friends are arrived. I see you every day. We 
have seen it ourselves. The king himself has spoken of 
it. It is the same man and the same woman. They are 
the same children. We inhabit the same houso. You are 



91 

always the same. I have bought of the same ink, of 
the same paper. I have given it to the same servant. 
My sisters will come themselves. One must not always 
-<peak of one's self. 

19. 

91irt)t fo, not so ; cBeit fo, [o, as, just as ; iite^r al§, more than ; mnU 
jer alS,_less than; kt ^iipfeTftici), the engraving; bie £anbfartc, the 
map ; bte 53eIof)nung, the reward ; bie ©ebulb, patience ; ber ^i)akXf 
the crown, dollar ; crfreiit, delighted ; licrbienen, to deserve ; auggebcn, 
vO spend (money). 

©It bift oroger, aU tcfj ; aber bctit ^ruber ift nic^t fo grog, 
aU id), ^Tain £)l)eim ift eben fo reid}, a(§ betn ^ater. SStr 
[]abcn eben fo mk ^iidjer, al^ @ie; abcr Wlv ^aben ntcfjt 
fo Dtclc ^iipferftic^c imb ^anbfartcn. 3}tetrt ©o^n, hu bift fo 
ffeigig gcmcfen, bag bu cine ^elo^nmtg uerbienft. Qd) I)abe 
uicfjt fo md au^Sgegebcn, aU$ ©ie gtauben. Qdj bin baritber 
eben fo erfreiit, aU <2te. S^xt (Sdjinefter Ijat eben fo fdjbne 
£teiber, aU bie meinttje. SJZeine @bl}ne arbetten nidjt fo mtt, 
aU bie ^^j^'tgen. §err 9u f}at me^r H'tnber, aU wiv ; id) 
gtaube, cr l)at beren mcljr aU ncun. Souife ^at n^entcjer 
gremibinnen, aU §cnrtctte. SBir finb Ijente fletgicjer geirefen, 
a(i5 geftern ; inir Fjaben jtDei Slnfgaben me^r gemad;)t. ^c^ 
f)abe Dtel ©ebntb, aber ®te t)aben beren noc^ meljr. §etnri(^ 
bat ^ente mel)r aU jeljn ^rtefe abgefdjrieben. 'Sie fonnen 
il)m ntdjt roeuigcr ahi gtnci Sf)alcr gebcn. 

5)cr SlrBcitcr, the workman ; tc[d;a[t{gt, occupied, busy ; gcjd;icft, 
clever ; fdjtafcn, to sleep. 

Is your brother as tall as I? He is not so tall as you. 
Has he as many books as I? He has not so many books 
as you. The young man has as beautiful engravings 
as you. I love him as much as you love him. You 
do not love me as much as I love you. Your cousin 
was so busy, that he did not see me. Your physician 
is more lucky, but not so clever, as ours. This physician 
is very rich, he has more than thirty houses. This 
workman asks no less than six dollars. The child has 
slept more than two hours. Our gardener has many 
children, I believe that he. has more than nine. Wo 
have done to-day three exercises more 



92 

21. 
3e mcfir. . .bcjlo mcl)r, the more. . .the move; je ft)cntgev. . .bcflo^ociiU 
gcr, the less... the less; bte ^rcube, the joj; bie ScfjanbUmg, the 
treatment ; nad}fid)tig, indulgent ; ftrcng, strict, severe ; sernuiiftig, 
reasonable ; leibcn, to suffer ; criciben, to endure ; Tiad)benfcn, to re- 
flect ; jugic^en, to incur; ermuntern, to encourage; bcobad)ten, to ob- 
serve; aufebcn, to look at; fic^ betni&cn, to give np one's self to. . . 
fel)(cn, to fail; chrag {)a&cn itiibcr. . ., to have a grudge against; mm 
now ; fcnft/ formerly. 

-3cf) irietg ntc^t, \vo3 bir fcl)len nmi], (tebe S^t^^^ ; i^ ntebr 
limit Ijicr (adjt, befto meljr ineiiift bu ; je mel)r nmu bid) cr== 
muntert, btcfj bcr greube gu iiberlaffen, befto me^r betritbft bit 
bic^, 9htit tft e§ etne ^iertetftmtbe, ba§ t(^ bic^ beobadjte, 
lutb je ttteljr id) bid) an[el)e, befto tnenigcr begreife id), \va^ 
bid) fo fel)r ipeiiteu ina^t. — 5(d), (ieber Dttfel, @ie iDiffeit nid)t 
2U(e§, lDa§ id) ^u (eibeit I)abe. Seberntanit ^at ettnaS miber 
mid), ttub je tttef)r id) itber bie ^e^attbliing nai^benfe, bie id) 
erleibc, befto luettiger !aittt id) begreifen, toa^ fie titir jiigejogeit 
I)abcit ittag. @o glltdlid) ic^ auf bem Sattbe inar, fo itnglitd^^ 
(id) biit id) in ber @tabt. ©o nad)fid)tig @ie fottft inaren, fo 
ftreng finb (Sie {eljt* — !^u bift nie gufrieben, meiit ^inb ; je 
iite()r bit ()aft, befto nte()r t)er(angft bit» St ^^citiger titan 
ipitnfd)t, befto ^nfriebener ift man. 3e f^^^cr man ift, befto 
Derniinftiger mng man fetn. 

22. 

iDer SBun[d), the wish ; gctjtg, avaricious, stingy ; i)crfd)tt)cnbcri[d; 
prodigal, extravagant ; fparfam, economical ; lef)rreid), instructive , 
ld}abli(^, hurtful, noxious ; todd], soft ; Qdci)Xt, learned. 

As liappy as we were in the country, so unhappy are 
we in the town. As diligent as this young man is, so 
idle is his brother. As instructive as are good books, 
so hurtful are bad (ones). As extravagant as is Mr. N., 
so avaricious is his uncle. The more money one has, 
the more friends one has. The more he drinks, the 
more he is thirsty. The softer (the) pens are, the 
worse they are. The less desires one has, the more 
happy one is. The more one begs him, the less he 
does it. The less money he has, the more economical 
he is. The more learned we are, the more modest we 
Dught to (must) be. 

23. 

3cbcr, every, ever}' one ; ctnt|i[C, some ; baa ?(Ucr, the age ; ^it 



93 

$flan^e, the plant; bcr ^d)kx, the fault ; ba§ ^Bifc, the evil ; Uftcn, it 
cost ; erfuUen, to fulfil ; jlc^en Ucibm, to stop. 

3cbe^3 mtcv Ijat feme ^f(icf)ten. Scbcr Ijat fciue fflutji 
erfitllt, ^cbcr ^aitm, jcbe "^flanje, jebc^ £f}ier tft niUjltd). 
Man mug jcben 3^ag cjut amnenben. ©iefcr £naBe Bleibt 
bet jebem §au[e fteljcu. ^c^^cr l}at feme ge(j(ei\ ^t^ ^)^^2 
Sebem etii ^itd) ge[djeu!t. .^cuncn ©ie eine Don biefen 
5)amen? 3d) ^^nne etuicje nou biefcit §errcn, aber id) fenne 
feine Don btefeit ©amen. (Effeii Sie eintcje ^irncn. SI)a fiub 
^djone 5Ie|3fe( ; geben ©ie mir cinige. 3s^^^i^>5 f)tit mtr G^[ci9t, 
bag ©ie morgen abreiften. 9}tau mug Don ^liemanbCem) 
^bfe^ reben* Qd) tann c^3 bir ntcfjt geben, benn id) Ijabe c^ 
3emanb(em) t)erfprodjen. Dciemaub iDeig, bag ©te I)ter fiub. 
SBir ^aben c§ 9ctemiaub(em) o^<:\ac\t, 3d} J)^^^^ ^"t^i^^^ ^o^^ 
memcn ^iidjertt tierloren. Qd) Ijabc nid]t§ 3U tijuu. Sir 
fjabcu uou md)t6 gefprodjcu. 

!Dcr (£tanb, the station, the state ; bet %m\i, the prince ; bcr Untcvi 
t[)an, the subject ; ber (Stubcnt, the student ; ha§ ©erdufd), the noise ; 
crfdjiXiJcn, to frighten, terrify ; ciitmat, once, some day. 

Every station has its pleasures. Every noise terrifies 
him. I have told it to every boy and every girl. Every 
one must die some day. The prince speaks to every 
one of his subjects. Lend me some pens. We have 
seen some students. Some of our friends will come 
this evening. I shall take some of your books. Nobody 
knows it. I know nobody. I shall tell it to nobody. 
None of my friends will come. Do you know some of 
these ladies? I do not know any of them. I have 
spoken to none of the gentlemen. I speak of some 
one, whom you have not yet seen. I have lent my 
umbrella to somebody who will return it to me to- 
mor]-ow. 

25. 

Scr (Sine, the one ; bcr 5(nberc, the other ; 53cibc, both ; cinanbci, 
one another; me^tcrc, several; ge\r»i§, certain; jebcr bet, any one 
^v!io ; tucbcr. . .ncc^, neither. . .nor ; ber 93ortrurf, the reproach; bci 
§ib[rf)icb, the leave ; baS ©cfc^, the law ; taS 33ein, the leg ; felten, sel 
dora, rare ; gcboreiT,. born • trennen, to separate ; bcnciben, to envy ; 
ocrtljeibic^en, to defend ; angrcifeu, to attack. 

(Sr gibt bent Giucn, unv3 er bem 5Iubcrn utmmt. ^cibe 
l;abcn Unvedjt. Gr (jat ^nibcn 'iH^ninlrfe gemadjt; abcr 



94: 

ruebcr ber (Eiue nod) bcr Sdibere Ijat fie tierbtcnt Qd) l)aht 
Don ^ciben Slbfcfjieb genommen, !4Diefer ©olbat l^at kibe 
^eine t)eiioren. ©iefe beiben ^ritber Ikhzn fii^ fe^r, fie 
ge{)en nie oljne einanber au§. (Sie !onnen fid) nidjt con etn^* 
anber trennen, ©eben ®ie mtr einen anbern §nt nnb anbere 
§anbfd}nl)e. ^eneibet nidjt haQ ©liid Slnberer, @pred)en 
Ste mtr t)on ctwa^ 5lnberm, S^ mi^ barliber nt{^t§ ®e* 
iDtffc0. (gin geit)iffer §err unb eine geiniffe ^ame ^aben e^3 
mtr er^a^It ^c^ f)abe e§ t)on 2}^el)reren ge^ijrt. (g§ ift 
felten, bag man me^rere grcnnbe ^at -gc^ trnrbe btr eine 
geber (eiljen, inenn ic^ mel}rere ^citte. SKir l^aben mel)rere 
3:age in biefer @tabt gngebrai^t Qd) fage e§ einem ^eben, 
ber e§ ^dren roiU. 2Bir n^erben un§ gegen ^eben t)ert^eibigen, 
ber nm angreifen luirb. X)a^ ®efe^ ir>irb Qc'i^m beftrafen, 
ber e3 ntdjt hcohadjkt 

26. 

5)ie ^erfort, the person ; bie SangeiDeile; weariness, ennui ; tocI)(tl)a; 
tig, charitable. 

The thing is not yet certain. A certain boy has told 
me so (it me). I have given your book to a certain 
school-boy. My father knew nothing certain of it yet. 
Several of my friends know it. I have received to- 
day several letters. I have heard it of several persons. 
Give me another shirt and other stockings. One says 
this, the other says that. Have you no other ink, no 
other pens? These two boys love one another; they 
are both diligent. Men must love one another. These 
two friends think often of one another. Every one 
who is rich ought to be charitable. Whoever is in- 
dustrious has no ennui. 

27. 

S)te ®elegen!^eit, the opportunity ; gctoi3I)nt, accustomed ; iiid, thick, 
fat; gte^cn, to pour; benu|en, to profit bj, to make use of; ftc^ auf 
i}aikn, to stay. 

Qd] gc^e morgen nad) ^ladjen. Tldn ^ater ift fd)on ge^ 
ftern Ijingegangen. Sd) ^^^ ^^od) md)t ha. @ie Ijabcn 
nid}t§ babei gemonnen. S'^ \t)txht mid) brei 2^age bort auf- 
^alten. Sir ()aben bie DIadit bort 3ugebrad)t. S'd) ^^^^ ^^ 
il)m t)erfprodjen, nnb id) irerbe baran bettfen. !Die S^inte tvax 
tttoa^ in bi(f ; ic^ f)abe cin inenig Saffer bajn gegoffen. Qd) 
bin nidjt baran geipoljut. 533ol(cn (Bit fid) anf biefe ^an! 



95 

fclicu ? Sa, id) mil mid) baraitf fef^en. S]i ^l)V §err 25atet 
im 3n^wci'? 9ictn, cr ift uidjt baria. 2Ba§ Ijaben ©te ne^ 
ben Qfya ^(umen f}e|.')f(an3t? S^J I}abe ©emitj'e I)tngepf(an5t 
^'art l)at 3el)n geljler gcmadit, uiib id] Ijabc beren ucun gemadjt* 
©inb ©ie rait mcincm (goljiie ^ufriebcn? Qa^ id) bin fefjr 
^iifrieben irtit ifjin. §aben 8ie mit bem gitrften iiber meiu 
llngtitd gefprodjeu? Qd) {)abe nod) nidjt mit iljm bariiber ge* 
fprod)en. ijaben (Sie ^riefe er^atten? 3^^ ^ ^^^^ it)elc^c 
erljalten. SoIIen (Bk ein ®la§ S5?ein? 3^) "^^^^^ 3t)nen, 
id) {)abe fd)on ipctd)en getrnnfcn. ^ahm (5ie ©etb ? 9lein, 
id) I)abe !ein^. ®a§ ift cine gnte ®e(e(3enl)eit, id) merbe fie 
benn^^en. 

28. 
Have you some wine? I have some, I have none. 
Has your brother any ink? He has some, he has none. 
Hast thou any paper? I have some, I have not any. 
Have these gentlemen any horses? They have some, 
they have none. Has your aunt any sisters? She has 
two. Has thy cousin been to the ball? She has not been 
there. Is your uncle gone into the country? He is gone 
there this morning. "Will you think of my affair? I 
shall think of it. We shall gain much by it. The 
wine is too strong; pour a little water into it. How 
many faults have you made? I have made six. Have 
they spoken of the war? Yes, they have spoken of it, 

29. 

^cx ©tcnf}, the service ; bcr Hnbanf, ingratitude ; l?a§ S3ct[p{el, the 
example; ttie SSerlcumbung, calumny, slander; ba§ Slcnb, the misery ; 
irid)ttC5, important; lact^etlic^, ridiculous; ac^tung§ir»crt(), respectable; 
abgcfcljmadt, absurd ; fci}rcdlid), frightful ; bosljaft, malicious ; rec^tltrf), 
honest; ftd) befd)it>ercn,_to complain ; crWcifen, to do ; taftern, to back- 
bite, to slander; ycrgc1]cn, to forget; rei^cn, to pull, to snatch; ijers 
nuit^en, to suppose, to presume ; jtrf) iiberlafl'ert, to give one's self up 
to ; cinen Oefaltcn finben, to take pleasure in ; jiemltci), rather, pretty ; 
bi^ireilcn, sometimes. 

(2ie befd)n)eren fit^ iibcr ben Unban! ber 3}tcnfd)cn; [a, 
man bclo^nt bi^ireiten fe[)r idjkdjt bie lr)id)tii3ften Sjienfte, 
unb e§ gcfdjie^t jiemtii^ oft, ba^ biejenigen, benen man am 
mciften ®nte§ ermiefen I)at, bie Unbanfbarften finb. Ql)t 
Dtac^bar ^iKcbcrt jnm ^eifpiel ift ber unbanfbarfte Tln\]d) 
ton ber 33?c[t. Qx nnbet cinen (^^efaficn baran, fcine '^Boi)^ 



96 

tljcitcr 311 Idftcru. (Jr I)at nudj bicfcr ^Tagc tiou bcit lac^crttc^i 
ftcit !lDingcn unterljalten; cr I)at Don bcu acljtunfj^inert^cften 
^]3crfoncii ^o[c5 G^fagt iinb fid) ben abgcfcfjmadtefteit ^eiv 
(cnmbungcn iibertaffen. Gr t)en3ij3t, baj3 nnr ilju an§ bem 
fcl)rcc!(icl][ten (Elcnbe geriffcn Ijaben. ^a3 betri'ibt niicl) inefjr, 
ak> ^k gdntbcn. ^err Robert fprtdjt anbcr^, al§ er benft, 
Gr tft uidjt fo bovljaft, ab3 ^ie tDermutljcn, !l:er rcdjtUdje 
^^lann fpridjt nid}t aubcr^?, al§ er bcnft. 

30. 

!rag 93crbvcd)cn, the crime; ba§ 33cri'prcd)cn, the promise; bcr 3Bcg, 
the road; bet Umjltanb, the circumstance; bte £age, the situation; hirj, 
short ; bcfttmmt, i-)Ositive ; mcifiDiirbtg, remarkable ; fingcn, to sing ; 
l?crbicncn, to deserve; entrci^cn, to snatch away; befd)ulbigen, to ac 
cuse ; fict) cvinncrn; to remember ; geiroljnlid), usually, generally. 

My sister sings better than she plays. You are hap- 
pier tharx jou. deserve. The ladies speak generally 
more than they write. You have come sooner than I 
thought. Mr. S. is the cleverest physician (that) I know. 
We speak of the cleverest physician of the town. They 
accuse him of the most frightfid crime. He has given me 
the most positive promise to write to me. We shall 
take the shortest road to go to S. I remember still 
the most important circumstances. I have been at JST. 
yesterday; it is one of the most remarkable towns of 
Europe. We have rescued our friends from the most 
unhappy situation. 

81. 

^k SBctntrauBe, the bunch of grapes ; retf, ripe ; cvbncn, to arrange ; 
l^crjci()cn, to pardon ; lau[cn, to run. 

(Bci^cn <Sie fid) neben mid). Sc[en Bk uiir, inaS (^ie gc^ 
fd)riebcn I)abcn. iBetriiben (Sie fid) nidjt incl)r baritber. ^'er? 
nen (Sie ben!en, bcDor (gie fd)rctben. Drbnen (Sie bicfe 
^riefe, bet)or Ste iDeggcI)en. ^ffen (Bk !einc ^eintraubcn 
meljr; fie finb nod) nid)t reif. ^ommen ©ie I)ierl)er, iiieiii 
grcunb. @e^en (Sie bort!)in, nietne Stebe. (£pred)cn \v\x 
nidjt. mcl)r bauon. Wiv woikn im§ gu S:ifd)e fe^cn. 2Bir 
inoKcn cin iDcnig fpa^icven cid)en. Safjt uni!> inifcrcn gcinbcn 
t)cr3ei[)cn. 2agt im§ m^ §aufe 9el)cn. SBir inoUcn nid)t 
Idngcr bleibeu. @cl)eu tnir (iebcr in bic Btaht ^nviicf. I^ommt 
.fiinber, c^ i[t fd)on fpdt. Vanf nidjt fo fe()r, §cinrid). ®u , 
2c()ft nidjt nic()r mil, mcnn bn nidjt nrligcr bift. 



97 



f3)te ^I'ugeub, virtue ; haS £aftcr, viee ; acvcrf}t, just; vufen, to call 
^viffcn, to hate ; !plaubcrn, to chatter ; i)cruntcrgcl)en, to go down, 
descend ; naljev tretcn, to approach ; i)orf)CV, before, beforehand. 

Let us give a piece of bread to this poor little boy. 
They call us, let us go down. Madam, take another 
(one more) cup of coffee. Let us read the newspaper 
before. Let us be just to every one. Let us love virtue 
and hate vice. Let us approach a little, come a little 
nearer. Look here, Sir. Let us hope always. Let us yet 
wait a moment. Do not go away yet. Wash yourselves 
before you go out. Go to bed. Do not get up. Let us 
work at present. We will not chatter any more. 



©ie £u(|c, the lie; tcr Siigncr, the liar; ber Sltufftggang, idleness; 
fcer ©d}meid}lcr; the flatterer ; bcr 9ld(^ftc, the neighbor ; ber Xlmgang^ 
the intercourse ; ergcBcn, addicted ; aKgcmcin, Tiniversal ; ^id)m, to 
flee, to shun ; i)eraci;ten/ to despise ; ftcl; I}mgcbctt, to give one's self 
up to ... . 

Qd) [jaffc bte[cn ^cenfrf^eit ; er ift eitt SitGiter. SStr ^affcn 
ben 9}|iiffiggang. Sir inerben tmmer biciemgen Ijaffcn, bte 
bcm Safter crgckn finb. 3'^) ^j^ff^ 9ttemanben. ®ott \inii 
mdjtr bag iDir ^cw^^^^^t^ Ijaffen. §af[et bie Sitge, aber fjaffct 
euren Dtddjftcn nidjt. gttelje bie -^ofen unb fiirfje hen llmciang 
berjemgen, ineWjc tugenbljaft finb. :iDte[er 9}lenfcf) wivh alU 
gemein t)eracljtet; ^^ebermamt flieljt ifjtt. SStr flieljen alk 
btejentgen, ipeldje fid) bem SJIiiffiggange Ijingeben. Mcin 
On!eI Ijat nttr gcratf)en, bte ©efctifdjoft biefcr jitngen Seute ju 
piemen. 2a^t im§ bte (^djrnetdjter fiteljcn. '^k Qcit f(tei)t, 
utan mitj3 fie benuljeii. 

,3i. 

Why do you hate me? I do not hate you. We must 
hate nobody. I have always hated (the) flatterers. Shun 
the evil and do (the) good. I shun (the) bad compa- 
ny. Shun the wicked. Let us all shun vice. Your sister 
must shun the intercourse with these ladies. Stay; do 
not flee. You have nothing to fear. Everybody shuns 
(the) liars. We must profit by our time. We despise 
those who do not fulfil their duty. He who is despised, 
vs unhappy. Virtuous people are loved and ^steemed. 



98 



oo. 



2)[e hnfimft, the nrrival; bte ®cfaf)r, the danger; tcr UcBermut^, 
hauglitiness ; bcr SSinb, the ^vind ; unbcfannt, unknown ; ftc^ be' ijdfj 
tigen, to be busy ; ftd) l^orncfjmert, to determine upon, to intend ; fid| 
Fliitcn, to beware ; fid) be[)crn, to improve, to mend ; ftd) ccrirren, to 
lose one's way; fid) au^jc^en, to expose one's self ; ftd) jujict)en^ to 
incur. 

^cl) I)aBe mi^ ben gan^crt ^Ibenb Befc^aftigt Qd) inerbc 
Kiic^ je^t anHeiben. SStrft bit f)eute fpajieren gel^en? 3d) 
freite mid) iiber bte 5In!nnft ntetne§ Waters. 'Ajk (^angetnetle 
\]t bemjemgett unbetont, ber fic^ jit befc^ctfttgen inet^. ^art 
Iiat \\d) t)orgenotttmen, btefen 9lad)mttta^ nad) 9L gu ge^en, 
^tr irerbeit itn§ bort titet S3ergnitgen mac^en* Tlan tft 
glitcfltd), tpentt matt fid) tt)oI)( befittbet Sobe bid) nit^t felbft ; 
pte bid) t)or bem Uebermut^. S^er ^ittb legt fic^ ; voiv be- 
fommett guteS S^etter. 9^uf)ett (Sie eitt tnenig au§. ©iefer 
(gc^itler I)at fid) gebeffert, Sir ^ben itttS terirrt. 3^* W't 
eitc^ eiiter gro^en @efap auSgefe^t Sir toitrbett itnS ^or^ 
iDitrfe guge^ogen ^aben, ti^etttt mv ha§> getf)att f)attett. 

Wash, yourself. You are not yet washed. I have 
washed myself this morning. Will you not wash your- 
self? At what do you rejoice? I rejoice at seeing you. 
"We rejoice at your happiness. I cannot rejoice more. 
My sisters intend to go to the ball. This dog has lost his 
way. I shall not expose myself to this danger. At what 
are you busy? I am busy reading. You will incui' re- 
proaches if you do not go there. Beware of doing that. 
My cousin will never mend. We have been very much 
amused yesterday. Louisa is not yet dressed. You are 
mistaken, she is already gone to church. 

87. 

S)er Dfen, the stove ; ha§ ^ett, the bed ; ta§ ®xa§, the grass ; ijcr* 
langeti, to desire ; fic^ |e|cn, to sit down ; ftet)cn, to stand ; liegea, to 
Te; jt^cn, to sit. 

(^elje bic^, meitt ^tnb. Qdj bttt itidit mitbe ; id) fe^e mic^ 
felten. ©e^en ®te fic^, id) merbe mid) aiic^ fe^en. (get-en 
@te \xd) nii^t auf jenen @ttil)t, er ift serbrod)en. Sir tooUen 
un§ auf biefe ^an! fe^en. Souife unb §enriette, !ommt nnb 
fe^t end) neben mi(^. Sarmn fi^^en (5te ntdjt? Qd) Ijabe jn 
laitge gcfeffen, id) iaim ntdjt meljr fi^cn. (55 tft mir ititmog- 



lidjf ben oau^cn S^ag 311 fil^en. So ift beiit ^riiber? (^i 
fi^t t)or ber Si^^ur* S)te ganje gamilie fag um ben Z\\d) 
I)ernm» 9}^etn ^ater berlangt, ha^ id) immcr fit^e. Sarnm 
fte^en (Sie, metne §errcn? ©et^cn @ie firf), 3^^) tan nldjt 
iange fte{)en, ic^ bin fogktc^ mitbe. -3^^) '^<^^^ i^^''cr etne ©tnnbe 
I)ter geftanben,unt auf btdj jn inarten. So ift betn §mtb, ^ar(? 
(gr Itegt ^tnter bent Dfen. ^Icin better lag geftern nm 3cf)n 
Uf)r noc^ int ^ttk, Sir l^aben bi^ je^t im ©rafe gelegen. 
88. 

2)er 6^or, the clioir, the quh-e ; j\tii]d)en, between ; bet ^laf^, tho 
room. 

Sit down, if you please. I beg you to sit down. I am 
sitting already. I sit down where I find room. Will you 
not sit down? I shall sit down by your side. Make 
room, that this gentleman may (can) sit down. You do 
not sit comfortably, (well,) Miss. I did not sit comforta- 
bly there; I have been sitting between your two sis- 
ters. Where were you sitting at church? We were 
sitting in the choir. These gentlemen are always 
standing; ask them to sit down. I have been stand- 
ing (for) a whole hour. 

89. 
©cBoren tucrben, to be born ; gefaHcn, to please ; ntl§faflett, to dis- 
please ; c§ gcfdllt mix I)ter, I like it here, I like this place ; gcfdlltgft, 
if you please ; fd}iceigen, to be silent. 

Stffen (Sie, itjann (Ste geboren ftnb ? Qd) bin im Womt 
9}?at geboren. S^'^^^ ?3tenfcf) inirb geboren, nnt ^n fterben. 
liefer ^nabe iuurbe narfj bem S^obe fetneS Waters geboren. 
®tefe§ ^nd) gefdllt ntir. Sjtefer ©arten n)nrbc nttr beffer 
gefaflen, luenn er grower n^cire. Tltin §nt iDtrb Qljucn ge* 
fallen. Sie gefiiflt e§ Qljnm ^ier? (?§ gefdllt ntir ^ler fe{)r 
gnt. S§ iDiirbe ntir aber nod) beffer gefa&en, luenn id) einige 
grcitnbe bei mtr Ij'dtk ; aHein ntetne grennbe gefaden fic^ anf 
bent Sanbe ntdjt. ^§ Ijat ntir tintner beffer anf bent Sanbe 
al§ in ber @tabt gefatlen. Sarum fc^nietgen (Bit? Qd) lann 
ixidjt f(^ir»etgen, toenn tc^ etn^a^ fe^e, n)a§ tntr ntigfdilt. ^tn 
funger 9}2enfii) ntng tntmer fdjtneigen, inenn ditcre Cente mit 
tinanber reben. ©djineigt, idj mil nidjt§ nteljr bauon (}bren 
40. 

When were you born? I was born in the month of 



100 

September. Coriieille was born at Rouen. We are 
all born, in order to die. I am born to be unliappy 
I like this lady very much. I do not like it in the 
country. I liked it much better in the town. Do you 
like this place? We like it better here than at our 
house. Come here, if you please. That has not pleased 
me. Be silent. My aunt cannot be silent. We are silent 
when ladies speak. I shall not be silent. I have 
been silent too long. Why have you been silent? If I 
had been silent, I should have done better. 

41. 

Slad), after. 
Jfiai^ unb nad), by degrees ; rtad) line t^or, always tlic same ; crjl, 
only, but; tie (Sette,. the side ; ba§ ^iib, the picture, the portrait; bie 
2)ccmung, the opinion ; ber Xalt, the time, measure ; ber 5(nfcl)em, the 
appearances ; fpareri, to economize. 

!5)cine (gltern finb na(f) ®ott betne gro§teu SBoIjItljcitcr. 
3(f) reife morgen nad) bonbon, imij ii^erbc erft xiad) brct 
SBorfjen itiieberlommen. ^ladj xodd)cv Seite mug man ge^en, 
urn nad)_ bem (Sdjloffe ju !ommen? Qd) mvhc nadj bem 
3Ibenbe[fen ^u -3^nen fommen. !Dtefe§ -^ilb ift nad) ber 92atur 
gemalt. §err 9L tuar I)ter unb f)ai itac^ Qi-}nm gefragt. 
Wtm 5Infd)eine nad) \vxx\t bu bctnen ^^ro^eg terlieren. IDIetner 
9}2einung nad) iDcrbe id) iljn geintnnen. ^icfe SBaare irirb 
nad) ber (Sile t)er!auft. 31)^* ^rubcr fleibet fief) tmmer nad) 
ber 9}2obe. (Sic tan^en nidjt nad) bem Zattc, Qd) Ijabt bir 
gcratljcn ^u jparen, bamtt bn nad) nub nad) retrf) inerbeft ; 
allein hn lebft nac^ tute t)or. 3ii) beit)oI)ne etne (Stube, bie 
nad) bem ©artcn ge^t. ^lad) bem, \va^ QfjV ^ruber mtr 
gefagt l^at, finb Bk mtt Q^xmx Scorer fel)r ^ufrieben. ^lad)^ 
bem \mv eine (Stnnbc gelnartet f)atten, gingen tDtr fort 
42. 

®ci, with, at. 
S;tc 2amxc, the humor ; btc 9(ngclcgen'^eit, the afiiiir ; bcr (Sticl, the 
handle ; bte Jllingc, the blade ; btc (5'f)rc, honor ; bie (2d;la(^t, tlie 
battle ; cin Sflomer, a Roman ; ha§ ©eBiirtgfcjl, the birthday ; »crficl)crn, 
to assure ; fid) crfunbtgen, to inquire; anucfjiitcn, to accept; Ibegcgiicit; 
to meet ; J)olcn, to fetch ; iimfommcu, to perish ; in S'^raueit anshxt- 
^tn, to burst into tears ; lDid}tig, important. 

Qd) Wax biefen 3}torgcn bet -bem |)rcnfji[d'jen ©efanbten. 
Sr luar bet fel)r guter l^anne, naljm mid) bci ber ganb nub 
terficl)cvte mid), bag er fid) 1} cute nod) bet bem DJcintfter nad) 



101 

mtintt i'luQelecjcnljcit crfimb-ujcn incrbc, 3d) f^'^^^^ W^^ ^^^'^ 
Zi\d]t, mtb bacfjtc kt mix felbft, baj er inciueu Sc[ud) iud)t 
amieljmen lt)erbe. S^^ ^jfitte ehieu inidjtigen ^rtef bet mir, 
ben id) U}m iibergebeu Ijabe. ijaben (Sie @e(b bei fid)? ^ct 
mem iDofjucn @ic? S'a) iKoIjiie ualje bet ber ^irdje, nidji 
roeit t)on ber ^'oft Dteljuien ^k haQ> 9}^e[fer hd bent @ticl 
unb ntc^t bei ber ^linge, ^cr (Sine nal)in il)n bet bent ^opfe, 
ber SInbere bet hm -^einen. Q^dj Derfidjere (Sie bet nteiner 
(gf}re. ^cf) begegncte iljin beint ^erait^geljen an5 bent ^^ca^ 
tcr. ^ir inerben e§ il)nt bei ^elegenljeit fageit. SBaritm 
fi^^en <Bk beint gener, finb (5ie nidjt tt30^(? ^egen ©ie inir 
bie SSaaren bet ©eite; id) inerbc fie Ijolen (affen. Wlc'm ^nu 
ber ift in ber ^d)lad]t bei 2eip3ig nntgefontmen. ^ei biefen 
Morten brad) er in 3^I)ranen an§« 2Bir inaren tmnter ^lu 
fantmen, bei Zac^ nnb hd ^lad)t (S§ iDar eine alk @clnoI)n^ 
^eit bei ben &^omern, fcincn grennben an i[)rent ©ebnrt^tacje 
@efd)enfe gn fd)icfen. 

43. 

2}tit, with. 
Sic Jvlltgr}cit, prudence ; h'V 2}cut^, courage ; bie SHute, tlie gun ; tie 
5?uge(, the ball ; Me £aiti:'jd)aft, the landscape ; ba0 ®ewi)|en; conscience ; 
bie ^timmc, the voice ; taS ^auvtivort, the substantive ; ber Stnfanggj 
bud)ftabe, the initial letter; tjani^cln, to act ; laben, to load, to charge ; 
Dorgel}en, to pass ; tccfjrcn, to honor. 

Mit mem finb ^ic fpajicrcn gegangcn? 9}|it lr)eld)er 
®aine fjaben <^ie getanjt ? §anbeln (Sic ftet§ mit ^Ing^eit, 
t)ertf)eibii3en (gte fid) ntit DJhit^? S^ie (2d)onI)eit l^ergeljt 
mit ben -3^^1'cn, 3 ft S^]^^ S'tinte mit einer i^nget ge(aben? 
QfjV grennb f)at mid) mit einem ^cfnd)e beel)rt. S^^an ift 
fel)r snfrieben mit i^m, (5r ift geftern mit ber $oft ange^ 
fommen. (Ex trcigt einen brannen dlod mit gotbencn ^nopfen. 
S)er innge Tlamx mit ben langen §aaren ift ber <So^n bc^ 
§anfe«. §aben (Sie ben iD^aitn mit ber grogen 9tafe nnb 
hen fd)tt)arsen 5[ngen gefel)en? Wdn ^inb, bn mngt bcin 
g(eifd) mit ber ©abet nnb nid)t mit ber §anb effen, Mdnc 
Q3afe ]^at mir mit 3:()ranen in ben 5(ugen cr3ct()(t, bag fie 
morgcn abreifen mng, !4^iefe Sanbfd)aft ift mit bem ^kU 
ftift, nnb nid)t mit ber geber geseic^net. Qd) fann biefcS 
©efd)en! nid)t mit gntem ©einiffen annef)men. (Sr trat mit 
einer ^iftole in ber §anb l)erein, ttnb fd)rte mit (anter 
<2timme. Qm 5)entfd)en unrb jebe§ ^anptmoxt mit einem 
gvogen 3infang§bnc^fta&en gefd)riebcn. 
9 



102 
44. 

5(u», out of, from, of 
^k (Srfal)rung, experience ; bic Slbfid}!, the intention ; ber Vluh, 
envy; bie Uebung, the exercise; bie (Btrafe, the punishment; fca3 
£'lc^t, the light; ber Sob; _^ death; bie ^trd)t, fear; bcr ^al§, the 
throat ; fonft, otherwise ; {iber|c|cn, to translate ; ^ai)X ailS, ScJ^f 
tin, from year to year. 

333a§ madjen @ie? Q<i) i\hzv]ci^t am bem ©cutfi^en in^3 
gran^oi'ifdje, So^er fommen (gie? 333tr fommen au§ ber 
(gc^ufe, aitS bem ©arten. So^er finb ©te? ^rf) bin au^ 
Berlin, unb mciu greunb tft au§ S^on. SSer l^at au§ btefem 
©lafe getrunfen? 34 ^^^6 ^^ f^i^^ (Srfa^rung. 3<^ ^^e 
e§ ait^ guter ^bfid)t, qu§ Siebe ^u tf)m get^an. 3(i) tx]tl}Q 
au§ 3^rem ^rtefe, bag @te no(^ immer untDo'^l finb. 5Dic 
(I()oIera fommt au§ 5lfien. !^iefe ^ilbfaule ift au§ DJlarmor. 
©tefe §itte finb auS ber Tloht. (5r fd)reit au§ Doflem §a(fe. 
-gc^ (iebe i[)n an§ gan^em |)ergen. illein ^rnber fomntt feit 
ad)t ^tagen ntc^t au§ bem ^intmer. ®e^t mir anS ben 
2lugcn, ber ^^cib fprtd)t an§ ^^j^en. 3"^) ^^^ ^fJi^S^ ntc^t 
me^r ^tauter gefpielt, id) fomme gan3 auS ber Uebung. ^a§ 
gid)t ift au0. ajcit bem 3:obe ift ^(leS an§. ©er (g(^lt(er 
mn§ au§ gutem Stllen unb nic^t au§ gnrdit t)or (Strafe 
arbeiten; fonft n)trb er -3^^^' ^^^ Q'^^^ cin in bie (Sdjnte 
geljen, ofine groge gortfdjritte ^u madjen. 
45. 

§(uf, on, upon, at. 
5)ie 2iBelt, the world; baS 9Bort, the word ; bie Sagb, the chase ; bic 
^eiter, the ladder ; ber Sdrm, the noise ; ber %aU, the case ; baS ®eiiicl)t; 
the face ; fieigcn, to mount, ascend ; gtuingeti, to compel ; [olgen, to 
follow ; ertappeii; to catch ; re^nen, to reckon. 

5lnf ^Bieberfe^en ! Qa ido^I, anf bem ^aHe inerben iDir 
un§ iDieberfe^en. '^idjU anf ber Selt gefdHt mir beffer aU 
tin ^ad. Qd) gtaube bir anf bein Sort. !Do(^ frene bid) 
nid)t p fel)r bar anf, cr !ann (eii^t anf t)ier3e^n 2:age anf* 
gcfd)oben inerben. SO^eine ^ritber gel)en morgen anf bie -3^-9^/ 
unb ic^ inerbe auf^ Sanb ge^en. (ge^en 8ie fic^ anf einen 
Stul)(; unb fteigen ©ie nicftt anf bie Seiter. Sir Ijaben iljm 
biefe ©umme anf fein gnteS ®efid)t getieljen. (Sr !am anf 
mid) to^, unb moUte mic^ 3tningen, i^m jn folgen. -34 f)ore 
2arm anf bcr (Strage; man I)at einen !l)ieb anf frifdjer ■tijal 
ertappt. SJ^eine OJ^ntter ift brei iBiertel anf fieben U()r ah^ 
gereift. Sie Ijeigt biefe ^(nme anf bentfdj? *Binb (Sie bcifc 



103 

auf mid) ? Sic utele ©rofcfjeit geljeu aiif chteu Xfjixkx ? Q'd) 
toerbe auf foqe ^dt Derreifen. %n\ aik ^'dUt bin id; aha 
Bi^ ^um funf3e()nten bie[e§ 3}lonat§ iDieber ^uriid. 5lufg 
Sdngfte inerbe tc^ hx^ 3um 3tt)an3ti3ften bleiben. ©te fonncn 
e§ auf metne ©efaljr t!)un. ^d) ^abe auf immer Slbfdjieb 
Don i^m genommem (Sr ^offt gl^ar noc^ immer auf mid), 
alkin id) f)abe itjm crHcirt, ba§ cr auf mid) nidjt mcljr 311 
redjuen brauc^t 

46. 

UeBcr, over, above. 
$r)a§ @ett)itter, the thunder-storm ; ha§ (£d)ir)etbt, the sword ; hex 
Sct)tr)Ct^, the perspiration ; bte (Stirn, the forehead ; bte ^taft; the 
force; ha§ ©elingen, success; na§, wet; beftdnbig/ constantly; aits 
fdnglid^, in the beginning ; fdjulbtg fein, to owe ; in ©d^ulbcn ftecfcn,; 
to be in debt. 

(g§ fte^t tin ®eU3itter ubcr ber (Stabt. 5)a§ (Sc^tDerbt fjiug 
Itber feinem ^opfe« ©ein S3etter filjt beftanbig iiber fciucn 
^ud)ern. !^ie ipaare ^cingcn i!)m itber bie 5Uigen. T)cr 
<Sc^U)ei6 tief il)m itber bie @tirne. Gr ftc(ft bi§ ubcr bie 
£)^ren in ©djulbcn. ®a§ ift itber fcine ^xcifte, itber fciuen 
S3erftanb. !i)iefe jitngen Scute fcfjlafen immer iiber bent Sefen 
cin. dJldm gran ift itber fiinfjig unb id) bin itber fcdjjig 
^ajre ait S:)iefe§ Ziid) ift itber ^mei (SUen breit. Sir 
mitffen itber biefen glug, iiber jcne ^rii(fc» ^c^ tDcrbe itber 
granffurt nad) Seipjig reifen. ©ie (E^re ge^t iiber ben dlcidj^ 
tt)um. §cute itber ac^t 3^age !ommt mein 33ater an. (Sr ift 
itber ein I)a(be§ Qa1:)X nerrcift getDcfen. 3Dein ^Better ift mir 
itber ^unbert 3^I)a(er fdjutbig. greue bii^ ntdjt 3U frit!) itber 
ba§ ©elingen beiner Unterne^imtng ; bu bift nod) nidjt itber 
ben ^erg. S§ regnct fe^r ftarf, xviv finb itber unb itber nag 
gemorben. S^cin grennb fdjreibt un§ nid)t mtl)v; anfciuglidj 
eri)ie(ten mir ^ricfe itber ^ricfe Don iljut. 

4T. 

©egen, against, to, 
©ic SSaffe, the weapon; ha§ @cic|, the law ; bic Ouittung, the 
receipt; ber 2)icnfi, the service ; tvol)ltl)dttg, charitable; tcagcn, to 
carry; bcwunbcm, to admire ; \t>ettcn, to bet; Ui\tm, to do; bctreten, 
to set foot upon ; freitaffcu, to set at liberty. 

!5)iefer ©enerat trcigt bie Saffen gegcn fein 33ater(anb, 
Ser gegcn fein Ocmiffcn Ijanbctt, ^anbelt gcgen ®ott unb 
i)a§ @efe^. Qd) bemunbere feine Siebe gegcn feiue gamilte 
unb feine Serene gegcn fcine greuube. lluferc gitrftin ift mol)(* 



101 

tl)dt'ig gcgcu bic 5(rmcn. doriolau Wax imbanfuar gcgcn fein 
^aterlaub. (5r ift freiijelaffen luorben oegcit fein 33er|precl]en, 
bag 2anb md)t iDieber 311 bctreten. -3d) ijahz {()n gcgen Qitit^^ 
timg bc3al)tt. ^d) ^""^^^c jcljn gegcn ein^, ha^ er nidjt trie* 
berfommt. ©iefer ^icnft ift nidjtd gcgen benjenigen, ben 
(Sie mir gclciftct I)aben. ©iefeS ^orf liegt gegen 9corben. 
(Sr fc^Iief gcgen jn^ei lU)r ein, unb ftanb gegen ncun UI)r 
tnieber anf. dWin Snfet roirb gegen (Enbe be^ Sinter^ an= 
fommcn. 

48. 

SBenn, if, Tvlien ; ob/ if, whctiier ; \x)ann; wlien. 

iSiciif because ; tt)dr)renb, wliile, during ; bcr diati}, the advice ; Hug, 

\vise ; untertjaltcub, amusing ; i)crbietcn; to forbid. 

^d) inerbe tf)n gemig be(oI)nen, n^enn id) mtt t^m jiifrieben 
bin. Sd) itierbe e§ S^nen fagen, iDenn <Sie ^n mir tommen. 
Caffen @ie mid) triiffen, iDann (Bk fommen irerben. Senn 
i[}r gUtd'Iic^ feib, fo erinnert end) ber ^icnfte, bie iDir enc^ 
geleiftet ^aben. Senn id) irit^te, mann er ^nriicffdme, fo 
\Ditrbe id) e§ Qi)Mn fagen. SBenn meine ©djiDefter !(ug ift, 
fo iDirb fie meinen 9^at^ befolgen. Senn fie alter fein mirb 
unb ettnaS me^r (Srfa^rnng iDirb eriangt Ijaben, fo icirb fie 
finben, ha^ id) dltd)t I)abe. Qd) ineig nidjt ob ba§ inaljr ift. 
Sr fragt, ob (Sie morgcn abreifen iDerben. Qd) lann nidjt 
anf^ge^en, iDeil ber 5Ir3t e§ mir i^erboten I)at. ^dj xoiii 3I)nen 
ein nnterljaitenbe^ ^ndj (ei^en, iDeil ©ie nidjt anSgeljen ton* 
nen. (Sr arbeitet fleigig^ iDd^renb fein ^rnber fpagieren geljt. 
(^r mxh tdgtid) Don feinen ii^eljrern getobt, indtjrenb fein ^ru* 
ber ftetv uon ii)nen getabelt iDirb. 

49. 

5)a, as, because ; aU, wlien. 
5)er ^taal, the state ; artnc^men, to accept ; einlabcn, to invite ; tsor* 
ivetfcn, to reproach ; aufinetfcn, to awake, to rouse ; trenncii/ to se- 
parate ; ^tnterlafiett; to leave ; t)orbetgcf)cn, to pass ; urtgerat(}cn; ill- 
bred ; futifttg, in future ; Ictl'c, low, soft. 

3)a id) Ijente feinen ^efndj nidjt anneljmen !ann, fo Wiii 
id) iljn anf fitnftigen (gonntag einlaben. ■Da id) morgen ah^ 
reifen mnj, fo bin idj gefommen, nm SIbfdjieb Don -3^)^^^^ 3n 
ne^men. 5Da mein S3ater franf ift, fo !ann idj nidjt fpa3teren 
geljen. ^cil luir fiirdjtcten, (Sie anf3mpec!cn, fo tjaben mir 
(eife gefprodjen. 5}a mir geiDoIjnt marcn, mit einanbcr jn 
(cben, fo Ijattcn mir incle 9}tiilje, mvi gn trcnnen. 5(13 



105 

^^clopibaS bem (Epamhtonba^ Domnirf, bng cr bcm (Biaatt 
toe Umber tjtnteiiane, antinortetc bicfcr : S^ii ttjuft nod) 
inentcjer fiir ha^ S5ater(aub, ba bit iljin mix eiucn itntjeratljencn 
(Bof)n ^mterlafi'en n^trft 51I§ 2:ttit§ cincn S^ag (jatte uorbci- 
gclien (affen, oI)ne ^enmnbem ctroaS @itte§ ^u cinncifcn, fiiQte 
cr: 3dj ^jf^^^e etnen Xaa, t)er(oren. 
50. 

£3c((cn, to be ^villing ; fcnncrt, to be able, to know ; la)\m, to lot, 
to allow, to have (done). 
S)cr S3cfc(;l, the order ; bie dlci\c, the journey ; bic 5(itfmcrffamfcit, 
tlie attention ; bie 2u\t, the mind, the wish ; bet SBobcn, the soil ; 
eifjcnfinnig, obstinate ; fcudjt, moist ; ficfcnbcrg, particular ; sorgcrudt; 
advanced ; UTitcmcI}mcn, to undertake ; fid) iridrmcn, to warm one's 
self; (£d)littfd)u() lau[cn, to skate. 

®tc lumber meineS S^adjbar^ fiub fo cigcnfmntg, bog fte 
uie bie :S"efclj(e il)rer SItern erfiiticn rjoKcn. S53iH ber ^ater 
fie aiif ben @pa3iert3ang nutncl)men, fo rooilen fie gu §aufe 
bictben ; will bie SJhttter, ha]^ fie arbeiten, fo iDolIen fie aitS^ 
cje^en. (E5 tft tatt, wiv woikn in« §au0 geljcn, ober mir 
inoKeu ciu inentg fptelen, itm un§ git ern^cirmcn. !4Die ^cli^ 
gion tniU, bag it)ir i'einem ^Inbern t()un, luaS mir ntdjt tnollen, 
baj man e§ nn^ tl)ne, ^tefe ^f(an3en iroKen einen fendjtcn 
^oben nnb cine befonbere S(nfmcr!famfcit. SBir fonncn Did 
ti^nn, incnn \vdv nnr luoUcn. Sir iDcrben biefe ^eife nirljt 
mcl)r unterncljmcn fonncn, lDci( bie 3^^}i*e§5eit fdion ^n \ncit 
norgerltcft ift. 23}cr mit Dinljen rcifcn iniU, mng ik ©pradje 
be§ ^anbeS !cnncn, in tt)cld]cm cr rcifet. fonncn (Sie ^djiitU 
fdjn^ (anfen? Qd) fonnte c§ c^cbem mot)(; aber feitbem idj 
ha^ ^ein gcbrodjcn ()abc, !ann id) e§ nidjt me!)r. Sd) tj^^^e 
mir ein paar nene (Sticfet madjcn laffen. ©iefer 2el}rer ia^i 
feinc ^djiiler f)inau§geiicn, fo oft fie £^nft Ijaben. 



106 



DIYEESE EXERCISES. 



THE CANE-PIFE. 
(The vocalnilaiy is to be found at the end of the exercises.) 

(5tn ^outg Ijatte etnen ©(fia^meifter, ber fid) Dom §irten* 
flabe 3it biefem iDtcfjtigen Slmte emporgeicfjinmicjen ^tte. ^er 
Sdjvil^meifter iDitrbe aber bet bem ^ontge Derflagt, ba§ er ben 
fomgltc^eu (Bdjai^ beraubc imb bte geraiibten l^oftbarfcUen in 
cinem Oeinolbe uerbcrge, ba§ iiiit einer eiferneu S^^iir Der* 
fefjen [ei. 

!l)er fonig bei'itdjte htn @c[jat3mciftei% bc[a!} fcineit ^^alaft, 
unb atS er an bie eiferne Xl)iir !am, befal}! er, fie 3n ciffnen. 
5(($ ber ^onig (jineintrat, ttsar er gan^ erftannt. (Sr fa() 
nic^t^ al'3 bie t)ier Sdnbe, einen (dnblidjen 3^ifd) nnb einen 
©troI]feffe(. Slnf bem 3:ifd) lag eine §irtenf(ote, ein §irten= 
[tab nnb eine §iitentafd)e. 

!Der @d}al^meifter aber fprac^ : Sn itteiner 3^^9^nb Ijittete 
id) bie (Sd)afe. !Dn, o ^onig, ^ogft mid) an beinen ^of. 
§ier in biefem ©emotbe brad)te ic^ fcit ber Qdt ta^M) eine 
(Stnnbe ^n, erinnerte mid) mit grenben meineS oorigen ^tan^ 
be^3, nnb n)ieber^oIte bie Sieber, bie id] cljemalS gnm Sobe be§ 
(£d)opfer§ fang, aU id) frieblid) meine §eerbe Ijnkk. 5lc^, 
la§ mid) trieber 3nritdfel)ren anf meine t)dter(id)en ginren, wo 
id) g(ndlid)er mar, alS an beinem 5)ofeI 

Sier It'onig mar fel)r cr3ltrnt liber biejenigen, meld)e bei 
cblen 3}2ann uerCenmibet I)attcn ; er nnmrmte iljn nnb bat il)n 
bci il)m 3n bteiben. 

2. 

THE TIIllEE EOBBEES. 

T)xd 9uinbcr morbclcn nnb ptltnberten cincn iTanfmann, 
ber mit ciucr ll^tcngc 6)e(b unb ^oftbarfcitcn bnrd) einen 
3Salb rciftc. £'ie brad)ten bcit gcraubtcn Bdjcit^ in i^re 



107 

§of)te, Uiib fcijicftcn bcti iiingftcit uou Kjiicu iit bic (Stabt 
uni Cebcnv^mittcl ein3ii!aufen. 

2I1§ er fort \mv, fagten bie beibcn auberen : SBanim foffen 
wiv biefe groBen 9ieidjtl)umer mit bte[em ^itrfdjeu t^eilcit? 
Scnn er guritdfommt, wolkn wiv i()n tdbten. 

S)er jimge S^ctuber bad)te untenrcg^3 bei fid) : 5IBie (jnidtidj 
Wave id), iDenn ad btcfe^ @e(b mtr geljorte! 3d) ^^id meinc 
g^.»et @efdf)rtcn tjergiftcn, fo bcljatte id) e§ fiir mid) adeiit. 
— 5l(§ er in ber (gtabt angcfotnmen irar, !aufte cr ^chtivi-- 
inittd ein, tfiat ©ift in ben Sein nnb fcljrte in ben Salb 
guriid, 

2aixm irar cr in bie ^of)k getrctcn, aU bie beibcn anbe^ 
ren auf il^n jufprangen unb if)n ntit iljrcn ©otdjcn bnrdj* 
boI)rten. §teranf fe^^ten fie fid), a^en unb tranfen ben ter^ 
gifteten 3Bein. (gte ftarben nnter I)efttgcn (Sd)mer3en, unb 
man fanb iljrc 2cid)name mitten unter hm @d)a^-en, voddjc 
fie aufgctjciuft I)attcn. 

THE PILGRIM. 

Qn einem prad)tigcn 'Sd)toffe, Don bem fd)on (dngft jebe 
(Spur t)erfd)tDunbcn ift, khU cinft ein fef)r reid)er flitter. (Sr 
Dertcanbte t)ie( ®e(b, imt ev jn t)erfd)oncrn; aber cr t^at wc^ 
nig fitr bie 5(rmen. 

!Da fam einmat ein armer ^ilger, ber um etnc 5ytac5t()er^ 
berge hat ©er Slitter tine^ ifjn tro^-ig ah unb fagte : 5Diefe3 
(Sd)(og ift fein ©aft^of. — (Srlaubt mir nur brei gragen, 
fagte ber ^itger, fo mil id) wdtcx gel)en. — X)a§ gebe id) 
3U, nerfc^te ber Skitter, 

2Ber betr»oI)nte t)or (5u(^ biefe§ (Sd)rc6 ? fragte ber ^ilger. 
— dJlcin 33ater. — SKer iDar t)or tf)m ber ^etx)ol)ner biefe^ 
(2d)(offe§? — dTain ©rojtiater, — Unb wcv mxb nadj i^nd) 
bavin n3o[)nen ? — Tldn ®o^n, vomn e§ ©ott toiU, 

91un, fprad) ber ^itger, tnenn Qchtv nur eine getniffe ^cit 
in biefem Sdjtoffe tDo^nt, unb iDcnn immer (Siner bem ^In* 
bern ^^iai^ barin mac^t, fo feib 3^)^* ^^^' @dfte I)ier unb ba^o 
©d)(o§ ift luirflid) ein @aftl)au§. SJermenbet bal}er uid)t fo 
Diet, um bicfe^ S^an^ fo fe()r ju Derfd)onern, xvdd)t^ Q{)v nur fiir 
fo furje ^dt befi^t. Zt)nt (ieber ben Slrmen ®ute6, fo merbct 
Sljr im §immei eine elDige ^oI)nuug ertangcn.. — !Der Slitter 
ual)m bicfc 3^9ortc gu ^erjen, gcindljrte bem ^Htger feine ^ittc 
unb unirbe fiir bie gotge nio(){tf)dtiger gcgen bie Slrmen. 



108 
4. 

THE ROBIX-REDBREAST. 

(Sin L^iotpcfjldjen !am in bcr etrcnge bc§ 33tnter3 an 
ba§ geufter cine§ frommen Sanbmanne^ al^3 ob e§ gern Ijtnetn 
raodjte. !4}a ijffnete ber Canbmann fein gcnfter inib na^m 
'M§> 3utraitltd)e Xljkxdjm freunb(td) in fcine S^oljnung. 9cun 
i3icite c0 bie ^rofamett itnb l!ornd}cn auf, bie l^on fcinem 
3:i|'d]e fielen, xmb bie £inber bey SanbmannS Itebten bag 
23ot3(ein felji\ 

$iber al§ nun ber grit!)Iin(] lutebcr in ba§ Sanb fant unb 
bie ®ebii[dje fidj betaubten, ba bffnete ber Sanbmann fein 
75cnfter, unb ber !(etne ©aft entflol) in ba§ nalje SSalbdjen, 
uv^y bante fein DIeft imb fang ein fro^lidieS Steb(^en, 

Unb fielje, aU ber Sinter tnieberfefirte, ba !am ba§ D^otl}- 
feljidjcn aberma(§ in bie 2Bof)nnng be§ SanbntannS, unb Ijatte 
fein Seibdjcn tuitgebrac^t. !l:er Sanbmann aber unb feinc 
.^inber frcuten fid} feljr, aU fie hk beiben 3:f)ierc^en fa{)en, 
bie fo gutraulic^ um^ erf djauten. Unb bie llinber fagten : S^ie 
^^ogeldjen fe^en un§ an, ai§ ob fie un'3 etli^aS fagen iDoL^ten. 

S)a antmortcte bcr S>ater : Senn fie reben fonnten, fo 
mitrben fie fagen : Qiitvaimi crlDecft R^^trauen, unb Siebe er^ 
,^cugt ©cgeniiebe. 

5. 

THE YOICE OE JUSTICE 

= Sin rcidjer d^lanxir Stamens (SI]rt)fe$, gebot feincn .^ned> 
ten, cine arme SBittme fammt iljren lEinbern au^3 ifjrer So!j^ 
nung ju tiertreiben, wdl fie ben geiDi^finlic^en 3'^u§ ntd^t ju 
ga^Ien t^ermodjte, SU§ bie Sjiener famen, fpraa^ ba§ SBeib : 
S(4 t)er3ief)et ein iDenig ; t^ielleidjt, bag euer §err fidj unfcr 
crbarme ; id) tdiit ju \i)m geljen unb i^n Utitn. 

©arauf gtng hk Sittire ^n bem reidjen Mann mit i^rcn 
uier ^^inbern, einS lag !ran! barnieber, unb alle f(el}ten, fie 
nic^t in t3erftogen. (5ijri)fe§ aber fpra^ : Wtim iBefe^te !ann 
id] nidjt cinbent, e§ fci bcnn, bag SU^ Sucre ^djnlb fogleidj 
be3al)(et. 

3I)a iDcinte bie 93tuttcr bittcrlic^ unb fagte : 2Idj, bie ^flcge 
eincS franfen IxinbeS I;at all nieinen S3erbicn[t i^crge^rt unb 
ntcine Hrbeit geljinbcrt. Unb bie ^inbcr ffcljtcn nut bcr 
IDtuttcr, fie nidjt gu t)erftogen. 

SCbcr dfjrljfc^ iranbtc fidj meg noii iljncu unb ging -in fcit? 



t 



109 

G3ar[cuf)au^ nub (cijte [icfj aiif ha^^ %>ot]kv, 311 ntljeu, line ci 
pffcgtc. (So mar aber ciit frfjiDiilcr S^ag, unb hidjt am ©ar- 
tcn[aa( ffog ctit (Strom, ber uerbrcitcte Fciiljding, unb co iDar 
cine (Stide, bag fein Sitftdjcu fid) regte. 

©a fjorte (2f}rl)[e§ baS ©eUopel be^3 ©djiif^ am lifer, aber 
c§ tonte ilim gletd) bem@ciinnfetbcr ^inber bcr armenSBiltlne; 
imb cr tnarb imru{)tg auf feincm ^^olfter. 

©arnadj Ijordjte er auf ba§ $}Laitfd)en be^3 ©trome^ unb c§ 
bitufte i^n, aU ruljt er an bcm ©eftabc cine» uncnblidjcn 
SJ^eere^, nnb er toa^U fid) auf feinem ^^fiiljle. 

5ld3 cr nun tnicber (jordjte, crfdjoti an^ ber gerne ber Xion* 
ncr cine§ ©eroitterCv imb er glanbte bte Sttmme bc§ ®eridjt^3 
ju t)ernel)men. 

5)tnn ftanb er ploi^Iid) anf, eiite nad) §anfc nnb gebot fcU 
nen ^nedjten, ber armen SBtttoe ha^^ §an§ in offnen, 5lber 
fie mar fammt ifjren ^inbern in ben Salb ge3ogen unb nii'== 
genb^^ 3U finben. llnterbeffen mar ba§ ©emitter ^inanfge30' 
gen, unb e§ bonnerte imb fiel ein gemaltiger 9iegen. dtjrijfe^ 
aber mar doK Unmntt) nnb manbelte umfjcr. 

Im anbern Slage uernaljm (2l)ri}fe§, ba§ !ran!e ^Qinb fei 
im Satbe gcftorben unb bie 9}h:tter mit htn anberen I)inmeg= 
ge3ogen. fca marb tijm fein ©arten fam.mt bem ©aal unb 
•poffter 3umiber, unb er genoj] nidjt mcljr bie 0if)(nng be^3 
ranfd)enben ©trome?. 

^alb nadjl)er fiet (5f)rt)fe§ in eine ^Qranftjeit, unb immer in 
ber §i^^e be§ gieberS uernaljm er beo ®d)i(fe5 ©e(i5pet nnb 
ben fanfdjcnben @trom unb ba^3 bnmpfe S^ofen bc§ ©emitter^, 
?(ifo t)erfdjicb er. 

6. 

THE PEACHES. 

tgin Sanbmann hvadjk an^ ber ^taht fiinf ^firfidje mit, 
bie fdjdnftcn, bie man felien fonnte. (Seine llinber aber faljen 
bicfe grudjt 3um erften d)lak; beof)alb rimnberten unb frenten 
fie fid) fel)r iiber bie fc^onen Stepfei mit ben rotI)lid)en ^acfen 
nnb ben: 3arten glaum, ©aranf uertl)ei[te ber ^ater fie untcr 
feine Dier ^naben, unb eine erljictt bie 9}tntter. 

5lm 5(benb, aU bie ^inber in ha^$ ^d)laffdmmerlein gingen, 
fragte ber 23atcr : 9cnn, mic I)abcn euc^ hk fc^onen 3(epfc( 
gefd)me(ft? 

§errlic^, (icber 33ater ! fagte ber ^leltefte. Go ift eine fdjonc 
grnd)t, fo fdnbertid) nnb fo fanft Don ©efd)mad\ -3d) fiabe 
9* 



110 

inir hen ■^tclii [ortifaiU Dcrn;al}rt unh wnti mir baraii^3 eiiien 
^aiim ci^ielicri. 

^vav) ! fagtc bcr ^atei\ ^a§ ^ei{3t Ijau$>I)a[teri['ii filr bic 
3utoft gcfovflt, line c§ bem ^'anbnmnn ge3iemt, 

Qd) l)abe bie meiuige fogletdj aufgegeffen, rkf ber Qitngfte, 
imb h^n (^tetit fortgemorfcn, unb bie DJcutter Ijat inir bie 
gdlfte mn bcr iljrigeit gegcben. D, ba§ fcljuiccft fo fii^ itr.b 
5cr[cf)mil5t titt 2}2unbe! 

3cun, fagte ber iBater, bit ^aft ^tuar md)t fc^r Kug, abcr 
boc^ natltrlicij unh ttacf) Snblidjer 2Sei[e ge^aubett. gilr bic 
tdtgljeit ift aitcf) noc^ Diaum gemtg tm i^eben. 

!l)a beganu ber ^iDcite <So^n: 3^^ tj^ibe ben (Stein, hen ber 
Heine ^rnber forlmarf, gefammett unb anfgeflopft. ©^ iDar 
cin ^crn barin, ber fi^mecfte fo fii]3 vok eine ^Dcu^. ^ber 
.Tieinen ^firfic!) Ijabe id) cerfanft unb foDiel ®etb bafitr crl)al^ 
ten, ha^ id), wenn id) nadj ber (gtabt lomine, wolji ginolf ba^ 
filr fanfen !ami, 

©er 33ater ff^iittelte ben ^opf unb fagte : .^(ug ift ba§ 
(Vamr, aber finbtid) unb natiirlid) toar e^5 nid}t, ^eiDaljre bid} 
ber ^imniel, ha^ bu !ein ^aufmann toerbeft ! 

Unb bu, ^bmnub ? fragte ber Sater. Unbefangen unb offen 
antmortete (Sbmunb : Qd) [jabe meinen ^^firfid) bem Soljue 
unfer§ 9cad)bar^3, bem franfen ©eorg, ber ba§ gieber ^at, ge^^ 
brad)t. Gr vooitk il)n nid)t nel)men, ba Ijab' id) il)n i!)m auf 
ba§ ^ttt getegt unb bin {jinmeggegangen, 

9cun, fagte ber ^ater, ircr I) at benn tno^I ben beften @e^ 
hvand) mn feinem ^firfid) gemadjt ? 

S^a riefen fie alle brei: ^DaS ^at ^ruber Sbmunb getljan! 
— Gbmunb aber fdjlrieg ftilL Unb bie IDIntter umarmte ifju 
mit einer S^Ijrcin' im Huge. 

THE DESERT ISLAND. 

Gin reidjer, guttljatiger l02ann n^odte etnen feiner 8!lat)cu 
gtitcftidj madjen: er fd)enfte ibm bie greibeit unb {iei3 if)m cin 
gc^iff mit t)ielen fbftlidjcn SI?aaren auSriiftcn. „®et)," fagte 
er, „unb fegte bamit in cin frcmbe§ \?anb; iDudjcre mit bicfen 
SSaaren, imb ader ©eipinn foH bein fein." — S^cr gftaue 
reifte ab; aber hum mar er einige ^dt anf ber @ee, aU fid) 
ein ^eftiger (Sturm erI)ob unb ba5 (Sdjiff gegcn eine ^(ippe 
tnarf, ba^ e§ fdjcitcrte. !5^ie !bftiid}en S3aaren uerfanfen im 
DJccer, aUe fcine ©cfciljrtcn famcn nm, unb er felbft erreid;te 



Ill 

mit genauer Diotl) bn§ Ufcr ctncr S^nfel. Ranging, nadt mib 
Dl)ne §ii[fe, gtng cr tiefer m'§ Sanb fjinetn, lutb xvdntz iiber 
fcin Ungtitcf, al^ cr non fcnt einc groile ^tabt erbttcftc, aitS 
bcr il)m cine DD^enge Giuinoljiier niit grogem ©efc^rei entgcgcn 
fam. „.^ei( unferm v^ontgcl'^ rtefen fie tfjm 311, fe^ten i():i 
auf etiiCH pradjttgen Sagen unb fitljrtcit i{)n in bie @tabt. 
(Sr fam in ben fontgiicijen *ipa{aft, IDO man i()m einen ^nr= 
pnnnantcl antcgte, ein Sjiabem urn feine (gtivn banb nnb 
iljn einen gotbenen 2^()von bcfteigen lie§. !l)ie ^orneljmen 
txatm urn if)n I)cr, fieten t)or il)m nieber nnb fdjinnren int 
D^amen be3 gan^en SoIfc§ il}m ben Gib ber S^^rene. 

®er nene ^dnig glanbte Slnfang^v at(e biefe ^errlicljfeit 
fei ein fcljoner S^ramn, bi5 bie gortbaner feine§ ®(iid"e§ if)n 
nicfjt meljr girieifetn (ieg, bag bie lunnberbare ^egeben(}eit 
voixtM) \val)v fei. — „Qd} begreife nic^t," fpracT) er bei fid) 
fetbft, „tt)a§ bie ^(ngen biefe§ innnberlidjen S5o(fe§ be^anbert 
I}at, einen nacften grentbting ^n feinem £i3nig gn madjen. 
©ic iniffen nidjt, \vtx id) bin, fragen nic^t, \vo idj r)er!omme, 
nnb fc^en mid) anf tl)ren S()ron ! 2Ba§ ift ba§ fiir eine be= 
fonbere ®itte in biefem Sanbe?" 
8. 

CONTINUATION. 

©0 badjte cu nnb iDnrbe fo nengierig, bie Urfadje feiner 
(2ri)ebnng jn tuiffcn, ha]^ er fid) entfc^tog, einen t)on ben ^or* 
neljmen an feinem §ofe, ber i{)m ein iceifer d^lann ^xi fein 
fd)ien, nm hk 5(nf(ijfnng biefeS 9iatl)fel§ jn fragen. — „^c- 
$ier!" rebete er il)n an, „tiiarnm I)abt if)r mid) benn gn enrem 
^lonige gemac^t? 2Bie fonntet i[)r iDiffen, ha^^ id) anf cnrer 
3nfc( angefommcn fei? Unb inaS iDirb enbtid) mit mir mer:= 
ben?" — „§err!" antoortete ber ^e^icr, „biefc Sn]d inirb 
Hon ©eiftern bcn3oI)nt. (Sie r)aben t)or tangen ^titcn bm 
9((Imdd)tigen gebeten, i^nen jal)rlid) einen (Sot)n 2(bam3 ^n 
fenben, baj er fie regtere. !l)er 3I(Imdd)tige f)at i()rc ^itte 
angenommen, nnb (dj^t a((e 3a^re, an bent ndm(ic^en S^age, 
einen DJ^enfd)en an i^rer S^]^^ (anben. SDie (Sinn^o^ner eilen 
il)m, Xdk bn gefe()en I)aft, frenbig entgegen nnb crfennen il)n 
fiir i^ren OberI)errn ; aber feine ^legiernng banert nid)t Idn- 
ger afe ein Qaiji\ Q]t biefe ^dt tierfloffc-n nnb ber beftimmte 
S^ag n)ieber erfd)ienen, fo n?irb er feiner SBiirbe entfe^t ; man 
beraubt i()n be§ !onig(id)en ^d)mncfe§ nnb legt i^m fdjlec^te 
v^feibcr an. ^eine ^ebienten tragcn il)n mit @eit>a(t an§ Ufet 



112 

iinb (cgcn ifjit in elit kfoiibeit^ ba^ii p,c6aiitcv 3ci}if|, ba^ tfjn 
niif cine anbere Sn]d brtiigt. ^ie 3nfcl ift tuitft inib obe ; 
jcncr, ber nocfj uor inenigeu Xagen cm macl)tii3er ^ouig tear, 
fommt Ijicr imdt an imb finbct lucbcr lliitcrt(}aueit nocb 
grcunbc. 9ttcmanb rdmmt an fetncm llnglitcfe 3:i)ei(, itub er 
miij tit bte[cm iDitfteit Sanbe cm traurige^ unb fitmuicmolle^ 
^'ebcn fiiljrcn, tpcmt cr feht ^afjv ntcf)t flitg angeiDcnbct fy\t 
l)iaclj bcr ^^crbamtimg bc§ atten .QouigS geljt ba5 ^oi! bem 
nciicn, belt tljm bte 33orfeI}img be§ 5tt(macf)ttgcn jebcS Sa^)V 
oljiie 5Iu§naI)me \cnhtt, auf bie gciDoIjitUdie SBeij'e eutgegcn 
imb nimmt i()n mtt gletcfjcr greubc, iDte ben i^origcn, anf. 
"^jk?^, gcrr ! tft ba§ eirtge ©efe^ btefe^ ^^eirf)e^3, ba§ fein 
Hoitig ipii^rcnb fetner ^cgternng anf()eben !amt." — „^inb 
bcnn ancf) ineine ^orgcinger," fragte ber ^ontg inciter, „t)on 
biefcr fnrjcn S^auer iljrcr §oI)eit unterriditct geinefcn V' — 
„.^:cinem Don xiyatn/' antinortcte bcr ^e^ter, „tnar biefeS @c[e^ 
bcr ^crganglic^feit imbc!annt: aber ^inige lichen fid) non 
bcm ©fan^c, ber tijren 2:^ron nmgab, blenben ; fie t)crgagcn 
bie tranrigc 3itinnft, unb Derlebten i[)r -9^^«^r oljne tncife jn 
fcin. Stnberc beraufdjtcn fid) in ber ©ilBig^'eit if)rc§ ©litcfcS ; 
fie gctranten fid) nid)t, an bie iniifte S^fcl jU benfen, ano 
gnrd)t, bie 9{nncl)m(id)!eit bcy gegenn^drtigcn ©ennffeS gir 
ncrbittern ; nnb fo tauincltcn fie, roie S^rnnfene, an§ eincr 
greube in bie anbere, bi§ i[)re Qcit nm wax imb fie in ba^ 
©d)iff geinorfcn inurben. SBenn ber nnglltdUc^e STag !ain, 
fo fingcn 2(tle an, fid) gu bcf(agcn nnb t^re S3erblenbnng gn 
bcfenf^en ; aber nun inar e§ gn fpat, nnb fie innrbcn o[)ne 
©d)onimg bctn (Elcnbe iibcrgebcn, ba§ fie cnnartete unb bem 
fie bnrd) SBei^oljcit utdit fjatten tiorbcugen inoKcn." 

9. 

CONTINUATIO^T. 

•Dicfe (5r^aI)Iimg beS ®eifte$ crfiiKte ben llonig mit gnrc^t, 
r fd}auberte t)or bem 8cbjtdfal bcr Dorigen £onige ^uritd: unb 
It) itnf d)te, ti)rcm Ungliide ju entge^en. (5r fal) mit (Sd)rccfen, 
ba5 fd)on einige ^od)en i3on bicfem fnrgen S'a^^re uerffoffcH 
iDctrcn, unb \ia^^ cr cilen mli^te, bie iibrigen STage feiner ke- 
gicrnng befto beffer gu niiijcn. „3Beifer ^c.^^icr!" fprad).cr 311 
bem ©ciftc, bn I)aft mir mein Htnftige^? ^djid'fat unb bie lur^e 
"Sjancr meincr !onigItd)en d)lad)t entbccft ; aber id) bittc bid), 
[age mir and), roa^3 id) tl)im iniif?, H'Cim id) baC> Qkwh nxv^ 



113 

iicr S^onjctitijer ucnuetbeii voiti." — ^Grinucrc hid), |)crr !' 
autlDortcte hex ©cift, „ba6 bit nad't aitf unfere -3^^[ct O'^^oiU' 
men Mft ; benn eben fo tinrft bit lincber (jtnaiivgeljen itnb nic^ 
mnl§ guritd'feljreu. S^3 ift alfo iiuv cm ctn3ic]cg Wittd moo* 
(id), bem SJtaiiGcI t)or3iibeugcn, bcr in jencm ^anbe ber SScr^ 
Iicmnimg broljt : menu hu c§ ndmttcfj frit(|tbar mad)]t imb mtf 
Gimnoljiiern befel^-eft. SDieS ift naci) miferen ©efe^en t)cr- 
(jOimt, imb bcinc llntert^ancn finb bir fo follfommcn gc()or* 
fam, bag fie Ijinget)cn, tpo bit fie Ijtnfenbeft. (Bd)\dt alfu 
eine DTccnge Slrbeit^Ieitte l^iniiber imb lag tie tnitften gelbcr 
in frndjtbare 5(ccfer uertranbcln ; banc (Stdbte imb S3oiTatIj^' 
{)iinfcr nnb t^erforge fie mit a((cn notljbitrftigen Sebenvmitteln. 
33cit Ginem Sort : bercite bir cin nene^ 9ieidj, beffen Gin* 
moljncr bid) nad) bciner S3crbannung mit grenben anfneljmcn. 
3iber cite, lag fcinen 2(ngcnbti(^ imgeniitjt i)oriibcr i3cl)cn ; 
benn bie 3cit ift fur^, nnb je mc^r bn jnm SInban bciner fiinf^ 
tigcn Sol)nimg tl)nfi, befto g(ndlid)er luirb bein 5InfentI)a{t 
bort fein. S^enfe, bein Qodyc ift morgen fd)on um, nnb ni'ii^e 
bcine grciljcit mie cin Hnger glitd)tting, bcr bem ^crbcrben 
ciitgetjcn mid. Senn bn meinen 9vatl) t)erad)teft ober ^au^ 
bcrft, fo bift bn t)erIorcn, nnb (angers Gtcnb ift bein Soo§.'^ 

5^cr £i)nig mar ein Hnger iO^ann, nnb bie 9icbe bc§ (i)ci^ 
ftc^o gab feiner Gntfd)(iegnng nnb feiner 3^I)dtig!eit gtiiget. 
Gr fanbte fogteid) eine SJicnge Untcrt[}anen ah: fie gingcn 
mit grenben nnb griffen ha§> Serf mit (Sifer an. 2)ie S^fel 
fing an fid) gn oerfd)oncrn, nnb e^e fcd)§ 9}2onben Dergangcii 
maren , ftanben fd)on Stdbte auf i[)ren bln^cnbcn Slnen 
S^cffcn nngead)tet lieg bcr ^ijnig in fcinem (^nfer md)t nad)- 
er fanbte tmmer me()r Ginrooliner i)inUber; bie fotgcnbcn 
maren nod) frenbiger, aU bie erften, ha fie in ein fo mo()I 
angebantcS Sanb gtngen, ba§ i^re grennbe nnb SInoermanbten 
bcmof)nten.. 

10. 

THE EIS^D. 

llntcrbeffcn fam ba^3 (Snbe be^ -3<^^i*cv iimner ndl)er. uTie 
oorigen ^onige fatten oor bicfem ^Ingenblid'e igegtttert, biefcr 
fal) tl)in mit ^el)nfnd)t entgegen; benn er gtng in ein ?anb, 
mo er fid) bnrd) fcinc ffnge 2:i)dtig!eit eine banernbe SBoI)- 
nnng gebant I)attc. — 'a^cv beftimmte S^ag erfd)icn cnblid), 
S^er ^onig mnrbe in fcinem ^^atafte ergriffen, fcincS 5^ia^ 
bem§ nnb fciua* foniglidicn .^.(cibnng beraubt nnb auf ha<i 



114 

imDcrmeibltcf)e '3'cfjiff gebradjt, ba§ tl)it nad) feinem 33crljan* 
nuiig^orte fitfjrtc. i^amn wax cr abcr am Ufer ber neucn 
3nic( gelaubct, aU iijm bie (Sinitio^ner mit greuben eittgegen 
ctlten, if)n mit grower Ql)vc empfmtjen, imb fein §aupt ftatt 
jcne3 S'tabemS, be[feu §errttcl)fcit nur ein Sa^r inaljrte, mit 
ctnem m:t)ent)e(f(icl]en S3Iitmen!ran5e [djmiidtem S^er 51(1^ 
mddjtige beIo!)nte feme 2Bei§[}eit : (Sr gab i^m bie Unfierb- 
Ucijfcit [ciner Untcrtljaiien imb macljte i^n 311 iljrem emigen 
Sliinige. 

^er reidje, iDoljItljatige [Dtann tft @ott ; ber (SffaDe, ben 
fctn ^perr fortfenbet, ift ber 9}^enf(lj bet [einer ©ebitrt ; bie 
3nfel, wo er autanbet, ift bie SBett ; bie (SimDoljiier, bie ifjm 
freubig entgegen fommen, finb bie (Sllern, hk fitr ben nadten 
Seincnbcn forgen. SDer S3e5ier, ber if)n t)on bem traurigen 
@cl}id'fal, i)a^ i(}m beDorftel)t, miterridjtet, ift bie SBeiSljcit. 
'4^a§ 3^^)- fciner 9iegicrmtg ift ba§ menfc^lidje 2eben, imb 
bie iDiifte 3nfet, \voi)in cr gcfldjrt li^irb, bie tunftige Selt. 
©ie 5lrbeit§(eitte, bie er bal)in fenbet, finb bie giiten 2Ber!e, 
bie er inciljrenb feineS SebenS t)errid)tct. !5)ie ^ijnige aber, 
ineldje i3or i(}m baljingegangen finb, oljne itber ba§ Ungliicf, 
ba§ il)nen brof)te, nadj^itbenfen, finb jene tljoridjten S}>enfdjen, 
bk fid) b(o§ mit irbifd)en grenben befd)aftigen, o^ne an i^r 
Sebcn nad) bem Xobe- jn benfen; fie merben mit einigem 
(Slenb befrraft, mci( fie mv bem Xtjrone be§ Sidmilc^ttgen mit 
gtinben erfdieincn, bie an gnten Scrfen (ecr finb. 



V C A B U L A r. Y . 



1. 



(S^a^mctftcr, treasurer; ^irtenftaB, shepherd's-staff ; 5(int, office; fid^ 
cmvcricl)aHnc5cn, to rise ; l>crtlagcn, to accuse ; Berauben, to rob ; <e^a^, 
f.reasnre , jlcftbarfciten, trinkets ; X)crbergen, to hide ; ©ciDoIbe, vault^; 
perfcljen, to provide ; bcfef)en, to examine ; crftaunt, surprised ; Idnblirf), 
rural ; (Etrc{}fe[icl, chair of straw ; .^irtenflote, cane-flute ; <^irtentafd)C, 
ehephv'rd's-bag ; giiten, to look after ; (Scl)laf, sleep ; Jtc[)cn, to attract ; 
.^of, court ; jubringen, to spend ; ber i^orige (Btanb, the former state ; 
lincbcr()olen, to repeat; £'icb, song; £'cb, praise; (2cl}i3vfcr, Creator; 
frtcbltd), peaccahl y ; ^5ca-bc, flock ; i.\itcrnd}e ?5lurcn, native fields ; 
erjiirnt, angry; vcdcumbcii, to slander; cbcl, excellent; iimarnien, tfl 
embrace. 



115 



SRditber, robber ; movbeit, to nnirder ; vlinibern, to plunder, to rob 
Hoftbarfcitcn, valuable things ; •fQcijic, cavern ; I'ebengmittel, victuals ; 
fort, gone ; JBurfdje, fellow ; tcbtcn, to kill ; untcnncgg, on the road ; 
©efdfjrte, companion ; sergiftcii, to poison ; t)cl)altcti, to keep ; @ift, 
poison ; faum, scarcelj^ ; tretcn, to enter ; Jufpringcn, to rush upon ; 
5)old), dagger ; bUTd)6Dl)ren, to pierce ; i;c[tig, violent ; Seidjuam, 
corpse •, auf(}dufen, to accumulate. 

3. 

Spur, trace; 5:et[cf;\t»tnbcn, to disappear; Slitter, knight; lu^r^ucni 
t)Ctt, to spend ; ycrKl)onem, to adorn ; ^-pilger, pilgrim ; 9lad)tf)crbcvgc, 
night's-lodging; abweifcn, to refuse; tro^tg, haughtily; @aftf)Df, 
inn; i^TCigc, question; treiter ge()en, to go on his way; jugcben, 
grant; btnrof)uen, to inhabit; ©aft, guest; totxflid), indeed; licbcr, 
rather; .^immcl, heaven; eWDig, eternal, everlasting ; 9Bof)nung, habi- 
tition; crlangcn, to acquire ; gcltidljren, to grant; fur hie ^^'olgc, afte 
wards ; lr»cl;ltf)citig, cliaritable. 

4. 

(Sti'cngc, rigor ; 3Stntcr, winter ; fvomm, good-natured ; £anb: 
I'vann, peasant; ai§ ob, as if; jutcaulid), confidently; freuttbttd), 
Mendly ; 2Bot)nung, house, dwelling ; aufpiden, to pick up ; ®rOi 
famcn, ^tumd)cn, crumbs ; ^tu^ltng, spring ; ^anb, country ; ©cs 
I iiid), bushes ; fid) bclaubcn, to leaf, to cover themselves with leaves ; 
cntflicgen, to fly away; bciuen, to build; dlcjt, nest; frof^ttd), jo^-ful; 
t)iebcrkb/Tcn, to return; abcrnuilS, again; mitbringcn, to bring along 
■'«-'<-h one; um^erfd)aucn, to look about; anfcl)cn, to look at; 3utrauen, 
fidence; ciToeifcu, to arouse ; cv^cugcn, to produce. 



with one 
con 



5. 



©cbictcu, to order; 5?ncdit, servant; SSithiV, widow; liertreibeit, 
to expel; jd[)rlid}, annual: Si'nS, rent; lier5ief)eu, to tany, stay; ex- 
barmen, to have pity ; nranf barnieber licgeu, to be ill ; ^etfen, to 
implore; j^crftc^eu, to expel; S3efc()(, order; dnbem, to change; 
cS i'ci benn, except; (id)utb, debt; bittcrlid), bitterly; ^jlege, care, 
nursing; S}ctbienjl, gain; Jjerjefjten, to consume; »crf}tnbcm, to hinder; 
fid} wcgircnben, to turn away; ©artenl)au§, summer-house; fid) legcn, 
to lie down; ^olfler, cushion; ruf)en, to repose; !pfl[egcn, to use, to 
be in the habit; fd)^!!, sultry, very hot; bid}t, close by; fiie^cn, 
to flow, to run; <Strcm, river; lu^rbreitcn, to spread; 5iii()lung, 
coolness; Stifle, quiet; ^uft, air; fid) regcn, to move; ©elispel, con- 
tinual lisping; (£d)ilf, reed; tifcv, bank; toncit gletc^, to sound like, 
to resemble; ©ewinfcl, whining; imru£)ig, restless; baniad), then; 
]^sjrri)cn, to listen; 9iaufd)eit, rustling; bdud)tert, to seem; ©eftabe, 
shore; uncnblict), endless; fid) ird^eu, to toss aboiit; 2)onncr, thun- 
der; ©clinttcr, thunderstorm; @crid)t, judgment; »enie^mert, to 
hear; cilen, to. hasten; nirgenbS, nowhere; uutetbcffen, in the mean 
time; ()inauf^ic[)en, to come up; gei^altig, violent; UnmutI), depressed 
spirits; urii!)cru\inbe(n, to walk to and fro; I)tinvcgjiebcn, to pasa 



116 

away; jiUinbcr Wcvben, to be disgusted; gcnic^cn, to enjoy; laufdjctt^ 
to rustle ; 4?t^c, heat ; ^^itbcv, fever ; tunivf, dull, hollow ; !lcjcn^ 
uoise , j;ci'ic()cibcn, to expire. 



!^anbmann, countrynifin ; mitBringcn, to bring along witli one 
^jirftid), peach ; rotl}lid), reddish ; ^Bacfcn, cheeks ; jart, tender ; 
^taum, down; i?ctt()cilcrt, to divide; (Sd}laffammcrlcin, little bedroom; 
fcl}mccfen, to taste, to like; fviuBcrlid) unb fanft, delicious and sweet 
at the same time; @ejd)macf, taste; (Etcin, stone; forgfam, carefully; 
iicnr»a^Tcn, to keep; crjtcl)cn, to raise; f)au5^alterijd;, economical; 
3ufunft, future ; forgcn, to take care; gcjicmcn, to become; aufcffcn, 
to eat up; fortwcvfcn, to throw away; «§alfte, half; jerfdjiucljen, to 
melt; J^ur, to be sure- flug, v>dse; itac^ finbltc^cr SBcifc, chiidlike ; 
^anbeln, to act; il(ugf)cit, prudence, wisdom; 9laum, room; begins 
nen, to begin ; jammcln, to gather, to pick up ; aufflopfcn, to open ; 
Slcxn, kernel; jd}uttcln, to shake; bcwafjrcn, preserve; uiiBefaiigcn, 
unaffected; cffcu, frankh^; ©cBvaud), use ; Sljl'dnC; tear. 



©uttpttg; Kmd, charitable; fd)enfeiT, to give, to present; <2d)tff, 
ship; fcftlid), precious; auSn'ifteu, to fit out, to equip; fcgclu, to 
sail; lt>ud)cr!t, to make profit; @ctX)inn, gain ; !aum, scarcely; (iec, 
sea; {)efttg, violent; (Sturm, storm; crf}cbcTt, to rise; illippe, clitf; 
fd}ettcm; to wreck; bcvftnfen, to sink; @cfaf)rte; companion; unu 
fcmmcn, to perish; crreid)ett, to reach; mit gcnauer Dtotf}, narrowly ; 
Ufcr, shore ; naitt, naked ; <^ulfc, help ; ticfcr {)inctngef}cn, to plunge 
into, to proceed farther; fern, far, distant; crbUcfen, to perceive; 
DJtcnge, crowd; entgegcn fcmmen, to come to meet; ^cil, prosperity; 
blessings ; SBvigcrt, carriage ; SJuintcl, cloak ; feeftetgen, to ascend ; 
tie 23ornef)men, the nobles; um if)n l)ertrcten, to surround him; (Sib, 
oath; anfangS, in the beginning; opcrrlid)fcit, splendor; 2;raum, 
dream; ^ortbauer, continuation ; tt)unbcrbar, wonderful ; ©egebcndcit, 
event, adventure* iinmberlid}, strange ; bejaiibem, to enchant; §umb. 
(ing, stranger; befonbere, singular; (£tttc, custom. 

8. 

Duntgiertg, curious; Itrfad^c, cans-e, reason; (S'rIjcBung, elevation; 
?luflbjung, solution; 9]atl)fe[, riddle; "ma^ wixh au5 mir wcrben, what 
will become of me; ©cift, spirit; bcwcf)nen, to inhabit; al(mdd;ttg, 
almighty; lanbert, to disembark; entgcgencilcit, to hasten towai-ds ; 
cvfcnncn, to recognize, to acknowledge ; Dbcrl)crr, sovereign- D^cgic; 
rung, government; bauern, to last; yerfiic^en, to pass; iincbcr cr; 
jd-Kincn, to reappear; SSiirbc, dignity ; cntl'c|cn, to depose ; beraubcn, 
lo deprive ; (Sd)mutJ, ornaments ; \mi\t imb obc, desert and desolate ; 
r.uad)ttg, powerful; Untcrt[)an, subject; 3:t}cil, part, interest; himmcr; 
l^cU, sorrowful; iBerbannung, banishment; 23orlcf)ung, providence; 
5liK°nciI)mc, exception; aufncl)mcn, to receive; l^crig, preceding; 9\ctd}, 
kingdom ; auf(}cben, abolisli; ffiorgdngcr, predecessor; Saucr, dura- 
tion ; <§cf)cit, sovereignty; fficrgdnglid)fcit, transientness ; (5Han^^ 
B])lendor; fe(cnbcn, to ])lind; Snfunft, future; i^cvlcbcn, to pass, to 



117 

Bpeud ; beravifd)cn, to intoxicate ; (Siifi'gfeit, sweetness; fia) gctraucu, tc 
dare; 5(nncl)mlict}fcit, delight, sweetness; gc^cnwartig, present; @cnu6 
enjoyment; ycr^tttcni, to embitter; taumcln, to stagger, to pass; truii 
fen, tipsy; um fcirt, to be passed; SScrblcnbung, blindness, fascination 
fcufjcn, to sigh ; (£d)cming, forbearance, mercy ; (Slcnb, miser}' ; uber 
f^cbcn, to deliver; iiorbcugcn, to prevent. 



C5rja()Iung, recital, story; eV|Vificn, to fill; juri'ufidjaubcrn, to tremble, 
€d)irtl\il, fate; entgclicn, to escape ; (£d)recfcn, fright; bte u&rt^cn, th< 
remaining ; bcfto bcffer, so much the better; nii^en, to turn to profit , 
Vcrmcibcn, to avoid ; ftd) crinncrn, to remember ; 2)iittet, mea?»s ; SJtartcjcl, 
want ; broI)cn, to threaten ; ndmlid}, namely ; that is to say ; frud)t&iH 
;nad}cn, to fertilize ; befe|cn, to fill ; ycrgonnen, to permit ; tJoUfommcn, 
perfect ; gcf)orfam, obedient ; StrbcitSlcutc, workmen ; ^clb, field ; 5(cEcv) 
field; baucn, to build; S3orratf)§^au§, magazine; ycviorgcu, to provide; 
notf)burtttg, necessary; £cbcn§mtttcl, victuals; bcrcitcn, to prepare; 
yorubergcl)cn, to pass ; nugenii^t, without profit ; Slnbau, culture ; 
SScfjUUng, habitation, dwelhng; 5{ufcntf)alt, stay, residence; 33cr: 
berben, ruin, destruction ; t»crad)ten, to despise ; fRatf), advice ; jaubevn, 
to tarry; ^co§, fate; Olcbc, discourse, speech; (Sntfdjlte^ung, resolu- 
tion ; !?l)attgfcit, activity ; ?5tuge(, wing ; ha§ iBcvf angrcifcn, to set to 
work; (SifcV, zeal; ftcljen, to be ; btii^cnb, blooming; ?Iue, pasture; 
bcfl'cu ungcad)tct, notwithstanding; nari;ta[[cn, to relent; augebaut, 
cultivated ; 5lmKTU\inbtc, relations. 

10. 

Uutcvbcftcn, meanwhile; nat}cr fommcn, to approach; j'ltcni, to 
tremble; ^^lugcublic!, moment; mit (£c()nfiid)t cntgegenfc()cn, to await 
with impatience; bcftimuit, fixed; erfd}Ctncn, to appear; eubltd), at 
last; crgrcifcn, to seize; beraubcn, to deprive; unyermcibf id), inevi- 
table; $5cvbanminglort, exile ; .^au^^t, head ; iDdljren, to last ; unycr^ 
IPclflid)/ never-fading ; S3(uincnfTam, wreath of flowers ; fd)mutfcn, to 
adorn; belcr)ncrt, to reward; Unftcrbltdjfcit, immortahty; eWtg, eternal, 
everlasting ; f crtfcnbcn, to send away ; ©eburt, birth ; 2Bclt, world ; 
ivcinen, to weep; bci^crftGi^cn, to await; untcrrtd)tcn_, to instruct; 2Borf, 
work; vervid)tcit, to do; luidjbcnfcn, to reflect; t(]5rid;t, foolisli; irbtfd}, 
worldly; bcjdidfttgen, to occujy; Ictt, cmj^ty 



118 



COLLECTION OF MUCH USED . PHRASES. 



L 



Thanks to God' 

I owe it to you, 

God forbid I 

would to God I 

very well, I agree to that, 

directly, 

presently, by and by, 

this minute, 

to-morrow, then I 

as quickly as possible, 

as soon as possible, 

at the latest, 

at the most, 

to have done, ' 

never mind, 

come for it, send for it, 

all in all, 

by the by, 

just in time, 

importunely, 

about nothing at all, 

not by far, 

have done with it I 

by degrees, by little and little, 

by ourselves, 

heedlessly, 

by turns, 

it is my turn, 

by snatches, 

to my taste, 

mothinks, 

in my way, 



©Dtt fet S^an!! 

id) t^erbanfe e^ bir; 

bemal^re ©ctt! ' 

tocdte ©Dtt! 

gut, bag la^ i(^ gelten, 

jetjt gleicf) ; 

fcglei^ ; 

ben Slugenblic! ; 

auf mcrgen ! 

fo [(^nell ai§> mh^iii) ; 

aufio eljefte; 

fpdtefteng ; 

I}cd}ften0 ; 

fertig fein; 

ba§ t^ut md)t» ; 

^okn Sieeg, lajjen Siee» I;clen 

^Uey giifammen genomirten ; • 

t^a fdllt mir ein ; 

3ur rec^ten S^it ; 

giir Un3eit; 

inn nicety nnb nnbev n{(^t^ ; 

bei meitem nid}t; 

{)5re auf bamit! 

nad} unb nac^; 

imter »ier Slugen; 

cl;ne Ueberlegung; 

tpedifel^meife, nad) ber Dici^e; 

bie ^ldh^ i[t an mir ; 

[ti'idineife ; 

nad} meinem ©efd^made; 

nad} nTeinem ^lebiinfen; 

nad) inciner 3(rt ; 



119 



well-grounded, 

among ourselves, 

unwillingly, 

till I see you again, 

by one's self, 

to the right, to the left, 

purposely, 

delightful, 

as usual, 

for my part, 

joke apart, 

Cheap, 
pitiful, 

against my inclination, 
unheard of, 
not to be believed, 
With a loud voice, 
with a low voice, 
what is the use of that ? 
straight along, 
partly — partly, 
that is to say, 
that is yet to be seen, 
to be, to do, 
at the end of a year, 
quite sure, 
in case of need, 
f the worst comes to the worst, 
repeatedly, 
at random, 
at break of day, 
at night-fall, 
in the heat of summer, 
in the cold of winter, 
sheltered from the rain, &c. 
a*- sunrise, 



2. 



griinbli(^ ; 

unter unio ; 

ungern; 

au^ S>ieber[el;en; 

fiir [id; adein; 

red}tj§, VmU; 

mil g'lei^, ab[id}tn^; 

3um ©nt^iiden; 

me geit)oI}nli(^ ; 

\va§> mid) betrifft; 

Sd}er5 bet 6eite. 

n)D[)Ifeil; 

gum (Srbavmen ; 

Iriber SSiden; 

itnerl;5rt ; 

urtglaubiid;; 

mit lauter (Stimme ; 

mit leifer Stimmc; 

lt)03u 'oa§'^. 

gerabe gu; 

t!)eil^— t^eiB; 

'i)a^ ^eif5t, namli(^ ; 

ba§ fragt fid}, 

\\ii) befinben; 

11 ad} 33erlauf eine» 2d\:)Xi^'; 

ganj gemif.; 

im 3totf;[alIe; 

loenn'g gum 2leuf3erften Icmuit; 

ju iDieberljolten Wlakn; 

aiif'y G)eratl)emol;[; 

beim Mn^xud) be^ Sage^ , 

bei einbred^eiiber Tiad)t; 

mitten im ©ommer; 

im f;drte[ten SCinter; 

gcfd}ul^t Iter bem S^xegen 2C. ; 

mit 'Soiiuenautgang. 



120 



To believe liim, 
to hear him, 
to speak candidl}^, 
to see him, you would take 
him for a common man, 

all but tvfo dollars, 
he is fond of flowers, 
as far as you can see, 
by dint of reading, 
without his parents' know- 
ledge, 
beginning from the first, 
from afar, 
by day, by night, 
even and odd, 
suppose, 
by force, 
thunderstruck, 
willingly, 
pi'ay, 
candidly, 
in good h.umor, 
in bad humor, 
as well as one can, 
more and more, 



worn raan iljvix v3iaiikn fell; 
Yocnn man iljn fo rcbcn l;cvt; 
Pllenljersig cjefagt; 
Winn Sie il;n jo feljen, [o fell: 

ten Sie il)n fiir einen gemei 

nen DJiann IjalUn ; 
hiS> auf gtoei 2:l;aler ; 
er {[t ein ^reunb »cn 33[umen , 
fo iDcit, alg ba^ ©e[id;t reid^t; 
biirc^ t)iele^ Se[en; 
cl;ne SBifjen feiner (lltern: 

ocm etftert an gered^net; 

i?on SBeitem ; 

am 2;age, be^ Tia(^tB ; 

gleid} luib imgleii^ ; 

SefelU; 

tiiit ©elnalt; 

roie i:cm tenner geriil^tt; 

gcrn ; 

id; bitte; 

aufri^tig ; 

guter Saime; 

iibler Saune; 

fo gut man fann , 

immer mel;r. 



In all my life, ever, 

never to be forgotten, 

all at once, 

indeed? 

so much the more, 

further, 

from the bottom, 

by v/ord of mouth, 

with nil my heai-t. 



in meinem 2ehcn, i^cn |e f)cr; 

xmi^ergellUd} ; 

auf einmal; 

iTjirfli^? im (s-rnfte? 

um fo mef)r; 

ferner ; 

fen Grnnb anx>\ 

miinblid}; 

i:rn gan^cni -pev^cn; 



121 



what are you about? 

what is the matter ? 

by name, 

by sight, 

for want of money, of time^ 

you have no reason, 

well, what are you talking 
about ? 

anew, 

every year, every day, 

by writ, by rote, 

(to be) on the point (to be) 
going, 

on the very spot, 

in the first place, in the se- 
cond, in the last place, 

in the mean time, 

in some way, 

on the way, on the road, 

in return, 

in the open air, 

in broad day-light, 

in the open street, 



)[va§ gibt'^? tva^ \\i Io>3? 

bem 9^amen nadj; 

toon 2lnfef)en; 

aii^ 2Ranget an ©elb, an 3eit, 

6ic l;aben n{d)t llr[ad}e; 

nun, motoon ift bie 9iebe? 

oon 3ieuem ; 
jd{;rli(^, tdgltd}; 
fc^riftlii^, au5ir»enbi{j ; 
int ^egri[f [ein ; 

vitt Ort unb Stelle; 

gum Grften, jum Bi^eiten, gum 

£e|ten ; 
iinterbeffen; 
ein{gcrmaf3cn ; 
untern^eg^ ; 
bagegen, gum (Srfahe; 
in ber freien Su[t; 
am {;ellen S^age; 
an\ freier (£tra{3e. 



The other day, 

excessively, 

topsy-turvy, 

here enclosed, 

sooner or later, 

confusedly, 

whether you like or no. 

you have hurt me, 

far from the point, 

on purpose 

not by far, 

to be sure, 

what is still worse. 



neuHd} ; 

fiber alle 2)ua^en ; 

unterft ^u cberft, !D|3fiiber ; 

betfolgenb, inliegenb; 

liber !ur3 ober lang ; 

burdjeinanber; 

man mag lucllen cber m<i)t ; 

<Bk \)abcn mir \vd) getf)an ; 

n^eit getef)It; 

ab[ic^t(id^ ; 

bei n^eitem nid^t; 

gemi^; 

iiia^5 ncd; fdfdmmer ift; 



122 



nothing of consequence, 
somewhere, anywhere, 
nowhere, not anywhere, 
elsewhere, 

are we going anywhere ? 
something hurts me, 
what is your pleasure ? 
if you please, 
it is of no moment, 
what does it matter ? 
done! 

in what do you amuse your- 
self? 
I amuse myself in reading, 
I like fruit very much, 
he likes wine better than beer, 
nor I neither. 

Heaven be praised, 
to pass in a carriage, on horse- 
back, 
that does well, 
that will not do, 
he is to come home, 
you are very much to be pitied, 
there are my scissors, 
some one rings the bell, 
he has done you no harm, 

that is what he told me, 
thus did I answer him, 
that is just what you are, 
in this way we can arrange it, 
I am cold, warm, hungry, 

thirsty, 
what ails you? what is the 

matter with you ? 



ni(^t» I10U ^ebeutung ; 

irgenbiDD ; 

nirgenby ; 

anberemo ; 

getjen mx irgenbtoo I;in? 

e§> t^ut tiiir etwas mef;; 

ma^ beliebt? 

fein Sie fo gut; 

eg i[t nic^t con Sebeutung ; 

\Da§ ^ii)a\iet eg? 

tcpp! abgemad)t! 

it)cmit ©ertreiben 6ie fid} bie 

3eit? 
id) iinterf)alte mid} init Sefen ; 
id) e[fe fef}r gern Obft; 
er trinft lieber 2Bein aU ^m; 
id) and] md)t, 

5)em §immel fei ^ant ; 
iDorbei \ai)xen, reiten ; 



6. 



bag gef)t gut; 

bag gef}t nii^t; 

er foU nai^ ^aufe tommen ; 

6ie [inb iro!}! red^t gu beflagen; 

ba ift meiue Sd^eere; 

tuan flingett; 

er l^at ^fjnen uid)tg ^u Seibe 

getfjan; 
bag fagte er luir; 
^olgeubeg antrocrtete id) i^m, 
fo finb 8{e; 

fo fcunen wiv eg uiad}en; 
mid} friert, mir ift voaxm, inul 

bungert, mid} burftet; 
ma? feblt ^hun'^. 



123 



I am sick, 

he has a competency, 

I am much concerned about it, 

to have something on one's 

mind, 
you have but to speak, 
he needs but follow me, 
you have but to come for me 

about six o'clock, 
I cannot but praise him, 
you may depend upon it, 



niir i[t iibel; 
ci- f)at [ein Sluefominen ; 
ey liegt mir am ^er^en ; 
et\vas> auf bem ^erjen \)dben , 

£ie biirfen nur reben ; 

er barf mir nut folgeii ; 

8ie biirfen mi(^ nur gegen fcc^3 

Ul)x abl)okn; 
id) !ann il;n nur (oben ; 
Sie fonnen fid} barauf i^erlaffen. 



7. 



It is a pity, 

I know nothing about it, 

I never saw the like of it, 

there are eighteen of them, 

(there are three people, want- 
ing to speak to you, 
what is the matter there ? 
three months ago, six months 
ago, fifteen months ago, 
I have not seen you for such 

a long time, 
it will be crowded, 
there is nothing to say against 

it, 
it is impossible to bear it, to 
make him hear reason, 
^ is there anything more beau- 
i tiful than this garden ? 

he is a man of his word. 
Qiy daughter got the fever 

yesterday, 
we shall certainl}^ have a 
thunderstorm 



ey i[t ^Bdjahc ; 

id} mei^ ntd}ty bat)Dn; 

be^gleii^en Ijabe ic^ nie ge^ 

fel}en ; 
ey finb il}rer ad)^t1)n ; 
ey t^erlangen brei 9}'tenfd}en, 

Sie gu fprec^en ; 
may gibt e^ ba? 
)ocx brei ^Ronaten, einem \)alhc\\ 

^d)x, fiinf ^Sierteljabren ; 
ic^ l)abe Sie fd)Dn fo (ange nid}^ 

gefeben; 
cy U)irb ticU n?erben; 
bagegen ift nidjt^ gu fagen; 

ey ift nid}t mcglic^ au^3uf}alten, 

i^n 3ur 33ernunft §u bringen; 
gibt c^ etiDaic Sd}5nere^ aly 

biefen ©arten? 
er ift ein Wiann »cn SBort.; 
meine 3:od}ter befam geftern 

bay ^ieber; 
w'n befcmmen gemiJ3 ein d'e* 

Wlttex ; 



124 



he has had one, and you shall 

have one likewise, 
I have but o^lanced at it, 



er I;at mvS be!ommen unb 6ic 
follen and) eing l)aben; 

16:) t:)ahe Tiur einen ^M barauf 
gemov[en. 



They are already gone for it, 

how far have you got ? 

I do not know what I am 

about, 
you have hit at the right point, 
that is too much, 
it is the same with all animals, 
it will be of no use, 
I have said so all along, 
what is to be done ? 
I do not know, which way to 

turn, 
come along? 
what do you want, 
what is the name of that ? 
what is the meaning of that ? 
to faint, 
it is not to me, you must say 

that, 
it is, because I have been ill, 

why, he did not know him, 



Titan beforgt ei3 fd^on; 

\vk weit [inb 8ie? 

id} lt)eif3 nid}t, tnoran id} bin ; 

Sie r;abene^ getrofi'en; 

ba» gel^t gu tt)eit; 

fo ift e^ mit alien %f)kxm', 

e§ mirb nic^t^ l^elfen ; 

id} l;aBe e^ immer gefagt; 

)ma§ fell gefd^eljen ? 

id} n)ei^ md)t, rool)tn id} mtc^ 

iDenben foil ; 
fommmit! 
\vaK> roolkn 6ie? 
me ^ei^t bay? 
it»a§ Ijei^t 'i^a^'^. 
cl)nmdd}tig merben 
mir ntrtfi'en Sie ba^ nid}t 

fagen; 
ba^ maii)t, ireil id) ixant ges 

mefen bin ; 
er fannte \^n ja nid}t. 



9. 



I am very glad of it, 

I am sorry for it, 

I am very comfortable, I feel 

very well, 
r feel very ill, 
to be well oif, 
he has paid him a visit, 



e^ i[t niir [el)r lieb; 
e» t1:)ut mir leib ; 
eio {ft mir ted}t wol)! ; 

mir i\V§ fd}led}t ju ?i)hit[}e; 
l'Dol}U}abenb [ein ; 
er ^at il}m cincn S3e[ud) gc* 
madit; 



r 



125 



we have been tc see Mr. N. 

who is ill, 
he is coming directly, 
it is going to strike twelve 

o'clock, 
he has enlisted, 
what things are these, 
to was just going out, 
what shall become of you ? 
don't believe it, 
have you finished the book'! 
how do you do ? 
how are you getting on ? 
it gets on well, 
that is a matter of course, 
I am going to tell you, 
what are you about ? 
he does not succeed in it, 
my honor is at stake, 

I shall come to see you, 

does this suit you ? 

this conduct does not become 

you, 

go to meet somebody, 

leave me alone, 

to be circumstantial, 

10 



mv I;a&en 5erni Dl. befud^t, 

ber !ran! i[t; 
cr it)irb gleid} fommen ; 
cy iinrb gleic^ glDcIf [d;Iagen; 

er i[t ©olbat gemorben; 

iDay fixr Sac^en [inb bag ? 

er ipollte ebcn I}inaug ; 

toay foil auy Sb^en mevbcn ? 

glauben 6ie ey ja nid}t ; 

I)aben 6{e ha§> S3ud7 au§gele[en ; 

mie gel;t'g? 

luie Qel)V§ ^l)nm'^^ 

e§ gel;t gut; 

bay ux\U^t fic^ 'con folbft; 

id} trill (miif3) ^^mn fagen , 

voa§> fangen Sie an? 

eg gelingt ifjm nid)t? 

meine Gbre \kl)t babei nuj bcin 

Spiele ; 
id} iDerbe 6{e befud^en ; 
fte^t S^nen bag an ? 
biefeg S3etragen gesienit eiid^ 

nid^t; 
^emanbem entgegen ge|)en; 
gef)' unb laf3 mid) gnfriebcn; 
etiuag ]^aar!(ein er3d(;ien. 



INSTRUCTION BOOKS 

roB 

STUDENTS OF MODEM LANGUAGES, 

PUBLISHED BY 

D. APPLETON <& COMPANY, 

649 & 651 UROADWAY, KEW YORK. 



A H N ' S INTRODUCTORY 

PRACTICAL COURSE to acquire 
the French Language by a Short and 
Easy Method. Translated and ar- 
ranged, and supplied with a pro- 
nunciation of English Sounds. By 
J. C. (Ehlschljeger. 13mo. Price 
T5cte. 

''The system of instruction of 
Alinis simple and natural, and many 
who have acquired the language 
testify to its advantages." 



ri. 



I 



Integral Metliod of Frencli In- 
struction. 
NEW AND COMPREHEN- 

SRT] FRENCH INSTRUCTOR, 
based upon an Original and Philo- 
sophical Method, Applicable to the 
Study of all Languages, with an 
Introduction explanatory of the 
Method, and a Treatise on French 
Pronunciation. By Stephen Peap.l 
A^'DRF,ws and George Batchelor. 
lvol.,12mo. 469 pages. Price, $1.50. 

PRACTICAL PRONOUIT- 

CER AND KEY to Andrews and 
Batchelor's New French Instructor. 
Containing the Lessons of the In- 
structor, with a phonetic rendering 
in parallel columns ; a French 
Translation of the Exercises, to- 
gether with an Appendix. 1 vol. 
12mo. 347 pages. Price, $1.25. 

It is claimed that the labor of 
teaching and learning the French 
language is immensely reduced by 
this new method, and the success of 



the pupil placed upon a footing of 
certainty never heretofore attained. 
The general characteris-tics of the 
system for which this claim is made 
are as follows : 1. The judicious 
combination of Theory and Prac- 
tice, Rule and Exercise, in their 
just proportion to each other. 2. 
A new Analysis of the Elements of 
Language. '3. The presentation of 
a Panoramic Yievi' of the French 
Language as a whole. 4. Teaching 
one thing at a time, and proceedicg 
by Inductive Steps. 5. The thor- 
ough examination of Complex Sen- 
tences, and the peculiar force and 
relations of Connecting Words. G. 
The furnishing of so complete a 
Key to the Pronunciation that the 
American can teach it with the 
same accuracy and facility as the 
native Parisian. 



B A D 1 S ' S GR AMMAIRE 

ANGLAISE d'apres le Systerae 
d' Ollendorff, a TUsage dcs Fran- 
9ais. Par Charles Badois. 12mo. 
282 pages. Price, $1.50. 

The v,'ant of a condensed Gram- 
mar for teaching Frenchmen the 
English language, long experienced 
by residents as'well as travellers in 
this country, has been met by M. 
Badois with this clear and practical 
Treatise, on the Ollendorff plan. In 
the course of a few lessons, the 
learner is so familiarized with the 
most necessary English words and 
idioms that he can^ readily express 
himself, and can understand ordi- 
nary conversation. To the gram- 
matical course is appended a scries 
of Reading Lessons, accompanied 
with an Interlinear translation, 
which renders the volume complete, 
and makes it all that the French 
student can require for the acquisi- 
tion of our tongue. 



MODERN LANGUAGES. 



CABINET DES FEES ; or, Ee- 
creative Eeaclings, aiTanged for the 
express use of Students in French. 
By G. Gekaed, Professor of the 
French Language and Literature. 
1 vol., 12iao. Price, $1.50. 

" This is just the hook for learn- 
ers of French who have just com- 
Uiauced to read in that tongue." 



CITOUQUET'S CONYERSA- 

TIOJTS AI^TD DIALOGUES. By 
GusTAVE Chouquet. 16mo. 204 
pages. Price, Tocts. 

A phrase-book is essential to 
those who would acquire an easy 
style of conversation in French. 
Such an auxiliary they will find in 
this work of Chouquet's, which em- 
braces dialosues on daily occupa- 
tions and ordinary topics, involving 
those idiomatic expressions that 
most frequently occur. The author 
displays judgment in his choice of 
subjects, and tact in adapting him- 
self to the comprehension of the 
young. With a knowledge of the 
phrases and idioms presented in 
this volume, the student can take 
part in ordinary conversation with 
fluency and elegance. 



factory mannei*, a want that waa 
long felt. It teaches at once French 
and Rhetoric— and that by a pleas- 
ant and easy process. 



CHOUQUET'S GUIDE TO 

FEENCH COMPOSITION. By 

GusTAVE Chouquet. 12mo. SOT 
pages. Price, $1.85. 

This volume is intended to serve 
as a reading and translation book, 
a text-book on Rhetoric, and a 
manual of French composition and 
conversation. The First Part Com- 
prises a treatise on Rhetoric, writ- 
ten in French, but applicable to all 
languages, which will discipline the 
mind of the learner in the elabora- 
tion of thought, and train his judg- 
ment for sound literary criticism. 
The Second Part is devoted to Com- 
position proper; contains analyses 
and models of narrations, descrip- 
tions, dissertations, letters, etc., 
and a list of subjects on which, 
after these models, the pupU is re- 
quired to try his powers. 

It will be seen that this work is 
intended only for those who have 
already acquired some knowledge 
of the language ; for such, particu- 
larly in young ladies'" schools, it is 
admitted to liil, in the most-eatis- 



COLLOT'S DRAMATIC 

FRENCH READER ; being a Selec- 
tion of some of the best Dramatic 
Works in the French Language. 
By Professor A. G. Collot. 12mo. 
521 pages. Price, $1.50. 

In the belief that dramatic litera- 
ture atfords peculiar facilities for 
familiarizing the student with 
French conversation in familiar, as 
well as more elevated, style. Prof. 
Collot has brought together in this 
volume fourteen of the chefs-d''ce:uvre 
of the French drama, comedy and 
tragedy, by such auttiors as Scribe, 
Piron, Moliere, Voltaire, Racine, 
and Comeille. They are arranged 
in progressive order, and furnished 
with notes on such jsassages as re- 
quire explanation. Affording enter- 
taining pictvires of French life, as 
well as specimens of the finest 
style, it is believed that this collec- 
tion is just what is needed for ad- 
vanced classes. 



COMME^^T OM PARLE A 

PARIS : French as Spoken in 
Paris. By Madame de Petrac, 
12mo. 252 pages. Price, $1.50. 

" Comment on parle a Paris," or 
how they speak French in Paris, is 
certainly a very desirable thing to 
know ; with the aid of this new ■ 
and unique manual by Madame de 
Peyrac, the knowledge may be gain- 
ed without difficulty. Her volume 
is not intended for children, but for 
those who have partially acquired 
the language, and need only famil- 
iarity with an elegant style of con- 
versation. To invest the subject 
with greater interest, the form of 
a domestic romance is adopted. 
A variety of characters are intro- 
duced, and lively tableaux of French 
life and manners are presented. 
Teachers, who arc dissatisfied with 
the Readers they have heretofore 
employed, are recommended to pro^ 
cure and examine this admirable 
volume, which has been warmh^ 
commended by critics and edu 
cators. 



MODERN LANGUAGES. 



CORINNE, OR ITALY. By 

Baroness de Stael. New editioii, 
revised and corrected. 1 vol., 12mo. 
432 pages. $1.50. 

In the whole circle of polite lit- 
craLiire we scarcely know of any 
produclion in modern limes, that 
lias been honored with such lavish 
encomiums as the celebrated work, 
by Mad. de Stael, entitled "Co- 
riune, or Italy." The multitude of 
eloquent passages and enchanting 
pictures which" adorn this extraor- 
dinary production, do not impair 
in the least the interest of the fic- 
tion, as the authoress has skilful- 
ly introduced the digression only 
where the progress of the action is 
suspended, when the reader is 
even afraid of its resuming its 
course, and when he enjovs a mo- 
ment of repose, so much "the more 
because he is sensible of an ap- 
proaching storm " Corinne " 

is a work adapted to all readers. 
From its brilliant pictures the 
artist may derive fresh enthusiasm, 
with new means of expressing it ; 
the learned may acquire ingenious 
comparisons and new imasrery ; the 
tourist to the cla:fsic land of the 
Old World, the most important and 
judicious hints. 



COUTAX'S CHOIX DE 

POESIES (Select Poetry for Young 
Persons). By Madame A. Coutan. 
12mo. 329 pages. Price, $1.50. 

Madame Coutan's collection, made 
during many years devoted to the 
teaching of French, embraces some 
of the choicest and best poetry in 
the language. While it is peculiar- 
ly adapted to young ladies' schools, 
there is no class of students or 
general readers to whom it will not 
prove an acceptable and instructive 
companion. 



Be Fivas's Frencli Works. j 

^^Ew elementary! 

FRENCH PtEADER : An Introduc- ' 
tion to the French Language. Con- 
taining Fables, select Tales, remark- 
able Facts, amusing Anecdotes. 
With a Dictionary. By Axain de 
F-TVAS. 16mo. 147 pages. Price, 
to cents. 



IL THE CLASSIC FRENCH 

READER ; or, Beauties of the 
French Writers, Ancient and Mod- 
em. With a Vocabulary of all the 
Words and Idioms contained in the 
Work. By J. L. Jewett. 12mo. 
388 pages. Price, $1.5!). 

The Elementary Reader, as its 
name imports, is for beginners. It 
consists of short and easy pieces, 
written in familiar style, and of the 
most attractive character. 

The Classic Reader may, with ad- 
vantage, follow the Elementarj^ or 
may be used independently of it 
with somewhat older classes. For 
this work, the choicest productions 
of the extensive field of classic 
French Literature have been gath- 
ered. The great names of Fenelon, 
Bossuet, Montesquieu, Chateaubri- 
and, Thierry, Beranger, etc., afibrd 
sufficient guaranty of the purity, 
vivacity, and elegance of the con- 
tents. Each piece presents a sub- 
ject complete in itself. By selec- 
tions from the writings of difl'erent 
literary epochs, the reader is en- 
abled to form an enlightened judg- 
ment of each, and the work is thus 
rendered a faithful mirror of the 
best French literature, ancient as 
well as modem. The short bio- 
graphical sketches of the authors, 
preiixedto the several extracts, will 
be read with interest. 

HI. NEW GRAMMAR OF 

FRENCH GRAMMARS. Cora- 
prising the substance of all the 
most approved French Grammars 
extant, but more especially of the 
Standard Work, "Grammaire des 
Grammiaires," sanctioned by the 
French Academy and the Univer- 
sity of Paris. With numerous 
Exercises and Examples illustra- 
tive of every Rule. By Dr. Y. de 
FiTAS, M. A., F. E. L S. 1 vol., 
12rao. $1.25. 

At once the simplest and m.ost 

complete grammar of the French 

language. To the pupil, the effect 

is almost as- if he looked into a 

I map. so well defined is tlic course 

I of study as explained by M. de 

j Fivas. - 

" Its precision and conciseness 
are admirable. We cordially rec- 
ommend it to teachers and stu- 
dents. Its excellence cannot fail to 
secure it an established rcputatiom" 
—Standard. 



3I0DERN LANG UA GES. 



THE FRENCH MANUAL : A 

New, Siniple, Concise, and- Easy 
Method of Acquiring a Conversa- 
tional Knowledge of the French 
Language, including a Dictionary 
of over Ten Thousand Words. By 
M. Alfked Hatet. Entirely re- 
Tised and corrected from the last 
English edition, with a new eystein 
of Pronunciation. 1 vol., 12mo. 332 
pages. Half bound, $1.25. 

" A great many learners," says 
Le Coiirrier de V Europe, ''mlglit, 
after having waded through the 
tedious courses of French hitherto 
followed, be able to express them- 
selves in a sort of half academic 
language, but it woidd be altogether 
impossible for them to converse on 
the ordinary topics of every-day 
life, or give an order to a servant. 
It is this familiar language that M. 
llavet's book is destined to put 
them in possession of, and we be- 
lieve nothing has been neglected to 
secure that happy result." It is, 
in the opinion of some of our fore- 
most teachers, emphatically the best 
system for learning French. 



Ollendorff's French Grammars. 
FIRST LESSONS IN THE 

FRENCH LANGUAGE ; being an 
Introduction to Ollendorff's Larger 
Grammar. By G. W. Greene. 
16mo. 138 pages. Price, 75 cents, 

OLLENDORFF'S NEWMETH- 

OD of learning to EeacI, Write, and 
Speak the French Language. With 
full Paradigms of the Regular and 
Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and 
Impersonal Verbs. By J. L. Jew- 
ETT. 12mo. 498 pages. Price, 
$1.25. 

KEY TO EXERCISES. Sepa- 
rate volume. Price, $1. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METH- 

OD of learning to Read, Write, and 
Speak the French Language. With 
numerous Corrections, Additions, 
and Improvements, suitable for this 
Country. To wdiich are added. 
Value's System of French Pronun- 



ciation, his Grammatical Synopsis, 
a New Index, and short Models of 
Commercial Correspon deuce. By 
V. Value. 12mo. 5S8 pages. Price, 
$1.25. 

KEY TO EXERCISES. Sepa- 
rate volume. Price, $1. 

Ollendorff's French Grammars 
have been before the public so Ioult, 
and have had their merits so gener- 
ally acknowledged, that it is unne- 
cessary to enter into any detailed 
description of their peculiarities or 
lengthy argument in their favor. 
Suffice it to say, that tbey are found- 
ed in nature, and follow the same 
course that a child pursues in first 
acquiring his native tongue. They 
teach inductively, understandingly, 
interestingly. They do not repel 
the student in the outset by oblig- 
ing him to memorize dry abstract 
language which conveys little or no 
idea to his mind, but impart their 
lessons agreeably as well as effi- 
ciently by exercises, which teach the 
principles successively involved 
more clearly than any abstract lan- 
guage can. They give a conversa- 
lional, and therefore a practically 
useful, knowledge of the language ; 
the student is made constantly to 
apply what he learns. To these 
peculiarities is due the wide-spread 
and lasting popularity of the Ollen- 
dorff' series. 

Prof. Greene's Introduction, the 
first of the works named above, 
will be found useful for young be- 
ginners. In it are presented the 
fundamental principles of the lan- 
guage, carefully culled out, and H- 
lustrated with easy exercises. It 
paves the way for the larger works, 
preparing the pupil's mind for their 
more comprehensive course, and 
awakening in it a desire for farther 
knowledge. 

Value's and Jewett's works are 
essentially the same, though differ- 
in? somewhat in tlieir arrangement 
and the additions that have been 
made to the original. Some insti- 
tutions prefer one, and others the 
other. Either, it is believed, will 
impart a thorough acquaintance 
with French, both grammatical and 
conversational, by an interesting 
process, and with but little outlay 
of time and labor. 



NOUVEAU (LE) TESTA- 

:MENT. Par J. T. Ostervald. l2mo. 

Limp cloth, 50 cents. 



MODERN LANGUAGES. 



THE ADYENTUKES OF 

TELEMACHUS. By Fenelon. 
New edition, with the Meaning in 
English, at the foot of each page, of 
the most difficult Words occurring 
in the Test. To which is added a 
Sj'noptical Dictionary of Mythologi- 
cal and Geographical Names. From 
the edition of Charles le Brun. 
The whole carefully revised and 
corrected from Didot's Paris edi- 
tion. 1vol., 13mo. 395 pages. $L^. 



THE ADYENTUEES OF 

TELEMACHUS. By Fenelon. 
Standard edition. Edited by Ga- 
briel Surenne. 18mo. 393 pages. 
Price, 75 cents. 

Fenelon's world-renowned " Tele- 
maque " will always retain its popu- 
larity as a Keader for French classes, 
on account of the purity of its style, 
the interest of its narrative, and the 
excellence of its moral. The pres- 
ent edition is convenient in form, 
faultless in external appearance^ and 
as coiTect as the editorial supervision 
of an accomplished scholar like Su- 
renne can make it. 



PICCIOLA. By X. B. Sain- 

TINE. Preceded by Kesearches on 
the Employment of Time in State 
Prisons, by Paul L. Jacobs. New 
edition, revised and corrected. 1 
vol., 12mo. $1.^5. 



B O E M E E ' S ELEMENTAEY 

FEENCH EEADER. With an 
Analytical Study of the French 
Language, a Treatise on French 
Poetry, and a Dictionaiy of Idioms, 
Proverbs, Peculiar Expressions, etc. 
By J. EoESTER, LL. D., Professor of 
the French Language and Litera- 
ture in the N. Y. Free Academy, 
l&no. 297 pages. Price, $1.50. 

From the N. Y. Com. Advertiser. 

" We invite attention to this new 
French Eeader, which seems admi- 
rably adapted to the use of the stu- 
dent, and especially to the code of 
instruction and explanation with 
which it is introduced— the whole 
forming, as we conceive, a book of 
exceeding value to both learners 
and teachers, and capable of greatly 
facilitating the labors of both." 



PEENDEEGAST'S MASTEEY 

SEEIES for learning Languages on 
New Principles. By Thomas Pken- 
DERGAST. Author of "The Mastery 
of Languages ; or, the Art of Speak- 
ing Foreign Tongues Idiomatical- 
ly." This method offers a solution 
of the problem, How to obtain fa- 
cility in speaking foreign languages 
grammatically, without using the 
Grammar in the first stage. It 
adopts and systematizes that pro- 
cess by which many couriers and ex- 
plorers have become expert practi- 
cal linguists. 

The following Manuals may now 
he had : 

HANDBOOK TO THE MASTEEY 
SEEIES, being an Introductory 
Treatise. Price, 50 cents. 

THE MASTEEY SEEIES, GEEMAN. 
Price, 50 cents. 

THE MASTEEY SEEIES, FEENCH. 
Price, 50 cents. 

To hefolloived shortly by 
THE MASTEEY SEEIES, SPANISH. 
Price, 50 cents. 

THE MASTEEY SEEIES, HEBEEW. 
Price, 50 cents. 

"We know that there are some 
Avho have given Mr. Prendersast's 
plan a trial, and discovered that in 
a very few weeks its results had 
sui-passed all their anticipations."— 
The Record. 

"The Mastery System gives, in 
our opinion, all the advantages of 
OUendorff's. and is free from its de- 
fects. ... To gain a thorough com- 
mand of the common phrase's which 
the majority use exclusively and all 
men chiefly, is the goal at which 
the Mastery System aims, and we 
think that goal can be reached by 
its means more easily and in a 
shorter time than by any method 
yet made 'knovfa.'''—Norfol7c News. 



MODEBN LANGUAGES. 



PRONOUNCING FRENCH 

DICTIONARY. By Gabriel Su- 
EENNE, F. A. S. E. IGmo. 556 
pages. Price, $1.25. Pocket edition. 

In the preparation of this new- 
work, due rei^ard has been paid to 
tlie introduction of such, new words 
and definitions as the progressive 
changes in the language have ren- 
dered necessary ; and for this pur- 
pose the best and most recent au- 
thorities have been carefully con- 
sulted. It is therefore confidently 
anticipated that the volume will 
prove not only a useful auxiliaiy to 
the student, but also a convenient 
Pocket Companion to the traveller, 
wherever the French language is 
spoken. A vocabulary of proper 
names accompanies the work. 



ROWAN \S MODERN FRENCH 

READER. With a Vocabulary of 
the Nev/ and Diflicult Words and 
Idiomatic Phrases adopted in Mod- 
ern French Literature. By F. 
EowA^^. Edited by J. L. Jewett, 
Editor of Ollendorff's French Meth- 
od. 12mo. C41 pages. Price, 
$1.50. 

One object of Ibis volume is to 
offer specimens of the French lan- 
g'unge as it is spoken at the present 
day, and presented in the works of 
the modem authors of France, Avith- 
out the risk of sullying themind of 
the young reader by indelicate ex- 
pressions or allusions. Another is 
to facilitate the task of the teacher 
by rendering the work attractive to 
the pupU. Such selections have 
therefore been made as will, it is 
hoped, be interesting and entei-tain- 
ing to the j^oung reader, while at 
the same time they will prove 
worthy specimens of the peculiar 
style of their respective authors;^ , 

The American edition is rendered 
still more valuable by the addition 
of extracts from the writings of 
Sisraondi and Mignet, modern his- 
torians of distinguished merit. The 
vocabulary of new and difficult 
words and idiomatic phrases is con- 
veniently arranged for reference, 
and consideral)ly enlarged ; while 
the whole has undergone thorough 
revision, with a view to accuracy in 
every particular. The orthography 
ha^ "l)een made to conform to that 
of the Dictionary of the Academy 
and the r.?ago cf modcni writers. 



ROEMER'S SECOND FRENCH 

READER. Illustrated with His- 
torical, Geographical, and Philolo- 
gical Notes. 12mo. 478 pages. 
Price, $1.50. 

This volume, like the preceding 
one, presents, a series of lively and 
entertaining extracts, calculated to 
stimulate the curiosity and enhst the 
feelings of the scholar in favor of 
the language. The selections are 
made from modem authors exclu- 
sively, and bear witness to the nice 
literary discrimination of the com- 
piler. A.S a collection of elegant 
extracts, this volume is second to 
none; it has become a general fa- 
vorite both with teachers and stu- 
dents. 

R O E M E R ^S POLYGLOTT 

READER. Forming one of a series 
of Five Volumes. Translated from 
English Text. By J. Roemer, LL. D. 
1 vol., 12mo. Price, $1.50. 

The desiirn of the work is to en- 
able the learner to have the same 
v>ork in five tongues. The selec- 
tion are made from the best authors. 



SPIERS AXD SURENNE'S 

French and English and English 
and French Pronouncing Diction- 
ary. One vol., 12mo. 973 pages. 
Price, ^2.50. Standard abridged 
edition. From new and large tj'pe. 

The First Part of this well-known 
and universally popular work con- 
tains : Words in common use, 
Terms connected v,'ith science. 
Terms belonging to the fine arts. 

Four thousand historical names, 
Four thousand geogi-aphical names. 

Upwards of eleven thousand 
words of recent origin, 

The pronunciation of every word 
according to the French Academy 
and the most eminent lexicograph- 
ers and grammarians; also. 

Jtlorc than seven hundred critical 
remarks, in A\iiich the various mc- 
tlKids of pronoiuicing employed by 
diifi'rent authors arc investigated 
and compared. 

The Second Part contains : A 
copious vocabulary of English 
words, with their proper pronun- 
ciation. Tlie whole is preceded by 
a critical treatise on French pro- 
nunciation. 



MODERN LANGUAGES. 



ADLER'S HAND-BOOK OF 

GEEMAJM LITEEATUEE. Con- 
taiuing ScMUcr's Maid of Orleans, 
G o e t li e ' 3 Ipliigeuia in Tauris, 
Tieck's Puss in Boots, The Xenia, 
by Goethe and Schiller. With 
Critical Introductions and Esplana- 
tor}' Notes; to which is added an 
Appendix of Specimens of German 
Prose, from the middle of the Six- 
teenth to the middle of the Nine- 
teenth Centuiy. By G. J. Adlek. 
12mo. 550 pages. Price, $1.50. 

For classes that have made some 
proficiency in the German language, 
and desire an acquaintance with 
specimens of its dramatic literature, 
Bo more charming selection than 
this can be found. Sufficient aid is 
given, in the form of introductions 
and notes, to enable the student to 
understand thoroughly what he 
reads. The proi^ress of the lan- 
guage is graphically illustrated by 
t^pecimens of the literature at differ- 
ent eras, coiiated in an Appendix. 



4. It contains five sections. The 
first contains easy pieces, chiefly in 
prose, with aU the words necessary 
for translating them ; the second^ 
short pieces in prose and poetry 
alternately, with copious notes and 
renderings ; the Udrcl, short popular 
tales of Grimm and others; the 
fourth, select ballads and other 
poems from Biii-ger, Goethe, Schil- 
ler, Uhland. Schwab, Chamisso, etc. ; 
thti fifth, prose extracts from the first 
classics. 

5. At the end is added a vocabu- 
lary of all the words occurring in the 
book. 

The pieces have been selected 
and the notes prepared with great 
taste and judgment, so much so as 
to render the book a general favorite 
with German teachers. 



A NEW, PE ACTIO AL, AND 

Easy Method of Learning the Ger- 
man Language. By F. Ahn, Doctor 
of Philosophy, and Professor of the 
College of Neuss. 12mo. Price, 

$1. 



A D L E R ' S PROGRESSIVE | 

GERMAN EEADER. By G. J. I 

Abler, Professor of the German ! 
Language and Literature in the Uni- 
ver!?ity of the City of New York. 
12mo. 308 pages. Price, $1.{K). 

The plan of this German Eeader ; 
is as follows : 

1. The pieces are both prose and 
poetry, selected from the best au- 
thors, and present sufficient variety 
to keep alive the interest of the 
scholar. 

2. It is progressive in its nature, 
the pieces being at first very short 
and easy, and increasing in diffi- 
culty sind length as the learner ad- 
vances. 

3. At the bottom of the page con- 
stant references to the Grammar are 
made, the difficult passages are ex- 
plained and rendered. To encour- 
age the first attempt of the learner 
as much as possible, the twenty-one 
pieces of the first section are ana- 
lyzed, and all the necessary words 
given at the bottom of ttie page. 
The notes, which at first are very 
abundant, diminish as the learner 
advances. 



I EICHHORN'S PRACTICAL 

GEEMAN GEAMMAE. By 

Charles EichhorjST. 12mo. 287 
pages. Price, $1.S). 

Those who have used Eichhorn's 
Grammar commend it in the highest 
terms for the excellence of its ar- 
rangement, the simplicity of its rules, 
and the tact with which abstruse 
points of grammar are illustrated by 
means of written exercises. It is 
the work of a practical teacher, who 
has learned by experience what the 
difficulties of the pupil are and how 
to remove them. 



R E M E R ' S POLYGLOTT 

EEADEE IN GERMAN. Being a. 
Translation of the English Selec- 
tion. Translated by Dr. Solger. 
12mo. $1.30. 



WORMAN'S GERMAN 

GEA3IMAR. 1 VOL, 12mo. 500 
pages. Price, $2.00. 

The Elementary work by the same 
author has met with great success, 
liaving been introduced into a large 
Biimber of schools and colleges. 



to 



MODEBN LANGUAGES. 



OLLENDOEFF'S NEW METH- 
OD of Learning to Eead, Write, and 
Speak the German Language. By 
Geokgb J. Adler, a. M. ISmo. 
510 pages. Price, $1.25. 

HEY TO EXEECISES. Sepa- 
-rate volume. Price, $1. 

Few books have maintained tlieir 
■Dopularity in the schools lor so long 
a period as the Ollendorflf series. 
The verdict pronounced in ttieir 
favor, on their, first appearance in 
Europe, has been signally confirmed 
in America. The publishers have 
received the strongest testimonials 
in relation to their merits from the 
press, from State and county school 
officers, from principals of acade- 
mies, and teachers of public and pri- 
vate schools in all seclioas of the 
United States. 



Grammars for Teaching English 
to Germans. 
OLLENDORFF'S NEW METH- 
OD for Germans to Learn to Eead, 
Yv^rite, and Speak the English Lan- 
guage. Arranged and Adapted to 
Schools and Private Academies. 
By P. Gands. 12mo. 599 pages. 
Price, $1J50. 

KEY TO THE EXEBOLSES. 
Separate volume. Price, $1. 



BRYAN'S GRxiMMAR FOR 
Germans to learn English. Edited 
by Professor ScnuiEDEK. 12mo. 
189 pages. Price, $1.26. 

The publishers have got out these 
A'olumes in view of th^ great num- 
ber of Germans residing in and con- 
stantly emigrating to the United 
States, withv/hom the speedy acqui- 
sition of English is a highly desir- 
able object. To aid them in this, 
the services of competent and ex- 
perienced teachers have been pro- 
cured, and the admirable Grammars 
named above are the results of their 
labors. 

The Ollendorff Grammar embraces 
a full and complete synopsis of Eng- 
lish Grammar, applied at every step 
to practical exercises. It is con- 
structed according to the "New 
Method " which has so generally 
approved itself to ptiblic favor. A 
moutii's study of this \olume will 
supply the learner v.ith such current 



idioms that he can comprehend 
ordinary conversation, and in turn 
make himself uuderstood. 

Bryan's Course is briefer, and 
better adapted for primary classes 
and those whose time of study is 
limited. It presents the cardinal 
principles of the language, well ar- 
ranged and clearly iHiistrated. The 
anomalies of English syntax are 
handled in a masterly manner, and 
the general treatment of the sub- 
ject such as to remove from it all 
difficulties by the way. 



ELEMENTARY G E R M A N 
READER. By Rev. L. W. Heyden- 
EEicH, Professor of Languages at 
Bethlehem, Pa. Price, $1.00. 

This is an excellent volume for 
beginners, combining the advan- 
tages of Grammar and Reader. It 
has received strong and cordial 
commendations from the best Ger- 
man scholars in the country : among 
whom are Prof. Schmidt, of Colum- 
bia College, N. Y. ; William M. 
Reynolds, late Pres. of Capitol 
Univ., Columbus, Ohio ; Edward H. 
Eeichel. Principal of Nazareth Hall ; 
W. D. Whitney, Prof, of Sanscrit 
and German in Yale College, etc., 
etc. 



Italian. 
MEADOWS'S ITALTAN-AND- 

ENGLISnDICTIONx\RY. In Two 
Parts. I. Italian-aud-English ; II. 
English-and-Ttalian. Comprehend- 
ing, in the First Part, all the Old 
Words, Contractions, and Licences 
used by the ancient Italian Poets 
and Prose Writers ; in the Second 
Part, all the various Meanings of 
English Verbs. With a new and 
concise Grammar, to render easy 
the acquirement of the Italian Lan- 
guage; exhibiting the Promincia- 
tion by Corresponding Sounds, tho 
Parts of Speech, Gender of Italian 
Nouns, New Conjugation of Regu- 
. lar and Irregular Verbs, Accent on 
Italian and English Words, List of 
usual Christian and Proper Names, 
Names of Countries and Nations. 
By F. C. Meadows, M. A. 1 vol., 
IGrao. $3. 



MODERN LANGUAGES. 



ELEMENTARY GRAMMx\R 

OF THE ITALIiVlT LAI^GUAGE. 

Progressively Arranged for the use 
of Schools and Colleges. By G. B. 
FONTANA. 12mo. 236 pp. $1.50. 

The object of this work is to pre- 
sent the language as spoken to-day, 
in its simplest garb, both theoreti- 
cally and practically. The Gram- 
mar is divided into two parts, em- 
bracing Sixty Lessons and Sixty 
Exercises. The first part is excki- 
t^ively given to rules indispensable 
to a general idea of the language ; 
the second is framed for those who 
are desirous of having an insight in- 
to its theory, and consists of syn- 
onyms, maxims, idioms, and figura- 
tive expressions. The Exercises 
of both parts are very regularly pro- 
gressive,— and those of the second 
part are of course the most difiicult. 
Some of them contain extracts from 
celebrated poems translated into 
plain prose, so that the pupil may 
compare his Itahan translation with 
the original, which has been in- 
serted for that purpose at the end 
of the book. Others are biographi- 
cal sketches of the most prominent 
among the Italian writers ; by 
which means the pupil, whilst ac- 
quiring the language, may become 
familiar with the life and works of 
some of the classic Italian authors, 
such as Manzoni, Alfieri, Tasso, 
Petrarch, and the father of Italian 
language and literature, Dante M\- 
ghicri. 



FORESTI'S ITALIAN 

EEADEE : A Collection of Pieces 
in Italian Prose, designed as a Eead- 
ing-Book for Students of the Italian 
Language. By E. Felix Fokesti, 
LL. D. 12mo. 298 pages. Price, 
$1.50. 

In making selections for this vol- 
ume, Prof. Foresti has had recourse 
to the modern writers of Italy rather 
than to the old school of novelists, 
historians, and poets ; his object 
being to present a picture of the 
Italian language as it is written and 
spoken at the present day. The 
literary taste of the compiler and 
his judgment as an instructor have 
been brought to bear with the 
happiest results in this valuable 
Header. 

From the SavannaJi EepiiUican. 

" The selections are from popular 
authors, such as Botta, Manzoni, 
Machiavelli, Yillani, and others. 



They are so made as not to consti- 
tute mere exercises, but contain 
distinct relations so complete as to 
gratify the reader and engage his 
attention while they instruct. This 
is a marked improvement on that 
old system which exacted much 
labor without enlisting the sym- 
pathies of the student. The idioms 
that occur in the selections are ex- 
plained by a glossary appended to 
each. The Italian Reader can with 
confidence be recommended to stu- 
dents in the language as a safe and 
sure guide. After mastering it, the 
Italian poets and other classicists 
may be approached with confi- 
dence.'" 



MILLHOUSE'S NEW ENG- 
lish- and -Italian and Italian-and- 
English Dictionary. With the Pro- 
nunciation of the Italian. With 
many additions, by FERcmAi^r) 
Bracctfoeti. 2 vols., 8vo. Half 
bound, $6.00. 

This Italian Dictionary is consid- 
ered the best which has yet been 
published. It was prepared by tha 
late John Millhouse, and is ac- 
knowledged, by those who have 
made themselves familiar with the 
Italian, to excel aU that have yet ap- 
peared. 



ROEMER'S POLYGLOTT 

Reader, in the Italian Language ; 
being a Translation of the English 
Book under that title. 1 vol., 12mo. 
$1.50. 



Ollendorff's Italian Grammars. 
PRIMARY LESSONS IN 

Learning to Read, Write, and Speak 
the Italian Language. Introductory 
to the Larger Grammar. By G. W, 
Greene. ISmo. 238 pages. Price, 
75 cts. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METH- 
OD of Learning to Read, Write, and 
Speak the Italian Language. With 
Additions and Corrections. By E. 
Felix Foeesti, LL. D. ISmo. '533 
pages. Price, $1.50, 



MODERN LANGUAGES. 



KEY. Separate volume. Price, 

$1. 

In Ollendorff's grammars is for 
the first time preeented a sj'stem by 
which the etudeut can acquire a 
conversational knowledi^e of Italian. 
This will recommend them to prac- 
tical students ; while, at the same 
time, there is no lack of rules and 
principles for those who would pur- 
sue a systematic grammatical course 
with the view of translating and 
writing the language. 

Prof. Greene's Introduction should 
be taken up by youthful classes, for 
whom it is specially designed, the 
more difficult parts of the course 
being left for the larger volume. 

Tlie advanced work has been care- 
fully re\ased by Prof. Foresti, who 
has made such emendations and ad- 
ditions as the wants of the country 
required. In many sections the 
services of an Italian teacher cannot 
be obtained ; the Ollendoi-ff Course 
and Key will there supply the want 
of a master in the most satisfactory 
manner. 

From the United States Gazette. 

"The system of learning and 
teaching the living languages by 
Ollendorff is so superior to all other 
modes, that in England and on the 
Continent of Europe, scarcely any 
other is in use, in well-directed 
academies and other institutions of 
learning. To those who feel dis- 
posed to cultivate an acquaintance 
with Italian literature, this work 
wiU prove invaluable, abridging, by 
an immense deal, the period com- 
monly employed iu studying the 
language." 



Spanisli. 
AHN'S SPANISH GPvxiMMAR ; 
being a New, Practical, and Easy 
Method of Learning the Spanish 
Language ; after the System of A. 
F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy, and 
Professor at the College of Neuss. 
First American edition, revised and 
enlarged. 12mo. 149 pages. |1. 

KEY. 25 cents. 

Prof. Ahn' 8 method is one of 
peculiar excellence, and has met 
with great success. It has been 
happily described in his own words : 
"Learn a foreign language as you 
learned your mother tongue" — in 
the same simple manner, and with 
the same natural gradations. This 



method of the distinguished Ger- 
man Doctor has been applied in the 
present instance to the Spanish 
Language, upon the basis of the ex- 
cellent Grammars of Lespada and 
Martinez, and it is hoped that its 
simjplicity and utility will procure 
for it the favor that its German, 
French, and Italian prototypes have 
already found iu the Schools and 
Colleges of Europe. 



(DE BELEM) THE SPANISH 

PHRASE-BOOK; or. Key to 
Spanish Conversation. Containing 
the chief Idioms of the Spanish Lan- 
guage, with the Conjugations of the 
Auxiliary and the Regular Verbs, on 
the plan of the late Abbe Bossut. 
Ey E. M. DE BELEii. 1 vol., 18mo. 
87 cents. 



DE VERE'S GRAMMAR OF 

THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 

"With a History of the Language and 
Practical Exercises. By M. Schele 
DE Veke. 12mo. 273 pages. Price, 
$1.50. 

In this volume are embodied the 
results of masy years' experience ou 
the part of the author, as Professor 
of Spanish in the University of Vir- 
ginia. It aims to impart a critical 
knowledge of the language by a 
systematic course of e^rammar,' il- 
lustrated with appropriate exer- 
cises. The author has availed him- 
self of the labors of recent gram- 
marians and critics: and by con- 
densing his rules and principles, and 
rejecting a burdensome superfluity 
of detail, he has brought the whole 
within a comparatively small com- 
pass. By pursuing this simple 
course, the language may be easily 
and quickly mastered, not only for 
conversational purposes, but for 
reading it fluently and writing it 
with elegance. 
From tJie PhUadelpJda Daily News. 

"No student of the Castilian dia^ 
lect should be without this Gram- 
mar. It is at once concise and 
comprehensive — m ultvm in parvo^ 
containing nothing that is redun- 
dant, yet omitting nothing that is 
essential to the learner. The con- 
jugations are so admirably arransred 
as no lomrer to present that stum- 
bling-block which has frightened so 
many from the study of one of the 
richest and most majestic of lan- 
guages." 



H151 74 . 



STANDARD ITALIAN W0BK6. 



Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar. A New Method of Learning to 

Eead. Write, and Speak the Spanish Language ; with Practical 
Rnles for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models of Social and 
Commercial Correspondence. By M. Velazquez and T. Simon- 
NE. 12mo. 560 pages. 

KEY TO THE EXERCISES. Separate voiame. 

Ssoane's Neuman and Saretti's Spanish-and-English and 

Eiiglish-and-Spanish Pronouncing Dictionary. By Mariano 
Velazquez de la Cadena, Professor of the Spanish Language 
and Literature in Columbia CoDege, N. Y., and Corresponding 
Member of the ISTatioual Institute. Washington. Large Svo. 
1.390 pages. Neat type, fine paper, and strong binding. 

In the revision of the work by Velazquez, more than eight thou- 
sanil woi'ds. idioius, and familiar phrases have been added. It gives 
in both ianriia'jfes the exact equivalents of the words in general use, 
boih in ihelr literal and metaphorical acceptations. 

StandiiTd Pronouncing Spanisli Dictionary. An Abridgment 
of Yehizciuyz's Large Dictionary, intended for Schools. Colleges. 

and Truvvilers. Li two Parts. I. Spanish-English : 11. Eng- 
lish-Spi'.nisb.. By Maeiajso Velazquez de la Cadena. r^mo. 

■ 833 pages, 

Yeiasqiisz'jj Easy Introduction to Spanish Conversation. By 

MAEiA>fo Velazquez de la Cadena. ISmo. 100 page.~. 

S'ew Spanish S,eader. Consistingof Extracts from 

tlio Works of rhe most approved Authors, in Prose and Verse, 
arranged in progressive oi'der ; with Notes Explanatory of the 
Idioms and most difficult Constructions, and a copious Vocabu- 
lary. 12mo. 351 pages. 

Toloii's Spanish Seader. 12mo. 156 pages. 

Mastery Series— Spanish. By Thomas Pkendsrgasx. liJmo. 



ITALIAN TEXT-BOOKS. 

rontana'3 Elementary Grammar of the Itali£:n Language. 

Progressively arranged for the use of Schuoii and Colleges. 
12mo. 23o pages. 

Foresti's Italian Eeader. A Collection of Pieces in Italian 
Prose, designed a^ x Seading-book for Students of the Italian 
Language. l-Jmo. -^98 pages. 



;# 




